Manual
easyE4 Manual

10/19 MN050009 EN

Company information
All brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Break-Down Service
Please contact your local office:http://www.eaton.eu/aftersales
or the After Sales Service
Hotline After Sales Service:+49 (0) 180 5 223822 (de,en)AfterSalesEGBonn@eaton.com
automation@eaton.com
Original Operating Instructions
is the German-language edition of this document
Publication date
10/19 MN050009 EN 3.3 Edition, Build 011
Copyright© 2018 by Eaton Industries GmbH, 53105 Bonn
Author: Electrical Sector, Business Unit MOC
Editor:Eaton Industries GmbH, Hein-Moeller-Straße 7-11, D-53115 Bonn
All rights, including those of translation, reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
form or by any means, whether electronic, mechanical, photocopying, micro-filming, recording,or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Eaton Industries GmbH, Bonn.
Subject to alteration.

DANGER!
Dangerous Electrical Voltage!

Before starting with the installation
Installation requires qualified electricianl Disconnect the power supply of the device.
l Secure against retriggeringl Verify isolation from the supplyl Ground and short-circuitl Cover or enclose anyneighboring live parts.
l Follow the engineering instructions (IL) of the device
concerned.
l Only suitably qualified personnel in accordance with
EN 50110-1/-2 (VDE 0105 part 100) may work on thisdevice/system.
l Before installation and before touching the device
ensure that you are free of electrostatic charge.
l The functional earth (FE) must be connected to theprotective earth (PE) or to the equipotential bonding.
The system installer is responsible for implementing
this connection.
l Connecting cables and signal lines should beinstalled so that inductive or capacitive interference
does not impair the automation functions.
l Install automation devices and related operating elements in such a way that they are well protectedagainst unintentional operation.
l Suitable safety hardware and software measures
should be implemented for the I/O interface so that aline or wire breakage on the signal side does not result in undefined states in the automation devices.
l Deviations of the mains voltage from the nominal
value must not exceed the tolerance limits given in
the specifications, otherwise this may result in malfunction and hazardous states.
l Emergency-Stop devices complying with IEC/EN
60204-1 must be effective in all operating modes of
the automation devices. Unlatching the emergency
stop devices must not result in an automatic restart.
l Built-in devices for enclosures or cabinets must only
be run and operated in an installed state; desktop
devices and portable devices only when the housing
is closed.
lMeasures should be taken to ensure the proper
restarting of programs interrupted after a voltage dip
or outage. This should not result in dangerous operating states even for a short time. If necessary, emergency stop devices should be implemented.
l Wherever faults in the automation system maycause damage to persons or property, external measures must be implemented to ensure a safe operating state in the event of a fault or malfunction (forexample, by means of separate limit switches, mechanical interlocks, etc.).
l

I

Table of Contents
easyE4 Manual

1Company information2

Before starting with the installation

3

Table of Contents1

0.1

About this manual

13

0.1.1

List of revisions

13

0.1.2

Target group

14

0.1.3

Legal disclaimer

15

0.1.4

Short designations

16

0.1.5

Writing conventions

17

0.1.5.1

Warning labels

17

0.1.5.2

Documents with additional information

18

1.

easyE4 control relays description

19

1.1

Use as intended

19

1.2

Function

20

1.2.1

Features20

1.3

Device models - versions and part nos.

22

1.3.1

Base device versions

22

1.3.2

Expansion versions

24

1.3.2.1

Overview of available easyE4 devices

26

1.4

What the different parts of the part number mean

28

1.5

Accessory devices

29

1.6

Nameplate30

1.7Support31

1.8

Programming software easySoft 7

32

1.9

Safety regulations

33

1.9.1

Basics33

1.9.2

Mandatory requirements, personnel requirements

33

1.9.2.1

Occupational safety

33

1.9.2.2

Personnel qualifications

33

1.9.2.3

Device documentation

34

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1

2

1.9.2.4

Installation, maintenance, and disposal

34

1.9.2.5

Prerequisites for proper operation

35

1.9.3

Device-specific hazards

36

1.10

Engineering

39

1.10.1

Length of input cables

39

1.10.2

Analog Signals

40

1.10.3

Notes on connecting EASY-E4-AC-... devices

41

2.

Installation

43

2.1

Prerequisites for the location of use

44

2.1.1

Installation position44

2.1.1.1

Temperatures44

2.1.1.2

Aeration and de-aeration

45

2.2

Unpacking and checking the equipment supplied

46

2.3

Mounting

47

2.3.1

Mounting easyE4 control relays

47

2.3.1.1

Installation on mounting rail

50

2.3.1.2

Screw mounting

52

2.3.1.3

Dismounting of a device

53

2.4

Connection terminals

54

2.4.1

Screw terminal connection

54

2.4.2

Push in connection

55

2.4.3

Connecting the power supply

56

2.4.3.1

Special notes on connecting EASY-E4-AC-... devices

57

2.4.4

Connect digital inputs

58

2.4.4.1

Connect digital counter inputs

60

2.4.5

Connecting analog inputs

61

2.4.6

Connecting relay outputs

62

2.4.7

Connecting transistor outputs

63

2.4.7.1

Transistor output behavior in the event of a short circuit/overload64

2.4.7.2

Connecting outputs in parallel

64

2.4.8

Analog I/O expansion device

65

2.4.9

Analog input expansion with temperature measuring67

2.4.10Terminal configurations for individual devices

70

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2.5

External connections

72

2.5.1

External connection layouts

72

2.5.2

Memory card

73

2.5.3

Ethernet

75

2.5.3.1

Connecting the Ethernet cable

76

2.6

Programming software license

78

2.6.1

System requirements

79

2.6.2

Licensing79

2.6.2.1

Getting a license key

80

2.6.3

Adding a license key later on

81

2.6.4

Software updates and hardware changes

82

2.6.5

Installation instructions

83

3.

Commissioning

87

3.1

Initial commissioning

87

3.2

Daily operation

87

3.3

Switch on

88

3.3.1

Startup behavior of easyE4 control relays with LED indicators

88

3.3.2

Startup behavior of easyE4 control relays with a display andkeypad90

3.3.2.1

Changing the menu language

91

3.3.3

Startup behavior of base devices with connected expansion
devices93

3.3.4

Status display on easyE4 control relays with display and keypad 94

3.3.5

Commissioning the Ethernet network96

3.3.5.1

Network operation

96

3.3.6

Remote operation

97

3.4

Overview of switch-on behavior

98

3.5

Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program 100

3.6

Automatic booting from the card

106

3.6.1

Preparing the card in the PC for booting with easySoft 7

106

3.6.2

Preparing the card in the easyE4 device for booting with
easySoft 7

110

3.6.3

Preparing the card for booting on the easyE4 device itself

114

3.7

Reset – resetting the device to factory settings

116

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3

4

3.8

Updating firmware

117

3.9

microSDMemory card

124

3.9.1

microSD Ejecting the memory card

124

3.10

Setting a splash screen for the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display

126

4.

Operation

127

4.1

Base device with display and buttons

127

4.1.1

LCD Display

127

4.1.1.1

Display color backlight

128

4.1.2

Keyboard

128

4.1.3

Selecting menus and entering values

129

4.1.4

Cursor display

130

4.1.5

Entering of values

130

4.2

Operating modes of the easyE4

131

4.2.1

RUN mode

131

4.2.2

STOP mode

131

4.3

Operation of the menu selection and value entry

133

4.3.1

How to navigate the device menus

133

4.3.2

Operating principle in the circuit diagram and function block
editor133

4.3.3

Selecting a device menu

134

4.4

Overview of the menus on the device

135

4.4.1

Main menu

135

4.4.2

STOP RUN operating mode menu

135

4.4.3

Menu Parameter

136

4.4.4

Set clock menu

137

4.4.5

Menu Card

138

4.4.6

MenuInformation

139

4.4.7

System options menu

140

4.4.8

Program menu

142

4.5

Your first EDP program

144

4.5.1

Draw a wiring diagram

146

4.5.2

Testing the circuit diagram

149

4.5.3

Control options in RUN mode

150

4.5.4

Delete Program152

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4.6

Transfer program to the easyE4 device

153

4.6.1

Transfer with a microSD memory card

153

4.6.2

Establish Ethernet connection

158

5.

Programming on the device

161

5.1

Program161

5.2

Circuit diagram display

161

5.3

Circuit diagram elements

163

5.3.1

Function blocks

163

5.3.2

Relays163

5.3.3

Contacts

164

5.3.4

Coils

165

5.4

Working with contacts and coils

170

5.4.1

Entering and modifying contacts

171

5.4.2

Changing an N/O contact to an N/C contact

172

5.4.3

Entering and modifying coils

173

5.4.4

Deleting contacts and coils

174

5.4.5

Creating and modifying connections

175

5.4.6

Deleting connections

176

5.4.7

Adding a rung

176

5.4.8

Deleting a rung

176

5.4.9

Got to a rung

177

5.4.10

Saving the circuit diagram

177

5.4.11

Exiting the circuit diagram without saving

178

5.4.12

Searching for contacts and coils

178

5.4.13

Switching with the Cursor Buttons

179

5.4.14Checking the circuit diagram

180

5.4.15Jumps

181

5.4.16

Wiring NET operands in the circuit diagram

183

5.5

Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card 187

5.5.1

Configuration on base devices with a display

188

5.5.1.1

PROGRAM submenu

189

5.6

Working with function blocks

191

5.6.1

Adding function blocks to the circuit diagram for the first time191

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5

6

5.6.2

Function block list

193

5.6.3

Configuring parameters in the function block editor

194

5.6.4

PARAMETERS menu

197

5.6.5

Deleting function blocks

197

5.7

Using operands in a program

200

6.

Function blocks

216

6.1

Manufacturer function blocks

218

6.1.1

Timer modules

218

6.1.1.1

HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)

218

6.1.1.2

HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)228

6.1.1.3

OT - Operating hours counter

238

6.1.1.4

RC - Real-time clock242

6.1.1.5

T - Timing relay

246

6.1.1.6

YT - Year time switch (Year Table)

261

6.1.1.7

WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)

268

6.1.1.8

AC - Astronomic clock

272

6.1.2

Counter Function Blocks

281

6.1.2.1

C - Counter relay

281

6.1.2.2

CF - Frequency counter287

6.1.2.3

CH - High-speed counter

293

6.1.2.4

CI - Incremental Counter

299

6.1.3

Arithmetic and analog function blocks

306

6.1.3.1

A - Analog value comparator

306

6.1.3.2

AR - Arithmetic

312

6.1.3.3

AV - Average317

6.1.3.4

CP – Comparator

326

6.1.3.5

LS - Value scaling330

6.1.3.6

MM - Min-/Max function335

6.1.3.7

PM - Performance map

339

6.1.3.8

PW - Pulse width modulation

345

6.1.4

Open-loop and closed-loop function blocks

351

6.1.4.1

DC - PID controller

351

6.1.4.2

FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter

358

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6.1.4.3

PO - Pulse output

364

6.1.4.4

TC - Three step controller

379

6.1.4.5

VC - Value limitation

384

6.1.5

Data and register function blocks

388

6.1.5.1

BC - Block compare

388

6.1.5.2

BT - Block transfer

395

6.1.5.3

DB - Data function block401

6.1.5.4

MX - Data multiplexer

406

6.1.5.5

RE - Recipe records

410

6.1.5.6

SR - Shift register415

6.1.5.7

TB - Table function

423

6.1.6

NET Function Blocks

428

6.1.6.1

GT - Get values from NET

428

6.1.6.2

PT - Put values to NET

432

6.1.6.3

SC - Synchronizing clock via NET

436

6.1.7

Other function blocks

440

6.1.7.1

AL - Alarm function block440

6.1.7.2

BV - Boolean operation

444

6.1.7.3

D - Text display

448

6.1.7.4

D - Text display editor

458

6.1.7.5

DL - Data logger

475

6.1.7.6

JC - Conditional jump

486

6.1.7.7

LB - Jump label

491

6.1.7.8

MR - MasterReset493

6.1.7.9

NC - Numerical converter

497

6.1.7.10

ST - Set cycle time

503

6.2

interrupt function blocks

506

6.2.1

IC - Counter-controlled interrupt

506

6.2.1.1

General506

6.2.1.2

Operating principle

507

6.2.1.3

The function block and its parameters508

6.2.1.4

Other

511

6.2.2

IE - Edge-controlled interrupt

519

6.2.2.1

General519

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7

8

6.2.2.2

Operating principle

520

6.2.2.3

The function block and its parameters521

6.2.2.4

Other

523

6.2.3

IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block525

6.2.3.1

General525

6.2.3.2

Operating principle

525

6.2.3.3

The function block and its parameters527

6.2.3.4

Other

529

6.3

UF - User function block

533

6.3.1

General533

6.3.1.1

General information on user function blocks

534

6.3.2

Creating a user function block

534

6.3.3

Configuring a user function block

536

6.3.4

Programming a user function block541

6.3.4.1

Programming view tabs

542

6.3.5

Calling a user function block in the main program

543

6.3.5.1

User function blocks in an ST main program

547

6.3.6

Saving a user function block

548

6.3.7

Exporting a user function block550

6.3.7.1

Plausibility check

551

6.3.8

Importing a user function block

552

6.3.9

Replacing a user function block553

6.3.10

Deleting a user function block553

6.3.11Comparing user function blocks

554

6.3.12Printing a user function block

556

6.4

Timing and counter relay example

557

7.

System settings

561

7.1

System options - Base device with display and buttons

562

7.2

Display563

7.3

Device ID

564

7.4

Splash screen

565

7.5

NET

566

7.6

Ethernet

568

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7.7

Update569

7.8

Switch languages

570

7.8.1

Selecting a menu language on a base device with a display

570

7.8.2

Setting the menu language in the easySoft 7

570

7.9

Setting the startup behavior

571

7.9.1

Enabling / disabling the RUN START option

572

7.9.1.1

Configuration on base devices with a display

572

7.9.2

Enabling / disabling the CARD START option

572

7.9.2.1

Configuration on base devices with a display

573

7.9.2.2

Configuring the easySoft 7

573

7.10

Debounce574

7.10.1

Configuring input debouncing on a base device with a display

574

7.10.2

Configuring input debouncing in easySoft 7

574

7.11

Download comments

575

7.12

P buttons

576

7.12.1

Configuring the P buttons on a base device with a display

576

7.12.2

Configuring the P buttons in easySoft 7

576

7.13

Define program name

577

7.14

Retention function578

7.14.1

Retention in the easySoft 7

579

7.15

Security – password protection

581

7.15.1

Configuring the password on a base device with a display

581

7.15.1.1

What happens if you forget your password or enter the wrong
password?
583

7.15.2

Configuring the password in easySoft 7

584

7.16

Configuring the microSD card and device ID

586

7.17

Time and Date setting

587

7.17.1Time and date on a base device with a display

587

7.17.2

Setting time and date in the easySoft 7

590

8.

easyE4 Inside

593

8.1

Program execution

594

8.2

Transfering an existing circuit diagram

597

8.3

Device information

598

8.4

NET network

599

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

9

10

8.5

Operating states easyE4

602

8.6

Device easyE4 time responses

603

8.6.1

Time behavior of the inputs and outputs

603

8.6.2

Base device timing

604

8.6.2.1

Delay time for operation with DC power supply

604

8.6.2.2

Delay time for operation with AC power supply

606

8.6.3

Timing characteristics of expansion devices

608

8.6.3.1

Delay time for AC expansion devices

608

9.

Operating system diagnostic messages

609

9.1

Transistor outputs (overload / short-circuit)

611

9.2

Diagnostics buffer

612

9.3

LED status messages on the device

613

10.

Connection to other devices

615

10.1

Setting up a NET

625

10.1.1

Access on the NET

626

10.1.2

Communication via NET

627

10.1.3NET settings

629

10.2

Modbus TCP

632

10.2.1

General632

10.2.2

Programming communication with Modbus TCP

633

10.2.2.1

Read Coils 0x01:

634

10.2.2.2

Read Discrete Inputs 0x02:

635

10.2.2.3

Read Holding Registers 0x03:

636

10.2.2.4

Read Input Registers 0x04:

637

10.2.2.5

Write Single Registers 0x06:

638

10.2.2.6

Write Multiple Registers 0x10:63810.2.3

Modbus TCP error handling639

10.2.4

Modbus map

643

10.3

Setting up a web server

646

10.3.1

Configuring the web server function in easySoft 7

648

10.4

Web client

652

10.5

E-mail function

670

10.6

Convenient visualization for easyE4

680

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

11.

Faults681

11.1

Messages from the operating system

682

11.2

Possible situations when creating programs

683

11.3

Event

684

11.4

Functionality of the NET faulty

685

12.

Maintenance

687

12.1

Cleaning and maintenance

688

12.2

Repairs689

12.3

Storage, transport and disposal

690

12.3.1

Storage and transport690

12.3.2

Disposal

691

Appendix693

A.1

Dimension and weight specifications

694

A.2

Approvals and declarations

698

A.3

Technical data

699

A.3.1

Data sheets

699

A.3.1.1

Base devices

699

A.3.1.2

Expansions

699

A.4

Required memory for function blocks

705

A.5

Further information

709

A.6

Sample Projects

711

A.6.1

easyE4_Lauflicht_EDP.e70 application example

711

Alphabetical index

714

List of Figures

726

Glossary

737

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

11

12

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0.1 About this manual

0.1 About this manualThis manual contains all the information you will need in order to use the easyE4 safely
and effectively.
The Manual easyE4 manual is considered an integral part of the devices and must
always be readily available in the device's close proximity so that users have accessto it.
As an integrated part, the easySoft 7 Help groups together the relevant sections in the
easySoft 7.
This Manual describes all of the devices' lifecycle stages: transportation, installation,commissioning, operation, maintenance, storage, and disposal.
It assumes you have electrical engineering knowledge and skills.
Make sure to always use the latest documentation for your device.
MN050009_EN

Manual easyE4

The latest version of this documentation, as well as additional references, is available
for download on the Internet.
http://www.eaton.eu/doc
Please send any comments, recommendations, or suggestions regarding this document to: automation@eaton.com
0.1.1 List of revisions
The following significant amendments have been introduced since previous issues:
Page Keyword
New Modification Deleted
Publication date
11/2018
11/2018 V1.1

A3
A5
24

1/2019 V1.2
2/2019ff

4/201910/2019ff

New edition✓
Real-time clock characteristic curve
Sample program
Cat No. MEMORY-SUD-A1
Corrections
Added models EASY-E4✓
AC-... and EASY-E4-DC-4PE1;
added AC, AV, PM, and RE
function blocks
Webserver, E-Mail function,
time response, micro SD card
Device versions with push in ✓terminals,EASY-E4-AC (cULus)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

✓

✓
✓

13

0.1 About this manual

0.1.2 Target group
This manual is intended for electricians and electrical engineers, as well as for thepeople who will be in charge of performing the electrical installation and people whowill be using the control relays as operating and monitoring devices or as integrated
operating and control devices in their own applications.
This manual is intended for people who:
Want to use an easyE4 control relayl Develop an application with easySoft 7.
l Want to test or commission a developed applicationl Maintain an application with easySoft 7.
l Want to diagnose faults in an applicationleasyE4 devices must be installed and connected exclusively by electricians and people
who are familiar with electrical installation work.
CAUTIONInstallation requires qualified electrician

Follow the safety instructions for the easyE4!
The section on safety instructions must be read and understood byeveryone who will be working with the easyE4 before the actual work is
performed.
WARNING
Incomplete operator manual copies
Working with individual pages taken out from the operator manual may
lead to bodily injury and property damage due to missing safety information.
Always work with the latest and full document.

14

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0.1 About this manual

0.1.3 Legal disclaimer
All the information in this manual has been prepared to the best of our knowledge and inaccordance with the state of the art. However, this does not exclude the possibility ofthere being errors or inaccuracies. We assume no liability for the correctness and completeness of this information. In particular, this information does not guarantee any particular properties.
Do not use the easyE4 before reading and understanding this manual.
It is assumed that the user of this manual is thoroughly familiar with the information
found in the manuals for incorporating the control relay into automation processes.
Hazards posed by the control relay cannot be ruled out if the safety instructions are notobserved – especially if the control relay is installed and commissioned by inadequately
qualified personnel or if it is used improperly. Eaton assumes no liability for any damages resulting from cases such as these.
The use of sample programs and of the easySoft 7 programming software is subject tothe following instructions and rules of use:
1. The program examples provided were created to the best of our knowledge andbelief and in accordance with the current state-of-the-art. The program
examples provided were created to the best of our knowledge and belief and inaccordance with the current state-of-the-art. However, errors cannot be totally
excluded, and the example programs do not cover all function blocks and applications that are available for the control relays.
2. Electrical engineering skills and know-how are required in order to be able to program and commission control relays. An incorrectly wired or incorrectly configured control relay will pose a property damage risk and an injury hazard when
active components such as motors and pressure cylinders are being driven.
3. When using the provided sample programs and generating a program with
SWDeasySoft 7, the user has the sole responsibility to observe the following:
All relevant rules and practices for preparing circuit diagrams for the circuit
relays as specified in the latest documents for these relays.
l All occupational health and safety and accident prevention directives, standards, and regulations applicable to the commissioning, circuit diagram creation for, and use of the control relays for your planned application, inparticular those imposed by employers' liability insurance associations(Berufsgenossenschaften).
l Acknowledged rule of technology and state of science.
l All other general due diligence regarding the prevention of damages to lifeand physical condition of persons as well as material damage.
leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

15

0.1 About this manual

4. The manufacturer cannot accept any liability for any damages that are caused
by customers not using the program examples provided in accordance with theconditions of use specified here under points 1 to 3.

0.1.4 Short designations
The following general terms are used throughout this manual:
Short designation
Explanation
easyE4EASY-E4-...
EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P)EASY-E4-...-12...C1
EASY-E4-...-12...C1P
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P)EASY-E4-...-12...CX1
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1P
Expansions
EASY-E4-...-...E1(P)EASY-E4-...-...E1
EASY-E4-...-...E1P

Entire series, used to refer to all the devices in the product family
Used to refer to the devices in the series
Base devices from the product family with an LCD display and a keypadType With screw terminal connection
Type With push in connection
Base devices from the product family with diagnostic LEDs
Type With screw terminal connection
Type With screw terminal connection
All input and output expansions as devices in the product family
Type With screw terminal connection
Type With screw terminal connection

For the exact designation for your easyE4, please refer to the inscription on
the device.

16

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0.1 About this manual

0.1.5 Writing conventions
Table 1: Format conventions used throughout this manualAward

Description

Monospaced
Font
ButtonMenu path\submenu\...\itemMenu/command

Used for displays, elements at the file level, source code command lines<name>
13:08

Used for the button labels on the device and in easySoft 7
Used for paths to views and dialog boxes in easySoft 7
Used for commands found in the menu
Angle brackets are used to indicate variable values
that you must replace with your own values
Flashing values on the display are shown in gray in this manual

0.1.5.1 Warning labels
Risk of personal injury warning.
DANGER
Warns of hazardous situations that result in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Warns of the possibility of hazardous situations that could result in serious injury or even death.
DANGER!
Dangerous Electrical Voltage!

CAUTIONWarns of the possibility of hazardous situations that can cause injury.
Property damage warning
NOTICE
Warns about the possibility of material damage.
Prohibited use
Prohibited uses, actions, etc.
Explanation

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

17

0.1 About this manual

Bids
Bid
Explanation
Notes

Indicates instructions to be followed
Additional information, background information,
information worth knowing, useful additional information
0.1.5.2 Documents with additional information
Manuals, for example. These will be listed with the corresponding title and Eaton number after the icon.
Publication title

For identifying the Eaton publication code

External Internet addresses. They will be shown after the
Destination address
Links to external content are shown in blue.

18

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

icon.

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.1 Use as intended

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.1 Use as intended
The easyE4 device is a programmable switching and controller device that is used toreplace relay and contactor controls.
It is intended exclusively for monitoring, operating, and controlling machines and systems, as well as building and automation services for commercial buildings.
Any other use must be discussed and agreed upon with the manufacturer in advance.
The easyE4 are approved for use in closed spaces.
Bid
The easyE4 device must be used only in locations for which the device
is approved. Make sure to read and follow the information and labels on
the nameplate for the device, as well as section Approvals and standards in the appendix.

Prohibited uses, actions, etc.
It is strictly prohibited to use the device to implement safety-relevant
functions (in the sense of personal and machine protection) or safetyrelated controls (such as burner, emergency stop, and two-hand safetycontrols).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

19

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.2 Function

1.2 Function
The easyE4 device is an electronic control relay.
With their compact cover dimensions – and a heavy-duty, flat, anti-glare front – thebase devices and expansions are ideal for industrial applications.
1.2.1 Features
Logic gatesl Time and counter functions
l Time switch functions
l Arithmetic functionsl PID controllers
l Control relays with 16-character x 6-line LCD display (128 x 96 pixels) and keypadavailable.
l Function expansions can be implemented with insertable microSD cards
l Integrated operating system, can be loadedl Built-in Ethernet interface
l Requires little space; can be used in an upright position as welll Device construction for mounting railsl Real Time Clock (RTC)l Programming languages: Ladder diagram (LD), Function Block Diagram (FBD),
Structured Text (ST), and easy Device Programming (EDP) on device and in
easySoft 7leasyE4 base devices combine the functions of a control relay and an input device in one
single unit
The Ethernet port makes it possible to integrate the base device into a network.
This allows the design of systems using high-speed controllers with decentralized intelligence.
There is ladder diagram language version called easy Device Programming (EDP) thatyou can use to put together a circuit diagram on the device.
In the case of devices with a display, you can enter the program as a circuit diagram directly on the device by using the corresponding buttons. You can also program it on yourcomputer with the easySoft 7 programming software program (this option can also be
used for base devices without a display).
For example, you can:Connect N/O and N/C contacts in series and in parallell Connect output relays and markers.
l20

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.2 Function

Define outputs as coils, impulse relays, risingor falling edge-triggered relays or as latching relays.
l ...
l

You can use the function blocks to run arithmetic functions, compare values, count up,
count down, etc. All the function blocks available are provided in a list
→ Section "Function blocks", page 216
If you wish to wire a easyE4 device via your PC, i.e. create a circuit diagram, use the
easySoft 7→ Section "Programming software easySoft 7", page 32.
If you want to connect a easyE4 device to a visualization, use the XV-102-AO-35TQRB1E4 3.5" HMI touch display→ Section "Convenient visualization for easyE4", page 680.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

21

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.
All easyE4 devices come with an operating system (firmware).
The base devices in the easyE4 series feature:a microSD memory card slot
l an Ethernet port (10/100 Mbit/s) that can be used as a communication or network
interfacel

The functionality for each base device can be customized with up to 11 expansions
from the easyE4 series.
1.3.1 Base device versions
The available base device versions are different from each other in terms of:
The type of operating voltage - UC, DC or AC
l The type of outputs - Relays or Transistorl The type of terminals - screw terminals or push in terminals
l

and
l

The type of controls - a display and buttons or an LED display

Figure 1: Device model with EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display and button controls or with EASY-E4-...12...CX1(P) LED display for diagnostics

22

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1(P),EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P)EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1(P),EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1(P)

①

①

②

②

⑧
⑥

⑦

⑧
⑫
⑪

⑦

⑩
⑥
⑨
④
⑤

④
⑤

③

③

EASY-E4-DC-12TC1(P)EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1(P)

①

①

②

②

⑧
⑥

⑦

⑧
⑫
⑪

⑦

⑩
⑥
⑨
④
⑤

④
⑤

①

③

①

Power Supply⑥

Pushbuttons⑪

LED POW/RUN②

Input points

⑦

⑫

LED
ETHERNET/NET③

Outputs⑧

Slot for microSD
memory card
Covering cap④

Ethernet connection
Functional
earth
Ethernetsocket⑨

Display⑩

Cursor buttons⑤①

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com③

23

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

1.3.2 Expansion versions
The available input and output expansion devices are different from each other in termsof:
The type of operating voltage - UC, DC or AC,
The type and number of inputs/outputs - relay or transistorl The corresponding function - temperature, for example
l The type of terminals - screw terminals or push in terminals
l
l

and
l

24

in terms of width - 4 or 2 (space units SU).

EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P),EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)EASY-E4-UC-8RE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P),EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)Figure 2: Device model with 4SU

Figure 3: Device models in 2SU

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

EASY-E4-...-16...
①

EASY-E4-...-8...
①②⑬

EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P)

②

①

⑧⑬

⑧⑬

⑧

⑪

⑪

⑪

③

③

EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P)①

EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)

①

①

⑭

⑭

⑧⑬

⑧⑬

⑧

⑪

⑪

⑪

⑭

③

③

EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)

②

⑬

②

①

Power Supply⑬

Bus connector plug②

Input points⑭

Analog inputs③

Outputs⑮

Analog outputs⑧

Covering cap⑪

LED POW/RUN/⑭⑮

StatuseasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

25

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

1.3.2.1 Overview of available easyE4 devices
Make sure to take advantage of the EATON online catalog. Enter "easy" into the searchbox and the catalog will take you directly to the corresponding product group in the
Automation, Control and visualization section.
http://www.eaton.eu/ecat
easyE4 control relaysl26With screw terminals or
EASY-E4-..-....1P push in terminals

Catalog No. and type

Description

197211 - EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
197504 - EASY-E4-UC-12RC1P

Base device with display;
12/24 VDC, 24 VAC;
digital inputs: 8, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs;
digital outputs: 4 relay outputs

197212 - EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1
197505 - EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1P

Base device with diagnostic LED;
12/24 VDC, 24 VAC;
digital inputs: 8, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs;
digital outputs: 4 relay outputs

197213 - EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
197506 - EASY-E4-DC-12TC1P

Base device with display;
24 VDC;
digital inputs: 8, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs;
digital outputs: 4 transistor outputs

197214 - EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1
197507 - EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1P

Base device with diagnostic LED;
24 VDC;
digital inputs: 8, of which 4 can be used as analog inputs;
digital outputs: 4 transistor outputs

197215 - EASY-E4-AC-12RC1
197508 - EASY-E4-AC-12RC1P

Base device with display;
100 - 240 V AC, 100 - 240 V DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC),digital inputs: 8; digital outputs: 4 relay outputs

97216 - EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1
97509 - EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1P

Base device with diagnostic LED;
100 – 240 VAC, 100 – 240 VDC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC),digital inputs: 8; digital outputs: 4 relay outputs

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.3 Device models - versions and part nos.

I/O expansion for easyE4 control relayslWith EASY-E4-...-...E1screw terminals or
EASY-E4-...-...E1P push in terminals

Catalog No. and type

Description

197217 - EASY-E4-UC-8RE1
197510 - EASY-E4-UC-8RE1P

12/24 V DC, 24 V AC,
digital inputs: 4,
digital output: 4 relays

197218 - EASY-E4-UC-16RE1
197511 - EASY-E4-UC-16RE1P

12/24 V DC, 24 V AC,
digital inputs: 8,
digital output: 8 relays

197219 - EASY-E4-DC-8TE1
197512 - EASY-E4-DC-8TE1P

24 V DC,digital inputs: 4,
digital output: 4 transistors

197220 - EASY-E4-DC-16TE1
197513 - EASY-E4-DC-16TE1P

24 V DC,digital inputs: 8,
digital output: 8 transistors

197221 - EASY-E4-AC-8RE1
197514 - EASY-E4-AC-8RE1P

100 - 240 V AC, 100 - 240 V DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC), digital inputs: 4,
digital output: 4 relays,

197222 - EASY-E4-AC-16RE1
197515 - EASY-E4-AC-16RE1P

100 - 240 V AC, 100 - 240 V DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC), digital inputs: 8,
digital output: 8 relays

197223 - EASY-E4-DC-6AE1
197516 - EASY-E4-DC-6AE1P

24 V DC,
analog inputs: 4,
analog outputs: 2

197224 - EASY-E4-DC-4PE1
197517 - EASY-E4-DC-4PE1P

with temperature measuring
Pt100, Pt1000 or Ni1000
24 VDC;
analog inputs: 4;
outputs: NoneeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

27

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.4 What the different parts of the part number mean

1.4 What the different parts of the part number mean
The part number includes information that specifies the version and model of the specific device being used.
The Part number can be found at the front of the easyE4.
Table 2: Key to part numbers

easy-E4 - .CPowerrating28

Type ofsupplyvoltage- ..
Numberof inputs/outputs

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com...
Type of output
R-Relay
T-Transistor
A-Analog
P-Temperature- x1(P)
E-Expansion
CX-Base device with LED diagnostics
C-Base device with display
and buttons
1-Version
P-Type With push in connection instead of With screw
terminal connection.

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.5 Accessory devices

1.5 Accessory devices
In addition to the expansions, there are additional accessories available for easyE4 control relays.
NOTICE
Only use original accessories.
Order accessories through your supplier or through the EATON
online catalog
www.eaton.eu/ecat
Example:Cat No. and type198513 XV-102-AO-35TQRB-1E4
198514 XV100-BOX-E4-DC1

198515 XV100-BOX-E4-UC1

191087 MEMORY-SUD-A1

197226 EASYSOFT-SWLIC
061360 ZB4-101-GF1
197225 EASY-E4-CONNECT1

272484 - TR-G2/24

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Description
Touch display for easyE4, 24 VDC, 3.5 Zoll, TFTcolor, Ethernet
Starter package consisting of EASY-E4-DC-12TC1, XV-102-AO35TQRB-1E4 touch display, Ethernet switch, three patch cables, andlicense for easySoft 7
Starter package consisting of XV-102-AO-35TQRB-1E4, EASY-E4-UC12RC1, Ethernet switch, three patch cables, and license for easySoft
7
microSD
2 GB memory card with adapter, I Grade, without an operating system
Programming software license easySoft 7
ZB4-101-GF1 Device foot for screw mounting
EASY-E4-CONNECT1 spare parts package
Consists of three (3) connectors and three (3) end covers for theeasyE4 series between the control relay and input/output expansions
Transformer, 230 V, 12/24 V, 2/1 A

29

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.6 Nameplate

1.6 Nameplate
The device can be identified by checking the nameplate on its side.
This nameplate includes the following information:
Manufacturerl Versionl Operational voltage
l Heat dissipation informationl Type approval and certification marks and informationl Information relevant to UL listingl

In addition to the device's part number and MAC address, the QR code in the front also
contains additional information:
Serial number
l Production Datel30

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.7 Support

1.7 Support
To get fast and effective support, make sure to always
provide Customer Service with the following information:
Part numberl Information from the QR codel Ambient conditions at the location of usel Fuse or other protective element used to protect the devicel Supply voltage conditionsl Device operating system (firmware) versionl If applicable, easySoft 7 build No., versionleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

31

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.8 Programming software easySoft 7

1.8 Programming software easySoft 7
easyE4 control relays are designed to be programmed with the easySoft 7 programming software program. This program was developed specifically for this seriesof devices, and makes it possible to quickly, conveniently, and easily integrate available
functions into a circuit diagram and use the result as a control program.
The program is available free of charge. However, you will need a software license inorder to be able to use all of its functions.
Some functions are not available in the demo version.
easySoft 7 can also be used to:
Test your circuit diagram by simulating the power flow (offline test).
l Transfer your circuit diagram to a connected and operational easyE4 base device.
l Monitor the power flow and view operand states after transferring the circuit diagram (online test)l Print out your circuit diagram so that you can document it in detaill

In addition, the program makes it possible for you to use a password to protect your projects and, accordingly, your know-how.
The easySoft 7 Help is an integral part of easySoft 7 and is designed to help you use theprogramming software.
Tutorials
For helpful videos that explain how to use specific functions, please visit the productpage at http://www.eaton.eu/easy.
Application examples
Support has provided a number of applications that are available for download as ZIP
files from the Software Download Center.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Anwendungsbeispiele/easy/Deutsch
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Application Samples/easy/English
These examples come with a task description, the circuit diagram, and the easySoft 7
project (in the EDP and LD programming languages as of this writing).

32

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

1.9 Safety regulations
1.9.1 Basics
The device has been designed according to the state of the art and all generally accepted safety rules and standards. However, this alone cannot eliminate all potential hazards, which is why it is necessary for you to be aware of all hazards and residual risks.
Do not run the device unless it is in perfect technical condition. Make sure to always
operate it as specified in this document and for the intended purpose.
Follow the safety instructions for the easyE4!
The section on safety instructions must be read and understood byeveryone who will be working with the easyE4 before the actual work is
performed.
NOTICEPay attention to the hazard severity levels used throughout this documentation whenever a hazard is indicated. The hazard symbol and signal word used and the corresponding text will provide information
regarding the specific hazard and how to avoid or prevent it.

1.9.2 Mandatory requirements, personnel requirements
1.9.2.1 Occupational safety
All generally accepted occupational health and safety rules and standards (internal andnational) must be complied with, as must be all applicable laws and regulations in therelevant country.
1.9.2.2 Personnel qualifications
The personnel responsible for installation, operation, maintenance, and repairs musthave the necessary qualifications for the work they will be performing. They must be
appropriately trained and/or briefed and be informed of all hazards and risks associatedwith the device.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

33

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

1.9.2.3 Device documentation
This manual is considered an integral part of the device and must always be readily
available in the device's close proximity so that users have access to it.
Make sure that every person who will be working with the device, regardless of the lifecycle stage involved, has read and understood the relevant parts of the documentation
for the device.
Additional parts of the documentation and information for the easyE4, including the
installation instructions, can be found at the Eaton Download Center - Documentation
and at the product pages on the Internet
http://www.eaton.eu/doc
http://www.eaton.eu/easy
WARNING
Incomplete operator manual copies
Working with individual pages taken out from the operator manual may
lead to bodily injury and property damage due to missing safety information.
Always work with the latest and full document.
1.9.2.4 Installation, maintenance, and disposal
Make sure that the device is connected, installed, serviced, and disposed of professionally and in line with all relevant standards and safety rules.
CAUTIONInstallation requires qualified electrician

Important!
Dispose of recyclables as required by your local recycling regulations.
Devices no longer being used must be professionally disposed of as per local regulations. To learn more, please visit:
Eaton.com/recycling

34

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

1.9.2.5 Prerequisites for proper operation
In order for the device to be able to meet the contractually stipulated terms, the following must be observed:
Only qualified personnel should be allowed to work with the device.
l The personnel working with the device must have read and understood all documents for the device and must follow all the instructions in them.
l The required ambient conditions must be met.
l Maintenance work must be carried out correctly.
lMake sure to read the → "Legal disclaimer", page 15.
We assume no liability for damages, consequential damages, and/or accidents causedby the following:
Failure to follow any applicable occupational health and safety rules, standards,
and/or regulationsl Device failures or function disturbancesl Improper use and/or handlingl Not following the instructions or observing the information in the documentation forthe devicel Alterations, changes, and repairs to the deviceleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

35

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

1.9.3 Device-specific hazards
CAUTION
DESTRUCTION
The easyE4 should only be opened by the manufacturer or by an authorized center. Operate the device until only with the enclosure fully closed
and sealed.
CAUTION
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE
Do not touch components (e.g., connector pins) that are electrostaticsensitive.
Discharge (by touching a grounded metal object) any static charge
accumulated in your body before touching the device.
Electrostatic discharges may damage or ruin assembly parts. Becauseof this, it is necessary to take precautions whenever handling the cards.
Please refer to the guidelines for electrostatic-sensitive components formore information (ESD guidelines).
CAUTION
INTERFERENCES
The values specified in the technical data, as well as the device's electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), cannot be guaranteed if the following
are used: unsuitable cables, improperly assembled and terminatedcables, and/or wiring that does not conform to the applicable standards.
Only use cables assembled and terminated by professionals.
The cables being used must be assembled and terminated as requiredby the port/interface description in this document.
When wiring the devices, follow all instructions regarding how to wire
the corresponding port/interface.
All general Directives and standards must be complied with.
CAUTION
INTERFERENCES
Screw all plug-in connections or lock them into place in order toimprove screening.
Signal cables must not be routed in the same cable duct with power
cables.
Before putting the system into operation, check all cable connections tomake sure that everything has been wired properly.
Make sure that all voltages and signals have the required values as specified in the technical data.
36

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

CAUTIONSAFELY DIVERTING ELECTRICAL INTERFERENCE CURRENTS
The devices must be connected to a central earth point with a conductorthat is as short and has as low a resistance as possible.
Ground connection characteristics:
Wire cross-sectional area ≧ 1.5 mm², length ≦ 350 mm
The easyE4 needs to be connected to the conductive structure in, e.g.,
the control panel using the central earth point (earthing screw). Thismethod of earthing is mandatory required for proper function.
l

DANGERSTRAY CURRENTS
Large equalizing currents between the functional earthing system andthe ground system of different devices may result in fire or in malfunctions due to signal interference.
If necessary, route an equipotential bonding conductor, with across-sectional area that is several times larger than that of thecable shielding, parallel to the cable.
CAUTIONDATA LOSS
If the SD card is being written to and a voltage drop occurs or the cardis removed, data may be lost or the SD card may be ruined.
Insert the SD card only when the easyE4 is de-energized.
Avoid writing to SD cards. Reasons:
SD cards have a limited number of write cycles.
l If there is a voltage drop while a write operation is in progress, data
loss is highly likely to occur.
lRemove the SD card only when the easyE4 is de-energized.
Before switching off the device, make sure that there are no programs writing to the SD card.
CAUTION
SHORT-CIRCUIT HAZARD
If the device is or has been exposed to environmental fluctuations (ambient temperature, air humidity), condensation may form on or inside it. As
long as this condensation is present, there will be a short-circuit hazard.
Do not switch on the device when it has condensation in or on it.
If the device has condensation in or on it, or if the panel has been

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

37

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.9 Safety regulations

exposed to environmental fluctuations, let the panel settle into the existing ambient temperature before switching it on.
CAUTIONUV LIGHT
Plastics will become brittle when exposed to UV light. This artificial
aging will reduce the easyE4 unit's lifespan. Protect the device from direct sunlight and other sources of UV radiation.
CAUTION
POINTY, SHARP OBJECTS AND CORROSIVE LIQUIDS
When cleaning the device:
Do not use any pointy or sharp objects (e.g., knives).
l Do not use aggressive or abrasive cleaning products or solvents.
Make sure that no liquids get into the device (short-circuit hazard) andthat the device is not damaged in any way.
l

CAUTION
INSTALLATION CUT-OUT
The mounting cutout must be located in a position that will not defeat the
purpose of stabilizing webs or other reinforcing elements in the control
panel. If necessary, reinforcing elements must be installed/added.
CAUTION
MECHANICAL FORCES ON THE ETHERNET PORT
Communications may be affected, and the connection's mechanicalcomponents may be damaged, if the Ethernet interface is subjected tostrong vibrations or the RJ45 plug-in connection is subjected to pulling.
Protect the RJ45 plug-in connection from strong vibrations.
l Protect the RJ45 plug-in connection from tensile forces at thesocket.
l

CAUTIONInstallation requires qualified electrician

38

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.10 Engineering

1.10 Engineering
The easyE4 series makes it possible to combine multiple voltage variants. Each easyE4base device can be wired with up to 11 EASY-E4-...-...E1(P) expansions with different
power supplies.
1.10.1 Length of input cables
Severe interference can cause a signal 1 on the inputs without a proper signal being
applied. Observe therefore the following maximum cable lengths:
Base device inputs I1–I6
l

40 m for AC supply voltages; 100 m for DC supply voltages

Base device inputs I7–I8
l

100 m for AC supply voltages; 100 m for DC supply voltages

Expansion device inputsl

40 m for AC supply voltages; 100 m for DC supply voltages

In addition, the following applies to base devices and expansion devices:
With longer cables, connect a diode (e.g. 1N4007) with a minimum reverse voltage of 1
kV and a let-through current of 1 A in series to the device inputs. Ensure that the diodeis pointing to the input; otherwise the device will not be able to detect the 1 state.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

39

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.10 Engineering

1.10.2 Analog Signals
DANGER
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals,
therefore the signal cables should be carefully routed and connected.
An incorrect connection can lead to unwanted switching states.
The following measures must be adhered to in order to prevent any deviations in analog
values.
Tips for analog signals
Use shielded cables.
Keep signal cables as short as possible and not longer than 10 m.
In the case of short cable lengths, terminate the signal cables' shield to the 0 V terminal on both sides across the entire area.
In the case of longer signal cables, the shield should only be terminated on one
end, i.e., on the side of the EASY-E4-... devices.
Otherwise compensation currents between both grounding points may flow, leading to the interference of analog signals.
Lay signal cables separately from heavy current cables.
Connect inductive loads that you are switching via the outputs of the EASY-E4-...
base devices to a separate power supply or use a suppressor circuit for motors
and valves.
If loads from motors, solenoid valves or contactors are operated with the same
power feed as EASY-E4-... devices, switching may give rise to interference on theanalog input signals.
Make sure that the reference potential is galvanically connected.

40

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.10 Engineering

1.10.3 Notes on connecting EASY-E4-AC-... devices
Special considerations for EASY-E4-AC-... expansions
Connect inputs I1–I8 on AC base devices and I1–I4 on expansion devices in accordance with all applicable VDE, IEC, UL, and CSA safety rules using the same phase conductor that delivers the supply voltage. Otherwise, the device will not detect theswitching level or may be destroyed by overvoltage.
During wiring, make sure to meet all cable protection requirements.
AC base devices
Input signal voltage rangel Off signal: 0 to 40 V.
l On signal: 79 to 264 V
Input currentl I1 to I6: 0.5 mA/0.25 mA at 230 V/115 V.
l I7, I8: 6 mA/4 mA at 230 V/115 V.
In addition, the following applies to I1–I6 on base devices:
With longer cables, connect a diode (e.g. 1N4007) with a minimum reverse voltage of 1
kV and a let-through current of 1 A in series to the device inputs. Ensure that the diodeis pointing to the input; otherwise the device will not be able to detect the 1 state.
Connecting inputs I7/I8
Neon lamps with a maximum residual current of 2 mA / 1 mA at 230 V/115 V can be connected to I7 and I8.
Always use neon bulbs that are operated with a separate N connection.
WARNING
Do not use reed relay contacts on I7, I8. These may burn or melt due tothe high inrush current of I7, I8.
Two-wire proximity switches have a residual current in the 0 state. If this residual current is too high, the device only detects the 1 state at the input.
With two-wire proximity switches or sensors with similar residual current consumption use therefore the inputs I7 and I8.
Use an additional input circuit if several inputs are required with a higher input current.
AC expansions
Connect the inputs, for example, to pushbutton actuators, switches or relay/contactor
contacts.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

41

1. easyE4 control relays description
1.10 Engineering

Input signal voltage rangel Off signal: 0 to 40 V.
l On signal: 79 to 264 V
Input currentl I1 to I8: 0.5 mA/0.25 mA at 230 V/115 V.
In addition, the following applies to AC expansion devices:
With longer cables, connect a diode (e.g. 1N4007) with a minimum reverse voltage of 1
kV and a let-through current of 1 A in series to the device inputs. Ensure that the diodeis pointing to the input; otherwise the device will not be able to detect the 1 state.

42

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation

2. Installation
CAUTIONInstallation requires qualified electrician

easyE4 devices must be installed and wired exclusively by an electrician or a person
who is familiar with electrical installation rules and practices.
The devices are installed in the following order:
1. Mounting base device
2. Assemble the base device and expansion devices into a block (optional)
3. Connecting the power supply
4. Connecting inputs
5. Connecting outputs
6. Connect to Ethernet
DANGER OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK!
Dangerous Electrical Voltage!
All installation work must be carried out with the entire installation in ade-energized state.
Always comply with all applicable country-specific safety rules and regulations:
1. Switch off and isolate
2. Secure against retriggering
3. Verify isolation from the supply
4. Earthing and short-circuiting
5. Covering or providing barriers to adjacent live parts
What to do before turning the device back on
Remove all tools and materialsl Leave the danger zonel Remove the short-circuiting and grounding at the area where work was performed
and then elsewherel Disconnect the ground wire from the system components first, then from thegroundl Do not touch system components or cables without a ground wire (if there was one
previously) anymorel Reinstall all safety covers, safety enclosures, safety labels, and safety signsleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

43

2. Installation
2.1 Prerequisites for the location of use

Do not remove safety measures at switching points until you get the all-clear for theareas where work was performedl If carrying out work that involves more than one worker, make absolutely sure that
nobody is still in the danger zonel

2.1 Prerequisites for the location of use
The device must be used exclusively in locations for which it has been approved/certified.
The supply voltage must be guaranteed and must conform to the relevant specificationsNameplate → page 30 andthe specifications on the → Section "Technical data", page 699 for the individual
devices → page 699
CAUTION
INSTALLATION CUT-OUT
The mounting cutout must be located in a position that will not defeat the
purpose of stabilizing webs or other reinforcing elements in the control
panel. If necessary, reinforcing elements must be installed/added.

2.1.1 Installation position
easyE4 devices are intended to be flush mounted in control cabinets, control panels, service distribution boards, or control consoles from behind.
The following must be taken into account when selecting the installation position:
The controls and connectors must remain accessible even after the device has
been installed.
l easyE4 devices can be installed in a horizontal or vertical position.
l

The slot for the microSD memory card is located under a cover on
the base device.
Please observe the clearance required in order to be able to remove
the microSD and use the buttons.
2.1.1.1 Temperatures
Make sure that the device does not overheat.
Do not expose the device to direct sunlight or other sources of heat.
The minimum clearance to components that radiate heat, such as transformers underheavy loads, is 15 cm.

44

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.1 Prerequisites for the location of use

CAUTIONUV LIGHT
Plastics will become brittle when exposed to UV light. This artificial
aging will reduce the easyE4 unit's lifespan. Protect the device from direct sunlight and other sources of UV radiation.
The environmental ambient conditions for operation must not exceed the specified values:
Ambient climatic conditions
Air pressure (in operation)

795 - 1080 hPa
Max. 2000 m above sea level

Temperature

Humidity

Operation - 25 – +55 °C (-13 – +131 °F)
The display is readable between ϑ -5°C (-23°F) ≦ T ≦ 50°C (122°F).
Storage / Transport - 40 – +70 °C (-40 – +158 °F)
Relative humidity 5 - 95 %Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures

2.1.1.2 Aeration and de-aeration
The device uses natural convection-based passive cooling, i.e., it does not use fans.
l Make sure that there will be enough volume for air changes inside the control panel,etc.
The specified clearance around the easyE4 is: a, b, c ≧ 30 mm (1.2")
l When installing the easyE4 in complex systems together with other assemblies,
you must ensure that there will be enough air circulation in order to prevent overheating.
Ambient temperature for natural convection: ϑ -25°C (-13°F) ≦ T ≦ 55°C (131°F)
The display (option) will be readable between ϑ -5°C (-23°F) ≦ T ≦ 50°C (122°F).
The panel builder is responsible for the temperature rise calculation. Eaton will
provide heat dissipation data for the easyE4 as necessary for design verification inaccordance with IEC EN 61439.
leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

45

2. Installation
2.2 Unpacking and checking the equipment supplied

2.2 Unpacking and checking the equipment supplied
Check the easyE4's packaging for transit damage.
Carefully remove the packaging in order to avoid damaging the device.
Check the package contents for visible transit damage.
Use the information in Installation instructions to make sure that the contents arecomplete.
Keep the original packaging so that you will be able to use it in the
future if you need to transport or ship the device.
Make sure to also keep the documents enclosed with the device
and/or to give them to the end customer.
The package for the easyE4 series comes with:
Table 3: Std. packeasyE4 control relays

Unit Description
1x
1x

EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) or
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P)Installation instructions IL050020ZU

Unit Description
1x
1x
1x

EASY-E4-...-...E1(P)Bus connector plug EASY-E4-CONNECT1
Installation instructions IL050021ZU

The easyE4 is sturdily built, but the components inside it are sensitive to excessively
strong vibrations and/or mechanical shock.
Accordingly, make sure to protect the easyE4 from mechanical loads that exceed thescope of the unit's intended use.
The device should only be transported in its original packaging after being packed properly.
Missing parts or damage
If you notice anything wrong, please contact your distributor or
Eaton Service +49 (0) 180 5 223822 (de,en)46

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

2.3 Mounting
NOTICE
Arrange for a professional technician to mount the device.
CAUTION
INSTALLATION CUT-OUT
The mounting cutout must be located in a position that will not defeat the
purpose of stabilizing webs or other reinforcing elements in the control
panel. If necessary, reinforcing elements must be installed/added.
Check to make sure that the installation clearances are being observed→ Section " Installation position", page 44
Make sure that the mounting cutout has the right size.
Mounting EASY-E4-...
Mounting on ICE/EN 60715 mounting rail OR
With screws and ZB4-101-GF1 mounting feet.
2.3.1 Mounting easyE4 control relays
Install a easyE4 control relays in an enclosure, switch cabinet or distribution board sothat the power supply and terminal connections cannot be touched accidentally during
operation.
The easyE4 control relays can be mounted either vertically or horizontally.
For ease of wiring, leave a clearance of at least 3 cm between the device terminals andthe wall or adjacent devices.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

47

> 30 mm(> 1.2")> 30 mm(> 1.2")> 30 mm(> 1.2")> 30 mm(> 1.2")

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

Figure 4: Mounting distance min. 3 cm

Snap the base device and every expansion onto a mounting rail
or mount every device using ZB4-101-GF1 device feet
Local expansion units are connected directly next to the basic unit.
You can use the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector to connect the easyE4 base device to
up to 11 expansions and assemble them into a single device block.
Expansion devices come with an EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector as standard.
You can use the expansion devices to:
Increase the number of inputs/outputsl Combine various voltagesl Process analog/digital signalsl

You can use all digital and analog expansion devices regardless of the corresponding
operating voltage.
Each expansion needs to be mounted individually on the mounting rail or with screws
and device feet, much like the base device. Once you are done mounting all the devices,use the connector to combine them into a single device block.
Connect the base device to the expansion, and the expansions to each other, with
the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector.

48

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

AC/DC/UC
OFF !

1
4

EASY-E4-CO
NN

2
DEL

ESC

ALT

ECT1

3

OK

≦ 11 x EASY
-E4-…E.

Figure 5: Assembling a base device with expansions

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

49

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

2.3.1.1 Installation on mounting rail
1. Position the base device against the mounting rail's upper lip in an inclined position.
2. Lightly push the device down and against the mounting rail until it snaps into
place over the mounting rail's lower lip.
The device will clip into place automatically.

35 mm (1.38”)

1

1 mm (0.04”)
7.5 mm (0.29”)
15 mm (0.59”)

2
Figure 6: Installation on IEC/EN 60715 mounting rail

3. Check that the device is seated firmly.
The device is mounted vertically on a mounting rail in the same way.

50

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

Mounting the first expansion (optional)
1. Position the expansion device against the mounting rail's upper lip in an inclined
position to the right of the base device.
2. Slide the expansion until it is resting flush against the base device.
3. Lightly push the device down and against the mounting rail until it snaps into
place over the mounting rail's lower lip.
4. Remove the end cover from the base device and store it in a safe place.
5. Connect the base device to the expansion using the connector.
Mounting additional expansions (optional)
1. Position the expansion device against the mounting rail's upper lip in an inclined
position to the right of the previous expansion.
2. Slide the expansion until it is resting flush against the previous expansion.
3. Lightly push the device down and against the mounting rail until it snaps into
place over the mounting rail's lower lip.
4. Connect the expansions to each other using the connector.
5. Repeat for all additional expansions – up to 11 EASY-E4-...-...E1(P)Finishing up the process
1. Take the base device's end cover and install it on the right side of the last expansion.
There will be the following electrical isolation at the local expansion connection
between the base device and the expansion device:
Basic isolation 400 V AC (+10 %).
l Safe isolation 240 V AC (+10 %).
l

Basic device and expansion unit can be provided with different power supplies.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

51

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

2.3.1.2 Screw mounting
Fixing brackets ZB4-101-GF1 that can be inserted on the rear of the easyE4 devices are
required for screw fixing.
These feet are available as an accessory – please refer to → Section " Accessory
devices", page 29.

CK

!

CLI

Figure 7: Inserting a fastening bracket.

Figure 8: Screw mounting configuration for a device

The base devices and EASY-E4-...-16... 4U expansions, such as
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P), require three feet each.
EASY-E4-...-8... 2U expansions, such as EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P), and EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P), require twofeet each.

52

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.3 Mounting

2.3.1.3 Dismounting of a device
Disconnect all the connections and wires for the device
If the device is a standalone base device, you can remove it directly
If you are working with a block consisting of a base device
and expansion devices, remove the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connectors

EASY-E4-CO

NNECT1

1

DEL

ALT

2

ESC

OK

Figure 9: Remove adjacent connectors

Remove the device from the mounting rail
1

3

2

Figure 10: Dismantling

Screw mounting option:
Unscrew the screws on the device feet.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

53

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4 Connection terminals
All devices are available in a version with screw terminals and a version with push interminals.
A flat-blade screwdriver is required in order to work with these terminals:
With screw terminal connection
Slot-head screwdriver, width 0.8 mm x 3.5 mm.
l With push in connection
Slot-head screwdriver, width 0.4 mm x 2.5 mm.
l2.4.1 Screw terminal connection
EASY-E4-...-12...C1, EASY-E4-...-12...CX1, and EASY-E4-...-...E1 devices are designed foruse with screw terminals.
The stripping length for the individual conductors, or the length of the wire end sleeve at
the individual conductors, is 6.5 mm (0.26“) for this connection.
Connect the individual conductors with a tightening torque of 0.5 - 0.7 Nm.
6,5 mm (0.26”)

Terminal capacityin mm²Solid

0.2 up to 4

Flexible

0.2 up to 2.5

Conductor cross section AWG
Solid cable with ferrulemin 22 - max 12

0.5 - 0.7 Nm
3.5 mmFlexible with ferrule54

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0.2 up to 2.5

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.2 Push in connection
EASY-E4-...-12...C1P, EASY-E4-...-12...CX1P, and EASY-E4-...-...E1P devices are designed
for use with push in terminals.
The stripping length for the individual conductors, or the length of the wire end sleeve at
the individual conductors, is 8 mm (0.31“) for this connection.
Push the individual conductors directly into the push in terminal until the terminal
locks in place. If necessary, use a flat-blade screwdriver to help.
8 mm (0.31”)

Terminal capacityin mm²
Solid
Flexible
Conductor cross section AWG

8 mm (0.31”)

0.2 up to 2.5

0.4 x 2.5 mm

min 24 - max 14
Terminal capacityin mm²

Solid cable with ferrule
Flexible with ferruleeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0.25 up to 1.5

0.4 x 2.5 mm

55

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.3 Connecting the power supply
Cable protection
Connect a circuit protection device (F1) rated for at least 1 A (slow) to all base devices.
You may need a higher circuit protection rating depending on the type and connection of
the expansion devices (F1).
You can use a shared, adequately sized circuit protection device for the base device
and expansion(s) that takes into account the amount - a maximum of 11 and the terminal - with UC, DC, and AC power.

AC: L 100 - 240 V AC/DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC)
UC: 12, 24 V DC/24 V AC
DC: 24 V DC
0 V/ NF1 > 1 A

L N N
EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P)EASY-E4-AC-12-RCX1(P)+ UC 0 V
EASY-E4-UC-12RC1(P)EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1(P)EASY-E4-DC-12TC1(P)EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1(P)+24 V 0 V

Figure 11: Connecting the power supply for base devices

AC: L 100 - 240 V AC/DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC)
UC: 12, 24 V DC/24 V AC
DC: 24 V DC
0 V/ N+24 V 0 V

+24 V 0 V

+ UC 0 V+ UC 0 V

L N

EASY-E4-DC-16-TE1(P)EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P)EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P)EASY-E4-UC-8RE1(P)EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)F1 > 1 A

Figure 12: Connecting the power supply for expansions

56

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

System test
The devices run a system test after the supply voltage has been switched on.
The system test lasts 1 s for the base device. After this time elapses, the device willenter RUN or STOP mode depending on the specific device and configured settings.
NOTICE
When the basic devices and expansion units are switched on, they
behave like a capacitor, so that an inrush current higher than the rated
input current is present. Take this inrush current into account when
designing the electrical equipment by using slow fuses and suitableswitches. Never use reed relay contacts to switch the power supply
as these may burn or stick.
You can find the required connection specifications for your device model from the corresponding data sheet, → Section "Technical data", page 699
2.4.3.1 Special notes on connecting EASY-E4-AC-... devices
DANGER!
Connect inputs I1–I8 on AC base devices and I1–I4 on expansion
devices in accordance with all applicable VDE, IEC, UL, and CSA safety
rules using the same phase conductor that delivers the supply voltage.
The device will otherwise not detect the switching level or may be destroyed by overvoltage.
Inputs I5–I8 on expansion EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P) can be connected to adifferent phase.
Ensure that the L and N conductor are not reversed.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

57

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.4 Connect digital inputs
The inputs of the easyE4 devices switch electronically.
Once you have connected a contact via an input terminal, you can reuse it as a contact
in your circuit diagram as often as you like.
Connect the contacts, for example buttons or switches, to the input terminals of theeasyE4 device.

AC: L 100 - 240 V AC/DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC)
UC: 12, 24 V DC/24 V AC
DC: 24 V DC
0 V/N

0V

I1

I2

I3

0V

In

EASY-E4-DC-12TC1(P)EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1(P)

I1

I2

I3

In

N

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1(P)EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1(P)

I1

I2

I3

In

EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P)EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1(P)Figure 13: Connecting the digital inputs on base devices

AC: L 100 - 240 V AC/DC (cULus 100 - 110 V DC)
UC: 12, 24 V DC/24 V AC
DC: 24 V DC
0 V/N

0V

I1

I2

I3

In

EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P)EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P)

0V

I1

I2

I3

In

N

EASY-E4-UC-8RE1(P)EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P)

I1

I2

I3

I4

I5

I6

I7

I8

EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)Figure 14: Connecting the digital inputs on expansions

As per the hardware characteristics, base devices have 8 digital inputs available (I1 –I8)
Meanwhile, expansion devices feature 4 (I1 – I4) or 8 (I1 – I8) inputs.
Special considerations for EASY-E4-AC-... expansions
DANGER!
Connect inputs I1–I4 on AC expansion devices in accordance with allapplicable VDE, IEC, UL, and CSA safety rules using the same phase conductor that delivers the supply voltage. Otherwise, the device will notdetect the switching level or may be destroyed by overvoltage.

58

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

Inputs I5–I8 on expansion EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P) can be connected to adifferent phase as I1–I4.
Ensure that the L and N conductor are not reversed.
Adjacent AC devices can be powered with different phases.
Table 4: AC phase assignment

EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P), EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)EASY-E4-AC-12RC1,
EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)
L Ue
L1
L1
L1
L2
L2

NUe I1-I8
N

N

L2
L3
L3
L3

N

I1-I4

I5 - I 8

L1
L1
L1
L2
L2

L1
L1
L1
L2
L2

L1
L2
L3
L2
L1

L2

L2

L3

L3
L3
L3

L3
L3
L3

L3
L1
L2

Example showing how to read the table

If expansion device EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)is being powered with phase L1, then inputs I1-I4 must also be driven with L1.
Inputs I5-I8 can be driven with the same phase L1, but also with either phase L2 or L3.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

59

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.4.1 Connect digital counter inputs
Only possible on base devices.
Base devices with DC and UC voltage come with special counting and measuring functions on inputs I1 to I4.
These functions are connected directly to function blocks.
The following applies to EASY-E4-UC-...:The voltage supplied to the EASY-E4-UC-... must be a DC
voltage, since only DC signals will be processed.
You can process the following:
4 individual high-speed counter signals (one single counting direction), I1, I2, I3, I4l 2 incremental counters, I1, I2 and I3, I4
l Frequencies I1, I2, I3, I4l

UC: 12, 24 V DC
DC: 24 V DC
0 V/N

0V

I1

I2

I3

I4

EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1

0V

I1

I2

I3

I4

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1

Figure 15: Connect digital counter inputs

Input cable length
Strong interference on long cables can result in inputs reaching their switching level. Please do not exceed the maximum
cable lengths specified in the technical data for the connected,
shielded sensors.

60

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.5 Connecting analog inputs
Only possible on base devices.
Base devices with DC and UC voltage can read analog voltages within a range of 0 to
10 V via inputs I5, I6, I7, and I8 on the EASY-E4-... base device.
The signal has a 12 bit resolution, value range 0 - 4 095.
The following applies:
I5 = IA01l I6 = IA02l I7 = IA03l I8 = IA04l

The analog voltage inputs can also be used as digital inputs.
UC: 12, 24 V DC
DC: 24 V DC
0V
F1 > 1 A

F1 > 1 A
+10 V

+10 V
0 - 10 V+24 V 0 V

I5 I6 I7 I8
IA1 IA2 IA3 IA4

EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1

0 - 10 V+UC

0V

I5 I6 I7 I8
IA1 IA2 IA3 IA4

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1

Figure 16: Connecting the analog inputs on base devices

SETPOINT encoder:
Use a potentiometer with a resistance ≤ 1 kΩ, e.g., 1 kΩ, 0.25 W.
DANGER
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals.
Consequently, greater care must be taken when laying and connecting
the signal lines. The measures described below must be adhered to inorder to prevent any deviations in analog values. An incorrect connection can lead to unwanted switching states.
In order to prevent fluctuating analog values, you should take the measures specified
for Engineering → Section "Analog Signals", page 40

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

61

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.6 Connecting relay outputs
The EASY-E4-UC-... and EASY-E4-AC-... base and expansion devices feature relay outputs.

Q1
1

Qn

2

1

2

0 V/N

L1, L2, L3/24 - 250 V AC
12 - 220 V DC

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1

EASY-E4-UC-8RE1
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1

EASY-E4-AC-12RC1
EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1

EASY-E4-AC-8RE1
EASY-E4-AC-16RE1

Figure 17: Connecting relay outputs

DANGER
Make sure to observe the technical data for the relays.
Do not exceed the upper voltage limit of 250 VAC on a relay contact.
If the voltage exceeds this threshold, flashover may occur at the contact, resulting in damage to the device or a connected load.

62

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.7 Connecting transistor outputs
EASY-E4-DC-... devices feature transistor outputs.
A separate power supply feed must be provided for the base device transistor outputs.

+24 VQ

0 VQ Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

F2 ≧ 2.5 A

+24 V
0V
EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1

Figure 18: Connecting base device transistor outputs

Transistor outputs on easyE4 expansion devices are powered via the power supply forthe expansion device. In other words, transistor outputs have the same potential as the
expansion device's inputs.
+24 V DC
0V
0V
+24 V
F2 ≧ 2.5 A
EASY-E4-DC-8TE1
F2 ≧ 5 A
EASY-E4-DC-16TE1

Q1

Q2

Q3

Q4

EASY-E4-DC-8TE1
EASY-E4-DC-16TE1

Q5

Q6

Q7

Q8

EASY-E4-DC-16TE1

Figure 19: Connecting expansion device transistor outputs

Suppressor circuit for transistor outputs on EASY-E4-... devices.
When inductive loads without a suppressor circuit are switched off, overvoltages areproduced. Accordingly, use an appropriate suppressor circuit for the transistor outputs
in order to handle these peak currents and prevent electronic components from overheating in a worst-case scenario.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

63

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

Depending on the actual inductive load (I, L):
If the +24 VDC power supply is switched off via a contact in the event of an
emergency stop, and if more than one driven output with an inductive load
can be switched off, you must provide these inductive loads with a suppressor circuit.
+ 24 V H
Uemax < UZ < 33 V
Q

Q

0VH
Figure 20: Inductive load with suppressor circuit

2.4.7.1 Transistor output behavior in the event of a short circuit/overload
The following applies to easyE4 devices with transistor outputs:
In the event of a short circuit or overload at a transistor output, this output will switch
off and a general fault alarm ID (please refer to fault IDs) will be set to 1. The output willswitch back on up to the maximum temperature after a cooling time that depends on
the ambient temperature and the current level. If the fault continues, the output willswitch off and on until the fault is rectified or the power supply is switched off.
2.4.7.2 Connecting outputs in parallel
Only outputs of the same group (Q1 to Q4 or Q5 to Q8) can be connected in parallel; e.g.
Q1 and Q3 or Q5, Q7 and Q8. Parallel switched outputs must be similtaneously energized.
If the outputs are not switched on and off automatically, or if outputs fromboth groups are connected in parallel, this may result in malfunctions suchas those occurring in the case of overloads.

64

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.8 Analog I/O expansion device
The analog inputs in expansion EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P) cannot be used as digital inputs.
The EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P) features four analog inputs and two analog outputs. You can
use easySoft 7 to set the operating mode for each analog input and analog output.
The following options are available:
Resolution, analog Resolution, digital value0 – 10 V
4 – 20 mA
0 – 20 mA

12 bit12 bit12 bit0 - 4095
820 - 4095
0 - 4095

For all analog inputs, you can configure noise suppression, averaging, and an update
rate in easySoft 7.
Project view

Figure 21: Device parameters tab, using the EASY-E4-DC-6AE1 as an example

DC: 24 V DC
0V
F1 > 1 A

0 - 10 V
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA+ 24 V0V

0 - 10 V
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA

IA1 GND IA2 GND IA3 GND IA4 GND

EASY-E4-DC-6AE1

Figure 22: Connecting analog inputs EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

65

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals+24 V DC
0V
F1 > 1 A
QA1 GND QA2 GND
0 - 10 V
0 - 10 V
4 - 20 mA
4 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA
0 - 20 mA+ 24 V

0V
EASY-E4-DC-6AE1

Figure 23: Connecting analog outputs EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)DANGER
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals,
therefore the signal cables should be carefully routed and connected.
An incorrect connection can lead to unwanted switching states.
In order to prevent fluctuating analog values, you should take the measures specified
for Engineering → Section "Analog Signals", page 40

66

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.9 Analog input expansion with temperature measuring
Temperature inputs cannot be used as digital inputs.
The EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P) analog input expansion features four (4) analog RTD inputs
that can be used to integrate Pt100, Pt1000, or Ni1000 temperature sensors.
The Pt100, Pt1000, or Ni1000 inputs are suitable for 2-wire and 3-wire connections. In
addition, unshielded or shielded cables with a length of up 30 m can be used for the connection. Finally, averaging for temperature readings can be set up.
When connecting temperature sensors, make sure to use the right configuration
depending on whether you are using a 2-wire or 3-wire connection. If the temperature
sensors are connected using a 2-wire connection, the corresponding input terminals
must be connected to each other, i.e., input terminals 2 and 3 for T1, input terminals 5
and 6 for T2, input terminals 8 and 9 for T3, and input terminals 11 and 12 for T4.
When inputs on an EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P) are not used, all three input terminals must be connected to each other.
DC: 24 V DC
0V
F1 > 1 A
3

Pt 100
Pt 1000
Ni 1000+24 V 0 V

T1:
T2:
T3:
T4:

2

Pt 100
Pt 1000
Ni 1000
1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12

T1:
T2:
T3:
T4:

1 2 3
4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12

EASY-E4-DC-4PE1

Figure 24: Connecting analog inputs EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)DANGER
Analog signals are more sensitive to interference than digital signals,
therefore the signal cables should be carefully routed and connected.
An incorrect connection can lead to unwanted switching states.
Unshielded signal cables must be routed separately from AC cables.
In order to prevent fluctuating analog values, you should take the measures specified
for Engineering → Section "Analog Signals", page 40
easySoft 7 is required in order to be able to configure the connected RTD sensors.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

67

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

Project view

Figure 25: Expansion parameter tab, using the EASY-E4-DC-4PE1 as an example

The temperature sensor connections determine which inputs will be used. Up to four different RTD sensors of type Pt100, Pt1000, or Ni1000 with an individual temperature
range can be connected to each EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P) expansion device.
Inputs that do not have a sensor connected to them will be "undefined."
By default, all inputs will be undefined and accordingly will be switched off.
The temperature ranges for the EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P) depend on the selected sensor.
Temperature
Temperature range Sensor style
°C
1
2
3
1
2

Pt1000 / Pt100
Pt1000 / Pt100
Pt1000 / Pt100
Ni1000Ni1000-100 … +200 (-148 - +392°F)-100 … +400 (-148 - +752°F)-100 … +800 (-148 - +1472°F)-50 … +100 ( -58..+212°F)-50 … +250 ( -58..+482°F)

Values will be represented as a signed decimal with the following resolution (with thespecifics depending on the selected format):
Representation Temperature Indicated value at selected representation
Sensor model value in °C Degrees Celsius
Degrees Fahrenheit Nonlinear°C

68

Pt100, Pt1000-100 up to +200

Pt100, Pt1000-100 up to +400

Pt100, Pt1000-100 up to +800

Ni1000-50 up to +100

Ni1000-50 up to +250

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

°F

value

1/10

1

1/10

1

-1000 up to
2000-1000 up to
4000-1000 up to
8000-500 up to
1000-500 up to
2500-100 up to+200-100 up to+400-100 up to+800-50 up to+100-50 up to+250-1480 up to+3920-1480 up to+7520-1480 up to+14720-580 up to+2120-580 up to+4820-148 up to+392-148 up to+752-148 to+1472-148 up to+212-148 up to+482

0 - 4095
0 – 4095
0 – 4095
0 – 4095
0 – 4095

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

The selected scaling and update settings will apply to all the temperature inputs in thecorresponding module.
The scaling and the unit (Celsius, Fahrenheit) can be selected for inputs T1 through T4. If
no scaling is specified, the corresponding raw value will be given with a 12-bit resolution (dimensionless, 0 – 4095).
Reading scaling: The scaling
Update - Sampling time for all inputs being used:
250 ms (no averaging)l 1 s (averaging over 4 measuring cycles)
l 2.5 s (averaging over 10 measuring cycles)
l 10 s (averaging over 40 measuring cycles)l

As soon as the device is switched on, the temperature will be measured and transmitted by all active sensors. However, the reading will not be averaged until after theset sampling time.
The expansion module features a DIAG output for function monitoring and diagnostic
purposes. This means that each temperature input can be individually mapped to an
operand within a range of ID25 to ID96.
Designation Event
DIAG
General diagnostic indicating that a diagnostic event is present
DIAG 1
Configured measuring range exceeded at at least one temperature input, or connection cable discontinuity
DIAG 2
Configured measuring range fallen below at at least one temperature input, or a short-circuit has
occurred
T1<Mapped operand>
T2<Mapped operand>
T3<Mapped operand>
T4<Mapped operand>

The temperature module will write to the easyE4 base device's diagnostic buffer.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

69

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

2.4.10 Terminal configurations for individual devices
Base devices
EASY-E4-UC-12RC1(P), EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1(P)Power Supply +UC 0V
0V
Input
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
OutputQ1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2 Q3/1 Q3/2 Q4/1 Q4/2

EASY-E4-DC-12TC1(P), EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1(P)Power Supply+24V 0V
0V
Input
I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
Output power supply +24VQ +24VQ 0V 0V
OutputQ1 Q2 Q3 Q4
EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P), EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1(P)Power Supply L N
N
Input
I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
OutputQ1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2 Q3/1 Q3/2 Q4/1 Q4/2

Expansions
UC input expansions with relay outputs
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P)Power Supply +UC 0V 0V
Input
OutputOutput

I1
I2
I3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8
Q1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2 Q3/1 Q3/2 Q4/1 Q4/2
Q5/1 Q5/2 Q6/1 Q6/2 Q7/1 Q7/2 Q8/1 Q8/2

EASY-E4-UC-8RE1(P)Power Supply +UC 0V
Input
I1
I2
I3
I4
OutputQ1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2
Q3/1 Q3/2 Q4/1 Q4/2
OutputDC input expansions with transistor outputs
EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P)Power Supply +24V 0V
Input
I1 I2 I3 I4
OutputQ1 Q2 Q3 Q4

EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P)Power Supply +24V 0V 0V
Input
I1
OutputQ1

70

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

I2
Q2

I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8
Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8

2. Installation
2.4 Connection terminals

AC input expansions with relay outputs
EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)Power Supply L N
Input
I1
I2
I3
I4
OutputQ1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2
OutputQ5/1 Q5/2 Q6/1 Q6/2

EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P)Power Supply L N
Input
I1
I2
I3
I4
OutputQ1/1 Q1/2 Q2/1 Q2/2
OutputQ5/1 Q5/2 Q6/1 Q6/2

I5
I6
I7
I8
Q3/1 Q3/2 Q4/1 Q4/2
Q7/1 Q7/2 Q8/1 Q8/2

Analog input expansion
EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)Power Supply +24V 0V
Input
IA1 GND IA2 GND
Input
IA3 GND IA4 GND
OutputQA1 GND QA2 GND
Analog input expansion with temperature measuring
EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)Power Supply +24V 0V 0V
Input
IA1-1 IA1-2 IA1-3
Input
IA2-4 IA2-5 IA2-6
Input
IA3-7 IA3-8 IA3-9 IA4-10 IA4-11 IA4-12

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

71

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

2.5 External connections
With their ports, the base devices make it possible to connect a variety of peripheraldevices and components.
2.5.1 External connection layouts
.

DEL

ALT

ESC

OK

Figure 26: Slot for microSD

Figure 27: Ethernet port on base device

72

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

2.5.2 Memory card
The slot for the microSD is located at the front of the base device.
Inserting a microSD card
Memory cards cannot be inserted the wrong way around.
Do not use force when inserting the card.
Pull out the slot.
Push the microSD card into the slot until you feel it lock into place.
Close the slot.
1

2

3

Figure 28: Inserting a memory card

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

73

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

Remove microSD
Pull out the slot.
Push the microSD card into the slot.
The memory card will be released and come out a bit
Remove the memory card.
Store the microSD in its case in order to protect it.
Close the slot
1

2

3
4

Figure 29: Removing the memory card Figure 30: Removing the memory card

74

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

2.5.3 Ethernet
Every easyE4 base device features an Ethernet port.
This Ethernet port is a Cat 5 port.
Make sure to use compatible standard RJ45 Ethernet cables only.
The Ethernet port on the base device serves as a communication interface.
The Ethernet controllers support transfer rates of 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.

Figure 31: RJ-45 socket, 8-pole

If you integrate the EASY-E4-... into an Ethernet network, youwill need to connect the functional earth to the corresponding
terminal.
To commission the communications between the EASY-E4-... control relay and thedevice to which the Ethernet cable is connected, follow the description for the connected device.
New easyE4 base devices will come with the Auto IP setting configured by default. In
order to configure the settings differently on the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P), use the menu
structure and go to System Options\Ethernet → Section "Ethernet", page 568

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

75

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

2.5.3.1 Connecting the Ethernet cable
EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) and EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P) devices are designed for use withboth screw terminals and push in terminals.
For more information on these terminal types, please refer to → Section "Connection terminals", page 54
Screw terminal conPush in connection
nection
0.5 - 0.7 Nm
3.5 mmFigure 32: Connecting the Ethernet cable

PIN Ethernet 10/100 MBit
RJ45
EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1
EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1
EASY-E4-AC-12RC1
EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1

8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Connect the functional earth
Plug in the Ethernet cable76

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Tx +—
Tx –—
Rx +Rx –
—
—
Rx –
—
—

2. Installation
2.5 External connections

Removing the Ethernet cableWith screw terminal connection

3.5 mmFigure 33: Removing the Ethernet cableWith push in connection

0.4 x 2.5 mm

Figure 34: Removing the Ethernet cableeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

77

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6 Programming software license
The programming software (version 7 and higher) is available for download.
Please note that easyE4 devices can only be programmed with easySoft 7.
The easySoft 7 programming software program is available for free. However, you willneed to buy a software license in order to be able to use all of the software's functions.
You can order an easySoft 7 programming software license through yoursupplier or through the EATON online catalog EASYSOFT-SWLIC, catalog
no. 197226.
http://www.eaton.eu/ecat
Once you purchase a software license, you will receive a license product certificatethat you can then use to request a license key online. This license key can be used to
unlock all of the software's functions.
Installation requirements
An easySoft 7 version
A PC that meets all system requirements and for which the person installing thesoftware has administrator privilegesl A 24-digit license keyll

If a valid license key is not entered during installation, the software will be installed in demo mode.
This means that the software will be fully installed, but with thefollowing limitations:
You will not be able to load any programs onto a connected
device (no online function)l There will not be any card manager functions available forthe microSD memory cardl

However, you will still be able to simulate programs.
You can always add a license key later on.

78

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6.1 System requirements
Hardware
Recommended minimum resolution of1280 x 1024 pixels
l Min. 250 MB of free space on the harddrivelSoftware
One of the following operating systems:
Windows 7 (32 + 64 Bit) >= SP1,l Windows 8/8.1 (32 + 64 Bit) orl Windows 10 (32 + 64 Bit)l2.6.2 Licensing
When you purchase an EASYSOFT-SWLIC (catalog no. 197226), you will be purchasing
a license product certificate for easySoft 7.
This license product certificate will include a 36-digit certificate numberthat you can use to request a 24-digit license key online.
During the installation process, you will be asked for the 24-digit license
key for your easySoft 7. If you do not enter a license key, the program will
be installed in demo mode.
You can add a license key at a later point if necessary.

Figure 35: license product certificate

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

79

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6.2.1 Getting a license key
To get a license key with your license product certificate, follow the instructions at:
http://www.eaton-automation.com/license

Figure 36: Input screen for the license product certificate No.

Once you enter the 36-digit certificate number from your license product certificate, adialog box will appear. For your own security, enter the owner information into this dialog box.
Once you enter all your information, a 24-digit license key will be sent to the e-mailaddress you provided.
The e-mail will contain the following information:
License type:SW-EASYSOFT
l License product certificate number: 7-digit number for your certificatel License key: Automatically generated 24-digit codel Information regarding the owner's registrationl

The 24-digit license key is requested during the installation process.

80

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6.3 Adding a license key later on
If you installed the demo version of easySoft 7, you can add a valid license key later onin order to unlock the full version.
Go to easySoft 7 the ? menu and click on

License.

A dialog box for entering the license key will appear.

Figure 37: License dialog box

Now enter the 24-digit license key
that you received by e-mail.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

81

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6.4 Software updates and hardware changes
Once you have licensed the programming software, you can download the latest
easySoft 7 version from the Eaton Download Center - Software and install it – thelicense information will remain.
If you change hardware, use your license key and redeem it again.
easySoft 7 can check whether there are any updates for the version installed. Thisrequires for the PC to have an active Internet connection.
Menu?

Figure 38: Options in ? menu

82

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

2.6.5 Installation instructions
Before starting with the installation, close all open applications.
To install easySoft 7, you will need to have local admin privileges for your system.
Download
Download the full version of the easySoft 7 program from the Software Download
Center.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software
Select the "Software" category, then the easySoft 7 software, then the product version, and finally your language.
Click on the product version you want in order to download it.
Save the installation package file on your PC.
Installation
During the installation process, you will be asked for the 24-digit
license key for your easySoft 7. If you do not enter a license key,
the program will be installed in demo mode.
You can add a license key later on if necessary.
Follow the on screen instructions of the installation package.

Figure 39: Step 1

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

83

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

Figure 40: Step 2 License agreement

You can also print out the terms of use in their entirety.

Figure 41: Step 3 License key

To install the full version of the software, enter your 24-digit license key here.
If a valid license key is not entered during installation, the software will be
installed in demo mode.
You can add a license key later on – please refer to → Section "Adding alicense key later on", page 81.

Figure 42: Step 4 Destination folder

Shows the path where the program files will be stored.

84

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

You can click on Browse... to set a different storage location where you want the
easySoft 7 programming software program to be installed.

Figure 43: Step 4.1 Changing the destination folder

Figure 44: Step 4.2 Creating your own destination folder

Figure 45: Step 6 Starting the installation

A confirmation prompt will appear.
The installation will start as soon as you confirm this prompt.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

85

2. Installation
2.6 Programming software license

Figure 46: Step 7 Progress display

Figure 47: Step 8 Finishing

The easySoft 7 icon will be added to your Desktop during the installation process.
Click on the easySoft 7 icon to open easySoft 7.

or
Figure 48: easySoft 7 icon depending on the screen resolution

86

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.1 Initial commissioning

3. Commissioning
CAUTION
SHORT-CIRCUIT HAZARD
If the device is or has been exposed to environmental fluctuations (ambient temperature, air humidity), condensation may form on or inside it. As
long as this condensation is present, there will be a short-circuit hazard.
Do not switch on the device when it has condensation in or on it.
If the device has condensation in or on it, or if the panel has been
exposed to environmental fluctuations, let the panel settle into the existing ambient temperature before switching it on.
The easyE4 devices with/without display and operator functions can be commissioned.
However, a display and operating facility is required in order to follow all explanationsin this chapter.
The following applies to devices without a display and controls: You can use easySoft 7
for the display and controls or use a remote display. To this end, the control relay offersa point-to-point Ethernet connection or a connection in a network via easySoft 7.

3.1 Initial commissioning
Carry out the following steps once:
Configure the device's system settings as necessary, including the menu language.
Please refer to→ Section "Switch languages", page 570
Install the required software package easySoft 7.
Transfer program to the easyE4 device

3.2 Daily operation
Once the easyE4 has been initially commissioned, it will run whenever it is connectedto the supply voltage.
In other words, it does not have to be separately switched on and off.
Reducing the level of brightness will increase the display backlight's
lifespan.
The corresponding setting can be adjusted in the operating system.
Follow the instructions in the following section if your base device
until will not boot up and/or if an error message appears:→ Section"Faults ", page 681

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

873. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3 Switch on
Before switching the device on, check the power supplies, inputs, outputs, and any
expansion devices and Ethernet connections to make sure that they are properly connected.
3.3.1 Startup behavior of easyE4 control relays with LED indicators
If there is no program, the control relay will start in STOP mode.
These devices without a display and controls feature 2 LEDs that indicate the state of
the Ethernet port and the device status.
If there is an executable program on the easyE4 control relays, the device will start in
RUN mode.
In addition to having a valid program on the control relay,please make sure that there are no peripheral faults that willlead to STOP mode.
Device models without a display feature LED indicators in the front:
1. POW/RUN
l 2. ETHERNET (base devices only)l

Figure 49: LED status indication

LED POW/RUN base device
The POW/RUN LED indicates the state of the POW power supply as well as the STOP
or RUN state.
Off
Green, continuous light
Green,
Flashing, 1 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 4 Hz

88

Malfunction or no supply voltage
Supply voltage OK, RUN mode
Supply voltage OK, STOP mode
Fault at one of the expansions,
between the easyE4 device and the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

LED ETHERNET/NET (base device only)
Off
Yellow, continuous light
Green, continuous light
Red, continuous light
Green, flashing,
2 flashes, pause, etc.
Green, flashing,
1 flash, pause, etc.

No Ethernet cable connected; supply voltage off
The port is not enabled; the easyE4 device does not have an IP address
Ethernet cable connected
There is an IP address, but the NET has not been configured
Ethernet conflict or error, e.g.: duplicate IP address, address collision
NET data flow working; one or more NET stations missing
NET data flow working; all NET stations working

LED POW/RUN status expansion unit
OffGreen, continuous light
Green,
Flashing, 1 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 3 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 10 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 0.5 Hz

Malfunction or no supply voltage
Supply voltage OK, address assigned, expansion bus working correctly
Supply voltage OK, no data exchange with base device
Supply voltage OK, no data exchange with base device,
diagnostic bit will be set, device not working
Device waiting for firmware update
Firmware update in progresseasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

89

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.2 Startup behavior of easyE4 control relays with a display and keypad
If there is no program, the control relay will start in STOP mode.
All the information on the display will be shown in English if the device is configured
with its factory settings.
If there is an executable program on the easyE4 control relays, the device will start in
RUN mode.
In addition to having a valid program on the control relay, please makesure that there are no peripheral faults that will lead to STOP mode.
easyE4 base device with integrated display
If there is no splash screen on the memory card
after being switched on, the easyE4 base device will show the Eaton
logo and then the status display. This status display provides information on the device's status.
l If there is a splash screen on the memory card
after being switched on, the easyE4 device will show the splash
screen and then the status display. This status display provides information on the device's status.
l

If there is no executable program on the easyE4 control relays, the device will start in
STOP mode.
All the information on the display will be shown in English if the device is configured
with its factory settings. Once the device is ready for operation, the status display willappear.

Figure 50: Example of status display on display

90

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.2.1 Changing the menu language
To change the menu language on the device, follow the steps below:
Press the OK button.
The main menu will appear.
Main menu

Figure 51: Main menu in English

Use thecursor buttons to scroll to the SYSTEM OPTIONS menu option.
Press the OK button.
The SYSTEM OPTIONS menu will appear.
Main menu\System Options\Menu Language

Figure 52: Menu path in English

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

91

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

Use thecursor buttons to scroll to the MENU LANGUAGE menu option.
Press the OK button.
Use the cursor buttons
to scroll to the language you want.
Confirm with the OK button.
Exit the menu with the ESC button.
The display will be switched to the language you selected.

92

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.3 Startup behavior of base devices with connected expansion devices
Make sure that all required expansion devices are connected to the expansion bus andto the base device.
As far as possible, switch all easyE4 devices on at the same time.
Check whether the program you want is found on the base device (display or
easySoft 7).
If there is no program on the base device, load the program you want (with thememory card or easySoft 7) onto the base device.
Start the base device in RUN mode.
Find out what the operating state of the base device and the expansions is.
All expansion devices must be selected in the program. The
expansion devices must be connected in the same order in the
program and in the physical block.
If a device is missing, or if a device different from the one in the program is being used,the easyE4 base device will remain in STOP mode. The easyE4 base device will also do
this if you install more devices than the ones found in the program.
DANGERIf you have already integrated devices into a system, secure any partsof the system connected to the working area to prevent access andensure that no one can be injured if, for example,
motors start up unexpectedly.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

933. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.4 Status display on easyE4 control relays with display and keypad
After being switched on, the easyE4 base device will start with the status display after
the boot logo.
The status display has six lines, with each one containing 16 characters.
Press the Alt button to switch between displays.
The first time you press ALT, the time will be replaced by the date.
Pressing the ALT button again will switch to display 2
Row

Status indicator 1

Status indicator 2

1
2
3
4
5
6

Figure 53: Start displays for easyE4 base device in English

Status indicator 1
Line 1
I........

The Ethernet status for the base device without LED indicators will be shown for diagnostic purposes
Inputs; the number will be shown during activity (1, 2, 3,..,8)
EOF
The Ethernet port is not enabled;
no Ethernet cable connected; supply voltage off
The port is not enabled; the easyE4 device does not have an IP address
ECN
Ethernet cable connected
EOK
There is an Ethernet IP address, but the NET has not been configured
ENW
NET data flow working; all NET stations working
ENM
NET data flow working; one or more NET stations missing
EER
Ethernet conflict or error, e.g.: duplicate IP address, address collisionLine 2

Settings in current program
RE
Retention activeI
Debounce activeNT
NET stations with NET ID (1 this case)
DC
Used to display the type of power used by the base device (AC or DC)P
P Buttons inactive (-) or active (+)

Line 3Current device settingWD
Weekdayhh:mmDevice time
DD-MM-YYY
Displays the device date with the configured format
ST
Configured startup behavior for the device;nothing displayed – automatic starting is possible

1xALT

Line 4Q
RUN/STOP94

Outputs; the number will be shown during activity (1, 2, 3, etc.)
Current device operating mode

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

Line 5
Line 6The device's MAC address or device name;displayed only if a name has been assigned
IP address; displayed only if an address has been assigned

Status indicator 2Line 1
Line 2
Line 3
Line 4
Line 5
Line 6

Displays set diagnostic bits ID1 through ID24:
state display with "0" and "1" for each bit
Bit number for each block
ID 1 ... ID 8:
ID 9 ... ID 16
ID 17 ... ID 24
Free
Current device operating mode

Press the ALT button.
Shows additional indicators.

Figure 54: Example of status display on display

You can use the main menu from the status display in order to access the individual submenus.
Press the OK button.
The main menu will appear.
Table 5: Main menu
STOP ✓ RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAMSee also→ chapter "3 Operation", page 127

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

95

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.5 Commissioning the Ethernet network
If you only want to communicate with one single easyE4, use an Ethernet cable to connect the easyE4 Ethernet port to your computer – please refer to → "Connecting the Ethernet cable", page 76
easySoft 7 communications make it possible to search for connected easyE4 that are
switched on and establish communications with them.
3.3.5.1 Network operation
Install the Ethernet network as required by your network architecture (switch, router,firewall, VPN, etc.)
If you want to run the easyE4 with other devices on the Ethernet network and communicate through the Internet, you will need to incorporate network security measuresoutside of the easyE4.
Make sure that the network area in which you run the easyE4 devices issecure.
You can do this by using VPN connections or other network security
measures such as a firewall, a WLAN without Internet access, etc.
WARNING
Make sure that it is absolutely impossible to have unauthorized accessto your easyE4 devices through a network. Unauthorized access may
result in injury and/or property damage.
Eaton recommends implementing measures for protecting against cyberattacks.
Eaton cyber security
http://www.eaton.com/cybersecurity
See also→ Section "Establish Ethernet connection", page 158

96

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.3 Switch on

3.3.6 Remote operation
If you want to put the easyE4 device into operation without being present at themachine or system, make sure that you always know what exactly will happen when
you do so.
Make absolutely sure that remote operation will not endanger anyone.
See also→ Section "Setting up a web server", page 646→ Section "Modbus TCP", page 632→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

97

3. Commissioning
3.4 Overview of switch-on behavior

3.4 Overview of switch-on behavior
The following figure shows what happens when the device is turned on.
RUN startl Card startl

As soon as the easyE4 device starts, the options will be read.
The easyE4 basic device will check whether a microSD has been inserted and whether
there is a starting program on the microSD. The device will then switch to RUN or STOP
mode depending on these parameters.

98

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.4 Overview of switch-on behavior

Figure 55: Startup procedure with device initialization① RUN start: The device should be able to start without easySoft 7②

Allow overwriting via card: If an microSD card with a starting program has been inserted, thedevice should load from the microSD card
Options set again, since they could be overwritten by the loaded programeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

99

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program
There is a connection via Ethernet that can be used to access the easyE4 base device
for programming purposes.
Physical connection
Ethernet uses point-to-point connections, meaning that whenever more than two
devices are connected, there needs to be a switch with a port for each device. It is
recommended to use appropriate industrial switches that have been developed for use
in industrial environments. You can use any standard switch and Ethernet cable with
RJ45 connectors.
You can also use an Ethernet connection to program the individual devices.
Basic information on assigning IP addresses
Internet Protocol (IP) version 4 (IPv4) addresses are used in order to enable easyE4base devices to communicate on an Ethernet network.
An IPv4 addresses are 32 bits (4 bytes) long and are used to uniquely identify networks, subnets, and individual computers that work with the TCP/IP protocol. A distinction is drawn between private address spaces for local networks (intranet) andpublic addresses (Internet).
A gateway is required in order to be able to address addresses outside of the local network.
The way that devices communicate with each other on a local Ethernet network can becompared to the way neighbors communicate with each other. The neighbors all live on
the same street. Each one of them has their own house with a unique house number.
In this example, the street corresponds to the network portion of an IP address, andneeds to be the same for all the devices on the subnet. Meanwhile, the house number
corresponds to the host (device) portion of an IP address, which needs to be unique forevery device on the subnet.
The network part of the IP address is obtained by AND'ing the subnet mask and IP
address. This means that the subnet mask determines the other IP addresses that it
will be possible to address on a local Ethernet network.
For example, in order for a PC with IP address 192.168.178.100 and subnet mask
255.255.254.0 to communicate with an easyE4, the easyE4 base device's subnet mask
must be the same, and the IP address must fall within an address range of 192.168.
(178–179).(1–254). The network part is always the same.
Table 6: Sample addresses for PC

100

PC

DecimalBinaryIP Address

192.168.178.100

11000000 10101000
10110010 01100100

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

PC

DecimalBinarySubnet Mask

255.255.254.0

11111111 11111111
11111110 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110010 00000000

Network section 192.168.178.192

AND

Table 7: Sample addresses for easyE4

easyE4

DecimalBinaryIP Address

192.168.178.1

Subnet Mask

255.255.254.0

11000000 10101000
10110010 00000001
11111111 11111111
11111110 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110010 00000000

Network section 192.168.178.192

IP Address

192.168.178.254

Subnet Mask

255.255.254.0

Network section 192.168.178.192

IP Address

192.168.179.1

Subnet Mask

255.255.254.0

Network section 192.168.178.192

IP Address

192.168.179.254

Subnet Mask

255.255.254.0

Network section 192.168.178.192

11000000 10101000
10110010 11111110
11111111 11111111
11111110 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110010 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110011 00000001
11111111 11111111
11111110 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110010 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110011 11111110
11111111 11111111
11111110 00000000
11000000 10101000
10110010 00000000

AND

AND

AND

AND

Please note that there are IP addresses that are not allowed to be used,as they are reserved for special purposes (e.g., broadcast and loopback
IP addresses).
Additional information can be found in the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority's(IANA) RFC 6890 - Special-Purpose IP Address Registries.
See also→ Section "Connecting the Ethernet cable", page 76→ Section "Establish Ethernet connection", page 158

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

101

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

Prerequisites that must be met in order to be able to access an easyE4 control relays:
The PC must have an Ethernet port that is free and has been configuredl The PC's Ethernet port must be on the same subnet as the easyE4 base device.
l The easyE4 control relays must be connected to the PC with a standard Ethernet
cable featuring an RJ45 connectorl An Ethernet address must have been assigned to the easyE4 base device via
DHCP, auto-IP, or manually.
l

For devices with a display, write down the address of the easyE4 base device bygoing to INFORMATION\ACTUAL CONFIG and scrolling to IP ADDRESS.
Open the Communication view in the easySoft 7 programming software.
Communication view
Communication\Connection view

Figure 56: Establish Ethernet connection

102

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

Click on Connection/IP profiles/Search... to open the Search for devices dialog box.
Start a New search.
Search for devices dialog box

Figure 57: Search for devices with an IP address

If there is an Ethernet connection, the easyE4 base device will be found and listed in thetable with the corresponding parameters.
Click on the Save as IP profile button to save the IP profile for the found easyE4base device.
Search for devices dialog box

Figure 58: Saving the found device's IP profile

A prompt will appear saying that the IP address for the easyE4 base device has beencreated as a new profile.
Close the Search for devices dialog box.
Changes in the Interface drop-down menu
The easyE4 base device's IP address will be found under Interface.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

103

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

If a connection to multiple easyE4 base devices had already been established,
there will be more entries available. In this case, select the IP address of theeasyE4 base device you want under Interface.
Communication\Connection view

Figure 59: Selecting the easyE4 device's IP address

Click on the Online button to establish a connection between your PC and theeasyE4 base device.
If the easyE4 base device is protected with a password, a corresponding prompt will appear and ask you to enter the password before you can access the device.
If the password is correct, the connection to the device will be established.
As soon as the connection is established, the status line will show ONLINE.
Transfer your *.e70 program by clicking on the PC => Device button in the Program / Configuration section.
Communication\Connection view

Figure 60: Connection to the easyE4 device established and program transferred

104

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.5 Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program

For additional help working with easySoft 7, read the various
help topics in the easySoft 7 Help. To access it, press the F1
key on your keyboard.
When the project is loaded, the Ethernet settings in the project will be transferred to theeasyE4 base device, or, more specifically: The parameter set under the Ethernet tab in
the Project view will be transferred. Depending on how this set has been configured,
the behavior of the Ethernet connection may change right after the project is loaded,
and this may result in the device being disconnected. If the connection needs to beestablished again, you will need to repeat the steps above.
See also→ Section "Connecting the Ethernet cable", page 76→ Section "Establish Ethernet connection", page 158

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

105

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

3.6 Automatic booting from the card
easyE4 base devices can be booted from the memory card.
To be able to do this, the following prerequisites must be met:
The microSD memory card must contain at least one compiled PRG program.
l One of the programs must have been set as the starting program, i.e., the microSD
memory card must contain a BOOT.TXT file.
l If there is a program on the base device already, the Allow overwriting via card
option must be enabled in the program.
l

If all these prerequisites are met, the device will boot from the card as follows:
Insert the memory card while the device is de-energized.
Switch on the supply voltage.
Since the RUN start option is enabled by default, the device will automaticallyswitch to RUN mode.
As soon as the easyE4 device switches to RUN mode, it will check whether there is a
program in its internal memory. If there are none, the following step will be skipped.
If there is one, the device will check whether the following option is enabled in Project
view/System settings tab/Memory card / device ID section/Program/device ID:
Allow overwriting via card – please refer to → "System settings tab" as well.
If this option is enabled, the starting program specified in the BOOT.TXT file will becopied from the card to the internal device memory and run.
The steps carried out when the device is turned on are shown in detail in the corresponding flowchart – please refer to → "Overview of switch-on behavior", page 98.
Meeting the applicable prerequisites
There are three different ways to prepare a microSD memory card for booting. Following is a description:
1. Preparing the card in the PC for booting with easySoft 7
The microSD memory card must be inserted into a slot on the PC and written tofrom there.
2. Preparing the card in the device for booting with easySoft 7
The microSD memory card is already in the device and is written to from the PC.
3. Preparing the card for booting on the device itself
The microSD memory card is already in the device and is prepared for booting
on the device itself. easySoft 7 is not needed in this case.

3.6.1 Preparing the card in the PC for booting with easySoft 7
Only possible with easySoft 7.

106

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

PrerequisiteslLicensed easySoft 7 version on the PC
Insert the microSD memory card into a card reader on your PC.
Open easySoft 7 and open the project you want to transfer, e.g., <test.e70>.
If you want the starting program on the card to overwrite the current program on
the device again later on, make sure to enable the Allow overwriting via card
option in Project view/System settings tab.
Start setting up the card by clicking on the Project/Card... menu option.
If this is the first time you click on this menu option, make sure to select the drive
corresponding to the microSD card.

The Card setup dialog box will appear.
Transfer program
Project/Card... menu option

Figure 61: Offline dialog box for memory card

Click the PC -> Card button.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

107

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

The “File selection” window opens.

If the list does not show any files, this means that there are no programs on thecard.
Enter the name you want for the program into the drop-down menu, e.g., <test>.
This name can be different from the *.e70 file's name. You can also select a namefrom the menu.
Confirm your selection with OK. This will transfer the program for the device selected in the Project view to the card.
If the project is a NET application, the "Selection of NET station" dialog box will appear.
Select the NET station with the program that you want to transfer to the microSD
memory card, e.g., <NET station NT1>.
A plausibility check will then be run – please refer to → "Running a plausibility check,"
page 1. If this plausibility check is completed successfully, the following prompt willappear.

108

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

Setting a program as the starting program"Do you want to enter the program as a start program on the card as well?"If you confirm by clicking on YES, the program will be set as a starting program forbooting. Accordingly, a BOOT.TXT file that contains the name of the starting program will be generated. In addition, the name of the starting program will appear in
the "Card setup" dialog box, in the Start program drop-down menu.
The .e70 program will be compiled into a .PRG program and shown in the list.
Optional: Checking the microSD memory card
You can use Explorer to check the contents of the microSD memory card. It should now
contain both the transferred program and the BOOT.TXT file.

Figure 62: microSD memory card drive with PROGRAM folder contains BOOT.TXT and compiled test.prg
program

The card is now prepared with all the prerequisites for booting. You can now use automatic booting from the card – please refer to → "Automatic booting from the card", page106.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1093. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

3.6.2 Preparing the card in the easyE4 device for booting with easySoft 7
PrerequisiteslLicensed easySoft 7 version on the PC
Insert the card into the device while the latter is de-energized.
Switch on the supply voltage.
Open easySoft 7 and open the project you want to transfer, e.g., <myProgram.e70>.
If you want the starting program on the card to overwrite the current program on
the device again later on, make sure to enable the Allow overwriting via card
option in Project view/System settings tab.
Establish online communications between the PC and the device – please refer to→ "Establish connection to device", page 618
If there is a program on the device already, make sure that the Allow overwriting
via card option is enabled in the program. To do so, enable the Allow overwriting
via card option in Project view/System settings.
Go to the Communication view/Program/Configuration section and click on the
Card… button.

The "Card setup" dialog box will appear.

110

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

Project/Card... menu option

Figure 63: Offline dialog box for memory card

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

111

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

Transfer program
Click the PC -> Card button.
The "File selection" dialog box will appear.

If the list does not show any files, this means that there are no programs on thecard.
Enter the name you want for the program into the drop-down menu, e.g., <test>.
This name can be different from the *.e70 file's name in easySoft 7. You can also
select a name from the menu.
Confirm your selection with OK. This will transfer the program for the device selected in the Project view to the card.
If the project is a NET application, the "Selection of NET station" dialog box will appear.
Select the NET station with the program that you want to transfer to the microSD
memory card, e.g., <NET station NT1>.
A plausibility check will then be run – please refer to → "Plausibility check", page 551. If
the plausibility check is completed successfully, the following prompt will appear.

112

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

Setting a program as the starting program"Do you want to enter the program as a start program on the card as well?"If you confirm by clicking on YES, the program will be set as a starting program forbooting. Accordingly, a BOOT.TXT file that contains the name of the starting program will be generated. In addition, the name of the starting program will appear in
the "Card setup" dialog box, in the Start program drop-down menu.
The .e70 program will be compiled into a .PRG program and shown in the list.
Optional: Checking the microSD memory card
You can use Explorer to check the contents of the microSD memory card. It should now
contain both the transferred program and the BOOT.TXT file.

Figure 64: microSD memory card drive with PROGRAM folder contains BOOT.TXT and compiled test.prg
program

The card is now prepared with all the prerequisites for booting. You can now use automatic booting from the card – please refer to → "Automatic booting from the card", page106.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

113

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

3.6.3 Preparing the card for booting on the easyE4 device itself
Prerequisitesl

The microSD memory card must contain at least one compiled PRG program.

The easyE4 device must be in STOP mode before it can be configured. If it is not, thedevice will point this out.
Insert the memory card while the device is de-energized.
Switch on the supply voltage.
Go to the main menu.
Open the CARD menu option.
Table 8: Main menu
STOP ✓ RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Go to PROGRAM
Table 9: Card
PROGRAM
LOG RECORDING
MANAGE SD CARDINFORMATION

Go to START PROGRAM
Table 10: Card\Program
SET BOOT PROG.
DELETE PROGR.
CARD -> DEVICE
DEVICE -> CARD

Select the starting program from the list containing the names of all the programs
stored on the memory card.
The ✓ checkmark at the end of a line indicates the program with which theeasyE4 device will start as soon as RUN mode is active.
Table 11: Card\Program\Start program
Name Program 1 ✓Name Program 2
Name Program 3...

If the display is empty, this means that no programs havebeen stored on the memory card.

114

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.6 Automatic booting from the card

Switch off the power supply.
The card is now prepared with all the prerequisites for booting. You can now use automatic booting from the card – please refer to → "Automatic booting from the card", page106.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

115

3. Commissioning
3.7 Reset – resetting the device to factory settings

3.7 Reset – resetting the device to factory settings
To carry out a reset, follow the steps below:
Create an empty file on the PC (with a text editor, for example) and rename it
RESET_MY_E4.BIN.
Use your PC to copy the file directly to the root of the microSD memory card.

Switch off the easyE4 base device.
Insert the microSD memory card.
Switch on the easyE4 base device.
Now turn off the easyE4 base device and remove the microSD memory card.
The easyE4 base device will be reset.
The program, password, and all settings will be deleted, and the network interface will
work with auto-IP.

116

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

3.8 Updating firmware
As of firmware version V1.10, the firmware for the expansions in the easyE4 series canalso be updated in addition to the base devices.
The process varies for base devices and expansions.
To update the firmware, you will need to use a microSD memory card. It is worth notingthat you can also overwrite the firmware on your base devices with older firmware on
the microSD memory card.
Eaton Industries GmbH, Bonn provides firmware updates *.zip files via its Download
Center - Software page (under Firmware Updates).
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Firmware Updates/easy
http://www.eaton.eu/software/OS Updates/easy
In addition to the *.fw file that contains the firmware update, a configuration file (*.ini) is
also stored in the same folder (ROOT) for base devices with bootloader version 1.01
and lower. This configuration file uses appropriate entries to control the update behavior of the base devices.
This configuration file is intended to enable series manufacturers to update the firmware for multiple devices in a row with a microSD memory card.
No configuration file is needed for expansion devices.
If the firmware on the easyE4 base device is the same version as the
update, no update will be carried out.
Observe the documents belonging to the update in the download center.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

117

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

Updating the firmware for base devices
All base devices can be updated with newer firmware.
To find out which generation your easyE4 device belongs to, you can check the device
menu or, during online communication with the easyE4 base device, the information in
Communication view/HW Info tab.
If there is a program on the base device, the program will be left unchanged when thefirmware is updated. Retentive data will remain unchanged as well.
Download the firmware you want from Download Center – Software to your computer.
Connect an empty microSD memory card (FAT format) to your computer.
Use your computer to unzip the downloaded firmware to the ROOT directory in the
microSD memory card.

Figure 65: microSD memory card content when using bootloader version 1.01

The specific files that will be unzipped and that are required for the firmware update will
depend on the bootloader version on the base device, as shown below:
Unzipped files

BootloaderversionBoot loader version
1.01

1.00
Firmware file "EASYE4.FW"
Configuration file "e4update.ini"

√
–

√
√

During online communication with the easyE4 base device, the bootloader version thatis found on the device will be shown in Communication view/HW Info tab .
If the bootloader version is version 1.01, check the parameters in the INI file
Check the parameters in the “e4update.ini” configuration file and adjust them asnecessary. In firmware version V1.12 and higher, the following values will be set
by default:
forceupdate=0 (default) (dominant value)
andupdateonce=1 (default)

118

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

force
updateupdate once00

No update is run.

0

1

The update will be run once (default).

1
1

0
1

An update from the microSD memory card will always be
run.

Once the update has run, the entry for updateonce is automatically
set to 0 in the configuration file.
This means that the default settings will cause the firmware to be
updated once only.
For additional updates from the microSD memory card, you will need to edit the“e4update.ini” configuration file manually by setting forceupdate=1.
Switch off the easyE4 base device.
Insert the microSD memory card with the new firmware into the microSD card
holder and slide the holder into the device.
Make sure that the power is stable and that the device is notturned off while the firmware is being updated (if it is, the operating system may be corrupted). Then run the firmware update
again.
Switch on the easyE4 base device.
Bootloader version 1.01: The configuration in the “e4update.ini” file will be read in theeasyE4 bootloader and a compatibility check will be run. An update will not be carriedout if the firmware on the device and the firmware on the card match.
Bootloader version 1.00: The firmware will be transferred from the microSD memory
card to the base device.
If the firmware on the device is being updated, a corresponding message will be shownon the display or the POW/RUN/STATUS LED will indicate that an update is being carried out.
Quickly flashing POW/RUN/Status LED:
The device is looking for the firmware on the microSD memory device.
l The LED POW/RUN/Status flashes slowly and rhythmically,
the update is running.
l

The new firmware starts then.
You can go to INFORMATION\SYSTEM to see what the current
firmware version is.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1193. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

Switch off the supply voltage.
Remove the microSD memory card with the firmware from the device.
If the firmware transferred from the microSD memory card is older than
the firmware selected in the project, the project will not be able to start.
The project may contain functions that the firmware currently on thedevice does not support.
The following applies when using bootloader version 1.01:
If you do not remove the microSD memory card, the parameters in the “e4update.ini”
configuration file will be read every time the device is turned on and, if applicable, thefirmware will be updated.
The following applies when using bootloader version 1.00:
If you do not remove the microSD memory card, the program will not start (when turning on the device) until after the firmware is transferred again from the microSD
memory card.

120

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

Firmware update expansion device
An expansion device update must run via the device menu of a easyE4 base device.
Expansion devices belonging to the first easyE4 generation (with firmware version
1.00) cannot be updated, as these devices do not have a bootloader physically. To findout which firmware version is found on the device, check the Communication view/HW
Info tab during online communication. .
You can reach the device menu througha base device with display, or
l in the communication view of the easySoft 7 under Display\Display + keys or
l from a remote display with the web server.
l

An update must be run separately for each expansion device.
Just as with updates for base devices, this requires for the required unzipped "*.FW"
firmware file to be stored on the microSD memory card.
Load the firmware you want on your computer.
Connect an empty microSD memory card (FAT format) to your computer.
Use your computer to unzip the downloaded firmware to the ROOT directory in the
microSD memory card.

The unzipped file must be a firmware system file that matches the easyE4 expansion
device (*.FW).
No entry is required in a configuration file for an update.
To update the firmware, the easyE4 expansion device must be connected to the basedevice with the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 plug connector.
The number of the easyE4 expansion is determined based on the position after the basedevices in the assembly block, starting with 1 from the left. The maximum number 11
can be assigned to an expansion in the block.
An update must be carried out separately for each expansion device.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

121

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

An expansion is updated from the base device with display
Expansion devices belonging to the first easyE4 generation (with firmware version
1.00) cannot be updated, as these devices do not have a bootloader physically.
Take the following steps to update an expansion from a base device with display:
Go to the main menu.
Open the menu path SYSTEM OPTIONS\UPDATE\EXPANSION.
Table 12: System options\Update
UPDATEEXPANSION

Select the number of the easyE4 expansion in the block; 1 to 11 are possible.
Table 13: System options\Update\Expansion
EXPANSION
1 -1 1UPDATEF i l e n a m eç£££¡¡¡¡££££££Ç

Select the corresponding firmware file.
Press the OK button to select.
A confirmation prompt is displayed.
You can return to the previous menu by selecting "No".
The update starts immediately by selecting "Yes".
"Update" flashes in the display.
After the update has ended, the display returns to the menu SYSTEMOPTIONS\UPDATE\EXPANSION.
Repeat the process for other easyE4 expansion devices.
You can only view the hardware information (HW Info), i.e.,
which firmware version is on the easyE4 expansion device, via
easySoft 7.
To do so, go to the Communication view and connect to youreasyE4 block. In the workspace Configuration, the FW version
is displayed in the HW info.

122

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.8 Updating firmware

See also→ Section "Transfer program to the easyE4 device", page 153→ Section "Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card", page
187
→ Section "Overview of switch-on behavior", page 98→ Section "Splash screen", page 565→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1233. Commissioning
3.9 microSDMemory card

3.9 microSDMemory card
easyE4 base devices can be used with a microSD memory card.
The easyE4 device supports microSD memory cards with a capacity of 128 MB to 32
GB (SD and SDHC, FAT12/16/32, Class 2 or 4 ).
The following card manager functions for microSD memory
cards and the online function are not available in demo mode.
Moreover, using a memory card makes it possible to use the following functions:
1. Automatic booting from the memory card
The easyE4 can load and run a starting program from the memory card.
2. Resetting to factory settings
starting program
3. Download new firmware
4. Setting a splash screen for the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display
You can store a boot.bmp file on the memory card so that it will be shown on thedisplay when starting the easyE4 and when inserting the card
5. Transferring user programs, Storing multiple programs
6. Logging data
→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475
In order to be able to transfer programs or use the data logger function, the microSD
memory card must be formatted accordingly.
The actual transfer is carried out in easySoft 7, in the Project view.
The DL - Data logger function block can be used for logging data and states.

3.9.1 microSD Ejecting the memory card
As an alternative to removing the memory card from the device, you can eject it with
easySoft 7.
There are two ways to do this:
Method 1
In easySoft 7, go to Communication view/Program/Configuration.
Click the Card... button.
In the Card setup dialog box, click on the Release button.
Method 2
In easySoft 7, go to Communication view/Display/Display + buttons.
Press OK to exit the display.
Make sure that the device is in STOP mode.
Use the P buttons to select the CARD menu option and confirm your selection with

124

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

3. Commissioning
3.9 microSDMemory cardOK.
Use the P buttons to select the MANAGE SD CARD menu option and confirm yourselection with OK.
Use the P buttons to select the RELEASE CARD menu option and confirm yourselection with OK.
After this, the microSD memory card will no longer be accessible.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

125

3. Commissioning
3.10 Setting a splash screen for the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display

3.10 Setting a splash screen for the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display
You can create your own custom monochromatic image externally in any program. Simply make sure that the image is in BMP format and is named boot.bmp.
The size is set at 128 x 96 pixels (width x height) or, alternatively, 128 x 64 pixels. You
can use two colors, which will be shown as shades of gray.
Make sure that the file always keeps the name boot.bmp!
Splash screen

Figure 66: boot.bmp

Transfer the image to the microSD memory card.
Store the boot.bmp file directly on the memory card.
microSD memory card on the PC

Figure 67: Storing the boot.bmp file

As soon as the easyE4 device is switched on,
the boot.bmp will be shown as a splash screen for the defined duration.
In order for the splash screen to keep working, the microSD
memory card must remain in the device.

126

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.1 Base device with display and buttons

4. Operation
The way in which the various base devices are operated varies.
Only EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) base devices with a display and buttons can be operated directly.
Meanwhile, EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P) base devices with LED indicators used for diagnostic purposes, as well as all expansion devices, are limited to providing information
via their LEDs' flashing patterns.
→ Section "Startup behavior of easyE4 control relays with LED indicators", page 88

4.1 Base device with display and buttons

Figure 68: Display and keypad

4.1.1 LCD Display
Monochrome device display with six lines, each with 16 characters (128 x 96 pixels).

Figure 69: Example of status display on display

The display can show texts, values, parameters, and pseudographics.
Once the device is switched on, as well as during ongoing operation, the device willswitch to sleep mode and display the status display after a configurable time without
any operator activity.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

127

4. Operation
4.1 Base device with display and buttons

4.1.1.1 Display color backlight
The display backlight can be illuminated white, red, or green or be switched off in order
to signal specific device states.
The backlight brightness has three different available levels.
Press the OK button on the device in order to open the main menu from the status
display.
Either the cursor position or the available action on the display will flash. A checkmark✓ will be shown to indicate which option is currently selected. Please note that since
the display has six lines only, you may need to use thecursor buttons to scroll tothe remaining available lines on a screen.
The display's settings can be configured on the easyE4 device in the SYSTEMOPTIONS\SYSTEM\DISPLAY menu, → Section "Display", page 563
4.1.2 Keyboard
DEL

Deleting in the circuit diagram

ALT

Special functions in circuit diagram, Status display

Cursorbuttons

Move cursor
Select menu items,
Change numbers, contacts and values

ESC

Back, Cancel

OK

Next menu level, Save your entry

Once the device is switched on, as well as during ongoing operation, the device willswitch to sleep mode and display the status display after a configurable time without
any operator activity.
Press the OK button on the device in order to open the main menu from the status
display.
Use thecursor buttons to scroll through the individual menu options.
To confirm a selection, press OK. to open the corresponding menu path.
If necessary, use thecursor buttons while in a line to toggle between theright and left display areas.
If this option is available, the ó character will appear.

128

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.1 Base device with display and buttons

4.1.3 Selecting menus and entering values
2x ALT

Calling the System menu

ESC

Return to the previous menu level
Cancel entries since last OKOKMove to the next menu level
Call menu item
Activate, change, save entries

Cursorbuttons

Change menu item,
Change the value,
Activate, change, save entries

How the P button functions are mapped to the cursor buttons:
Input P1
Input P2
Input P3
Input P4

Press the OK button on the EASY-E4-... in order to open the menu from the status
display.
Use thecursor buttons to scroll through the individual menu options.
To confirm a selection, press OK. to open the corresponding menu path.
If necessary, use thecursor buttons while in a line to toggle between theright and left display areas.
If this option is available, the ó character will appear.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

129

4. Operation
4.1 Base device with display and buttons

4.1.4 Cursor display
The cursor buttons

in the easyE4 program perform three functions:Movel Enterl Connectl

The current mode is indicated by the appearance of the flashing cursor.
Current selection flashes on the easyE4 display
œto position the cursor on the circuit diagram
In Move mode, use
in order to select a rung, a contact or a relay coil orthe selection position of a coil function or a NET-ID.

I 01

Use the OK button to switch to Entry mode so that you can enter or change avalue at the current cursor position.
Press the ESC button in Entry mode
to restore to the last changes of an entry.

lPress the ALT button to switch to Connect mode for wiring contacts andrelays.
Press the ALT button again to return to Move.

ESC

Press the ESC button to leave the program (circuit diagram and parameter display).

4.1.5 Entering of values
Used to select a position.
Use to select values
and/or a setting

130

ESC

Cancel, retain previous value

OK

Store settingseasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.2 Operating modes of the easyE4

4.2 Operating modes of the easyE4
A easyE4 device recognizes operating modes RUN and STOP.
4.2.1 RUN mode
In RUN mode, the program stored on the device will be executed immediately
after the device is switched on and will continue to be executed until you select STOP, asystem fault occurs, or the supply voltage is switched off.
The outputs will be driven based on the relevant switch logic. The parameter values will
be retained in the event of a power failure, and all you will need to do is reset the realtime clock in the event that the backup time elapses. → "Back-upof real-time clock",
page 702
In RUN operating mode:the process image of the inputs are read.
l The program is executed.
l The NET is run (Ethernet, web server, and Modbus TCP).
l the process image of the outputs is transferred to the physical outputs.
l

The easyE4 devices with a display do not start with RUN mode if you deactivate the
RUN MODE startup behavior.
easyE4 devices with LED indicators have a different startup behavior. On them, theRUN START and CARD START functions will be enabled automatically, as manually
starting the device is not possible.
For more information on the CARD START function, please refer to → Section "Setting
the startup behavior", page 571
4.2.2 STOP mode
When the device is in STOP mode, the program will not be executed. In order to be able
to do programming on the circuit diagram, modify system parameters, or configure communications, the device must be in this operating mode.
In addition, the program can be stored on the microSD memory card or be loaded fromit while the device is in this mode.
WARNING! AUTOMATIC STARTUP!
Configure your machine/plant so that the automatic starting of theeasyE4 device never causes unintentional starting of the machine/plant
concerned.
Create your program in such a way that a defined and safe startup procedure is always provided after the power supply is switched on.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1314. Operation
4.2 Operating modes of the easyE4

The main menu on the display is used to switch between operating modes, i.e., from
RUN to STOP and vice versa,→ Section "STOP RUN operating mode menu", page 135
If a program has not been stored on the easyE4, it will not be
possible to switch to RUN mode.
It will not be possible to do configuration work either.
In order to configure it, the program must be stopped.
STOP ✓ RUN

Operating mode changes may be protected with a password.

132

Ongoing operation

To work on the easyE4

Table 14: Main menu

Table 15: Main menu

STOP RUN ✓STOP ✓ RUN

PARAMETERSPARAMETERSSET CLOCKSET CLOCK

CARD

CARD

INFORMATIONINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.

SYSTEM-OPT.

PROGRAMPROGRAM

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.3 Operation of the menu selection and value entry

4.3 Operation of the menu selection and value entry
4.3.1 How to navigate the device menus
OK
ESC
DEL
ALT

Select; confirm value
Cancel; go backDeleteDepending on the starting point:- Toggle display- Jump to the start or end of the menu
- Jump to next line
Go left
Go right
Go up; increment value
Go down; decrement value

4.3.2 Operating principle in the circuit diagram and function block editor
ButtonEffectDEL

Delete rung, contact, relay or empty rung in the circuit diagram
Toggle between N/C and N/O contact, connect contacts, relays and rungs, add rungs
Change value; move cursor up, down

ALT

Change position; move cursor left, right
ESC
OK

Undo setting from last OK, current display, leave menu
Change contact / relay. Insert new; save settings
P1 input when used as P button
P2 input when used as P button
P3 input when used as P button
P4 input when used as P button

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

133

4. Operation
4.3 Operation of the menu selection and value entry

4.3.3 Selecting a device menu
You can use the main menu from the status display in order to access the individual submenus.
Press the OK button.
The main menu will appear.
The scrollbar on the right side will indicate whether there are additional menu options.
Please note that since the display has six lines only, you may need to use thecursor buttons to scroll to the remaining available lines on a screen
Table 16: Main menu
STOP ✓ RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAMA horizontal scroll bar indicates that other selection options are available. You may be.
able to reach them using the cursor keys

134

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4 Overview of the menus on the device
Following is an overview of the menu structure and the various submenus that can beaccessed from the main menu.
4.4.1 Main menu
Ongoing operation

To work on the easyE4

Table 17: Main menu

Table 18: Main menu

STOP RUN ✓STOP ✓ RUN

PARAMETERSPARAMETERSSET CLOCKSET CLOCK

CARD

CARD

INFORMATIONINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.

SYSTEM-OPT.

PROGRAMPROGRAM

4.4.2 STOP RUN operating mode menu
This submenu can be used to switch between operating modes.
STOP ✓ RUN

Table 19: STOP

Table 20: RUN

STOP?
STOP

RUN ✓

RUN?

YES

YES

NO

NO

See also→ Section "Operating modes of the easyE4", page 131

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

135

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.3 Menu Parameter
This submenu lists the function blocks that are being used in the current program. This
makes it possible to change the values of constants in the program at runtime without
having to stop or re-transfer the program.
When the password is activated and the +/- basic parameter for each function block isset, you can allow or deny the operator of the system the possibility to change the values.
Function blocks with basic parameters that you have set to + via the +/- character inthe function block editor are displayed in the PARAMETERS menu and can be changed.
It is only possible to change constants. Other operands cannot be changed. It is also
possible to change parameters via the PARAMETERS menu if you have saved the program and therefore password protected the function block editor.
To immediately apply a change to the individual constants, press the OK button. Pressthe ESC button to cancel the change instead.
List of function blocks in The current program
the current program,does not use any funce.g.,tion blocks
Table 21: Parameter

Table 22: Parameters

STOP ✓ RUN

T 01

Ü

PARAMETERSSET CLOCK

Table 23: ParameterS+

NO FUNCTION BLOCKSINCLUDED!

C 02

CARD
INFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

L:1

STOP

Pressing the OK button will show the parameters for the individual function blocks in an
additional submenu that can be used to modify these parameters with the cursor buttons.
Table 24: Time function
block example
T 01

Ü

S

>I1

000

800

>I2

009

200

QV>

000

000

..

136

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com+

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.4 Set clock menu
This submenu can be used to set the date and time, select the display format for thedate, and adjust the daylight saving time and radio clock settings on the easyE4 device.
Opens additional menus
Table 25: Set clock

Table 26: Set clock

STOP ✓ RUN

TIME/DATEPARAMETERSDSTSET CLOCKRADIO CLOCKCARD

ASTRON. CLOCK

Table 27: Set Clock\Time/Date
DD-MM-YYYY
FR 13.08.2018
12:03:04

INFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Table 28: Set clock\Daylightsaving time
✓

NO
DST
US
RULE

Table 29: Set Clock\Radio
Clock
RADIO
CLOCK
ACTIVE

: YES

INPUT

: I001OFFSET: +000'

Table 30: Set clock\astron.
clock
ASTRON.

CLOCK

LAT

N000. 0000000

LNG

E000. 0000000

OFFSET:+000'

See also→ Section "Time and Date setting", page 587

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

137

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.5 Menu Card
This submenu will only be available if a memory card is detected in the slot.
Opens additional menus
Table 31: Main menu

Table 32: Card

Table 33: Card\Program

STOP ✓ RUN

PROGRAMSET BOOT PROG.

PARAMETERS

LOG RECORDING

DELETE PROGR.

SET CLOCKMANAGE SD CARD

CARD -> DEVICECARDINFORMATION

DEVICE -> CARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Table 34: Card\Log recording
START NEW LOG
DELETE OLD LOG
DELETE ACT. LOG

Table 35: Card\Manage SD
card
FORMAT
RELEASE CARD

Table 36: Card\Information
EXISTING:YESFORMATTED:

YES

SIZE

xxxMB

FREE

XXXMB

See also→ Section "microSD memory card", page 1→ Section "Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card", page
187
→ Section "Configuring the microSD card and device ID", page 586

138

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.6 MenuInformation
Shows the current status of the easyE4 device.
Opens additional menus,
The submenu is only provided in English
Table 37: Main menu

Table 38: Information

STOP ✓ RUN

ACTUAL CONFIG

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

Information\Actual Config

SET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Information\System

Shows the versions on the easyE4
Specification of the part number
OS: Operating system version
B: Firmware build version
CRC: Cyclic redundancy check result

To update the operating system→ Section "microSD memory card", page 1→ Section "Device information", page 598

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

139

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.7 System options menu
This menu can be used to configure the basic settings for the system.
Opens additional menus
Table 39: Main menu

Table 40: System options

STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 41:
System options\Security

PARAMETERSSYSTEMPASSWORDSET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

RANGE

CARD

DELETE PROGR.
NETINFORMATIONETHERNETSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATEPROGRAM

Table 42: System options\System
DEBOUNCE
P BUTTONS ✓RUN MODECARD MODE
LOAD CARD
INDICATORDEVICE ID
BOOT LOGO

Table 43: System Options\Menu Language
ENGLISHDEUTSCH✓FRANCAIS
ESPAŇOLITALIANONEDERLANDSPOLSKIČESKÝPORTUGUÊS
РУССКИЙ
TÜRKÇEROMÂNĀMAGYAR

Deletes the program in
the easyE4 device.

Table 44: System options\Delete progr.
DELETE PROGR.?
YESNOThe submenu is only
provided in English

140

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

System options\Net4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

The submenu is only
provided in English

System options\Ethernet

Available in OS Version
1.10 and higher

Table 45: System options\Update
UPDATEEXPANSION

See also→ Section "System settings", page 561→ Section "Security – password protection", page 581→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625→ Section "Setting up a web server", page 646→ Section "Modbus TCP", page 632→ Section "E-mail function", page 670→ Section "microSD memory card", page 1

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

141

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

4.4.8 Program menu
This menu will only be available if the easyE4 is configured with its factory
settings and/or when a program created with the EDP programming language has been stored on the easyE4 device.
You can use this menu to create a program with the EDP programming language directly on the easyE4 device.
Opens another menu
Table 46: Main menu

Table 47: Program

STOP ✓ RUN

CIRCUIT DIAGR.

PARAMETERSFUNCTION BLOCKS

Used to display and edit the active circuit diagram, e.g.,

SET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Pressing the OK button will show the parameters forthe individual function blocks in an additional submenu that can be used to modify these parameterswith the device's cursor buttons.

Table 48: Programs\Function Blocks
T 01

Ü

S

+

C 02

L:1

STOP

Table 49: Timer module
example
T 01

Ü

S

>I1

000

800

>I2

009

200

QV>

000

000

..

142

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com+

4. Operation
4.4 Overview of the menus on the device

Menu options in the status line for work with the circuit diagram and the function
blocksWhen you complete your work on the circuit diagram and exit the menu with the ESC
button, you will be able to select from the CANCEL, SEARCH, GO TO, and SAVE options
by scrolling through them with the
cursor buttons in the bottommost line.
After editing the function blocks, the CANCEL and SAVE options will be available.
Table 50: Program\Circuit diagram

Table 51: Program\Function
blocksSAVEÓ

CANCELÓ

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

143

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

4.5 Your first EDP programThis section is intended to guide you step-by-step through the process of creating yourfirst program with the easy Device Programming (EDP) language in order to wire a circuit diagram. This should enable you to become familiar with all the relevant rules anduse an easyE4 device for your own projects in no time. Just like with conventional wiring, you will be using contacts and relays in the program. This means that the easyE4
device makes it possible to eliminate the use of these components in a variety of ways,
including the use of function blocks.
The easyE4 program will take care of the entire wiring for these components.
All you have to do is then connect to the easyE4 any switches, sensors, lamps or contactors you wish to use.
Use easySoft 7 to create your own program
Opens another menu
Table 52: Main menu

Table 53: Program

STOP ✓ RUN

CIRCUIT DIAGR.

PARAMETERSFUNCTION BLOCKSSET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAM

Prerequisites for entering a circuit diagram
The easyE4 device is in STOP operating
mode.
l The display must be showing the status display.
lPress the OK button to get to the main menu from the status display.
Use thebuttons to scroll to the Programs menu option.
Open the menu option by pressing the OK button.
The PROGRAMS\CIRCUIT DIAGRAM menu option will now be selected on the easyE4
device.
In general, press the OK button to switch to the next menu level, and press the ESC button to move one level back.
Press the OK button twice to enter the circuit diagram display via menu options<PROGRAM… ->CIRCUIT DIAGRAM>. This is where you will create the circuit diagram.

144

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

Circuit diagram display
The content of the circuit diagram is displayed in the first 5 lines. This window can be
moved over the circuit diagram. At the moment the circuit diagram is empty.
The cursor flashes at the top left, which is where you will start to wire your circuit diagram.
Circuit diagram display

Figure 70: Empty circuit diagram

The last line shows the cursor's position:
L: = Rung (Line).
l C: = Contact or coil field (Column).
l Amount of free memory in bytes.
leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

145

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

4.5.1 Draw a wiring diagram
The circuit diagram supports four contacts and one coil in series. The display shows 6
fields of the circuit diagram.
Use thegrid.

cursor buttons to move the cursor over the invisible circuit diagram

Navigating in the circuit diagram

Figure 71: Fields in the circuit diagram

The first four columns C are contact fields, the fifth column is a coil field. Each line L is acircuit connection.
The easyE4 automatically connects the contact to the power supply.
The following example is provided for a lighting control. The easyE4 device takes on thewiring and the tasks of the circuit shown below.

146

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

Figure 72: Lighting control circuit

Figure 73: Circuit diagram with inputs I01, I02 and output Q1

Now wire the circuit diagram as described below.
With this example the switches S1 and S2 are at the input. I001 and I002 are theswitch contacts for the input terminals in the circuit diagram .
The relay Q1 is represented in the circuit diagram by the relay coil

Q001.

The symbol identifies the coil's function, in this case a relay coil acting as a contactor.
Q001 is one of the easyE4device's outputs.
From the first contact to the output coilWith easyE4 devices wire from the input to the output. The first input contact is I001.
Press the OK button.
easyE4 will insert the first contact, I001, at the cursor position.
The I flashes and can be changed, for example,
to a P for a button input by using the cursor buttons
be changed at this point.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

or. However, nothing needs to147

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

Press the OK button twice,
to move the cursor across the 001 to the second contact field.
You could also move the cursor to the next contact field using the cursor button.
Press the OK button.
The easyE4 device will once again insert an I001 contact at the cursor position.
Press the OK. button so that the cursor will jump to the next position.
Use the or cursor buttons to select the number 002.
Pressing DEL will delete the contact at the cursor position.
Press the OK button to move the cursor to the third contact field.
You do not need a third relay contact, so you can now wire the contacts directly up to
the coil field.
WiringeasyE4 device displays a small arrowing.

in the circuit diagram when creating the wir-Press the ALT button to activate the arrow and press the cursor buttons
tomove it. Pressing the ALT button once more switches the cursor back to Move mode.
The ALT button also has two other functions depending on the cursor position:
In the left contact field, you can press the ALT button to insert a new
empty circuit connection.
l The contact under the cursor can be changed between a N/O and N/Ccontact by pressing the ALT button.
l

The wiring arrow works between contacts and relays.
When you move the arrow onto a contact or relay coil, it changes back to the cursor
and can be reactivated if required.
The easyE4 device automatically connects adjacent contacts up to the
coil.
Press the ALT to wire the cursor from I002 through to the coil field.
The cursor changes into a flashing wiring arrow and automatically jumps to the next
logical wiring position.
Press the cursor button.

Contact I002 will be connected up to the coil field.
You can use the DEL button to erase a connection at the cursor or arrow
position. Where connections intersect, the vertical connections aredeleted first, then, if you press the DEL button again, the horizontal connections are deleted.

148

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

Press the cursor button

once more.

The cursor will move to the coil field.
Press the OK button.
The specified coil function
be changed.

and the output relay Q001 are correct and do not have toYour result will look as follows: Your first wired and functional circuit diagram
I001---I002---------Ä Q001

L:1

C:5

40120

Figure 74: Completed circuit diagram

You can use the cursor buttons to access the part that is not visible.
Press the ESC button to leave the circuit diagram display.
Line 6 will show the SAVE menu option.
SavingI001---I002--------------Ä Q001

SAVE
Figure 75: SAVE menu option in the status line

Press the OK button to confirm.
The circuit diagram is stored.
Press the ESC button twice to return to the main menu.
You can test the circuit diagram if the S1 and S2 buttons are connected.
4.5.2 Testing the circuit diagram
Go back to the main menu.
Select the STOP RUN menu option.
The current operating mode is indicated on the display of the easyE4 device by a tickat RUN or STOP stop. Pressing the OK button enables you to toggle between the modes.
Press the OK pushbutton in order to change to RUN.
The Status display also shows the current mode set.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

149

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

4.5.3 Control options in RUN mode
There are two control options in RUN mode. Control of:
1. Inputs and outputs with Status display
2. power flow with power flow display
Status display during RUN mode
Change to the status display and press pushbutton S1.
Do not execute pushbutton S2.
The contacts for inputs I001 and I002 are activated and relay QS1 picks up, indicatedby the highlighted numbers.
Test using the power flow display
Change to the circuit diagram display and press pushbutton S1.
The relay picks up and the easyE4 displays the power flow with a double line.
I001===I002===========Ä Q001

L:1

C:1

RUN

Figure 76: Power flow display 1

Power flow display: Inputs I001 and I002 are closed, relay Q1 has picked up
Press pushbutton S2, that has been connected as a break contact.
The power flow is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out.
I001===I002------------Ä Q001

L:1

C:1

RUN

Figure 77: Power flow display 2Power flow display: Input I001 is closed, input I002 is open,
relay Q1 has dropped out
Press the ESC button to return to the Status display.
The circuit diagram does not have to be completed in its entirety so that it
is possible to test parts of it. The easyE4 device simply ignores any incomplete wiring that is not yet working and only uses the finished wiring.

150

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

Power flow display with zoom function
A reduced display of the circuit diagram is possible for a better overview. To do this, follow the steps below:
Change to the circuit diagram display and press the ALT button.
The circuit diagram display is reduced.
Press pushbutton S1.

Figure 78: Display with zoom, power flow

Power flow display in Zoom function: Input I001 and I002 are closed, relay Q1 pickedup
Contact closed, coil is triggered.
Contact opened, coil not triggered.
Press pushbutton S2, that has been connected as a break contact.
The power flow is interrupted and relay Q1 drops out.

Figure 79: Display with zoom, power flow interrupted

Use thecursor buttons to move from contact to contact or coil.

Press the cursor button.

The cursor moves to the second contact.
Press the ALT button. The zoom function will be turned off and the display will switch to
the display status with contact and/or coil designations.
Power flow display: Input I01 is closed, input I02 is open, relay Q1 has dropped out.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

151

4. Operation
4.5 Your first EDP program

4.5.4 Delete Program
The DELETE PROGRAM function not only deletes the circuit diagram but all elements ofa program. These are as follows:
Circuit Diagraml Function block list
l Function block diagraml Screensl

The system settings and operating parameters are reset to the default settings and also
a possible NET parameterization.
Proceed as follows to delete the program in the easyE4 device:easyE4 must be in STOP mode in order to extend, delete or modify the circuit diagram.
Switch the easyE4 device to STOP mode.
From the main menu, go to the SYSTEM OPTIONS menu.
Opens additional menus
Table 54: Main menu

Table 55: System options

STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 56: System options\Delete progr.

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

DELETE PROGR.?

SET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

YES

DELETE PROGR.

NO

CARD

NET

INFORMATIONETHERNETSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATEPROGRAM

Select DELETE PROGRAM.
The easyE4 device will show a confirmation prompt.
Select YES.
Press the OK button to delete the program
Or
Press the ESC button to cancel
Pressing the ESC button once more returns you to the previous menu level.

152

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device
There are two options for directly transferring a finished .e70 program to an easyE4
device.
With a microSD memory cardl With a direct Ethernet connection between the PC and easyE4l4.6.1 Transfer with a microSD memory card
Prerequisites
You will temporarily need a suitable microSD memory card with a maximum storage capacity of 32 GB.
l A PC on which the easySoft 7 programming software is installed, → Section"Installation instructions", page 83
lInsert the microSD memory card into a drive on your PC (with a suitable adapter ifnecessary).
Open the easySoft 7 programming software on your PC.
Create an application program and save it.
Use the help in themenu by accessing the help topics with the F1
key or open the easyE4 manual.
Or
Open a sample program.→ Section "Sample Projects", page 711
Make sure to stay in the Project view, as the Project menu will only be available there.
Application examples
Support has provided a number of applications that are available for download
as ZIP files from the Software Download Center.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Anwendungsbeispiele/easy/Deutsch
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Application Samples/easy/English
These examples come with a task description, the circuit diagram, and theeasySoft 7 project (in the EDP and LD programming languages as of this writing).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

153

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

Click on the Project\ Card... menu option.
easySoft 7 Project view

Figure 80: Sample program open

In the Select Folder dialog box that appears, select a folder where the LOGS and
PROGRM folders that easySoft 7 needs should be created.
Select the drive where the memory card is located
Exit the dialog box by clicking on Select Folder.

154

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

The Card setup dialog box will appear.
easySoft 7 Project View\Project\Card...

Figure 81: Card setup dialog box

You can use the Card section to specify the storage location, i.e., the drive, where themicroSD memory card is located.
In addition, this section will show the available information about the memory card.
Click on the PC => Card button to select the transfer option you want.

The File selection dialog box will appear.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

155

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

Use this dialog box to enter the name that the program should have on the easyE4
device.
Please make sure that this name does not have more than 14 characters (only lettersand numbers are permitted).
Enter a new entry into the input field.
easySoft 7 Project View\Project\Card...

Figure 82: File selection dialog box

The following safety prompt will appear:
Do you want to enter the program as a start program on the card as well?
This prompt is intended for cases in which the easyE4 device
will start running this program as soon as a supply voltage isapplied. If you select the Yes option, please make sure to take
into account the potential automatic startup and the settings
configured in the program
Click on Yes for the test with a sample program from this manual.

156

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

easySoft 7 Project View\Project\Card...

Figure 83: The program was transferred to the memory card.

Close the window
Remove the microSD memory card from the drive.
Insert the microSD memory card into the slot on the easyE4 base device.
→ Section "Inserting a microSD card", page 73
The easyE4 device will be ready for operation.
Apply the corresponding supply voltage while observing all relevant safety instructions.
The easyE4 device will start running the program (depending on the operatingmode).
Or
Transfer the program from the microSD memory card to the device
if you did not define the program as the starting program. → page 187

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

157

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

4.6.2 Establish Ethernet connection
Establishing a connection between a PC and an easyE4 base device
In order to be able to establish a connection, your PC must first have the required Ethernet capability. This capability can be in the form of a local Ethernet port on the PC or astandard adapter (e.g., USB-to-Ethernet adapter).
The PC's and the easyE4 base device's IP addresses must fall within the same range,i.e., the addresses' first two or three numbers must be the same, while the last number
must be different and not equal to 0.
Check the easyE4 device's IP address.
To do this, open the INFORMATION\ACTUAL CONFIG menu and scroll to IP
ADDRESS.
Table 57: Main menu

Table 58: Information

STOP ✓ RUN

ACTUAL CONFIG

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

Information\Actual Config

SET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAMThe submenu is only
provided in English

If an IP address has not been assigned yet, enter one.
To do this, open the SYSTEM OPTIONS\ETHERNET\IP Address menu.
Table 59: Main menu

Table 60: System options

STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 61: System options\Ethernet

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

ADDRESS MODESET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

IP ADDRESSDELETE PROGR.

SUBNET MASKNETGATEWAY ADDRESSINFORMATIONETHERNETDNS SERVERSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATECARD

PROGRAM

Table 62: System Options\Ethernet\IP Address
IP-ADDRESS
000.000.000.000

158

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Use the cursor buttons to enter the device's
IP address.

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

Table 63: System Options\Ethernet\Address mode
AUTO IP

Select the network setting you want.

✓

DHCP
STATIC IP

Set up a new Ethernet connection on your PC's operating system.
To do this, go to Windows Network and Sharing Center and set up a LAN connection
over Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4). Then enter an IP address in the samerange you used for the device, but with a different device number.
Example using Windows

Figure 84: Ethernet connection on PC

You can now connect to your easySoft 7 device with the easyE4 programming software.
See also→ Section "Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program", page100

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

159

4. Operation
4.6 Transfer program to the easyE4 device

160

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.1 Program

5. Programming on the device
This chapter describes how to wire easyE4 contacts and coils with the display andkeypad on an EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P).

5.1 Program
An easyE4 program consists of the required system settings for the easyE4 device,
NET, password, and operating parameters,
as well as the following:
Circuit diagram (program on the easyE4)
l Function block list
l Function block diagraml

Programs have file extension .e70. However, please note that this fileextension will not be shown on the display.
The programs themselves can be created very easily with easySoft 7 andthen transferred to the easyE4 device.
easySoft 7 Help provides corresponding support.

5.2 Circuit diagram display
The circuit diagram, i.e., the program with which the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) works, canbe displayed in the main menu under Program.
Programs/Circuit Diagram

Figure 85: Circuit diagram display

You wire contacts and coils of relays in the easyE4 circuit diagram from left to right,
from the contact to the coil.
The circuit diagram is created on a hidden wiring grid containing contact fields, coilfields and rungs. It is then wired up with connections.
Insert contacts in the four contact fields. The first contact field on the left is automatically connected to the voltage.
l The coil field can be used to enter the relay coil being driven together with the corresponding coil identifier and coil function. The coil identifier consists of a coil name,leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

161

5. Programming on the device
5.2 Circuit diagram display

coil number, and, in the case of function blocks, the function identifier. The coil function defines the method of operation of the coil.
The cursor buttons
can be used to change the contact fields. The number of the circuit connection and the contact are displayed in the lower status line.
There are 256 rungs available in the circuit diagram, for wiring contacts and coils.
For greater legibility the circuit diagram of the easyE4 device shows two contacts or
one contact plus coil in a row on each rung. A total of 16 characters per circuit connection and five circuit connections plus the status line can be displayed simultaneously.

Program display on the display

Connections are used to produce the electrical contact between relay contacts andthe coils. They can be created across several rungs. Each point of intersection is aconnection.
l The number of free bytes is displayed so that you can recognize how much memory
is available for the circuit diagram and function blocks.
l

The circuit diagram display has two functions:
It is used to edit the circuit diagram in STOP mode.
l It is used in RUN mode to check the circuit diagram using
the power flow display.
l162

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

5.3 Circuit diagram elements
A circuit diagram is a series of commands that the easyE4 device processes cyclicallyin RUN operating mode.
Coils and contacts are interconnected in the circuit diagram. In RUN mode, a coil isswitched on or off depending on the power flow and coil function set.
This section provides more information on how contacts and coils are mapped to operands; please refer to → "Using operands in a program", page 200.
5.3.1 Function blocks
Function blocks are program elements with special functions. Examples: Timing relays,
time switch, data block comparators. Function blocks are provided with or without contacts and coils. How a safety or standard function block is added to the safety or standard circuit diagram and parameterized is described in→ Section "Working with function blocks", page 191
In RUN mode the function blocks are processed according to the circuit diagram andthe results are updated accordingly.
Examples:Timing relay = Function block with contacts and coils
Time switch = Function block with contacts
5.3.2 Relays
Relays are switching devices that are emulated in easyE4 device electronically, which
activate their contacts according to the assigned function. A relay consists of at least
one coil and contact.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

163

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

5.3.3 Contacts
Contacts are used to change the power flow inside the easyE4 circuit diagram.
Contacts such as N/O contacts are set to 1 when they are closed and 0 when they are
opened. In the easyE4 circuit diagram you can wire contacts as make or break contacts. N/C contacts are indicated with a horizontal line above the operand concerned.
An easyE4 device operates with different contacts that you arrange in any order in thecontact fields of the circuit diagram.
Table 64: Usable contacts

Switching contact

Look

N/O contact, i.e., normally open
contact

I, Q, M, A, …

N/C contact, i.e., normally closed
contact

I, S, S, A, …

A detailed list of all contacts used in the circuit diagram is provided on → Section"Function blocks", page 216

164

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

5.3.4 Coils
Coils are the actuating mechanisms of relays. The results of the wiring are transferredto the coils when the device is in RUN mode. These switch to the On (1) or Off (0) stateaccording to these results. The options for setting output and marker relays are listedwith the description of each coil function.
A easyE4 device is provided with different types of relays and function blocks which
can be wired in a circuit diagram via their coils (inputs).
Coil functions
You can configure the switching behavior of relays with coil functions and parameters.
If you want to map coils from your circuit diagram to theeasyE4 device, use the coils with a contactor function in yourdevice!
The following coil functions are available for all coils:
Table 65: Coil function
Display
Coil function

Example￫ PageContactor function

Q01,

D02,

S04,

:01,

Impulse relay function

Q03,

M04,

D08,

S07,

M07,..
:01,..

→ page 166→ page 166

S

Set

SQ08,SM02,SD03,SS04..

→ page 167

R

Reset

RQ04,RM05,RD07,RS03..

→ page 167

Contactor function
withnegated result
Cycle pulse
on rising edge
Cycle pulse
on falling edge

Q04,

M96..

→ page 168

M01..

→ page 168

M42..

→ page 169

With non-retentive coil functions such as(contactor), (negated contactor), (rising) and (falling edge evaluation): Each coil must only be used once. The last coil in the circuit diagram determines the state of the relay. Exception: When working withjumps, the same coil can be used twice.
Retentive coil functions such asS, R,
can be used several times.
The available coil functions for the various function blocks are described in the relevant
sections. Please refer to → Section "Working with function blocks", page 191

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

165

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

Coil with contactor function
The output signal follows the input signal directly, the relay operates as a contactor.

Figure 86: Contactor function signal diagram

Coil with the impulse relay function
The relay coil switches whenever the input signal changes from 0 to 1. The relay
behaves like a bistable flip-flop.

Figure 87: Impulse relay signal diagram

A coil is automatically switched off in the event of a power failure and in STOP mode.
Exception: retentive coils retain the 1 state.
See also→ Section "Retention function", page 578

166

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements"Set" S and "Reset" R coil functions"Set" the coil function S and "Reset" R coil functions are normally used in pairs.
The relay picks up when the coil is set (A) and remains in this state until it is reset (B)by the coil function.
The power supply is switched off (C), the coil is not retentive.

on
S

on
R

on

A

B

C

Figure 88: Set and Reset signal diagram

If both coils are triggered at the same time, priority is given to the coil further down inthe circuit diagram. This is shown in the above signal diagram in section B. Has a higher
rung number(The Reset coil in the example above.)
I 05---------------S Q 01
I 10---------------R Q 01

Figure 89: Simultaneous triggering of Q 01

The above example shows the Reset coil with priority when the Set and Reset coil are
triggered at the same time.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

167

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

Coil negation (inverse contactor function)
The output signal will correspond to the inverted input signal. The relay will work like acontactor with negated contacts. If the coil is driven with a state of 1, it will switch its
make contacts to a state of 0.

Figure 90: Inverse contactor function signal diagram

Evaluating a rising edge (cycle pulse)This function is used if the coil is only meant to switch on a rising edge. When the coilstatus changes from 0 to 1, the coil switches its make contacts to 1 for one cycle.

Figure 91: Signal diagram of cycle pulse with rising edge

168

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.3 Circuit diagram elements

Evaluating a falling edge (cycle pulse)This function is used if the coil is only meant to switch on a falling edge. When the coilstatus drops out from 1 to 0, the coil switches its make contacts to 1 for one cycle.

Figure 92: Signal diagram of cycle pulse with negative edge

A set coil is automatically switched off in the event of a power
failure and in STOP mode.
Retentive coils keep their logic state.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

169

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4 Working with contacts and coils
Switches, pushbuttons and relays from a conventional hardwired circuit diagram are
wired in the easyE4 circuit diagram via input contacts and relay coils.
Hardwired
Wired with an easyE4 device
easyE4 connection

S2

S1

Q1

Make contact S1 to input terminal I1
Make contact S2 to input terminal I2Connect load E1 to easy output Q1
S1 or S2 switch on E1.

Q1

E1

easyE4 circuit diagram:I 001--------------------Q 001
I 002--kFigure 93: Circuit diagram with inputs

Circuit diagram with inputs I 001, I 002 and output Q 001
First specify which input and output terminals you wish to use in your circuit.
The signal states on the input terminals are detected in the circuit diagram with the
input contacts I, R or RN. The outputs are switched in the circuit diagram with the output relays Q, S or SN.
The jump destination has a special position for the input contacts and the jump location
for the output relays. These are used for structuring a circuit diagram.
Following is a description of how to wire various contacts and coils for the various
relay types and function blocks (inputs) in the circuit diagram.

170

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.1 Entering and modifying contacts

Figure 94: Contact legend

You choose an input contact in the easyE4 device by means of the contact name andthe contact number.
Example: Base device input contact or function block contact consists of the abbreviated function block name, the number, and the contact function.
Example: Contact of "comparator" function block
How a safety or standard function block is added to the circuit
diagram and parameterized is described in → Section "Function
blocks", page 216.
If a NET station's contact is used in a circuit diagram, the station's NET-ID (address)
will be placed before the contact name, ￫"Wiring another NET station's contact or coilin a circuit diagram" section, page 121.
Example: Contact of a NET station

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

171

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.2 Changing an N/O contact to an N/C contact
DANGER
Persons, systems and machines may be put at risk if an N/C contact
is misinterpreted. When using N/C contacts in the program always
evaluate the PRSNT and DIAG diagnostic bits of this module.
You can define each contact in the circuit diagram as a N/O or N/C.
Switch to Entry mode and move the cursor over the contact name.
Press the ALT button. The N/O contact will change to a N/C contact.
Press the OK button 2 × to confirm the change.

Figure 95: Change contact I 03 from N/O to N/C

Bear in mind that the active state of an N/C contact is 0. The 0 state of a contact may,
however, be present if the station is missing or is operating incorrectly. The use of an
N/C contact in the circuit diagram without evaluating the diagnostics bit may cause
incorrect interpretations.

172

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.3 Entering and modifying coils
With a relay coil or a function block, you choose the coil function, coil name, coil number
as well as the function block coil. With coils of an NET station, choose the address (NETID) in front of the coil name.
The coil number in the figures on the left must be the same as
the function block number!
ExamplesFigure 96: Relay coil "Output Q"

Figure 97: Relay coil for timing relay
function block with control coilFigure 98: Relay coil of a
NET station

A complete list of all contacts and coils,→ Section "Function blocks", page 216
The values for contact and coil fields can be changed in input mode.
The value that can be changed will flash.
The easyE4 device proposes contact I 001 or the coil Ä Q
001 for entry in an empty field.

Use thebuttons to move the cursor to a free contact or coil field.
Press the OK button to switch to Entry mode.
Use
to select the position you wish to change and press the OK to move tothe next position(a selected position is shown in light grey in the following figure).
Use thecursor buttons to change the value at the position.
The easyE4 device will exit input mode as soon as you exit a contact or coil field with
thecursor buttons or the OK button.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

173

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

In the contact field to change I 01
to I 02

In the coil field change

Q 001 to S Q 008

5.4.4 Deleting contacts and coils
Use thebuttons to move the cursor to a free contact or coil field.
Press the DEL pushbutton.
The contact or the coil will be deleted, together with any connections.

174

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.5 Creating and modifying connections
Contacts and relay coils are connected with the wiring arrow in Connect mode. The
easyE4 device displays the cursor in this mode as a wiring arrow.
Use
to move the cursor to the contact or coil field from which you wish
to create a connection.
Do not position the cursor on the first contact field.
Here the ALT button has a different function (add rung).
Press the ALT button to switch to Connect mode.
Use thecursor buttons to move the arrow between the contact and coil fields
and use thecursor buttons to move it between the rungs.
Press the ALT button to leave Connect mode.
The easyE4 device closes the mode automatically as soon as you have moved thearrow to an occupied contact or coil field.
In a rung, the easyE4 device connects contacts and the connection to the relay coil automatically if no empty fields are
between them.
Never wire backwards.

Figure 99: Circuit diagram with five contacts, invalid

When using more than four contacts in series, use one of the 96 M or 128 M markers.

Figure 100: Circuit diagram with M marker relay

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

175

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.6 Deleting connections
Move the cursor onto the contact field or coil field to the right of the connectionthat you want to delete.
Press the ALT button to switch to Connect mode.
Press the DEL pushbutton.
The easyE4 device deletes a connection branch.
Closed adjacent connections will be retained.
Close the delete operation with the ALT button or by moving the cursor to a contact or coil field.

5.4.7 Adding a rung
The circuit diagram display shows three of the 256 rungs at the same time. Rungs outside of the display, including empty rungs, are scrolled by easyE4 automatically in thecircuit diagram display if you move the cursor beyond the top or bottom of the display.
A new rung is added below the last connection or inserted above the cursor position:
Position the cursor on the first contact field of a rung.
Press the ALT button.
The existing rung with all its additional connections is “shifted” downwards. The cursor
is then positioned directly in the new rung.

Figure 101: Inserting a new rung

5.4.8 Deleting a rung
The easyE4 device only removes empty rungs (without contacts or coils).
Delete all contacts and coils from the rung.
Position the cursor on the first contact field of the empty rung.
Press the DEL pushbutton.
The subsequent rung(s) will be “pulled up”
and any existing links between rungs will be retained.

176

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.9 Got to a rung
The GO TO function can be used to go to a different rung.
Press the ESC button.
Use thecursor buttons to select the
GO TO menu.
Press the OK button.
Use thecursor buttons to select the rung you want (L…).
Always the first contact of the rung is displayed.
Press the OK button.

You can use the "GO TO" function to jump to any rung, up to thelast wired rung.

5.4.10 Saving the circuit diagram
Press the ESC button.
A menu will appear in the status line.
Use thecursor buttons to switch to the SAVE menu.
Press the OK button.
The entire program, circuit diagram and function blocks will be saved.
After saving, you will be returned to the previous menu from which you have opened
the circuit diagram.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

177

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.11 Exiting the circuit diagram without saving
In order to exit a circuit diagram without saving, press ESC.
A menu will appear in the status line.
Use thecursor buttons to switch to the CANCEL menu.
Press the OK button.
The circuit diagram is closed without saving.
5.4.12 Searching for contacts and coils
Boolean operands or function blocks that are wired as contacts or coils can be found in
the following way:Press the ESC button.
Use thecursor buttons to switch to the SEARCH menu.
Press the OK button.
Use the cursor buttons
to select a contact or coil as well as the required
number.
For a function block you select the function block name and the number.
Confirm the search with the OK pushbutton.
The search starts at the point where the search is activated, continues to the end of thecircuit diagram. It applies only to this area.
If the required contact or coil is located above the point of calling, start the search at the
beginning of the circuit diagram.
If the search is successful, you will automatically reach the required contact or coilfield in the circuit diagram.

178

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

5.4.13 Switching with the Cursor Buttons
You can use the four cursor buttons on the easyE4 device as hardwired inputs in the circuit diagram.
The P buttons can be used for testing circuits or for manual operation. The button function is a useful addition for service and commissioning tasks.

Figure 102: The cursor buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts P 01 to P 04.

Requirement:
The P buttons must have been enabled in the system menu.
Example 1
This standard circuit diagram example enables a lamp at output Q1 to either beswitched on or off via the inputs I1 and I2 or via the cursor buttons ÍÚ.

Figure 103: Switch Q1 via I1, I2, Í , or Ú

Example 2This circuit diagram example causes output Q1 to be actuated by input I1. I5 switches
to cursor operation and disconnects the rung I 01 via M 01.

Figure 104: I5 switches to cursor buttons.

The easyE4 device only evaluates P button entries if the status
display is shown.
The Status menu display shows whether the P buttons are used in the circuit diagram.
Display in Status display:
P: Button function wired and active,l P2: Button function wired, active and P2 buttonleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

pressed179

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

P-: Button function wired, not active,l Empty field: P pushbuttons not used.
l

I

1 .

. . .

6 . 8 . . . .
P 2

M

O

1

4 : 5

5

Q

0 2 .

. 6 .

8

M

A C :

. . .

. . . . . . . . .

n

i c h

t

e r b u n d e n

v

R U N

5.4.14 Checking the circuit diagram
The easyE4 device features an integrated power flow display with which you can follow the switching states of contacts, relay and function block coils during operation.
The circuit diagram display performs two functions depending on the mode:
STOP: Create the circuit diagram.
l RUN: Power flow display.
lCreate the small parallel circuit below and save it.

Figure 105: Paralleling link

Switch easyE4 to RUN mode via the main menu.
Switch back to the circuit diagram display.
You are now unable to edit the circuit diagram.
If you change to the circuit diagram display but cannot change
a circuit diagram, first check whether the easyE4 device is in
STOP mode.
Switch on I3.

Figure 106: Power flow display

In the power flow display, energized connections are thicker than non-energized connections.
You can follow energized connections across all rungs by scrolling the display up anddown.
The power flow display indicates the controller is in RUN mode.

180

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

The power flow display does not show signal changes in the
millisecond range due to the inherent technical delay of LCD displays.

5.4.15 Jumps
Jumps can be used for structuring a circuit diagram. They can replace the function of a
selector switch, for example, for Manual/Automatic mode or for different machine programs.
Jumps consist of a jump location and a jump destination (label). Jumps exist in thecircuit diagram, for skipping rungs:
Jump location and jump destination are located in the same circuit diagraml Function block editor, for skipping function blocks:
Jump location is located in the circuit diagram and jump destination in the function
block editor
The use of jumps in the function block diagram is explained in → "LB - Jump label",
page 491 and → "JC - Conditional jump", page 486.
l

The easyE4 device allows the use of up to 32 jumps.
Circuit diagram elements for jumps in the circuit diagram
Contact (N/O1)
Numbers
001 up to 032
Coils
Numbers
001 up to 032
Coil function, , , ,
1) can only be used as first leftmost contact

Function of jumps
If the jump coil is triggered, the rungs after the jump coil are no longer processed.
Jumps are always made forwards, i.e. the jump ends on the first contact with the same
number as that of the coil.
Coil = Jump when 1
l Contact only at the first left-hand contact position = Jump destinationl

The jump destination is always an N/O contact with the status 1.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

181

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

Backward jumps cannot be executed due to the way in whicheasyE4 works. If the jump label does not come after the jumpcoil, the jump will be made to the end of the circuit diagram.
The last rung is also skipped.
Multiple usage of the same jump coil and the same contact ispossible as long as this is done in pairs, this means:
Coil :1/jumped area/contact :1,
Coil :1/jumped area/contact :1,
etc.
NOTICE
If rungs are skipped, the states of the coils are retained. The time ofstarted timing relays continues to run.
Power flow display of skipped area
Jumped sections are indicated by the coils in the power flow display. All coils after thejump coil are shown with the symbol of the jump coil.
Example for jumps
A selector switch is used to select two different sequences.
Sequence 1: Switch on motor 1 immediately.
Sequence 2: Activate barrier 2, wait time, then switch on motor 1.
Contacts and relays used:
I1 sequence 1
I2 sequence 2
I3 guard 2 moved out
I12 motor protective circuit breaker switched on
Q1 motor 1Q2 guard 2
T 01 Wait time 30.00 s, on-delayed
D 01 Text “Motor protective circuit breaker tripped”

Circuit Diagram:

182

Power flow display: I001 selected:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

Range from jump label 1 processed.
Jump to label 8.
Range to jump label 8 skipped.
Jump label 8,
circuit diagram processed from this point on.

5.4.16 Wiring NET operands in the circuit diagram
A NET with several stations always allows the reading of all inputs and outputs. This ispossible regardless of whether a circuit diagram is being processed or not on the NET
station to be read. The inputs and outputs are addressed in the NET by using the preceding NET-ID of the station. The inputs and outputs of a NET station are identified withnI.. and nQ.
The permissible access by stations to the inputs and outputs of other stations depends
on the operating mode of the devices on the NET, in which the following applications are
possible:
Operating devices on the NET
NET marker
All NET stations each process a circuit
diagram.
n = NET-ID

Usable NET operands of data type…
Bit

Byte 32 Bit (DWord)nN..
nI.., nR.., nQ.., nS..,
nRN.., nSN...

nB..

nW.., nD...

Wiring a contact or coil of another NET station in the circuit diagram
Prerequisites
You must have selected an I.., Q.., R.., RN.., or SN.. operand in the circuit diagram andbe in input mode.
This mode is displayed by a flashing operand.
Use the cursor button ú to move the cursor to the position to the left of the operand.
A flashing zero appears as the initial value.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

183

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

Use the Í or Ú cursor buttons to select the NET-ID you want (NET-ID 7 in thisexample).
Click on OK.

The local I.., or Q.. operand has been changed to a NET operand nI.., nR.., nQ.. and nS...
Several NET stations with their own circuit diagram
The relevant NET stations each process a circuit diagram.
Every station has read access to all inputs and outputs of the other stations.
l The station only has write access to its local outputs and outputs of its local expansion unit.
Example: Station 1 uses the state of Q1 of station 2 in its circuit diagram. Station 1,
however, cannot set Q1 of station 2 to 1.
l Send NET (SN) and Receive NET( RN) is used for exchanging bits. These operands
are always used in pairs.
l Put (PT) and Get (GT) are used in order to exchange double word operands via theNET.
For more information on the manufacturer function blocks: → Section "Working withfunction blocks", page 191→ Section "Function blocks", page 216
l184

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

SN-RN combination for bit exchange on the NET
Writing via SNl

The NET operand SN (Send NET) is used for sending bit data from one NET station toanother. To do this you select the SN operand in a coil field.
Reading using RNl

The RN (Receive NET) NET operand is used to receive the bit data that another NET station has sent. To do this you select the RN operand in a contact field.
As the RN and SN must always be used in pairs, the following rule applies:on the sending station and receiving station use the same operand number for each
SN/RN pair to be formed.
l in the circuit diagram of the sending station you set for the SN operand (coil) the station number (NET ID) of the receiving station.
l in the circuit diagram of the receiving station you set for the RN operand (contact)
the station number (NET ID) of the sending station.
l

SN-RN example
NET station 2 sends the status of the P button P01 via SN1 to NET station 1.
2 slave

1 slave

Destination
Id

Source
ID

1

SN

2

RN

The relevant circuit diagram is as follows:

On NET station 1 the status of P1 is associated via RN01 as a count pulse for thecounter relay C01.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

185

5. Programming on the device
5.4 Working with contacts and coils

NET operand GT.. (receive), PT.. (send) and SC.. (set date and time)
The function blocks are of data type 32-bit. They will only work if the NET is working
properly.→ Section "Operating system diagnostic messages", page 609
More information about the function blocks: → Section "Function blocks", page 216
NET marker
N.., nB.., nW.., nD...
Every station that the NET marker describes can read any of the other stations.

Figure 107: 1 slave

Figure 108: 2 slave

186

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.5 Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card

5.5 Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card
easyE4 base devices can be used with a microSD memory card.
For more information on the various ways in which this memory card can be used,
please refer to: → "microSD storage cards" section, page 1
Programs are normally transferred from easySoft 7 to the device so that they can be
run on the device.
If the easyE4 base device has a microSD memory card, the program can also be stored
on this memory card.→ Section "Automatic booting from the card", page 1
You can store multiple programs on a single memory card.
One of these programs can be set as the boot program, i.e., this boot program will be
automatically transferred to the device and run as soon as there is a supply voltage
present (the device is turned on) and there is no program on the device itself.
Programs can be transferred on the easyE4 device itself. They can also be transferredwith easySoft 7 if the latter is connected to the easyE4.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

187

5. Programming on the device
5.5 Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card

5.5.1 Configuration on base devices with a display
The program needs to be transferred using the Card menu option.
In order to be able to do this, the program must be in STOP mode. If it is not, the device
will point this out.
Go to the main menu.
Open the CARD menu option.
Table 66: Main menu
STOP ✓ RUN
PARAMETERSSET CLOCKCARDINFORMATIONSYSTEM-OPT.
PROGRAMThe device menu for the memory card will appear with additional menu options.
Table 67: Card
PROGRAM
LOG RECORDING
MANAGE SD CARDINFORMATIONPROGRAMLOGSMANAGE CARDINFORMATION

188

Used to manage the programs on the device
Data can be written to a binary file by using the DL (Data Logger)
manufacturer function block. These logs can be managed here.
Used to format and eject the card
Provides information on the card size and the amount of freespace left

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.5 Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card

5.5.1.1 PROGRAM submenu
Requirement:
The following option must be enabled when creating the program in easySoft: Allow
overwriting via card
You can use this submenu to manage the programs on the easyE4.
The program transfer menu offers the following options:
Table 68: Card\Program
SET BOOT PROG.
DELETE PROGR.
CARD -> DEVICE
DEVICE -> CARD

STARTPROGRAM
If you select this submenu, a list with the names of all the programs stored on thememory card will appear.
Table 69: Card\Program\Start program
Name Program 1 ✓Name Program 2
Name Program 3...

The checkmark ✓ at the end of a line is used to indicate the program with which theeasyE4 device will start as soon as there is a supply voltage.
If the display is empty, this means that no programs have been
stored on the memory card.

Select the starting program you want.
DELETE PROGRAM
If you select this submenu, a list with the names of all the programs stored on thememory card will appear.
The ✓ checkmark at the end of a line indicates which program is currently set as thestarting program. Meanwhile, the program that is currently selected will flash.
Select the program that you want to delete.
A confirmation prompt will appear. The program will not be deleted until you select Yes
and press OK as a confirmation.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

189

5. Programming on the device
5.5 Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card

CARD -> DEVICE
If you select this submenu, a list with the names of all the programs stored on thememory card will appear.
The ✓ checkmark at the end of a line indicates which program is currently set as the
program to be transferred to the device. Meanwhile, the program that is currently selected will flash.
Select the program that you want to transfer to the device.
Confirm your selection by clicking the OK button.
A confirmation prompt will appear. The program will not be deleted until you select Yes
and press OK as a confirmation.
DEVICE -> CARD
The current program will be transferred from the device to the memory card.
After you select this submenu, another menu will be offered for selection.
SAVE PROG.
Overwrites the selected program with the program from theeasyE4
SAVE AS
Makes it possible to save the current program on the easyE4
under a new nameSee also→ Section "microSD memory card", page 1→ Section "Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card", page
187

190

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

5.6 Working with function blocks
Only the EDP programming language can be used on the device (if you want to programusing the LD, FBD, or ST language instead, you will need to use easySoft 7). The rest of
this section goes over the basics involved in working with function blocks on thedevice.
Function blocks are subdivided into manufacturer function blocks, interrupt function
blocks, and user function blocks.
Manufacturer function blocks, which are function blocks provided by Eaton, can beused directly on the device in the circuit diagram. Meanwhile,interrupt function blocks and user function blocks, which you can create yourself, will
only be available when using the LD, FBD, or ST programming language and can only be
used by using easySoft 7 to transfer the program to the device.
For a detailed description of all available function blocks, please refer to the "Function
blocks" section.
The manufacturer function blocks are used to simulate some of the devices used in conventional open-loop and closed-loop control systems. You can first use the function
block in the circuit diagram and then define the ACTUAL and Setpoint parameters forthe inputs and outputs in the function block editor.
Or vice versa: you create the function block in the function block editor, define the parameters and use it then in the circuit diagram. With easyE4 devices you can insert up to
255 manufacturer function blocks in the function block list.
easyE4 devices will not limit this number automatically. Thismeans that you must check the maximum number of manufacturer function blocks yourself in order to avoid a function
block error.

5.6.1 Adding function blocks to the circuit diagram for the first time
Prerequisites
In order to be able to select the PROGRAMS menu option, one of the two following
prerequisites must be met:
The card must contain a compiled *.PRG program that uses the EDP programming
language.
l The card must not contain a compiled *.PRG program.
l

To add a function block to a circuit diagram for the first time, follow the steps below:
Switch to the circuit diagram display by selecting
Main menu -> PROGRAMS -> CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

191

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

Use thebuttons to move the cursor to a free contact or coil field.
Press the OK button to switch to Entry mode.

Then use thecursor buttons to select the function block you want (e.g., a timing relay with the T identifier).

While the function block identifier is flashing, press the OK button or theto move to the function block number
Press the OK button.

buttonThe display switches to the function block editor. Here you normally define all function
block parameters. As you have reached the function block editor via the circuit diagramin this case, you can only set the basic parameters.
The figure on the left shows the function block editor of the Timing relay function block.

The basic parameters may vary according to the function block. All manufacturer function blocks have the basic parameter +/-. Through the +/- symbol you can switch theparameter display on and off in operating mode RUN to allow (+) or prevent (-) changes
to be made to reference points (constants). You must at least confirm the +/- characterwith the OK button.

192

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

Parameter sets can only be enabled or protected via the
FUNCTION RELAYS menu, or via the circuit diagram with the“+” enable and with “–” inhibit parameter set characters.
Use the cursor buttons
to select the parameter to be changed, for example
the time range “S”.
Use the cursor buttons
to change the parameter value to a different time
range such as M:S.
Press the OK button to exit the parameter dialog if you wish to save the parameters or press the ESC button, if you do not wish to parameterize the function
block and add it to the circuit diagram.
After saving or canceling, the cursor returns to the position in the circuit diagram where
you last left it.
In order to finish configuring the manufacturer function block (e.g., by assigning a reference value), open the function block editor as follows:
Press the ESC button in order to save the circuit diagram with the newly addedfunction block.
Answer the subsequent SAVE prompt with the OK button.
The circuit diagram is saved and the easyE4 device changes to the next higher menu
level.
5.6.2 Function block list
The function block list can be used to access the function block editor.
Go to
Main menu -> PROGRAMS -> FUNCTION BLOCKS.
This lists all function blocks that were ever used in the circuit diagram, and also thosethat were already deleted in the circuit diagram.
If no function blocks are shown, the list is empty.
The function block list in the example below contains the AR, CP, and T manufacturer
function blocks (the manufacturer function blocks are created in the order in which they
were edited).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

193

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

Function, special function, parameter
display
Displays the function blocks used

Current cursor line
Free memory in bytes
Figure 109: Explanation of the function block list

Use the cursor buttons
to select the required function block from thefunction block list, in this case timing relay T01.

Confirm the selection by clicking the OK button.
The timing relay is displayed in the function block editor.
5.6.3 Configuring parameters in the function block editor
The function block can be fully parameterized in the function block editor.
This is accessed via the function block list.
Access is blocked if the program is password protected.
Action Unit/special function
Function block number
Block nameParameter display (+ appears/ –does not appear)
Basic parameters

Function block
inputsVariable,
operand for inputs

Function block outputs
Variable, operand for outputs
Figure 110: Manufacturer function block display in the function block editor

194

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

Example: Timing relay function block
Function Block:
Switch function:
Time range:
Reference time >I1:
Actual time QV>:

timing relay
On-delayed with random time
M:S (Minute:Second)
20 min 30 s
Copied to MD96

Assigning operands at a manufacturer function block's input
The following operands can be assigned to the input of a manufacturer function block:
Constants, e.g.: 42,l Markers such as MD, MW, MB,l Analog output QA,
l Analog inputs IA,
l The QV outputs of all manufacturer function blocksl

You can set the parameters of the function block as follows:
Use thecursor buttons to scroll through the function block inputs' constants.
Change the values for a parameter set:
OK button: Switches to input mode.
Change whole number places with the
cursor buttons.
Use thecursor buttons to change the value of a whole number place.
OK button: Saves the constant immediately
Press the ESC button to leave the parameter display.
ESC button:
Keep the previous setting and exit the parameter display.
Ensure that the input of a function block is not assigned impermissible values during operation.
This risk exists if you apply negative values to an input even though the corresponding
function block only accepts positive values.
If, for example, the T timing relay function block is driven with a negative time reference, it will no longer switch as expected.
You should therefore take care to exclude such situations, as the easyE4 device cannot
foresee these when the parameters are assigned.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

1955. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

If, for example, you have set the output QV of the AR arithmetic function
block at input I1 of the T manufacturer function block, you should connect a
CP comparator in between in order to signal the occurrence of a negativevalue.
In most applications, a thorough simulation is enough to prevent any impermissible values at the function block input.
Assigning operands at a manufacturer function block's output
The following operands can be assigned to the output of a QV manufacturer function
block:llMarkers such as MD, MW, MB,or the analog output QA.

Deleting operands at function block inputs/outputs
Position the cursor on the required operand.
Press the DEL pushbutton.

The operand is deleted.

Behavior of the function block editor with different operating modes
When working with the function block editor, the mode of the device is important.
1. STOP: You will be able to access all of the manufacturer function block's parameters.
2. RUN:
Only access to the basic parameters is possible.
l It is only possible to change input values at manufacturer function blocks if
they are constants. The modified constants are used directly for further prol196

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

cessing in the circuit diagram.
l You can toggle between reference values and actual values by pressing ALT.
Example>I1= Actual value, here from the output of the counter C 01
l >I2= Constant 1095.
l QV> = Marker double word MD56.
l

Setpoints

Actual Values

5.6.4 PARAMETERS menu
This menu item can only be activated in RUN mode.
Manufacturer function blocks with basic parameters that you have set to + via the +/character in the function block editor are displayed in the PARAMETERS menu and canbe changed. It is only possible to change constants. Other operands cannot be changed.
It is also possible to change parameters via the PARAMETERS menu if you have saved
the program and therefore password protected the function block editor. This is thepoint of this menu. When the password is activated and the +/- basic parameter foreach function block is set, you can allow or deny the operator of the system the possibility to change the values.
Move from the Status display to the Parameters display by pressing OK ->PARAMETERS.
Follow the operating steps described in → Section "Assigning operands at a manufacturer function block's input", page 195

5.6.5 Deleting function blocks
To remove a function block, you must remove it from the circuit diagram and from thefunction block list.
Requirement: The easyE4 device must be in STOP mode.
Switch to the circuit diagram display by selecting
Main menu -> PROGRAMS -> CIRCUIT DIAGRAM.
Move the cursor in the circuit diagram to all the contact fields and the coil field inwhich the function block to be deleted is used and press the DEL button each time.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

197

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

Deleting function blocks from the function block list
In order to prevent accidental deletion, a function block continues to be managed in thefunction block list, even if it was already removed in the circuit diagram. To delete thefunction block permanently and therefore to free up more memory, you must remove itfrom the function block list.
Go toMain menu -> PROGRAMS -> FUNCTION BLOCKS.-> Function block list
Select the function block to be deleted in the function block list, in this case CP10.
Press the DEL pushbutton.
The function block is removed from the function block list.

Press the ESC button in order to save the function block list with the deleted function block.
Confirm with the OK button.
In the function block list select the required function block.
In this example, select the data block comparator AR01 in Adder mode.
Press the OK button.
Depending on the display selected the function block is shown with the ACTUAL values
and the result, or with the set operands and constants.
If you want to switch from the operand value display to the actual value display or viceversa while checking the manufacturer function block, press the ALT button.
Press the ALT button again.
Here are some useful tips:
Tips for working with manufacturer function blocks
Current ACTUAL values are deleted when you switch off the power supply orswitch the easyE4 device to STOP mode.
Exception: Retentive data keeps its state, → Section "Retention function", page 578.
The most recent actual values are transferred to the operands every cycle. The
data function block is an exception.
l If you want to prevent other people from modifying the parameters of the manufacturer function blocks, change the access enable symbol from + to – when crel

198

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.6 Working with function blocks

ating the circuit diagram and setting parameters. You can then protect the circuit diagram with a password.
l Since every function block in the function block list takes up space even if it is nolonger being used and has been deleted from the circuit diagram, you should clean
up things every once in a while.
Check the function block diagram for manufacturer function blocks that are nolonger needed and delete them.
l The manufacturer function blocks are designed so that an output value of a function
block can be assigned directly with an input of another function block. The 32-bit
data format is used automatically. This also enables the transfer of negative values.
The following applies to RUN mode:
A easyE4 device processes the manufacturer function block after a passthrough the circuit diagram. This takes the last status of the coils into
account.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

199

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

5.7 Using operands in a program
Only operands can be processed in a program. Accordingly, device input values, device
output values, device P button states, diagnostic alarms, and backlight LED outputs
need to be stored in operands. All operands can be mapped to markers, and markers
are also considered operands. In fact, these markers can be used for bit, byte, word,and double word access in the program and for implementing simple calculations andconnections.

Elementary data types
Following is a list of the various elementary data types. These data types are independent of the programming language you select.
Type/(description)
LengthFormatValue range
Examplein bits
BOOL/(Bit)
BYTE/(Byte)

1
8

WORD/(Word)

16

DWORD/(Double Word)

32

Binary (bool)
Decimal number(unsigned)
Decimal number(unsigned)
Decimal number(signed)0/1, FALSE/TRUE
0…255

TRUE (1)128

0 - 65535

1023-2 147 483 648…
+2 147 483 647- 65535

Permissible operands at a glance
Table 70: Permissible operands

Operand

Explanation

I

Input
OutputP buttons
Diagnostic alarm
Analog Input
Analog output
Markers
Marker byte
Marker word
Marker double word
LED output
Input bit via NET (receive)
Output bit via NET (send)
Network marker
Network marker byte
Network marker word
Network marker double word

Q
P
ID
IA
QA
M
MB
MW
MD
LE
RN
SN
N
NB
NW
ND

200

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Datawidth:

Data
type

1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
32 bit32 bit1 bit
8 bit
16 bit32 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
1 bit
8 bit
16 bit32 bit

BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
DINT
DINT
BOOL
BYTE
WORD
DINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BYTE
WORD
DINT

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Use

Operand range

Local bit operands

I1…I161)
I17…I128
Q1…Q161)
Q17…Q128
P1…P8
M1…M512 (EDP: M1…M128)
ID1…ID241)
ID25…ID96
LE1…LE3

Local value operands

IA1...IA41)
IA5...IA48
QA1...QA41)
QA5...QA48
MB1…MB512
MW1…MW512
MD1…MD256
N1…N512 (EDP: N1…N128)
xRN1…xRN32
xSN1…xSN32
NB1…NB64
NW1…NW32
ND1…ND16
Figure 111:

N operands bit

N operands value1) base device permanently assigned

Connection rules for operands
The following operands can be connected to the various inputs and outputs, as well as
to each other, regardless of the programming language you select:
Operators
Bit inputs
Bit outputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET
SN - Output bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit
nN - NET station n marker
ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlight
P buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output from another FB

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
–
x
x
x
–
x
–
–
x

Assigning operands

Value inputs

Value outputs

Constant
Markers: MB, MD, MW

x
x

x
x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

201

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Assigning operands

Value inputs

Value outputs

Analog inputs IA
Analog output QA
Numeric output from another QV FB

x
x
x

x
x
x

Overview of operands for numeric formats
The values of the data types marker byte (MB) and marker word (MB) are processed
as unsigned. In order to store negative values, you must use a marker double word.
This fact must be particularly taken into account if the output of a function block cantake on a negative value. You must temporarily store this value in a marker double wordin order to transfer it to the input of a function block, otherwise the sign information will
be lost.
The easyE4 device processes calculations with a signed 31-bit value.
The value range is: -2147483648 to +2147483647
In the case of a 31-bit value, the 32nd bit is the sign bit.
Bit 32 = status 0 -> positive number.
Bit 32 = status 1 -> negative number.
Example00000000000000000000010000010010 bin = 412 hex = 1042 dez
11111110110111001111010001000111 bin = FEDCF447 hex = –19073977 dez

Organizing marker ranges
The term "marker" is used to represent marker bits (M). Marker bits (M) are used tostore the Boolean states 0 or 1. A marker bit is also called an auxiliary relay.
easyE4 devices also manage the marker bits in marker bytes (MB), marker words(MW) and in marker double words (MD). A marker byte consists of 8 marker bits, amarker word of 16 marker bits and a marker double word of 32 marker bits.
In order to store the state for a contact, you can use a specific bit and, accordingly a
specific byte as well. For instance, marker bit 9 is included in marker byte 2, marker
word 1, and marker double word 1. You can use the following conversion table todetermine which word contains a bit or which bits encompass a specific double word.
Bear in mind that after the division, a rounding up to the next higher integer is necessary, even if the decimal number is below 0.5.
The easyE4 has 1024 bytes available for data storage.
This data memory can be accessed by bit, byte, word, or double word.
This means that four different operands with their own address can be used to accessthe exact same data range. Accordingly, it is extremely important to pay close attention
to each operand's address in order to avoid accidental duplicate access.

202

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Markers can be used to access data as follows (with the corresponding address
range):
M 1...512
l MB 1...512l MW 1...512l MD1...256l

Avoid accidental double marker assignments.
Otherwise you might address the 512 bit markers simultaneously via the first 64 marker bytes, 32 marker words or
16 marker double words and thus produce uncontrollable
states. When write accesses are made successively within an
MD, such as to MD1, MW2, MB4 or M32, the last write operation is retained.
Observing the following wiring rules will prevent the double assignment ofmarker bits.
For easyE4, use:
Marker bytes, starting at MB13
Marker words, starting at MW07
Marker double words, starting at MD04
The following operand tables show how this works.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

203

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Operand table
To read the operand table, observe the following information:
The most significant marker bit, byte, word or double word is located on the left and theleast significant on the right. Only double words have a sign bit. The other data formats
do not.
Example 1: Bit81 is contained in MB11, MW6 and DW3.
Example 2: Byte21 is contained in MW11 and DW6 and contains bits Bit161 to Bit168.
Bit

Byte

128…- 120…- 112…- 104…- 96…8- 88…8- 80…7- 72…6- 64…5- 56…4- 48…4- 40…3- 32…2- 24…1- 16…9
121
113
105
97
9
1
3
5
7
9
1
3
5
7
16

Word

15
8

Byte

32

31

8

7

6

4

5

4

3

3

2

2

1
1

2

1

30

29

28

27

26

14

25

24

13

23

22

12

21

20

11

7

19

18

10

17
9

6

5

384…- 376…- 368…- 360…- 352…- 344…- 336…- 328…- 320…- 312…- 304…- 296…- 288…- 280…- 272…- 264…377
369
361
353
345
337
329
321
313
305
297
289
281
273
265
257
48

47

46

24

45

44

23

43

42

22

41

40

21

12

39

38

20

37

36

19

11

35

34

18

33
17

10

9

512…- 504…- 496…- 488…- 480…- 472…- 464…- 456…- 448…- 440…- 432…- 424…- 416…- 408…- 400…- 392…505
497
489
481
473
465
457
449
441
433
425
417
409
401
393
385
64

63

62

32

61

60

31

DWord

204

9
5

8

Word

Byte

6

15

DWord

Byte

10

3

16

Word

Bit

11

256…- 248…- 240…- 232…- 224…- 216…- 208…- 200…- 192…- 184…- 176…- 168…- 160…- 152…- 144…- 136…249
241
233
225
217
209
201
193
185
177
169
161
153
145
137
129

DWord

Byte

12

4

Word

Bit

13
7

DWord

Bit

14

8…1

59
30

79

57

56

29

16

80

58

55
28

77

76

75

53

52

27

15

78

54

51
26

73

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

72

71

49
25

14

74

50

13

70

69

68

67

66

65

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Word

40

39

DWord

Byte

96

95

Word

111

127

109

108

125

142

107

124

141

140

158

156

79

175
88

172

121

138

120

101

100

41

99

117

116

115
58

133

132

67

131

85

43

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

168

150

66

149

148

75

167

65

147

146

74

165
83

42

129

145
73

37

166

84

130

33

76

169

113
57

38

170

114

29

134

151

97
49

34

152

98

50

59

68

153

81

25

118

135

82

42

51

119

136

77

86

102

60

137

154

171

83

30

78

173
87

44

103

39

174

84

21

52

69

40

176

104

61

155

85

26

70

157

86
43

35

80

DWord

105

122

139

17

44

53

36

Word

106

123

33

22

62

71

159

87

31

72

160

88

27

126

143

89
45

32

144

90

54

63

DWord

DWord

110

64

Word

Word

91

34

18

46

55

DWord

Byte

92

28

128

35

23

56

Word

Byte

93
47

DWord

Byte

94

24

112

36

19

48

DWord

Byte

37

20

Word

Byte

38

164

163

162

82

161
81

41

205

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Byte

192

Word

191
96

208

207

224

203

221

220

238

237

236

254

253

252

Word

136

269

268

287
144

233

232

143

284

249

142

214

231

248

98

213

230

212

211

265

264

229

228

227

245

244

123

141

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

280

113

243

140

242

122

262

261

260

131

279

225

241
121

61

132

281

226

114

259

258

130

257
129

66

282

209

57

246

263

210
105

62

266

193
97

106

115

247

194

53

124

133

283

195

49

116

125

134

285

196

107

67

286

197
99

215

177
89

58

250

267

198

108

117

68

288

216

178

90

54

126

135

DWord

199

63

270

179

45

100

217

234

251

180

50

118

127

271

200

109

64

272

201

218

235

181
91

59

128

DWord

92

101

110

119

255

202

219

182

46

102

60

256

183

55

120

Word

206

204

111

DWord

Word

222

239

184

93

56

240

185

51

112

Word

Byte

205
103

DWord

Byte

206

223

186

94

52

Word

Byte

187

47

104

DWord

Byte

188

48

Word

Byte

189
95

DWord

Byte

190

65

278

277
139

276

275
138

274

273
137

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

DWord

Byte

72

304

Word

303

320

319

317

316

315

334

333

332

167

351

350

349

348

Word

366

364

183

Word

383

382

381

380

191

399

328

344

396

361

360

154

325

342

324

323

376

341

358

340

339

189

357

356

355

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

392

178

374

373

372

187

391

354

353
177

89

188

393

337
169

371

370

186

369
185

94

394

338

170

179

375

321

85

180

377

322
161

90

378

305
153

162

171

359

306

81

172

181

395

307

77

326

343

289
145

86

190

397

308

163

95

398

309
155

164

345

362

379

310

327

290

146

82

182

96

400

311

91

192

DWord

329

346

363

291

73

156

173

92

384

312

165

174

365

292

147

87

184

DWord

330

347

293

78

166

175

367

313
157

88

368

314

331

294

148

83

176

DWord

295

69

74

158

84

352

296

79

168

Word

Byte

318

335

297
149

80

336

298

150

159

DWord

Byte

299

70

75

160

Word

Byte

300

151

DWord

Byte

301

76

Word

Byte

302

152

DWord

Byte

71

93

390

389

388

387

386

385

207

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Word

200

199

DWord

Byte

416

415

Word

431

447

464

428

427

444

461

460

240

476

239

440

492

456

438

420

201

419

473

472

437

209

436

435

453

452

227

245

123

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

488

470

217

451

469

225

468

467

466

234

485
243

122

449

465
233

117

486

244

450

226

235

487

433

113

236

489

434

218

118

490

417

109

454

471

418

210

219

455

401

105

228

237

246

421
211

220

457

474

491

422

439

402

202

114

238

493
247

124

423

119

494

248

424

229

120

403

101

212

441

458

475

404

110

230

477

405

106

442

459

406
203

115

478

495

425

221

116

496

407

97

204

213

222

231

DWord

426

443

193

102

214

445

462

479

408

111

232

480

409

107

446

463

410
205

112

Word

208

429

223

DWord

DWord

430

224

Word

Word

411

194

98

206

215

DWord

Byte

412

108

448

195

103

216

Word

Byte

413
207

DWord

Byte

414

104

432

196

99

208

DWord

Byte

197

100

Word

Byte

198

484

483

482

242

481
241

121

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Byte
Word

512

511
256

DWord

Word

DWord

152

156

301

310

282

155

298

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

297

149

307

154

289

145

299

308

281

290

150

309

273

141

291

300

265

274

146

151

311

266

137

283

292

257

133

275

284

249

258

142

293

302

250

497

129

267

276

498

125

259

268

147

303

499

138

285

294

148

312

260

143

295

251

500

134

277

286

501

130

269

278

502

252

139

287

304

503

126

261

270

144

DWord

Word

262

140

296

253

504

135

279

288

505

131

271

280

506

254

136

DWord

Word

507

127

263

272

DWord

Word

508

132

DWord

Word

255

264

DWord

Word

509

128

DWord

Word

510

306

305

153

209

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Word

320

DWord

Word

328

Word

180

368

DWord

Word

184

376

DWord

Wor-

210

366

374

188

384

382

362

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

380

361

181

371

370

186

381

353

177

363

372

187

383

354

182

373

345

173

355

364

183

375

346

178

365

337

169

347

356

179

367

338

174

357

329

165

339

348

321

330

170

349

358

322

161

331

340

175

359

323

332

313

157

166

341

350

176

DWord

324

171

351

314

162

333

342

172

360

325

334

315

158

167

343

352

316

163

335

344

DWord

Word

326

168

DWord

Word

327

336

317

159

164

DWord

Word

318

160

DWord

Word

319

369

185

379

378

377

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

d
DWord

Word

192

392

DWord

Word

400

212

440

DWord

Word
DW-

431

430

438

220

448

224

446

418

427

436

426

435

223

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

444

434

433

217

443

222

425

213

218

445

417

209

214

437

409

205

419

428

219

447

410

210

429

401

101

411

420

215

439

402

206

421

393

197

403

412

211

216

DWord

Word

422

394

202

413

385

193

395

404

207

423

386

198

405

414

387

396

203

415

432

388

189

194

397

406

208

DWord

Word

398

204

424

389

199

407

416

190

195

399

408

DWord

Word

390

200

DWord

Word

391

196

DWord

Word

191

442

441

221

211

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

ord

Word

456

DWord

Word

464

Word

248

504

DWord

Word
DWord

212

502

252

512

256

510

490

499

255

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

508

498

497

249

507

254

489

245

250

509

481

241

491

500

251

511

482

246

501

473

237

483

492

247

503

474

242

493

465

233

475

484

457

466

238

485

494

458

229

467

476

243

495

459

468

449

225

234

477

486

244

DWord

460

239

487

450

230

469

478

240

496

461

470

451

226

235

479

488

452

231

471

480

DWord

Word

462

236

DWord

Word

463

472

453

227

232

DWord

Word

454

228

DWord

Word

455

506

505

253

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program

Retentive markers
You can declare a freely definable contiguous range between marker bytes as retentive.
DeviceMarker range that can be declared as retentive

easyE4MB01 - MB400

For information on how to configure markers so as to store data in a non-volatile manner, please refer to → Section "Retention function", page 578.

Internal marker ranges in function blocks
Function blocks with a main program that can contain subroutines need to provide theirown marker ranges for the program as well. These marker ranges cannot be accessed
externally. Following are the function blocks that have their own marker ranges:
UF, IC, IE, IT
function blockMarker range

UF

16 marker double words

IE
IC
IT

32 marker bits

Available operands for UF - user function block
IC - Counter-controlled interrupt function block Interaction between main program andinterrupt program
IE - Edge-controlled interrupt function block
IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block Interaction between main program andinterrupt program
See also
Cross-reference list - Finding operands in a programeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

213

5. Programming on the device
5.7 Using operands in a program214

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

215

6. Function blocks

6. Function blocks
Function blocks offer pre-defined solutions for frequently occurring programming
tasks. Whether a function block is available or not will depend on the programming language you select and the firmware version used in the project.
Manufacturer function blocks
Manufacturer function blocks are available in easySoft 7 and directly on the device
Timer modules
HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)→ page 218
HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)→ page 268
OT - Operating hours counter→ page 238
RC - Real-time clock→ page 242
T - Timing relay→ page 246
WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)→ page 268
YT - Year time switch (Year Table)→ page 261
AC - Astronomic clock→ page 272
Counter Function Blocks
C - Counter relay→ page 281
CF - Frequency counter→ page 287
CH - High-speed counter→ page 293
CI - Incremental Counter→ page 299
Arithmetic and analog function blocks
A - Analog value comparator→ page 306
AR - Arithmetic→ page 312
AV - Average→ page 317
CP – Comparator→ page 326
LS - Value scaling→ page 330
MM - Min-/Max function→ page 335
PM - Performance map→ page 339
PW - Pulse width modulation→ page 345
Open-loop and closed-loop function blocks
DC - PID controller→ page 351
FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter→ page 358
PO - Pulse output→ page 364
TC - Three step controller→ page 379
VC - Value limitation→ page 384
Data and register function blocks
BC - Block compare→ page 388
BT - Block transfer→ page 395

216

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks

DB - Data function blockMX - Data multiplexer
RE - Recipe records
SR - Shift register
TB - Table function
NET Function Blocks
GT - Get values from NET
PT - Put values to NET
SC - Synchronizing clock via NET
Other function blocks
AL - Alarm function block
BV - Boolean operation
D - Text display
D - Text display editor
DL - Data logger
JC - Conditional jump
MR - MasterReset
NC - Numerical converter
ST - Set cycle time

→ page 401→ page 406→ page 410→ page 415→ page 423→ page 428→ page 432→ page 436→ page 440→ page 444→ page 448→ page 458→ page 475→ page 486→ page 493→ page 497→ page 503

interrupt function blocks
Interrupt function blocks are available only in easySoft 7
IC - Counter-controlled interrupt
IE - Edge-controlled interrupt
IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block→ page 506→ page 519→ page 525

User function blocks – used to create custom function blocks
User function blocks are only available in easySoft 7
UF - User function blockeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com→ page 533

217

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1 Manufacturer function blocks
6.1.1 Timer modules
6.1.1.1 HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)
easyE4 devices feature a real-time clock with a date and time functionality.
When combined with the HW, HY or WT, YT function blocks, this real-time clock makes
it possible to implement the functionality of a weekly timer and year time switch.
→ Section "Time and Date setting", page 587
The AC manufacturer function block, Astronomic clock, can be used to program switching operations based on sunrise and sunset times. In order for this to work properly, thesettings for the device clock and the device location's time zone and geographic
coordinates must be correctly selected in this tab.
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 32 weekly timer HW01…HW32(Hour Week).
Each weekly timer provides 4 channels. These channels all act
jointly on the function block output Q1 of the weekly timer.

Operating principle
Each of the 32 weekly timer, HW01 through HW32, features four channels that caneach be configured with an ON event and an OFF event in the parameter configuration
for the block. All channels act jointly on function block output Q1.
The following abbreviations are used for the individual days of the week:
Monday = Mon, Tuesday = Tue, Wednesday = Wed, Thursday = Thur, Fri = Fri, Saturday= Sat, Sunday = Sun.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

218

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: if the on condition is fulfilled.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x

219

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description
Function block release by
EN is necessary

Channel A - D

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Edit interrupt routine

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.
A maximum of four channels can be Note: If the off time is earlier
configured (all four channels will act than the on time, the control
on output Q1).
relay will not switch off until the
There is an ON time and an OFF time following day.
for each channel. In addition, you canselect one or two days of the week
when these times will apply.
Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Clicking on this button will open theinterrupt routine

Simulation possible

220

Note

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter definition at the function block
If + Call enabled is selected for the function block under Function block diagram/Parameters/, it will be possible to change the switching times in the PARAMETER
menu on the device while in RUN / STOP mode.
The time to be entered must be between 00:00 and 23:59.
Table 71: Incomplete and automatic parameter definition at the function block

Day

Hour

Minute---DY1 e.g. Mo--

DY2 e.g. Fr--

ResultA switch point will not be set if you have not set
the weekday or the time.
Device display: -- --:-If you only set the weekday for the On time, theprogramming software will automatically set theHour and Minute values to 00. The contact
remains active, if the Off Time has not been set.
Device display example: Mo 00:00/-- --:-If you only set the weekday for the Off time, theprogramming software will automatically set the
Weekday for the On time to Sunday and Hour andMinute values to 00.
Device display: Su 00:00/Fr --:--

DYx = Weekday
It is therefore not possible to enter the time only. If you delete the weekday (DEL button)whilst making an entry or during operation or simulation, the time will be deleted automatically. Entering the time automatically causes Sunday to be entered as the default
weekday.
Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Behavior in the event of a power failure
The time is backed up and refreshed in the event of a power supply failure. In this case,the time switches no longer switch and the contacts are kept open, Q1=0.
Information on the battery back-up time are provided on → Section "Back-upof realtime clock", page 702
After being switched on, the control relay will always update its switchingstate based on all existing switching time settings and will switch Q1
accordingly.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

221

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 1: Daily on/off switching(channel A ON - FR 10:00; OFF - SU 18:00)
If the function block output Q1 is to switch on and off daily for a certain number of weekdays, use one channel.
For one channel define at DY1 the weekday and at ON the time for the initial on
switching.
Then in the same channel define at DY2 the weekday and at OFF the time for thelast off switching.
The time switch is required to switch from 10:00 to 18:00 from Fridays to Sundays.

Figure 112: Signal diagram

The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 113: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

222

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 2: Switching at specific times
The time switch is required to switch from Mondays to Fridays between 6:30 and 9:00
and between 17:00 and 22:30.

Figure 114: Signal diagram

The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 115: Tab with parameters in the Programming vieweasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

223

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 3: Switching on one day and off switching on another day
If the contact Q1 is to remain switched on for a certain number of weekdays, use twochannels.
For one channel define at DY1 the weekday and at ON the time for the initial on
switching. DY2 and OFF are left without any parameters for this first channel.
Then in the next channel define at DY1 the weekday and at OFF the time for theswitch-off. DY2 and ON are without any parameters for this second channel.
The time switch is required to switch on at 18:00 on Tuesdays and switch off at 6:00 on
Saturdays.

Figure 116: Signal diagram

The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 117: Tab with parameters in the Programming view224

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 4: Time overlap
The time settings of a time switch overlap. The clock switches on at 16:00 on Monday,
whereas on Tuesday and Wednesday it switches on at 10:00. The off time for Mondays
to Wednesdays is 22:00.

Figure 118: Signal diagram

The first on time at one of the four channels switches output
Q1 to 1. The first off time of a channel switches output Q1 to 0.
If the on time and off time are the same, the output Q1 isswitched off.
The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 119: Tab with parameters in the Programming view Settings Time overlap

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

225

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 5: 24 hours
The time switch is to switch for 24 hours. On time at 00:00 on Monday and off time at
00:00 on Tuesday.

Figure 120: Signal diagram

The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 121: Tab with parameters in the Programming view 24 hours setting

226

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 6: Overnight switching
The time switch is set for one day, e.g. Mondays, for an on time of ON=22:00 and an off
time of OFF=6:00.
The HW time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

Figure 122: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

See also→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

227

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.2 HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)easyE4 devices feature a real-time clock with a date and time functionality.
When combined with the HW, HY or WT, YT function blocks, this real-time clock makes
it possible to implement the functionality of a weekly timer and year time switch.
→ Section "Time and Date setting", page 587
The AC manufacturer function block, Astronomic clock, can be used to program switching operations based on sunrise and sunset times. In order for this to work properly, thesettings for the device clock and the device location's time zone and geographic
coordinates must be correctly selected in this tab.
If you have to implement special on and off switching functions on public holidays, vacations, company holidays, school holidays and special events, these can be implemented
easily with the year time switch.
The channels are set via the PARAMETER menu or via easySoft 7.
The year time switch can:Switch at recurring intervals by switching on and off for individual days, months, or
years.
l Switch for continuous periods of time by remaining continuously switched on fromthe start of any user-defined day until the end of any user-defined day, month, or
year.
l

The parameters for the switch-on and switch-off times for recurring intervals are configured in one single channel for each.
The parameters for the switch-on and switch-off times for a continuous
period of time are configured in two neighbouring channels. If you enter
the ON information on channel A, the OFF information must be entered onchannel B; likewise, if the ON information is on channel B, the OFF information must be on channel C.
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 32 year time switches
HY01…HY32 (Hour Year). Accordingly, 128 switching times areavailable.
Each time switch is provided with four channels A, B, C and D.
You can choose an on and off switching time for every channel.
These channels all act jointly on function block output Q1 of theyear time switch.

228

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operating principle
Each of the 32 year time switches, HY01 through HY32, features four channels that caneach be configured with an ON event and an OFF event in the parameter configuration
for the block. An ON time and an OFF time that are accurate to the day can be selected
for each channel. All channels act jointly on function block output Q1.
Behavior in the event of a power failure
The time and date are backed up in the event of a power supply failure and continue torun. This means that it will continue to run in the event of a power failure, although thetime switch relays will not switch. The contacts are kept open when de-energized.
Information on the battery back-up time are provided on → Section "Back-upof realtime clock", page 702.
Switching behavior with overlapping channel settings:
If the set ranges overlap, the year time switch activates the contact withthe first detected ON signal irrespective of which channel is supplying thisON. In the same way, the year time switch switches the contact off withthe first detected OFF, irrespective of whether another channel still supplies the ON signal.
Please note that the time switches can only be configured up to the year
2099.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

229

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

230

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
1: if the on condition is fulfilled.

Q1

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block
will be enabled and function block
input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Channel A - D

A maximum of four channels can be
configured (all four channels will act
on output Q1). There is an ON timeand an OFF time that are accurate to
the day for each channel.
Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter display+ Call enabledSimulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

231

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameterization
If you select the function block in the easySoft 7 Programming view by clicking on it, atable with the various parameters will appear under the tab.

Figure 123: Year time switch parameters tab with and example in which a year range is being selected

Setting time range parameters
If + Call enabled is selected for the function block under Function block diagram/Parameters/, it will be possible to change the switching times in the PARAMETER
menu on the device while in RUN / STOP mode.
Time ranges are defined by setting an ON and an OFF time.
The contact therefore always switches from ON to OFF, as shown in the following Parameter examples. → "Example 1: Select year range", page 234.
Please note:
The year time switch only operates correctly if you observe the following
rules:The On year must be before the Off year,l ON and OFF times, the same time parameters must be defined.
l

Examples of correct time parameter configurations:
ON = --/--/Year, OFF = --/--/Year,l ON = --/Month/Year, OFF = --/Month/Year,l ON = Day/Month/Year, OFF = Day/Month/Yearl

Setting time range parameters in which the on phase is from the beginning of theyear to the end of the year (whole year(s)):
Channel A
ON: -- -- 22, OFF: -- -- 30 means:
The year time switch should switch on at 00:00 on day 01.01.2022 and switch off when
the OFF year has elapsed at 00:00 on day 01.01.2031. The parameters are set in one
channel. Refer to the → "Example 1: Select year range", page 234 below for this time
range.

232

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Setting time range parameters in which the on phase is from the beginning of themonth to the end of the month (whole month(s)):
First channel ON: -- 04 --, OFF: -- 10 -- means:
This year time switch will switch on on April 01st at 00:00 and after the OFF monthelapses will switch off on November 01st at 00:00. The parameters are set in one channel. Compare this to → "Example 2: Select month ranges", page 234 for this time range
found below.
Setting time range parameters in which the on phase is from the beginning of the
day to the end of the day for each month in each year (whole day(s)):
First channel ON: 02 -- --, OFF: 25 -- -- means:
The year time switch should switch on at 00:00 h on day 2 of each month, and switch
off when the OFF day has elapsed at 00:00 h on day 26. The parameters are set in one
channel. Refer to the → "Example 3: Select day ranges", page 235 below for this time
range.
Setting time range parameters in which the on phase is from the beginning of the
day to the end of the day for specified months and years year (day, month, year):First channel ON: 02 04 25; OFF: 25 09 25 means:
The year time switch will switch on on 04/02/2015 at 00:00:01 and off on 09/26/2029 at
00:00:00. Outside of the configured time range, the time switch will remain off.
Setting overlapping time ranges:
Refer to the → "Example 7: Overlapping ranges", page 237 below for these time ranges.
In these cases, a time cannot be configured for switching, and switching will always
occur for the entire day, from 00:00 to 24:00. This is a set configuration that cannot be
modified at runtime.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

233

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Examples HY - Year time switch in easySoft 7
Example 1: Select year range
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 1 January 2020, 00:00 h, and remainswitched on until 1 January 2028, 00:00 h.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 124: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 2: Select month ranges
The year time switch HY01 should switch on at 1 March , 00:00 h, and remain switchedon until 1 November, 00:00 h.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 125: Entry screen in the programming software

234

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 3: Select day ranges
The year time switch HY01 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 1 of each month andswitch off at 00:00 on day 29 of each month.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 126: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 4: Select “public holidays"
The year time switch HY01 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 25.12 of each year
and switch off at 00:00 on day 28.12 of each year.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 127: Entry screen in the programming software

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

235

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 5: Select time range
The year time switch HY01 is required to switch on at 00:00 on day 01.05 of each year
and stay on continuously until 00:00 on 2.11 of each year.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 128: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 6: Specific days of specific months
The year time switch HY01 is required to switch on at 0:00 on day 9 of months 6, 7, 8, 9
and 10 of each year and switch off at 00:00 on day 17 of the month.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 129: Entry screen in the programming software

236

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example 7: Overlapping ranges
Channel A of the year time switch HY01 switches on at 00:00 on day 3 of months 5, 6, 7,
8, 9, 10 and stays on until 00:00 on day 27 of the same months.
Channel B of the year time switch HY01 switches on at 00:00 on day 2 of months 6, 7, 8,
9, 10, 12 11 and stays on until 00:00 on day 19 of the same month.
The HY year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/HY01/Year time switch parameters tab

Figure 130: Entry screen in the programming software

Resulting behavior of contact HY01 Q1: The time switch comes on at 00:00 on day 3 andgoes off at 00:00 on day 27. The time switch comes on at 00:00 on day 2 of the months
June to December, and goes off at 00:00 on day 19 of the same months.
See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

237

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.3 OT - Operating hours counter
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 4 operating hours counter function blocks, OT01 through OT04. These function blocks output
minutes and seconds in addition to hours. A comparison with areference value that can be entered makes it possible, forinstance, to signal when maintenance work is due.
The counter states are retained even when the device isswitched off.

Operating principle
The operating hours counter will run as long as input EN has a state of 1. The operating
hours counter's seconds will be output at SC, the minutes at MN, and the hours at QV.
The second and minute values will run from 0 to 59, and the hour values will run from 0
to 596,523 h.
The operating hours counter features a comparison function. The corresponding reference value needs to be connected to I1. With every call, the value of the operating
hours counter will be compared with the value at I1. The operating hours counter features a direction input, D_.
If the operating hours exceed the reference value at I1 when counting up, function block
output Q1 will switch to 1 as long as the number of operating hours is greater than orequal to the reference value.
If, on the other hand, the operating hours fall below the reference value at I1 whencounting down, function block output Q1 will switch to 1 until the number of operating
hours is greater than the reference value.
The operating hours counter can be preset to any value you want. This value needs tobe connected to SV and applied with a wising edge at SE.
The operating hours at QV will not be reset to zero unless reset input RE is activated.
An operating mode change between STOP/RUN, supply
voltage ON/OFF, deleting the program, editing the program,loading a new program: None of these actions will clear theoperating hours counter's actual value.
However, operating hours will not be added if the program is
not running.
The actual value can only be cleared by using the reset input.

238

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
RE
D_

SE

1: Activates the function block.
Reset
1: Resets the actual counter value back to zero.
Count direction
Integer value range:
1: down counting
0…596 523
0: up counting
When there is a rising edge at SE, the value at
SV is applied as the operating hours value andappears at QV(DWord)I1

SV

The value at I1 is the reference value. If this reference value is greater than the operating hours
value, output Q1 will be set.
When there is a rising edge at SE, the value at
SV is applied as the operating hours value

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

239

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

ZE

1: If the operating hours counter reaches orfalls below the reference value at I1 whencounting down or reaches and exceeds it whencounting up
Zero
1: If operating hours counter = 0(DWord)QV

Actual operating hours counter value
Displayed in hours

Integer
Value range: 0…596 523

MNSC

MinutesSeconds

Value range: 0…59
Value range: 0…59

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)x
x

NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FBxx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Outputxx

bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x

LE - Output backlightxx
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

240

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set
Configuration/time range

Description

Note

Function block release by EN
is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, thestate of function block input EN
will be evaluated. If the checkbox
is disabled instead, the function
block will be enabled and function
block input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carried over will be retained. The
parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

241

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.4 RC - Real-time clock
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide exactly one real-time clock
RC01.
This function block can be used to read the date and time valueof the device's real-time clock. This value is output in sevenindividual parameters than can each be processed further individually. This makes it very easy to select recurring eventswith a downstream comparator function block.

Operating principle
If the function block is enabled, the date and time value from the device's real-timeclock will be output at the function block outputs: YY (year), MM (month), DD (day), WD(day of the week), HR (hours), MN (minutes), SC (seconds).
Function block output DT signals whether the clock has been switched to daylight saving time.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs

242

Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
DT
E1

0: The output value is standard time
1: The output value is daylight saving time
Error
0: Error-free operation
1: The value is invalid, since it is before thedevice's initial date

(DWord)
YY
MM
DD
WD

Date: year
Date: month
Date: dayWeekdayHR
MN
SC

Time: hour
Time: minute
Time: second

Range of 00 to 99
Range of 00 to 12
Range of 00 to 31
0= Su; 1=Mo, 2=Tu, 3=We, 4=Th, 5=Fr,
6=Sa
Range of 00 to 23
Range of 00 to 59
Range of 00 to 59

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

243

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Function block release by EN is necessary
Parameter set

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.

244

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

245

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.5 T - Timing relay
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 timing relays (timer)
T01…T32.
You can use a time relay to delay the switching duration andthe ON and OFF times of a switch contact. The times can be
set from a range of 5 ms to 99 h 59 min.
As reference values, you can use positive values,
e.g., from analog inputs or actual values from counter and timing relays.
Minimum time setting: 0.005 s (5 ms).
Operating principle
Each one of the 32 timing relays is a multifunction relay with various operating modes.
This operating mode is selected during configuration and cannot be changed at runtime.
In addition, the time range can be configured as well. Seconds, minutes, and hours areavailable.
The operands with the time reference values are connected to inputs I1, I2 and theswitching state and the actual value of the running timing relay are signaled at the outputs.
The timing relay is started via the trigger coil T…EN and can be selectively reset via thereset coil T…RE. The third coil T..ST terminates the run down of the actual time.
The EN input is used to start and stop the timing relay.
Enabling the function block by disabling the Function block
release by Enable is necessary option is not possible in this
case.

246

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

RE

ST

1: Activates the function block.
Enable, the timing relay is started (Trigger coil)
When a rising edge is detected, the timing
relay (trigger) will be started at the same time.
EN must be set to 1 without interruption until
the time you want has elapsed.
The only operating mode in which detecting arising edge is enough is the Single pulse
mode. In this case, the function block will be
activated for one cycle and started for this
mode.
Reset
1: Resets the timing relay to a value of zero(reset coil)
Stop coil
1: stops the timing relay.
The started time will cease to time out whilst
the ST is set to 1.
The stopped time will continue to time out if
the signal is reset to 0.
If ST has a state of 1 when there is a risingedge at trigger coil EN, the assumption of thetime reference value will be delayed while ST=1.

(DWord)I1
I2

Time setpoint 1
Time reference value 2 for an operating modewith two reference values, e.g., flashing. This
input will be ignored in the case of operating
modes with only one single reference value.

Integer value range:
S: 1…999995 ms, resolution 5 ms
M:S: 1… 5999 s, resolution 10 ms
H:M: 1… 5999 min, resolution 1 Min.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog inputx

QA - Analog output

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x

247

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Interpretation of variable operands for the time reference values at inputs I1 and I2
Variable time values
If you associate the function block inputs T ..I1 and T ..I2 with operands, you can use
variable setpoints. The setpoints are transferred as follows, depending on the time
range selected:
S, value in milliseconds. The last digit is rounded up or down to 0 or 5, maximum
value = 999995 ms.
l M:S, value in seconds, maximum value = 5999 s.
l H:M, value in minutes, maximum value = 5999 min.
l

Examples of time range S:
Operand value 9504 -> time value is 9.500 s.
l Operand value 45507 -> 45.510 s.
lExamples of time range M:S:l

Operand value 5999 -> Time value is 99 min, 59 s.

Example of time range H:M:lOperand value 5999 -> Time value is 99 h, 59 min.

Operating modeThis parameter defines the switch function of the timing relay.

248

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

DeviceOperating mode easySoft 7
parametersX?XâOn-delayed
On-delayed with random time
Off-delayed?

Off-delayed with random timeX

On/off delayed

â
â

?X

On/off-delayed with random timeüSingle pulse

ÜFlashing
Time values:
S1=Pulse time,
S2= Pause time;#

There are two time setpoints to be configured.
With random time, 2 time setpoints
Normalizes input signals of different pulse
lengths to a fixed pulse length at the switch
contact of the timing relay.
Time values
Two time reference values need to be configured.
I1=Pulse time,
I2= Pause time;
Synchronous flashing: I1 = I2
Mark-to-space ratio = 1:1#

Off-delayed with retriggering?

Off-delayed with retriggering and random
time

#

Note

Function block outputs
Description

Asynchronous flashing: I1 ≠ I2
Mark-to-space ratio ≠ 1:1
Retriggerable reference value
Retriggerable reference value

Note

(Bit)
Q1
(DWord)Switching contact

QV

Elapsed actual time in RUN mode

Parameter set
Configuration/time range
S

M:S

H:M

Integer value range:
0 to max. 99990 in time range: seconds;
milliseconds; hours
depending on configured time range.

Description

Note

Seconds:Milliseconds
Configurable as a constant:
00.005 to 999.995 (s.ms)
Minutes:Seconds
Configurable as a constant:
00:01 to 99:59 (min:s)
Hours:Minutes

Resolution: 5 ms

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Resolution: 1 s

Resolution: 1 min249

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Configuration/time range

Description

Note

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Configurable as a constant:
00:01 to 99:59 (h:min)Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Note on the minimum time setting:If a time value is less than the program cycle time, the elapsed
time will not be recognized until the next cycle. This may cause
unforeseeable switching states.
Analog value and timing relay setpoint
If you wish to use variable values as a timing relay setpoint, such as an analog input,
the following conversion rules apply, depending on the time base configured.
S time baseEquation: Time setpoint = ( Variable value/10) in [ms]Variable Value

Time setpointin [s]

Time setpoint
in [mm:ss]

Time setpoint
in [hh:mm]

000:000
00:10800:30800.507
04:099

00:00
01:04
05:00
08:02
68:15

00:00
01:04
05:00
10:06
68:15

(Minimum)

100
300
500
4095 (Maximum)

M:S time baseRule: Time setpoint = Variable value/60
Integer=Number of minutes,

Residual=

Number of seconds

Time base H:M
Rule: Time setpoint = Variable value/60
Integer=Number of hours,

Residual=

Number of minutes,

You can only use analog values as setpoints if the value of theanalog input is stable. Fluctuating analog values impair a reproducible timing response.

250

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Signal Diagrams
The fact that the function block features various operating modes means that it canwork in more than one way as shown below.
How the timing relay works with the on-delayed operating mode with and without
random times
Random switching
The contact of the timing relays switches randomly within the SETPOINT value range.

Figure 131: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed (with and without random switching)
1: Trigger coil T..EN
2: Stop coil T..ST
3: Reset coil T..RE
4: Switching contact (N/O contact) T…Q1
ts: Setpoint time
Range A: The time runs down from the SET time value.
Range B: The time does not elapse because the trigger coil drops out prematurely.
Range C: The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

251

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 132: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed (with and without random switching)
Range D: The Stop coil is inoperative after the time has elapsed.
Range E: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact.
Range F: After the reset coil is activated, the switching contact is switched off and the internal
time counter is reset. The function relay waits for a new trigger pulse.

252

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

How the timing relay works with the off-delayed operating mode with and without
random times
Random switching, with and without retriggering
The contact of the timing relays switches randomly within the SETPOINT value range.
Retriggering
When the time is running and the trigger coil is reactivated or deactivated, the ACTUAL
value is reset to zero. The SET time of the timing relay is timed out once more.

Figure 133: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed(with/without random switching, with/without retriggering)
1: Trigger coil T..EN
2: Stop coil T..ST
3: Reset coil T..RE
4: Switching contact (N/O contact) T…Q1
ts: Reference time
Range A: The time elapses after the trigger coil is deactivated.
Range B: The Stop coil stops the time from elapsing.
Range C: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact.
After the reset coil drops out, the relay continues to work normally.
Range D: The Reset coil resets the relay and the contact when the function block is timing out.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

253

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 134: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed(with/without random switching, with/without retriggering)
Range E: The trigger coil drops out twice.
The SET time ts consists of t1 plus t2 (switch function not retriggerable).
Range F: The trigger coil drops out twice. The ACTUAL time t1 is cleared and the SET time ts elapses
completely (retriggerable switch function).

254

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

How the timing relay works with the on/off-delayed operating mode with andwithout random times
Time value I1: on-delay time
Time value I2: Off-delay time
Random switching
The contact of the timing relay switches randomly within the SETPOINT value range.

Figure 135: Operational diagrams timing relay, on and off delayed 1
1: Trigger coil T..EN
2: Stop coil T..ST
3: Reset coil T..RE
4: Switching contact (N/O contact) T…Q1
ts1: Pick-up time
ts2: Drop-out time
Range A: The relay processes the two times without any interruption.
Range B: The trigger coil drops out before the on-delay is reached.
Range C: The stop coil stops the timeout of the on-delay.
Range D: The stop coil has no effect in this range.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

255

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

How the timing relay works with the single pulse operating mode with and without
random times

Figure 136: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 1
1: Trigger coil T..EN
2: Stop coil T..ST
3: Reset coil T..RE
4: Switching contact (N/O contact) T…Q1
Range A: The trigger signal is short and is lengthened.
Range B: The trigger signal is longer than the SET time.
Range C: The stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.

256

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 137: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 2• Range D: The reset coil resets the timing relay.
• Range E: The reset coil resets the timing relay. The trigger coil is still energized after the reset coil is
disconnected, whilst the delay time runs down..

How the timing relay works with the flashing operating mode, synchronous andasynchronous

Figure 138: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 1
1: Trigger coil T..EN
2: Stop coil T..ST

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

257

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

3: Reset coil T..RE
4: Switching contact (N/O contact) T…Q1
Range A: The relay flashes for as long as the trigger coil is activated.
Range B: The stop coil interrupts the timing out of the set time.
Range C: The reset coil resets the relay.

258

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
Selected timing relays can be run with retentive actual values. If a timing relay is retentive, the actual value is retained when the operating mode is changed from RUN to STOP
and when the power supply is switched off.
When the control relay is restarted in RUN mode, the timing relay continues with theretentively stored actual value.
In the Project view, go to the System settings tab and select the timing relays, out of T1
through T32, that should be run with retentive values. A retentive actual value requires
4 bytes of memory.
Operand

Description

Constant
C0.. to 99:59 (time range: "M : S"/"H : M") or 0 - 99.99 (time range: "S")Output of a counter relay (e.g. C3QV).
If the actual counter value is greater than the maximum permissible setpointof the configured time range, the setpoint will be limited to this maximum
value.
Example: Say you have configured the time range M: S and the actual countervalue is 31333. The device will limit the setpoint to 5999 min.
Note the relationship described below between the permissible analog value
and the timing relay setpoint.
Output of a timing relay (e.g. T4QV).

IA
T

Example of a timing relay when using the EDP programming language
I 10-----------------------------Ä T 02EN
M 42-----------------------------Ä T 02RE
M 43-----------------------------Ä T 02ST

Figure 139: Wiring the function block coils

The trigger coil of the function block is connected here directly to the device inputs.
. A marker activates the reset coil, while another marker activates thestop coil.
T 02Q1---------------------------Ä Q 01

Figure 140: Wiring of the function block contact

The signal from the function block will go directly to the device output.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

259

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261

260

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.6 YT - Year time switch (Year Table)
easyE4 devices feature a real-time clock with a date and time functionality.
When combined with the HW, HY or WT, YT function blocks, this real-time clock makes
it possible to implement the functionality of a weekly timer and year time switch.
→ Section "Time and Date setting", page 587
The AC manufacturer function block, Astronomic clock, can be used to program switching operations based on sunrise and sunset times. In order for this to work properly, thesettings for the device clock and the device location's time zone and geographic
coordinates must be correctly selected in this tab.
GeneralThis function block is an enhanced version of the existing HY year time switch function block.
easyE4 base devices provide 32 year time switches (new),
YT01 through YT32 (Year Table).
Year time switches can be used to easily configure unique orrecurring switching events.
The following operating modes are available within this context:lFixed datelFixed date for every yearl

Weekday rulelEaster rule

Variable holidays other than Easter cannot be selected.
Operating principle
Each of the 32 year time switches, YT01 through YT32, features eight channels that caneach be configured with an ON event and an OFF event in the parameters for the function block. All channels act jointly on function block output Q1.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

261

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

262

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: if the on condition is fulfilled.

Can be used to directly connect an output
that implements the configured switching
times

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block
will be enabled and function block
input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Channel A - D

A maximum of four channels can be
configured (all four channels will act
on output Q1). There is an ON timeand an OFF time that are accurate to
the day for each channel.
Constants can be edited on the

Parameter display+ Call enabledeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

263

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set

DescriptionNotedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Simulation possible

Parameterization
If you select the function block in the easySoft 7 Programming view by clicking on it, atable with the various parameters will appear under the tab.

Figure 141: Year time switch (new) parameters tab for YT function block with example showing all fourmodes

If + Call enabled is selected for the function block under Function block diagram/Parameters/, it will be possible to change the switching times in the PARAMETER
menu on the device while in RUN / STOP mode.
One of the following operating modes can be selected for each of the channels, A
through H:
Fixed dateWill switch one; the ON and OFF times and specified with a number of yearsl Fixed date for every year
ON and OFF times with specified day and month but no year
l Weekday rule
A cyclical switching operation that is carried out on a defined day of the week during a defined month. For example: the "first Sunday of January"l Easter rule
You can select an ON time and an OFF time that repeat annually and are relative toEaster. Easter does not have a fixed date, and is instead based on the lunar calendar. The selectable reference points for the ON and OFF times are Good Friday,
Easter Sunday, Easter Monday, and day(s) before/after Easter Sunday.
Reference points other than Easter cannot be selected.
l

In these cases, a time cannot be configured for switching, and switching will always
occur for the entire day, from 00:00 to 24:00. This is a set configuration that cannot be
modified at runtime.
This example uses all four available modes.
264

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Examples YT - Year time switch in easySoft 7
Example 1: Select year range
Year time switch YT01 should switch on on January 1st, 2020, at 00:00, and remainswitched on until January 1st, 2028, 00:00.
The YT year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/YT01/Year time switch (new) parameters tab

Figure 142: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 2: Select month ranges
Year time switch YT01 should switch on on March 1st, at 00:00, and remain switchedon until November 1st, at 00:00.
The YT year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/YT01/Year time switch (new) parameters tab

Figure 143: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 3: Select “public holidays"
Year time switch YT01 should switch on on 12/05 of every year at 00:00 and remainswitched on until 12/28 of every year at 00:00.
The YT year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

265

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Programming view/YT01/Year time switch (new) parameters tab

Figure 144: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 4: Select time range
Year time switch YT01 should switch on on 05/01 of every year at 00:00 and remainswitched on until 11/02 of every year at 00:00.
The YT year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/YT01/Year time switch (new) parameters tab

Figure 145: Entry screen in the programming software

Example 5: Specific days of specific months
Year time switch YT01 should switch on on the 9th of months 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 every
year at 00:00 and switch off on the 17th at 00:00.
The YT year time switch must be assigned the following parameters:
Programming view/YT01/Year time switch (new) parameters tab

Figure 146: Entry screen in the programming software

266

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

267

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.7 WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)
easyE4 devices feature a real-time clock with a date and time functionality.
When combined with the HW, HY or WT, YT function blocks, this real-time clock makes
it possible to implement the functionality of a weekly timer and year time switch.
→ Section "Time and Date setting", page 587
The AC manufacturer function block, Astronomic clock, can be used to program switching operations based on sunrise and sunset times. In order for this to work properly, thesettings for the device clock and the device location's time zone and geographic
coordinates must be correctly selected in this tab.
GeneralThis function block is an enhanced version of the existing HW 7-day time switch function block.
easyE4 Base devices provide 32 weekly timers, WT01 through
WT32. WT weekly timers can be used to easily configure recurring switching events. The function block was specificallydesigned for implementing switching events that occur at set
weekly cycles.
It can also take into account different procedures for businessdays and weekends.
Operating principle
Each of the 32 weekly timers, WT01 through WT032, can be configured with eightswitching events that will be executed at the same time and on any specified day of theweek. The corresponding settings are accurate to the minute and cannot be modified atruntime, i.e., they must be viewed as a set configuration.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.

268

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: if the on condition is fulfilled.

Can be used to directly connect an output
that implements the configured switching
times

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x
x

269

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block
will be enabled and function block
input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Channel A - D

A maximum of eight channels canbe configured (all eight channels
will act on output Q1). There is an
ON time and an OFF time that are
accurate to the day for each channel.
Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter display+ Call enabledSimulation possible

Parameterization
If you select the function block in the easySoft 7 Programming view by clicking on it, atable with the various parameters will appear under the tab.

Figure 147: Weekly timer (new) parameters tab with an example

If + Call enabled is selected for the function block under Function block diagram/Parameters/, it will be possible to change the switching times in the PARAMETER
menu on the device while in RUN / STOP mode.

270

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Channels A through H are available for an ON or OFF switching operation. The time to
be entered must be between 00:00 and 23:59.
In the example, the ON time on business days is 12:00, and the OFF time is 18:00. A
channel is required for each switching action. Channel A switches on every day of theweek at 17:30, while channel B switches off at 20:00.
See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

271

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.1.8 AC - Astronomic clock
Only available on easySoft Version 7.10 or higher.
If this function block is not being shown in the leftmost pane in easySoft 7, make surethat you are using firmware version 1.10 or higher for the project.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 astronomic clock function
blocks, AC01 through AC32. Output Q1 in these function blocks
is switched on during the time between sunrise and sunset.

Operating principle
The astronomic clock function block calculates both sunrise and sunset times based on
the geographical position of the device's location and the current device time (bothneed to be entered in order for the function block to work correctly). The device location
can be set in the Project view/Clock tab, while the device time can be checked andchanged directly on the device or in the Communication view/Clock section.
The astronomic clock function block is meant for use in latitudes of -65 to +65. Please
note that the sunrise and sunset time calculations will be too inaccurate outside of thisrange ( at a latitude of 60, the times will be inaccurate by up to 5 minutes; at a latitude of
65.7, the times will be inaccurate by about 12 minutes).
A time offset for the sunrise time and the sunset time can be set at function block inputs
O1 and O2 respectively. This means that the time when Q1 will be switched can be
moved up or delayed in order to, for example, account for a heating system's lag andpost-run times.
If a daylight saving time has been set up in the Project view/Clock tab, this setting will
also be taken into account when switching function block output Q1.
The function block inputs' and function block outputs' resolution is in minutes.
Time zone data changed at runtime will immediately affect the function block's behavior
accordingly.
The device location and device time must be correctly specified.

272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)O1
O2

Offset for calculating the sunrise time, in
minutes
Offset for calculating the sunset time, in
minutes

Integer value range:-720…+720

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers

x

RN - Input bit via NET2)xx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

273

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1
E1

1: During the time between sunrise and sunset
Error
1: If the device location's latitude exceeds thevalue range – please refer to Project view/Clock tab

Integer value range starting from theprime meridian:Longitude-180…+180 (W…O)

or if O1, O2 exceeds the value range.
Latitude-89.899…+89.899 (S…N)(-89°54'…+89°54')(DWord)
T1

T2

T1

T1

Hours in the switch-on time calculated on thebasis of the calculated sunrise and the value at
O1
Minutes in the switch-on time calculated on
the basis of the calculated sunrise and thevalue at O1
Hours in the switch-off time calculated on thebasis of the calculated sunset and the value at
O2
Minutes in the switch-off time calculated on
the basis of the calculated sunset and thevalue at O2

Integer value range:
0…23
Integer value range:
0…59
Integer value range:
0…23
Integer value range:
0…59

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB

x
x
x
x

2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)xx
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

274

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

275

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Examples showing how the AC function block will work in different regions of theworld
The gray area in the diagrams shows the time of day when Q1 will have a value of 1.
Accordingly, the examples show how longitude and latitude affect function block output
Q1.
There is no offset in the following examples, i.e., O1=0, O2=0;
Bonn in Germany
The following is the geodata for the Bonn location in Germany:
Latitude: 50.7344111
l Longitude: 7.0854634
lFigure 148: Sunrise and sunset in Bonn

Drevja in Norway
The following is the geodata for the Drevja location in Norway:
Latidude: 65.9780775
l Longitude: 13.2348074l

The sun does not set during the summer months (day 165 to 180).

276

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 149: Sunrise and sunset in Drevja

Douala in Cameroon
The following is the geodata for the Douala location in Cameroon:
Latidude: 4.0047314
l Longitude: 9.7329299
l

The sunrise and sunset times remain the same throughout the whole year with little
variation.

Figure 150: Offset; O1=-2; O2=2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise and off 2 hours after sunset

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

277

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Examples showing how the AC function block will behave with various offset values in O1 and O2
The gray area in the diagrams shows the time of day when Q1 will have a value of 1.
These examples are meant to show how the O1 and O2 offsets affect function block output Q1.
The same geodata applies to all the examples below:
Latitude: 50.7344111
l Longitude: 7.0854634
lFigure 151: No offset; O1=0; O2=0; Q1=1 between sunrise and sunset

Figure 152: Offset; O1=1; O2= -1; Q1 will switch on 1 hour after sunrise and off 1 hour before sunset

Figure 153: Offset; O1=-2; O2=2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise and off 2 hours after sunset

278

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 154: Offset; O1=-2; O2=-2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise and off 2 hours before sunset

Overlap between switch-on and switch-off times
The following geodata applies to the examples below:
Latidude: 60l Longitude: 0l Offset O1 = -4
l Offset O2 = 4lDuring the summer months, the switch-on time will overlap with the switch-off time.
This will cause function block output Q1=1 to always remain on during these months.

Figure 155: Q1 does not switch off during the summer months

Switch-off time before switch-on time
The following geodata applies to the examples below:
Latidude: 60l Longitude: 0l Offset O1 = 5
l Offset O2 = -7l

In the winter months, the switch-off time is before the switch-on time. This will cause
function block output Q1=0 to always remain off during these months.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

279

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 156: Q1 does not switch on during the winter months

See also→ Section "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ Section "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ Section "OT - Operating hours counter ", page 238→ Section "RC - Real-time clock", page 242→ Section "T - Timing relay", page 246→ Section "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268

280

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.2 Counter Function Blocks
6.1.2.1 C - Counter relay
This counter relay function block counts pulses that are received at counter input C_.
The count direction can be set.
Counting is carried out cyclically. The time of a pulse must therefore be
greater than twice the cycle time.
For shorter pulses, use the CH - High-speed counter function block →page 293.
You can set a lower and higher limit setpoint as comparison values for the counter relay
function block, as well as a start value.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 counter relays, C01 throughC32. Each counter relay can count up and down and functions
as a double word counter.

Operating principle
The contacts will switch according to the actual value. The appropriate function block
outputs switch according to the actual value determined. You can set a starting value
using input SV.
The counter relays C01…C32 are cycle time dependent.
The following applies to the EDP programming language:
The time for a single count pulse must be longer than twice thecycle time. For shorter pulses, use the CH high-speed counterfunction block.
NOTICE
Avoid unforeseeable switching states.
Switch C, CF, CH, CI function blocks only at one single point in the program.
Otherwise, previous counts will be overwritten.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

281

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

C_
D_

SE
RE

Counter input, counts with every rising edge
Count direction
0: up counting
1: down counting
The starting value at SV is applied whenever
there is a rising edge at this input
Reset
1: QV=0

Reset the counter to zero

(DWord)SH
SL
SV

Upper Threshold Value
Lower threshold value
Start value (Pre Set)

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
When there is a rising edge at SE, thisvalue will be applied as the countervalue.
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)

282

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.comxxx

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
OF

Overflow
1: if QV ≥ SH

FB

Fall below
1: if QV ≤ SL

CY

Carry
1: if QV > value range

ZE

Zero
1: if QV = 0

OF=1, if the actual value QV is greaterthan or equal to the upper thresholdvalue;
FB=1, if the actual value QV is less thanor equal to the lower threshold value;
If the value range is exceeded, the switch
contact switches to status 1 for one cycle
per rising edge detected. The function
block retains the value of the last valid
operation before the contact CY is set.

(DWord)QVCurrent counter value in RUN mode

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

283

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible284

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Signal diagrams.........

1.........

2
3

4

5

6

7

8

9
10
. . . . . . .

11
A

B

C

D

E

F

Figure 157: Signal diagram of counter relay
Legend for Figure
1: Counter input C..C_
2: Upper threshold value SH
3: Start value SV
4: Lower threshold value SL.
5: Counting direction, coil C..D
6: Transfer start value, coil C..SE.
7: Reset coil C..RE
8: Contact (N/O) C..OF: Upper limit threshold reached or exceeded.
9: Contact (N/O) C..FB: Lower threshold value reached or undershot.
10: C..ZE = 1, if actual value is zero
11: C..CY = 1, if the value is out of range.
• Range A:– The counter range has the value zero.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

285

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks– The contacts C..ZE (actual value equal to zero) and C..FB (lower threshold value undershot) are active.
– The counter receives pulses and increases the actual value.
– C..ZE drops out as well as C..FB after the lower threshold value is reached.
• Range B:– The counter relay counts upwards and reaches the upper threshold value.
The “upper setpoint value reached” contact C..OF becomes active.
• Range C:
The coil C..SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the start value.
The contacts go to the respective position.
• Range D:– The counting direction coil C..D_ is actuated. If counting pulses are present, downward counting is
initiated.
If the lower threshold value is undershot, the contact C..FB becomes active.
• Range E:– The reset coil C..RE is activated. The actual value will be set to zero.
– The contact C..ZE is active.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter relay.
– The contacts OF, FB, ZE become active according to the direction of the values (positive or negative).

Retention
Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values. You can select the numberof retentive counter relays in Project view/System settings tab, please refer to → Page
1 System Settings tab. The retentive ACTUAL value will require 4 bytes of memory
space. If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value will be retained when the operating mode switches from RUN to STOP and when the power supply is switched off. If
the device is started in RUN mode, the counter relay will continue to work with the nonvolatile actual value.
See also→ Section "CF - Frequency counter", page 287→ Section "CH - High-speed counter", page 293→ Section "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299→ Section "Timing and counter relay example", page 557

286

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.2.2 CF - Frequency counter
CF function blocks can be used to carry out frequency measurements that are independent of the cycle time.
There are four frequency counters available. The digital inputs I1 to I4 are permanently
assigned to the frequency counter function blocks provided:
I1: Counter input for counter CF01.
l I2: Counter input for counter CF02.
l I3: Counter input for counter CF03.
l I4: Counter input for counter CF04.
l

You can set a lower and higher limit setpoint comparison values for the frequency
counter function block.
Square wave count pulses are required to ensure a 1:1 mark to spaceratio.
The function block operates in the integer range from 4 to 5000 (1 kHz = 1000).
The value range cannot be exceeded as the maximum measured value is less than thevalue range.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 4 frequency counters
CF01…CF04. These high-speed frequency counters are internally connected with the digital inputs I01…I04 and operate independently of the cycle time. The contacts will switch according
to the actual value.

Operating principle
For the entire configured measuring interval, the pulses at the input are counted independently of the cycle time and are then used to determine the frequency. The numberof pulses counted within the measuring interval is then provided as a value at function
block output QV. Finally, as a result, output QF delivers a value equal to ten times the frequency so that the measurement can be accurate to the decimal place despite the factthat the value range is of type integer.
This means that the frequency is the value at QF multiplied by 0.1.
F= QF*0.1
The CF01…CF04 frequency counters are not dependent on the cycle time.
The minimum counter frequency is 4 Hz.
The maximum counter frequency is 5 kHz.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

287

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Only square wave signals are permissible.
The mark-to-space ratio is 1:1.
The counter wiring must observe the following digital input assignment:
I01 counter input for frequency counter CF01
l I02 counter input for counter CF02
l I03 counter input for counter CF03
l I04 counter input for counter CF04l

NOTICE
Avoid unforeseeable switching states.
Switch C, CF, CH, CI function blocks only at one single point in the program.
Otherwise, previous counts will be overwritten.

288

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled(DWord)SH

Upper Threshold Value

SL

Lower threshold value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB

x
x
x
x
x
x

2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

289

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
OF
FB
ZE

Overflow
1: if QV ≥ SH
Fall Below
1: if QV ≤ SLZero
1: if QV = 0(DWord)QV

QV outputs the number of pulses detected per
measuring interval

The function block operates in the integer
value range from 0…50 000.

QF

QF outputs the measured frequency*10.

The function block operates in the integer
value range from 4…50 000.
The following formula applies: 10 000 = 1
kHz.
The measurable frequency range is
0.4…5000 Hz.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x

LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Example with CF01 with 50 Hz at the input
There is a square wave signal with a frequency of 50 Hz at device input I01. Outputs QVand QF of function block CF01 will have the following values depending on the chosenmeasuring interval:

290

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Measuringinterval

QV

QF

f an I01

0.1s
0.5s
1.0s
2.0s
5.0s
10.0s

5
25
50
100
250
500

500
500
500
500
500
500

50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz
50 Hz

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by If this checkbox is enabled, the state offunction block input EN will be evaluated.
EN is necessary
If the checkbox is disabled instead, thefunction block will be enabled and function block input EN will not do anything.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on the device, as
can function block parameters whenusing the EDP programming language.

Measuring interval

Measuringinterval
0.1s
0.5s
1.0s
2.0s
5.0s
10.0s

Maximum
value at QV
500
2 500
5 000
10 00025 00050 000This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carried over will be retained. The
parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

The longer the measuring
interval, the smaller the frequency being measured canbe.

Simulation possible

Other
Signal diagrameasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

291

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

1

2

3

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

tg

4

5

6

7

Figure 158: Signal diagram of frequency counter
1: One of the device inputs I01 to I04
2: Upper threshold value SH
3: Lower threshold value SL
4: Enable CF..EN
5: Contact (N/O) CF..OF: Upper threshold value exceeded
6: Contact (N/O) CF..FB: Lower threshold value undershot.
7: Actual value equal to zero CF..ZE
8. tg: gate time ( = measuring interval) for the frequency measurement
The first measurements are made after the CF..EN enable signal has been activated. The value is output
after the gate time has timed out. The contacts are set in accordance with the measured frequency. If
the CF..EN enable signal is removed, the output value is set to zero.

Retention
The frequency counter does not have any retentive actual values since the frequency is
continuously remeasured.
See also→ Section "CF - Frequency counter", page 287→ Section "CH - High-speed counter", page 293→ Section "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299→ Section "Timing and counter relay example", page 557

292

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.2.3 CH - High-speed counter
CH function blocks can be used to quickly count rising edges forward and backward.
You can set a lower and higher limit as comparison values for the high-speed counterfunction block, as well as a start value.
There are four high-speed counters available.
Square wave count pulses are required to ensure a 1:1 mark-to-spaceratio.
The maximum count frequency is 5000 Hz.
Note that the digital inputs I1 to I4 are permanently assigned to the frequency counter function blocks provided:
I1: Counter input for counter CH01.
l I2: Counter input for counter CH02.
l I3: Counter input for counter CH03.
l I4: Counter input for counter CH04.
l

GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 4 high-speed counters
CH01…CH 04.
The high-speed up and down counters are internally hardwired with the digital inputs I01...I04 and operate independently of the cycle time.

Operating principle
The contacts will switch according to the actual value. The appropriate function block
outputs switch according to the actual value determined. The counter relays enable apreset start value to be defined at the SV input.
Only square wave signals are permissible.
The mark-to-space ratio is 1:1.
The counter wiring must observe the following digital input assignment:
I01 Counter input for the CH01 counter relayl I02 counter input for CH02 counter relayl I03 counter input for CH03 counter relayl I04 counter input for CH04 counter relayleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

293

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

NOTICE
Avoid unforeseeable switching states.
Switch C, CF, CH, CI function blocks only at one single point in the program.
Otherwise, previous counts will be overwritten.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the

(Bit)
EN

Function block release by EN
is necessary
parameter must first be enabled
D_

SE

RE

Count direction
0: up counting
1: down counting
The starting value at SV is applied
whenever there is a rising edge at
this input
Reset
1: QV=0(DWord)SH

Upper Threshold Value

SL

Lower threshold value

SV

Start value (Pre Set)

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

294

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

OF

Overflow
1: if QV ≥ SH

FB

Fall below
1: if QV ≤ SL

CY

Carry
1: if QV > value range

OF=1, if the actual value isgreater than or equal to theupper threshold value;
FB=1, if the actual value is lessthan or equal to the lower
threshold value;
If the value range is exceeded,
the switch contact switches tostatus 1 for one cycle per risingedge detected. The function
block retains the value of the lastvalid operation before the contact CY is set.

ZE

Zero
1: if QV = 0(Bit)(DWord)QVCurrent counter value in RUN mode

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x

295

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

296

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Signal diagram.........

1.........

2
3

4

5

6

7

8

9
10
. . . . . . .

11
A

B

C

D

E

F

Figure 159: Signal diagram High-speed counter
Legend for Figure
1: One of the I01 through I04 device inputs
2: Upper threshold value SH.
3: Start value SV.
4: Lower threshold value SL.
5: Count direction, coil CH…D
6: Transfer start value, coil CH..SE.
7: Reset coil CH…RE
8: Contact (N/O) CH..OF: Upper limit threshold reached or exceeded.
9: Contact (N/O) CH..FB: Lower threshold value reached or undershot.
10: CH..ZE = 1, if actual value is zero.
11: CH..CY = 1, if the value is out of range• Range A:– The counter range has the value zero.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

297

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks– The contacts CH..ZE (actual value equal to zero) and CH..FB (lower threshold value undershot) are active.
– The counter receives pulses and increases the actual value.
– CH..ZE drops out as well as CH..FB after the lower threshold value is reached.
• Range B:– The counter relay counts upwards and reaches the upper threshold value.
The contact “upper threshold value” CH…OF becomes active.
• Range C:– The coil CH..SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the start value.
The contacts go to the respective position.
• Range D:– The counting direction coil CH..D_ is actuated. If counting pulses are present, downward counting is
initiated.
– If the lower threshold value is undershot, the contact CH..FB becomes active.
• Range E:– The reset coil CH..RE is activated. The actual value will be set to zero.
– The contact CH…ZE is active.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter relay.
– The contacts OF, FB, ZE become active according to the direction of the values (positive or negative).

Retention
Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values. You can select the numberof retentive counter relays in Project view/System settings tab, please refer to → Page
1 System Settings tab. The retentive ACTUAL value will require 4 bytes of memory
space. If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value will be retained when the operating mode switches from RUN to STOP and when the power supply is switched off. If
the device is started in RUN mode, the counter relay will continue to work with the nonvolatile actual value.
See also→ "C - Counter relay", page 281→ "CH - High-speed counter", page 293→ "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299→ "Timing and counter relay example", page 557

298

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.2.4 CI - Incremental Counter
CI function blocks can be used to quickly count rising and falling edges forward andbackward. This counting is independent of the cycle time.
You can set a lower and higher limit as comparison values for the incremental value
counter, as well as a start value.
There are two incremental counters available.
Square wave count pulses are required to ensure a 1:1 mark to spaceratio.
The signals at channels A and B must have an offset of 90°; otherwise thecount direction will not be detected.
The maximum count frequency is 5000 Hz.
Note that the digital inputs I1 to I4 are permanently assigned to the incremental counter function blocks provided:
I1: Counter input for counter CI01, channel A.
l I2: Counter input for counter CI01, channel B.
l I3: Counter input for counter CI02, channel A.
l I4: Counter input for counter CI02, channel B.
lGeneral information
easyE4 base devices provide 2 high-speed incremental encoder
counters, CI01 through CI02. The high-speed up and down counters are internally hardwired with the digital inputs I01...I02 orI03...I04 and operate independently of the cycle time.

Operating principle
Incremental counters interpret rising and falling edges in order to identify the count direction. The count will be in the direction of the rising and falling edges.
The counter wiring must observe the following digital device input assignment:
I01 Counter input for the counter CI01 channel A.
I02 Counter input for counter CI01 channel B
I03 Counter input for counter CI02 channel A
I04 Counter input for counter CI02 channel B
The contacts will switch according to the actual value. The appropriate function block
outputs switch according to the actual value determined. The counter relays enable apreset start value to be defined at the SV input.
Only square wave signals are permissible.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

299

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The mark-to-space ratio is 1:1.
The signals of channels A and B must be offset by 90°. Otherwise the count direction
cannot be determined.
Positive count direction
If the rising edge at channel A is detected before the rising edge at channel B, thecounter will count up. This means that the counter will be incremented by 1 after there
is a rising edge at channel A followed by a rising edge at channel B. The same applies tothe falling edges in sequence at channel A and channel B. The counter relay's result will
be incremented and output at output QV.

Figure 160: CI function block counting up; QV=QV+4

Negative count direction
If the rising edge at channel B is detected before the rising edge at channel A, thecounter will count up. This means that the counter will be decremented by 1 after there
is a rising edge at channel A followed by a rising edge at channel B. The counter relay's
result will be decremented and output at output QV.

Figure 161: CI function block counting down; QV=QV-4

NOTICE
Avoid unforeseeable switching states.
Switch C, CF, CH, CI function blocks only at one single point in the program.
Otherwise, previous counts will be overwritten.

300

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the

(Bit)
EN

Function block release by EN
is necessary
parameter must first be enabledSERE

The starting value at SV is applied
whenever there is a rising edge at
this input
Reset
1: QV=0(DWord)SH

Upper Threshold Value

SL

Lower threshold value

SV

Start value (Pre Set)

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarmx

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

301

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

OF

Overflow
1: if QV ≥ SH

FB

Fall below
1: if QV ≤ SL

CY

Carry
1: if QV > value range

OF=1, if the actual value isgreater than or equal to theupper threshold value;
FB=1, if the actual value is lessthan or equal to the lower
threshold value;
If the value range is exceeded,
the switch contact switches tostatus 1 for one cycle per risingedge detected. The function
block retains the value of thelast valid operation before thecontact CY is set.

ZE

Zero
1: if QV = 0(Bit)(DWord)QV

302

Current counter value in RUN mode

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

The pulses at channel A andchannel B are counted. 2 pulses
are counted per counting
period.
Example: 2 pulses at channel A
and 2 pulses at channel B;
value at CI..QV = 4

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set
Function block
release by EN isnecessaryParameter display+ Call enabled

Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the state offunction block input EN will be evaluated. If the checkbox is disabledinstead, the function block will beenabled and function block input EN will
not do anything.
Constants can be edited on the device,
as can function block parameters whenusing the EDP programming language.

This parameter ensures that when existing programs are copied, the functionality of the function blocks that are
carried over will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1
depending on the function block.

Simulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

303

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Signal diagram

Figure 162: Signal diagram High-speed incremental value counter
Legend for Figure
1: One of the I01 through I04 device inputs
2: Upper threshold value SH
3: Start value SV
4: Lower threshold value SL
5: Transfer start value, coil CI..SE.
6: Reset coil CI…RE
7: Contact (N/O) CI..OF: Upper limit threshold reached or exceeded.
8: Contact (N/O) CI..FB: Lower threshold value reached or undershot.
9: CI..ZE = 1, if actual value is zero
10: CI..CY = 1, if the value is out of range.

304

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks• Range A:– The counter range has the value zero.
– The contacts CI..ZE (actual value equal to zero) and CI..FB (lower threshold value undershot) are active.
– The counter relay receives pulses at I01 and I02 or at I03 and I04 and increments the actual value.
– CI..ZE drops out as well as CI..FB after the lower threshold value is reached.
• Range B:– The counter relay counts upwards and reaches the upper threshold value.
The “upper setpoint value reached” contact CI..OF becomes active.
• Range C:– The coil CI..SE is briefly actuated and the actual value is set to the start value.
The contacts go to the respective position.
• Range D:– The counter relay receives pulses at I02 or I04 and decrements the actual value. The function block
counts down.
– If the lower threshold value is undershot, the contact CI..FB becomes active.
• Range E:– The reset coil CI..RE is activated. The actual value will be set to zero.
– The contact CI..ZE is active.
• Range F:– The actual value goes outside the value range of the counter relay.
– The contacts OF, FB, ZE become active according to the direction of the values (positive or negative).

Retention
Counter relays can be operated with retentive actual values. You can select the numberof retentive counter relays in Project view/System settings tab, please refer to → Page
1 System Settings tab. The retentive ACTUAL value will require 4 bytes of memory
space. If a counter relay is retentive, the actual value will be retained when the operating mode switches from RUN to STOP and when the power supply is switched off. If
the device is started in RUN mode, the counter relay will continue to work with the nonvolatile actual value.
See also→ Section "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299→ Section "CF - Frequency counter", page 287→ Section "CH - High-speed counter", page 293→ Section "Timing and counter relay example", page 557

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

305

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3 Arithmetic and analog function blocks
6.1.3.1 A - Analog value comparator
An analog value comparator or threshold value switch is used, for example, to compare
analog values or marker contents and switch when defined threshold values arereached.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 analog comparators, A01
through A32.
Analog comparators can be used to compare analog input
values with a reference value.

Operating principle
The following comparisons are available:
Function block input I1 greater than, equal to, or less than function block input I2.
Using the factors F1 and F2 as inputs enables you to amplify and adjust the values ofthe function block inputs.
Function block input OS can be used as an offset for input I1.
The HY function block input is used for the positive and negative switching hysteresis of
the input I2.
The contact Q1 switches if the condition of the comparison mode you have selected isfulfilled.

306

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Functionblock release
by EN isnecessaryparameter
must first be
enabled(DWord)
I1
I2
F1
F2
OS
HY

Comparison value 1
Integer value
range:
Comparison value 2-2,147,483,648
Gain factor for I1 (I1 = F1 * value)to
Default value = 1+2,147,483,647
Gain factor for I2 (I2 = F2 * value)
Default value = 1
Offset for the value at I1,
I1 OS = OS + actual value at I1;
Switching hysteresis for value at I2.
To calculate the hysteresis band (dead band) limited by theupper and lower hysteresis threshold), the function block
takes into account the value HY as well as positive and negative components.
I2 HY = Actual value at I2+ HY,
I2 HY = Actual value at I2 - HY);

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

307

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description
LT: less than (I1 < I2)
EQ: equal to (I1 = I2)
GT: greater than (I1 > I2)

Note

Less than (I1 < I2)
Equal to (I1 = I2)
Greater than (I1 > I2)

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

Status 1 if condition is fulfilled(e.g. I1 < I2 with LT mode active)

CY

If an out of range
value is indicatedwith CY = 1, Q1 willremain 0.
Status 1 if the above permissible value range of the function
block is exceeded.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

308

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x
x

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

309

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Signal diagrams
2 3
3

1
1
6
1
5

4
CY
A

B

C

D

Figure 163: Analog comparator signal diagram
Legend for Figure
1: Actual value at I1
2: Setpoint value on I2
3: Hysteresis on HY
4: Switching contact Q1 (N/O contact)
5: Offset for value I1
6: Actual value plus offset• Range A: Compare I1 greater than I2– The actual value I1 increases.
– The contact switches when the actual reaches the setpoint value.
– The actual value changes and falls below the value of the setpoint value minus the hysteresis.
– The contact goes to the normal position.
• Range B: Compare I1 less than I2– The actual value drops.
– The contact switches if the actual value reaches the setpoint value.
– The actual value changes and rises above the value of the setpoint value plus hysteresis.
– The contact goes to the normal position.
• Range C: Compare I1 with Offset greater than I2– This example behaves as described in Range A. The offset value is added to the actual value.
– Compare I1 equal to I2 The contact switches on.
– If I1 is equal to I2, i.e., if the actual value is equal to the reference value: The contact will switch off.
– If the hysteresis limit is exceeded with the actual value rising.
– If the hysteresis limit is undershot with the actual value decreasing.
• Range D: I1 with offset leaves the permissible value range. The contact CY closes. CY opens as soon
as I1 with offset is once more within the value range.

310

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a analog value comparator function block when using the EDP programming language
I01----A01Q1-----------------Ä Q01
I02----A01CY-----------------S Q02

Example of an AR configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
A02 GT +
>I1
>F1
>I2
>F2
>OS
>HY

Figure 164: Parameters on the display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
A02
GT
+
>I1

Function block: Analog comparator, number 02
Operating mode: Greater thanParameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
Comparison value 1, is compared with the comparison value 2 at
>I2, Value range: -2147483648… 2147483647
Gain factor for >I1 (>I1 = >F1. Value)
Value range: -2147483648… 2147483647
Comparison value 2 I1, Value range: -2147483648… 2147483647
Gain factor for >I2 (>I2 = >F2. Value) Value range: -2147483648 …
2147483647
Offset (zero point offset) for the value of >I1 Value range: 2147483648… 2147483647
Positive and negative switching hysteresis for comparison value I2,
Value range: -2147483648… 2147483647

>F1
>I2
>F2
>OS
>HY

See also→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

311

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.2 AR - Arithmetic
The Arithmetic function block performs all four basic calculations.
The function block is provided with the two Boolean outputs mentioned above for controlling the calculation result that you wire as contacts in the circuit diagram.
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 32 arithmetic function blocks,
AR01 through AR32. These function blocks can be used to carryout the four basic arithmetic operations: addition, subtraction,
multiplication, and division.
Operating principle
The function block will apply the selected arithmetic operation to the values at function
block inputs I1 and I2. If the calculation result exceeds the value range that can be represented, overflow signal contact CY will close and function block output QV will contain the value of the last valid operation. When the function block is called for the firsttime, the value at function block output QV will equal zero.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block. The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled(DWord)
I1
I2

Operand 1
Operand 2

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog outputx

QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

312

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.comxxx

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description

Note

ADD - Adder

Adding(I1 + I2 = QV)

SUB - Subtracter

Subtracting(I1 - I2 = QV)

MUL - MultiplierMultiplying(I1 * I2 = QV)

DIV - Divider

Dividing(I1 : I2 = QV)

2174483647 + 1 = QV contains the last permissible value as an overflow has occurred.
The carry bit AR..CY is set to 1.
-2174483648 - 3 = QV contains the last permissible value as an overflow has occurred.
The carry bit AR..CY is set to 1.
1000042 * 2401 = QV contains the last permissible value as an overflow has occurred.
The carry bit AR..CY is set to 1.
1024: 0 = QV contains the last permissible
value as an overflow occurred. The carry bit
AR..CY is set to 1.
10 : 100 = 0

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
CY
ZE

Status 1 if the above value range is exceeded.
Status 1 if the value of the function block output QV(the calculation result) equals zero

(DWord)QVCurrent counter value in RUN mode

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Integer value
range:-2,147,483,648 to+2,147,483,647

313

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

Addition example
42 + 1000 = 1042
2147483647 + 1 = Last valid value before this arithmetic operation, due to overflow(Carry) AR..CY = 1-2048 + 1000 = -1048

314

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Subtraction example
1134 - 42 = 1092
-2147483648 - 3 = Last valid value before this arithmetic operation, due to overflow(Carry) AR..CY = 1-4096 - 1000 = -5096-4096 - (-1000) = -3096
Multiplication example
12 x 12 = 144
1000042 x 2401 = Last valid value of this arithmetic operation, due to overflow (Carry)correct value = 2401100842 AR..CY = 1-1000 x 10 = -10000
Division example
1024 : 256 = 41024 : 35 = 29 (The places after the decimal point are omitted.)
1024 : 0 = Last valid value before this arithmetic operation, due to overflow (Carry)(mathematically correct “Infinity”) AR..CY = 1-1000 : 10 = -100
1000 : (-10) = -100
-1000 : (-10) = 100
10 : 100 = 0
Example of an arithmetic function block when using the EDP programming language
I 01----AR01CY-----------------Ä Q 01
I 02----AR02ZE-----------------S Q 02

Figure 165: Wiring the contacts

Example of an AR configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
AR04 ADD +
>I1
>I2
QV>

Figure 166: Parameters on the device display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
AR04 arithmetic
function block

Function block:Arithmetic

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

315

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

ADD +
+
>I1

>I2

>QV

Mode:Adder
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
First value is associated with the value at I2 via the arithmetic operation.
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Second value;
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Supplies the calculation result.
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

See also→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345

316

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.3 AV - Average
Only available on easySoft Version 7.10 or higher.
If this function block is not being shown in the leftmost pane in easySoft 7, make surethat you are using firmware version 1.10 or higher for the project.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 average function blocks, AV01
through AV32. Averaging is a method used to smooth data series,
and is primarily used, for example, to smooth temperatures or production data recorded over several hours or days by removing
high frequency components. Please note, however, that this function block is not intended for signal smoothing or for controllers –the FT function block should be used in those cases instead.
Operating principle
The average function block takes the values at function block input I1 and calculates
the corresponding moving average. Every time there is a rising edge at function block
input T_, the value at I1 is read and included in the calculation of the average value.
Meanwhile, the maximum number of values to be included in the calculation must be
specified using function block input NO. If this maximum number is reached, there will
be two possibilities depending on the selected operating mode.
One-time mode
When using one-time mode, the function block will stop calculating the average value
when done with the calculation, and function block output RY will be set to 1. This operating mode is primarily intended for calculating the average of a specific value range atperiodic intervals. Accordingly, it is, for example, suitable for calculating the average
day temperature every day (in which case a value of 24 would be selected for NO). The
maximum absolute error is 0.5.
Continuous mode
When using continuous mode, the function block will continue calculating the averagevalue with every new rising edge at T_. In this case, the moving average will be calculated for the window defined with NO, with the oldest value being eliminated and thenewest one being added every time there is a rising edge. In other words, this makes it
possible, with every new rising edge, to "look into the past" a number of edges = NO.
Since it is not possible to store all the values in the aforementioned window, the calculation is made with an approximate calculation instead. Please note that, just like with
one-time mode, function block output RY will also be set to 1 in this case as soon as thenumber of values NO is reached. This operating mode is suitable, among other things,
for continuously calculating the average value of a temperature for a specific period oftime (and a value of 24 would also be used for NO in this case).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

317

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The formulas used for the calculations are provided further below.
Even though the average value will be calculated only after the number of values to be
included (NO) is reached, it will already be output at function block output QV during thestartup phase (n < NO).
Please note that the selected number of values to be included (NO) should not be toolarge, as the larger NO is, the smaller smoothing factor SF will be, and the less the current value at I1 will be taken into account.
The currently calculated average value will be output at function block output QV. Meanwhile, function block output QN will indicate how many values were read at I1 and used
for the calculation.

318

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled

T_

RE

Trigger input
When there is a rising edge at T_, the value atfunction block input I1 is taken and used in the
average value calculation.
1: Resets the number of values to be included,
as well as the calculated average value;
QN=0, QV=0, RY=0.

(DWord)I1

Input valueNO

Maximum number of values that should be
included when calculating the average value.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Integer value range:
0…+2 147 483 647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FBxxx1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

319

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description
One-time mode

Continuous operation

Note

The average value calculation will be completed
as soon as the specified maximum number of
input values to be included (NO) is reached.
The average value will be calculated continuously
even if the maximum number of input values to be
included (NO) is reached.

The default setting is one-time mode.
Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
RY

E1

1: The average value calculation has been completed, since the specified number of input values to be included has been reached.
Error
1: If the value range for I1 or NO is exceeded.

(DWord)QVQN

The current average value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
The current number of values that were used in Integer value range:
0…+2 147 483 647
the averaging calculation

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

320

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.
The "Function block release by EN isnecessary" option is enabled bydefault.
Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter set
Function block release by
EN is necessary

Parameter display+ Call enabledSimulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

321

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
How average values are calculated in the AV function block
For these examples, the maximum number of values used to calculate the averagevalue (NO) will be 24.
Moreover, the examples use the sample temperature values in the table below andassume that they were (multiplied by 100) present and measured at function block input
I1.
One-time mode
In one-time mode, the moving average is calculated using the following formula:
One-time mode average value CMA(n) = ROUND [ CMAn-1 + (I1n – CMAn-1 )/( n+1) ]CMA(n) = Currently calculated simple moving averagen = 1…NOI1n = Value at function block input I1; e.g., temperature value

Continuous operation
In continuous mode, the smoothing factor is calculated first.
Smoothing factor SF = 2 / (NO+1)

SF = Smoothing factor; value between
0 and 1
NO = Maximum number of values to be
included in the calculation

The average value is then calculated using the formula below:
Continuous operation average value EMA(n) = ROUND [ EMAn-1 +SF* ( I1n – EMAn-1 ) ]EMA(n) = Currently calculated exponential moving averagen = 1…NOSF = Smoothing factor; value between 0 and 1
I1n = Value at function block input I1; e.g., temperature value322

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Temperature averaging example––– Arithm. mean –––Continuous–––One-time

value

mode

operation(EMA)–––Temp(CMA)

Figure 167: Sample curve for hourly temperature measurement, over 7 days

One-time mode
In the example, the average value in one-time mode is calculated for the 24th value /CMA (23) as follows:
CMA(23) = ROUND [ CMA(22) + I1(23) – CMA(22) ]23 + 1
CMA(23) = ROUND [ 1889 + (2004 - 1889)/24 ] = ROUND [1893,792] = 1894
Continuous operation
The smoothing factor in the example is SF = 2/(24+1) = 0.08.
In the example, the average value in continuous mode is calculated for the 24th value:
EMA(23) = ROUND [ EMA(22)+0.08*( I1(23) – EMA(22) ]EMA(23) = ROUND [ 2035 + 0.08* (2004 – 2035) ]EMA(23) = ROUND [2032.52 ] = 2033

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

323

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Table 72: Example temperature values
Day HourTemperature
Total
Temp
20 0
16
16
20 1
15
31
20 2
15
46
20 3
14
60
20 4
13
73
20 5
12
85
20 6
12
97
20 7
13
110
20 8
17
127
20 9
21
148
20 10
23
171
20 11
25
196
20 12
26
222
20 13
27
249
20 14
28
277
20 15
28
305
20 16
27
332
20 17
26
358
20 18
24
382
20 19
23
405
20 20
22
427
20 21
22
449
20 22
21
470
20 23
20
490
20 0
19
493
21 1
18
496
21 2
18
499
21 3
17
502
21 4
17
506
21 5
17
511
21 6
17
516
…
…
…

Arithmetic
Mean value

Durationoperation

Onceoperation

16.00
15.50
15.33
15.00
14.60
14.17
13.86
13.75
14.11
14.80
15.55
16.33
17.08
17.79
18.47
19.06
19.53
19.89
20.11
20.25
20.33
20.41
20.43
20.42
20.54
20.67
20.79
20.92
21.08
21.29
21.50
…

16
16
16
16
15
15
15
15
15
15
16
17
18
18
19
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
20
20
20
20
…

16
16
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
15
16
16
17
18
18
19
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.

324

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "A - Analog value comparator", page 306→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

325

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.4 CP – Comparator
This function block is used to compare variables and/or constants with each other.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 comparator function blocks(Compare) CP01 to CP32.
Comparators are used to compare variables and constants
with each other and output the relationship between them:Less than / Equal to / Greater than.
Operating principle
The function block compares values present at the inputs I1 and I2. The following contacts close depending on the comparison result:
I1 greater than I2, GT contact closes.
l I1 equal to I2, EQ contact closes.
l I1 less than I2, LT contact closes.
l

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

Comparison reference value

I2

Comparison value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog inputx

QA - Analog output

326

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

xx

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
LT
EQ
GT

Less Than
1: if I1 < I2
Equal
1: if I1 = I2
Greater Than
1: if I1 > I2

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

327

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a comparator function block when using the EDP programming language
The contact of the function block is sent to markers.
CP12LT----------------------Ä M 21
CP12LT----------------------Ä M 22
CP12GT----------------------u R M 21
h R M 22

Figure 168: Wiring the contacts

Example of a CP configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the328

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

following figure.
CP12 +>I1>I2

Figure 169: Parameters on the display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
CP12 comparator Function block: Value comparator, number 12+
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
>I1
Reference value to which the comparison is madeInteger value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647>I2Comparison value; I2 is compared with I1Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

See also→ Section "A - Analog value comparator", page 306→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "AV - Average", page 317→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

329

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.5 LS - Value scaling
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provider 32 value scaling function blocks,
LS01 through LS32.
These function blocks can be used to transfer values from one
value range to another. More specifically, a value scaling function block will take one of the mathematical relationships you
have specified and use it to scale the value at input LS..I1 inorder to then output it, either as smaller value or larger value,at output LS..QV. The mathematical relationship is based on astraight line defined by the coordinate pairs X1, Y1 and X2, Y2(see under “The mathematical relationship is:”).
A typical application is the conversion of values, such as
0…20 mA to 4…20 mA. An easy800 device is provided with
32 value scaling function blocks.
Operating principle"EN = 1" starts the function block.
"EN = 0" initiates a reset in which the output QV is reset to 0.

① Source range
Figure 170: Figure: Scaling the input values - reducing②

Figure 171: Scaling the input values - increasing

330

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Destination range

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The mathematical relationship is follows:m = GradientY0 = Y offset when X = 0
X1, Y1 = First value pair
X2, Y2 = Second value pairg = Straight line with positive gradientFigure 172: Mathematical interrelationshipeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

331

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)(DWord)I1

Input value, value range: 32-bit

X1
Y1
X2
Y2

First scale; data point 1
First scale; data point 2
Second scale; data point 1
Second scale; data point 2

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Value range: 32 bits

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Bit inputs
Operators
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarmxxx

LE - Output backlightP device buttons

332

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxxFunction block outputs
Description

Note(DWord)QV

Delivers the scaled input value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x

333

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Used to select device inputs I1
through I8 as a trigger for the interrupt
Clicking on the button will open theinterrupt routine in the Programmingview

Interrupt source

Edit interrupt routine

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Application example LS
An analog pressure sensor I1 in a tank delivers a value ranging from 0 (empty) to 10000(full). When the cylindrical, upright tank is completely full, it holds 600 liters. The purpose is for the current fill level to be converted to liters. The relationship between thepressure and the fill level, and accordingly the volume as well, is linear, meaning that an
LS function block can be used.
The parameters would need to be configured as follows: X1=0, X2= 10000, Y1=0,
Y2=600
QV will then deliver the fill level in liters.
See also→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339

334

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.6 MM - Min-/Max function
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 Min-/Max function blocks,
MM01 through MM32.
These function blocks can be used to determine the maximum
value and the minimum value of a changing analog value. This
makes it, for example, easy to conveniently determine the magnitude of the pressure fluctuations inside a system.

Operating principle
If the function block is enabled, the current value at function block input I1 will be compared with the existing minimum value and maximum value. If the current value falls
below or exceeds these values respectively, it will accordingly be set as the new minimum value or maximum value. Only one minimum value and one maximum value will
be stored in the function block at any one time.
Both values will be zero when the measurement starts. Moreover, they can be reset tozero using the RE input.
You can run the calculation cyclically or only when there are rising edges at function
block input T_. The typical application is monitoring a process value cyclically.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
ET

T_

1: Activates the function block.
Enable trigger
0: Calculates Min/Max every time the function
block is called; trigger input T_ is deactivated
1: Calculates Min/Max only when there is arising edge at T_; trigger input T_ is activated
Trigger input
Min/Max are calculated when there is a risingedge at T_, provided that ET = 1

RE(DWord)1: Sets the internal Min/Max values to 0

I1

Analog value used for the Min/Max comparison

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Typically, an ET = 0 automatic trigger configuration is used

The fastest this can be done is every
second cycle, since a switch from 0 to 1
is required at T_.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647335

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
RY

Event message signaling that a new minimum
or maximum value has been entered(DWord)QM
QX

336

Minimum value of I1 that was sampled during
the active period
Maximum value of I1 that was sampled during
the active period

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

This message will only be displayed for
one cycle

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

337

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339

338

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.7 PM - Performance map
Only available on easySoft Version 7.10 or higher.
If this function block is not being shown in the leftmost pane in easySoft 7, make surethat you are using firmware version 1.10 or higher for the project.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 4 performance map function blocks,
PM01 through PM04. This characteristic curve function is implemented by reading the value at function block input I1, looking up
the corresponding output value in a reference value table, and outputting this output value at function block output QV.
Operating principle
The performance map function block can be used to implement a characteristic curve
function. This characteristic curve function is implemented by reading the value at function block input I1, looking up the corresponding output value in a reference value table,
and outputting this output value at function block output QV. The reference value tableneeds to be filled with at least 2 and at most 32 values for I1 and QV beforehand. If avalue that is not found in the table is present at the function block input, the operating
mode being used will determine which value fits the best and will be output at the function block output.
An example is used in the following sections in order to illustrate which operating
modes are available and how they interpret the values at the function block input.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

339

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

Input value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

340

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operating modes
The operating mode will decide on the output value if the value at function block input I1
does not match one of the I1 values in the reference value table exactly.
Description
Interpolating

Next higher value

Next lower value

Nearest value

The average value between the next higher andnext lower value for I1 in the reference value table
will be output at function block output QV.
The function block will look for the next higher
value for I1 in the reference value table and output
the corresponding assigned value at function block
output QV.
The function block will look for the next lower
value for I1 in the reference value table and output
the corresponding assigned value at function block
output QV.
The function block will look for the nearest value
for I1 in the reference value table and output thecorresponding assigned value at function block output QV.
If the value at I1 is exactly in the middle between
two reference values in the table, the higher value
will be output.

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
E1

Error
1: If QV exceeds the value range(DWord)QV

Output value determined from the reference
value table based on input value I1.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

341

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.
The "Function block release by EN isnecessary" option is enabled bydefault.
Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter set
Function block release by
EN is necessary

Parameter display+ Call enabledSimulation possible

342

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
PM function block example: How the operating mode affects the results
Say that the following characteristic curve needs to be implemented using the PM function block. To do this, 32 mapped values are defined in the reference value table.

Figure 173: Example of a characteristic curve for the PM function block

Example of a reference value table in which QV values are mapped to I1 values
I1
QV
1
2
3
4
5
…
31
32

0
2
4
8
16
…
26
30

0
2
3
4
5
…
10
12

The following table shows how the operating mode affects the values at function block
output QV if the characteristic curve from the example is implemented using the definedreference value table. With the following values at the function block input:
Value Value at QV as a function of
at I1 the operating mode
1

3

5Interpolating: 1
Next higher value: 2
Next lower value: 0
Nearest value: 2
Interpolating: 3
Next higher value: 3
Next lower value: 2
Nearest value: 3Interpolating: 4

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

343

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Value Value at QV as a function of
at I1 the operating mode

827

Next higher value: 4
Next lower value: 3
Nearest value: 3Interpolating: 4
Next higher value: 4
Next lower value: 4
Nearest value: 4Interpolating: 11
Next higher value: 12
Next lower value: 10
Nearest value: 10

See also→ Section "A - Analog value comparator", page 306→ Section "AV - Average", page 317→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345

344

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.3.8 PW - Pulse width modulation
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide two function blocks for pulse
width modulation PW01…PW02.
These function blocks generate a pulse train with a constantperiod. The main application for PW function blocks is whenworking with devices that feature transistor outputs.
However, PW function blocks can also be used with devices
featuring relay outputs. Due to the relay's ON and OFF times, along period duration and a long minimum ON duration are both
possible with these devices.
Function block PW is used, among other things, to set up PID
controllers with a pulse output for proportional actuators.
When doing this, the PW function block is used together with
the DC (PID controller) function block.
Operating principle
The PW function block modulates the pulse duty factor of a square wave signal, andthus changes the mark to space ratio and pulse duration.
The period duration of the signal stays constant.
You define the period duration at the PD input. The on time or pulse duration is proportional to the manipulated variable at the SV input. You can also define the minimum
on duration at the ME input.
A hardware output is assigned to each function block:
PW01 -> Q01, PW02 -> Q02
The function block causes the direct output of the calculated value at the hardware output.
If you use a PW function block with its permanently assigned
Q1 or Q2 output, you cannot make any additional associationsof these outputs in the program.
A status change at Q1 or Q2 that is caused by the circuit diagram is suppressed in favor of the higher priority statuschange caused by the function block.
DANGER
UNFORESEEABLE SWITCHING STATES AT OUTPUT
When using the PW function block, strictly observe the separate
assignment of the outputs if other hardware-dependent function blocks
are used, such as the PO function block.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

345

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

If this is not observed, unforeseeable switching states may occur at the output concerned.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.
0: Output Q1 or Q2 switches to a state of 0.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)SV

PD

ME

Manipulated variable
No signals are output at Q1 and Q2 if
Value range: 0 to 4095 (12 bit) of this value
SV=0 or SV<ME, and the output conrange corresponds to 0...100% of the period dur- cerned will stay at 0.
ation. Notes on the normalization of the manipulated variable are provided in the previous
section Manipulated variable SV.
Period duration [ms]Value range: 0…65535
When the value is 0, no pulses are output at
Q1 and Q2.
The minimum period duration for a device withtransistor outputs is 5 ms.
(the resulting max. frequency is 200 Hz).
Minimum On duration [ms]Value range: 0…65535
The minimum on duration for devices with transistor outputs is 0.1 ms.
This on duration applies if ME is not set or set
to 0.
If ME=1, the on duration is 1ms etc..
The minimum on duration possible essentiallydepends on the downstream electronics.

Manipulated variable SV
The value range from 0 to 4095 of the manipulated variable SV corresponds to 0 to
100% of the period duration.
If you wish to control the pulse duration with the DC.. PID controller, you can associate
the DC..QV output directly with the input PW..SV. This kind of application does not
require any normalization since the DC..QV covers the same value range between 0 and
4095.
If you wish to control the pulse duration via an analog input that has a value range
between 0 and 1023, you will have to normalize this value first of all. If you require an
integral normalization factor, in this case the factor of 4, only multiplication with the AR
arithmetic function block is required.

346

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

If you wish to control the pulse duration with a signed value you will have to normalize
this value first of all with an LS value scaling function block.
If the actual value specified via SV for the pulse duration is shorter than the minimum on
duration, the output at Q1 or Q2 is accordingly 0. The status of the PW..E1 contact must
be observed.
If the off duration of the pulse at the output is less than the minimum off duration, Q1 or
Q2 are permanently on. The status of the PW..E1 contact must be observed.
Parameter limits for period duration and minimum ON duration
Table 73: Parameter limit values for period duration and minimum on duration

Period duration [ms]Minimum On
duration [ms]Note

EASY-E4-UC-...

Min. zzMax. 65535

Min. zzMax. 65535

Period duration
When the value is0, no pulses are output at Q1 and Q2.
minimum contact
closing time
Can be selected
within the valid limits

EASY-E4-DC-...

Min. zzMax. 65535
Min. zzMax. 65535

Min. zzMax. 65535
Min. zzMax. 65535

Base device

EASY-E4-AC-...

Minimum period duration PD
The minimum period duration is 5 ms.
Minimum contact closing time ME
The minimum on duration is limited to zz (100) µs when a very low manipulated variable
is set at input SV.
Minimum on duration = Minimum off duration
The above hardware restriction also applies to the minimum off duration if a very highmanipulated variable at input SV generates a correspondingly long pulse duration. If alarge mark-space ratio of this kind is almost as long as the period duration, the minimum off duration is 100 µs.
If the duration is below the set minimum on duration or minimum off duration, theBoolean control output E1 is set to 1. This control output E1 is used for monitoring duringcommissioning and does not have to be connected.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

347

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Period duration to minimum ON duration ratio
The ratio of the period duration/minimum on duration (P/M) determines which percentage of manipulated variables have no effect.
The minimum on duration must be set as low as possible so that P/M is as high as possible.
If, however, a very short on duration has no effect on the connected actuator, it is advisable to suppress these short on phases in order to reduce the load on the hardware. In
this case, the period duration should not be set too low.
Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs

348

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
E1

Error output
1: if the value is below the minimum on duration or minimum off duration.

The range limits are checked irrespectiveof the edge change on the Boolean EN
input.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation not possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

349

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "PW - Pulse width modulation", page 345→ Section "AR - Arithmetic", page 312→ Section "CP – Comparator", page 326→ Section "LS - Value scaling", page 330→ Section "MM - Min-/Max function", page 335→ Section "PM - Performance map ", page 339

350

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.4 Open-loop and closed-loop function blocks
6.1.4.1 DC - PID controller
GeneraleasyE4 The base devices provide 32 PID controller function blocks
DC01...DC32.

Operating principle
A closed-loop control circuit with a PID controller consists of the following components:
Setpoint (reference variable),l Actual value (controlled variable),l System deviation = (setpoint–actual value),l PID controller,
l Control system (e.g. PTn system),l Disturbance variables.
l

The PID controller operates on the basis of the equation of the PID algorithm. According
to this, the manipulated variable Y(t) is the result of the calculation of the proportional
component, an integral component and a differential component.
PID controller equation:Y(t)=Y(t) = YP(t) + YI(t) + YD(t)calculated manipulated variable with scan time t

YP(t)= Value of the proportional component of the manipulated variable with scan time t
YI(t) = Value of the integral component of the manipulated
variable with scan time t
YD(t)= Value of the differential component of the manipulated variable with scan time t

Proportional component
The proportional component YP is the product of the gain (Kp) and the control difference(e). The control difference is the difference between the setpoint (Xs) and the actual

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

351

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

value (Xi) at a specified scan time. The equation used by the device for the proportional
component is as follows:
YP(t) = Kp * [Xs(t) - Xi(t)]Kp =Proportional gain

Xs(t) =

SETPOINT value at scan time t

Xi(t) =ACTUAL value at scan time t

Integral component
The integral component YI is proportional to the sum of the control difference over time.
The equation used by the device for the integral component is as follows:
YI(t) = Kp * Tc / Tn * [Xs(t) - Xi(t)] + YI (t-1)]
Kp = Proportional gain
Tc = Scan time
Tn = Reset time (also known as integrationtime).
Xs(t) = Setpoint with scan time t
Xi(t) = Actual value with scan time t
YI(t–-1)= Value of the integral component of
the manipulated variable with scan time t – 1

Differential component
The differential component YD is proportional to the change in the control difference. So
as to avoid step changes or jumps in the manipulated variable caused by the differential
behavior when the setpoint is changed, the change of the actual value (the process variable) is calculated and not the change in the control difference. This is shown by the following equation:
YD(t) = Kp x Tv / Tc x (Xi (t-1) - Xi(t))
Kp = Proportional gain
Tc = Scan time
Tv = Rate time of the control system (alsocalled the differential time)
Xi(t) = Actual value with scan time tXi(t-1) = Actual value with scan time t - 1

In order for a PID controller to work, it must be enabled with DC_EN =1. The PID controller will provide manipulated variable QV as an output variable. If the DC..EN coil is
not active, the entire PID controller will be disabled and reset. The manipulated variable
at the QV output will assume a value of 0. Function block inputs DC_EP, DC_EI, and DC_
ED all need to be active in order for the proportional term, integral term, and derivative
term to be calculated.
Example: If only coils DC…EP and DC…EI are activated, the PID controller operates as
a PI controller.

352

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

A deactivation of the I and D component is linked with a reset. The controller isassigned parameters with the standard variables Kp [%], TN [0.1 s] and TV [0.1 s].
The device calculates the manipulated variable every time the scan time TC has
elapsed. If the scan time is zero, the manipulated variable is calculated every cycle.
The controller can also be run in UNP and BIP modes, and also controlled in Manual
mode.
Manual mode of the PID controller
A value must be present at the MV function block input in order to set the manipulated
variable directly. If the function block input DC…SE is activated, the value at MV istransferred directly as manipulated variable QV. This value is present for as long as the
DC…SE coil is activated or the value at the MV input is changed. If DC..SE is no longer
triggered, the control algorithm is active again.
Extreme changes in the manipulated variable can occur whenthe manual manipulated variable is transferred or deactivated.
If the function block is running in UNI (unipolar) mode, a negative signed manipulated variable value will be output as thevalue zero.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
EP
EI
DF
SE
(DWord)1: Activates the function block.
1: Activates the proportional term
1: Activates the integral term
1: Activates the derivative term
1: Accept manual manipulated variable

I1
I2
KP

Setpoint
Actual value
Proportional gain Kp [%]

TN
TV
TC

Reset time Tn [0.1 s]
Rate time Tv [0.1 s]
Scan time = Time between function block
calls. Value range: 0.1 s - 6553.5 s.
If the value 0 is specified, the scan time isdetermined by the program cycle time.

MV

Manual manipulated variable
Value range: -4096 ... +4095

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Value range: -32768 ... +32767
Value range: -32768 ... +32767
Value range: 0 ... 65535
The value 100 corresponds to a KP
(factor) of 1.
Value range: 0 ... 65535
Value range: 0 ... 65535

When UNP mode is selected: and negative values are entered at MV, the function block returns a zero at output QV.

353

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

KP Proportional gain factor
The input KP is used to define a proportional gain factor.
The value <100> corresponds to a KP factor of 1, the value 50 corresponds to a KP of
0.5 etc.
Scan time Tc
The TC input defines the time between the function block calls. Values between 0.1s
and 6553.5s can be defined.
If the TC scan time is set to 0, the program cycle time defines the time difference
between the function block calls. This may cause irregularities in the control response
as the program cycle time is not always constant. The ST (set cycle time) function
block should be used to set a constant program cycle time, please refer to → "ST - Set
cycle time", page 503.
A combination of two devices easyE4 is ideal for applications
requiring lengthy calculations or visualizations such as PID
closed-loop control tasks with the PID controller and also visualization functions at the same time.
In these kinds of applications, move the time consuming calculations to a second device, possibly without an integrated
display, which you can connect via NET.
Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1354

M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

nN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Operating mode
Description

Note

The manipulated variable is output as a
unipolar 12-bit value. .
The manipulated variable is output as abipolar 13-bit value.

Value range: 0 ... 4095

Operating mode
UNP
BIP

Function block outputs
Description

Value range: -4096 ... +4095

Note

(Bit)
LI

1: if the value range of the medium-voltage is
exceeded.

(DWord)
QV
QP

QI
QD

Manipulated variable
Proportional component of the manipulated variable
Can be used for diagnostic purposes
Integral component of the manipulated variable
Can be used for diagnostic purposes
Differential component of the manipulated variable
Can be used for diagnostic purposes

Integer value range
for operating mode UNP: 0...+4095 (12 Bit)for operating mode BIP: -4096...+4095 (13Bit)

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

355

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a PID controller with the programming method EDP
M 51---------------------------u-Ä DC02EN
d-Ä DC02EP
d-Ä DC02EIv-Ä DC02ED
M 52-----------------------------Ä DC02SE

Figure 174: Wiring the function block coils

The function block coils are activated by markers.
DC02LI---------------------------Ä S M 96

Figure 175: Wiring of the function block contact356

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The message of the function block is sent to a marker.
Example of a PID controller configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
DC02 UNP +
>I1
>I2
>KP
>TN
>TV
>TC
>MV
QV>

Figure 176: Parameters on the device display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
DC02
UNP
+
>I1
>I2
>KP
>TN
>TV
>TC
>MV
QV>

Function block: PID controller, number 02
Operating mode: Unipolar
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
SETPOINT of the PID control: -32768…+32767
ACTUAL value of the PID control: -32768…+32767
Proportional gain Kp; 0…65535,
in %; Example: The value 1500 is processed in the function block as 15.
Reset Time Tn: 0… 65535,
in 100 ms; Example: The value 250 is processed in the function block as 25 s.
Rate time TV: 0…65535,
in 100 ms; Example: The value 20 is processed in the function block as 2 s.
Scan Time Tc: 0…65535, in 100 ms
Manual manipulated variable: -4096… +4095
Manipulated variable:• unipolar: 0…4095• bipolar: -4096…+4095

See also→ Section "DC - PID controller", page 351→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "VC - Value limitation ", page 384→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

357

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.4.2 FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter
GeneraleasyE4Base devices provide 32 PT1 signal smoothing filter function
blocks FT01...FT32.
The function block smoothes noisy signals such as analog input signals. It operates as a low pass filter.

Operating principle
The signal to be smoothed is added via input I1. The smoothed output value is transferred to QV.
EN=1 starts the function block. EN=0 initiates a reset in which output QV is set to avalue of 0.
You can use the TG input to set the recovery time. This recovery time is the time overwhich smoothing will be applied, and it should not be longer than necessary, as signals
will be delayed more than is actually necessary for smoothing. Please note that delays
are an unavoidable side effect of signal smoothing.
The input KP is used to define a proportional gain factor. The input signal I1 is multipliedwith this factor. The value <100> corresponds to a KP of 1.
The PT1 delayed output value is provided at output QV.
If the function block is called for the first time when the device is started or after areset, this will result in the delay value being initialized with the input value (the PT1
delay does not start with a value of zero). In other words, the output value at QV will
equal the input value at I1 during the first processing cycle. This will speed up the PT1starting behavior.
Step response of the function block
The step response of the FT-PT1 function is an e function. After a time t = Tg the normalized output value is 0.63 QV/QVmax.

358

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 177: Response of the FT function block
Output value of the FT-PT1 signal smoothing filter function block, Tangent
Tangent

The output value is based on the following equation:Y(t) = [TA/TG] ∙ [ KP ∙ ( X(t)-Y(t-1) ) ]Y(t) = Calculated output value at time t
TA =Scan time (calculated internally)
TG = Recovery time
KP = Proportional gain
X(t) = Actual value at time tY(t-1) = Calculated output value at time t-1

Scan time
Scan time TA depends on the set recovery time value.
At recovery time TG

Internal calculation of
the scan time TA

TG ≦ 1000 ms

TA = 10 ms

TG > 1000 ms

TA = TG/100

Cycle time to scan time
The ratio of cycle time cyc to sampling time TA should be such that the sampling time ismuch larger than the cycle time (by a factor of approximately 10): TA=10 ∙ tcyc. The
sample time is set indirectly with the value for recovery time TG (please refer to thetable above).
The following therefore applies: tcyc << TA.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

359

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

For applications in which this cannot be fulfilled, the cycle time should be set with theST (set cycle time) function block so that the scan time is an integral multiple of thecycle time.
tcyc ∙ n = TA
mit n = 1,2,3, …

The function block always works with a scan time that is an integral multiple of thecycle time. This can cause the set recovery time to be lengthened.
In the case of time-consuming application scenarios in which,for instance, a signal smoothing filter and a PID controller areused and visualization tasks need to be executed simultaneously, the cycle time may be extended to an extent that
may not be tolerable for controller tasks. In these kinds ofapplications, move the time-consuming calculations to asecond device connected via easyNet – please refer to
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
(DWord)1: Activates the function block.

I1
TG

Input value
Recovery time TG [0.1 s]

KP

Proportional gain Kp [%]Value range: 0 ... 65535

Value range: -32768…+32767
Value range: 0…65535
The value 10 corresponds to a recovery
time of 1000 ms.
Value range: 0…65535
The value 100 corresponds to a KP
(factor) of 1.
The value 50 corresponds to a KP of 0.5.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs

360

Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog inputxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.comx6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
CY

Carry
1: If output value QV falls outside the valid
value range.

Value range: -32768…+32767

Delayed output value

Value range: -32768…+32767(DWord)QVAssigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

361

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of an FT-PT1-signal smoothing filter when using the EDP programming language
M 40-----------------------------Ä FT01EN

Figure 178: Wiring the function block coils

Example of an FT-PT1 signal smoothing filter configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the general display of function block parameters, as shown in the figureon the left. Enter the function block settings here.
FT17 +
>I1
>TG
>KP
QV>

Figure 179: Parameters shown on display

362

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The display contains the following elements:
FT17 signal
smoothing filter
+
>I1
>TG
>KP
QV>

Function block: Signal smoothing, number 17

Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
Input value: -32768… +32767
Recovery time: 0… 65535 resolved in 100 ms
Example: The value 250 is processed in the function block as 25 s.
Proportional gain: 0… 65535 in %; Example: With KP=1500 the function
block performs the calculation with Kp =15
Output value: -32768 … +32767, smoothed

See also→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "VC - Value limitation ", page 384→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

363

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.4.3 PO - Pulse output
GeneralThe DC versions of easyE4 base devices provide 2 pulse output function
blocks, PO01 through PO02. These function blocks make it possibly toquickly output 24 V pulses in order to drive stepper motors. Pulse output
PO01 is hardwired to device output Q1 and PO02 to device output Q2.
If you use a PO function block with its hardwired device output Q1 or Q2, do not not assign that device output again in the
program. Doing so will not have any effect, as a state changeby the function block has a higher priority.
WARNINGUNFORESEEABLE SWITCHING STATES AT OUTPUT
When using the PO function block, strictly observe the separate assignment of the outputs if other hardware-dependent function blocks are used, such as the PW function
block.
If this is not observed, unforeseeable switching states may occur at theoutput concerned.

364

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operating principle
You can use the pulse output function block to generate a defined number of pulses atdevice output Q1 or Q2.. This series of pulses is called a pulse train. You can change thefrequency within the pulse sequence. You can generate several pulse sequences indefined intervals. You can use these pulse trains to control a stepper motor in the threepossible individual sequences: acceleration, operation, and deceleration. The function
block also has Jog mode as well as normal mode.
Each function block is assigned a set device output for the fast pulses:
Function block PO01: -> device output Q01
Function block PO02: -> device output Q02
The device outputs Q1 and Q2 used must not be processed again in the circuit diagram.
The reason for this is that the PO function blocks overwrite all other status changes atthe device outputs Q01 and Q02.
A suitable power output stage that is compatible with the stepper motor being used isrequired in order to be able to drive the stepper motor.
The step information needs to be fed to the power output stage's input logic. The input
logic for both signals should be optocoupled and process an input voltage of +24V.
The parameter definition for a stepper motor and therefore the function block largely
depends on the rated load to be moved. This defines the framework for the maximum
start and operating frequency.
The function block is active if the PO..EN coil is actuated. After you have parameterized
the function block, you can actuate the coil PO..S_. This will start normal operation.
Alternatively, you can also actuate the coil PO..TP and start the function block in Jog
mode.
Pulse profiles
The PO function block enables very simple pulse profiles to be generated in order to control a stepper motor with the sequences acceleration [1], operation [2] and braking [3].
In order to do this, a PO function block supplies a user-defined number of square wave
pulses (50% relative ON duration) at the permanently assigned high-speed device output Q1 or Q2. I1 for normal operation or P1 for inching operation.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

365

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 180: Typical pulse profile for a stepper motor in normal moden1: Number of acceleration pulses
n: Total number of pulses
n2: Number of pulses for operation
n3: Number of deceleration pulses
QF: Current frequency
FS: Start frequency
FO: Operating frequency
PF: Jog frequency

Start frequency at function block input FS
The maximum start frequency that can be configured depends on the load torque. Entera start frequency value that will enable the stepper motor to move the load even at low
speeds. You will normally be able to find information on the maximum start frequency
without taking the load torque into account in the technical data for the motor. When theload torque is taken into account, the start frequency must only be high enough for the
motor not to lose any pulses during acceleration and not to be driven by the load during
deceleration.
If the value of FS is set too low, this may cause oscillations
between the motor and the load. Jumps at the start or end of
the positioning section may occur if FS is set too high.
Operating frequency at function block input FO
The maximum operating frequency also depends on the load torque.
The motor generally achieves its maximum power and torque at very low speeds. The
higher the speed, the weaker the motor will be.
Jog frequency at function block input PF
The maximum frequency that the motor should be able to reach in jog mode.

366

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Number of steps at function block input P1
The number of steps that the motor should be able to execute in jog mode.
Frequency change per step in the acceleration phase RF
During the acceleration phase [1], the motor's step sequence frequency is increased
continuously from the start frequency to the operating frequency.
The frequency change per step is used to define the number of steps that the acceleration phase will take with the configured starting and operating frequencies.
Frequency change per step in the braking phase RF
During the deceleration phase [3], the motor's step sequence frequency is decreased
continuously from the operating frequency to the start frequency.
The frequency change per step is used to define the number of steps that the deceleration phase will take with the configured starting and operating frequencies.
Number of pulses (total number of pulses) I1
The total number of pulses needs to be configured based on the distance being coveredon the basis of the specified step angle per step.
In normal operation the function block will always move a distance specified by the Total number of pulses.
This value for the total number of pulses and the calculated number of pulses for theacceleration and braking sequence are used by the function block to calculate the number of pulses for the operating sequence [2].
Number of pulses for acceleration and braking
The PO function block automatically calculates the number of pulses required for acceleration and braking using the frequency change values FS->FO and FO->FS you haveset.
You can calculate the number of pulses for the acceleration and braking sequence
using the following equations.

FO: Operating frequency [Hz]; FS: Start frequency [Hz],nRRF : Number of pulses in the acceleration sequencenRBF : Number of pulses in the braking sequence
RF: Frequency change in the acceleration phase [mHz/step]
BF: Frequency change in the braking phase [mHz/step]easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

367

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

EN

Enable of the function block on status 1.
The operations Start positioning job (S_) or
Jog mode (TP) can be executed when thefunction block is enabled.
Disable the function block on status 0.
The function block Reset is carried out when
there is falling edge from 1 to 0.

S_

The positioning job will start when there is arising edge.
An active positioning job will be signaled
with AC =1.

BR

Aborts the ongoing positioning job when
there is a rising edge.

TP

Activates the Jog mode on status 1
The on duration TP = 1 determines the type of
Jog mode.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled
Caution! In normal mode, always stop positioning jobs with the BR function block input.
In this case, the step sequence frequency will
be reduced according to the deceleration ramp
and the motor will decelerate smoothly.
A stop with EN= 0 would cause an abrupt stopof the motor and a possible loss of the reference point if this would be dragged further by
the moved load.
When a positioning job is activated, the acceleration, operating and braking phases are
executed in succession.
If a positioning job is already activated, arenewed rising edge 0 -> 1 at S_ will not cause
a new job to be started.
After the positioning job is aborted, the function
block now runs the braking phase, i.e. adelayed motor stop is executed.
The bit output AC is only set to 0 when thebraking phase has been completed.
Two operating mode are available in Jog modefor diagnostics and testing.
1. Positioning with a preset number of steps
TP on duration ≦ 0.5 seconds
The motor moves by the number of steps
defined at P1.
2. Positioning with a specified jog frequency manual mode
TP on duration > 0.5 seconds
The motor will be accelerated to the jog frequency set at PF.

(DWord)368

I1

Number of pulses

FS

Start Frequency

FO

Operating frequency

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

For number of pulses enter the total number
pulses for the entire sequence, consisting of
the three individual acceleration, operating andbraking phases.
Integer value range:
0…+2 147 483 647
Integer value range:
0…5000 Hz
Integer value range:
0…5000 Hz

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description

Note

RF

Frequency change in
the acceleration phase [mHz/step]

Integer value range:
0…65 535
Value for changing the frequency during theacceleration in 0.001Hz per step.
Example: f-REF = 0 - 10 V0=
No frequency change
100=
Frequency increased by 0.1
Hz per step

BF

Frequency change inthe braking phase [mHz/step]

Integer value range:
0…65 535
Value for changing the frequency during braking
in 0.001Hz per step.
Example: f-REF = 0 - 10 V0=
No frequency change
1000=
Frequency reduction by
1 Hz per step

P1

Number of steps in jog modePF

Jog frequency

If you only define a very low number of steps,
the start pulse at the TP function block input
must likewise only be very short. Otherwise
the function block will output several pulse
sequences that will cause the distance A to becovered several times. In extreme cases generate short start pulses at TP using a T... timing
relay.
Integer value range:
0…65 535
Integer value range:
0…5000 Hz

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

369

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
AC

E1

1: Signals an ongoing positioning job
Pulses are output at device output Q1 or Q2.
also during jog mode or during the braking
ramp and also after S_ is set to 0.
0: Signals that there is no ongoing positioningjob.
Error output
1: in the event of incorrect parameters, suchas:
- FO < FS (operating frequency < start frequency)- PF < FS (jog frequency < start frequency)

No positioning commands if the function
block detects incorrect parameters.
If the function block detects an incorrect
parameter change during an active positioning job, the step sequence frequency
is reduced according to the braking ramp
and the motor is gently braked to a stop.

(DWord)QV

Actual number of steps completed

QF

Actual output frequency

Integer value range:
0…+2 147 483 647
Integer value range:
0…5000 Hz

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n

370

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

xx

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block
will be enabled and function block
input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation not possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

371

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Normal mode with signal diagram
For normal mode, specify the number of pulses based on the distance that must be traversed.
In addition, configure the start frequency and the operating frequency as a function of
the load torque and of the motor being used.
Set the slope for the starting and braking ramps by using the corresponding RF and BF
frequency change inputs. The function block will interpret the frequency change parameter value as a change in mHz per step. For example RF = 2000 means that the frequency will increase 2 Hz per step during the acceleration phase.
Parameters for normal operation
Configure the following function block inputs as shown:l I1 - Number of pulses; e.g. 10000 (value range 0...2147483647)
l FS Start frequency; e.g. 200 Hz (value range 0-5000Hz)l FO - Operating frequency; e.g. 3000 Hz (value range 0-5000Hz)
l RF - Frequency change per step in the acceleration phase; e.g., 500 mHz/step,i.e., the frequency is increased 0.5 Hz per step (value range of 0 to 65535)
l BF - Frequency change per step in the deceleration phase; e.g., 2000
mHz/step, i.e., the frequency is decreased 2 Hz per step (value range of 0 to
65535)
Connect function block inputs EN, S_, and BR to a contact suitable for driving them.
Adding a comment for the selected operands can make the program easier tounderstand.
Switch input EN=1.
Start a positioning job with a rising edge at bit input S_.
Check the acceptance of the job at device output AC.
1
EN 0
1
S 0
FO
FS
QF

m1

m2

m3

AC

BR

Q1/2
A

372

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

BC6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 181: Signal diagram for PO pulse output with specified number of pulses for I1 - possible normal
mode phases
EN: Enable coil
S: Start coil for pulse sequence
FO: Operating frequency,
FS: start frequency,
QF: Current output frequency
m1 = Acceleration phase, m2 = Operating phase, m3 = Braking phase
AC: Positioning job active
BR: Stop coil for pulse sequence
Q1/2: Pulse sequence at the device output Q1 and/or Q2• Range A: The pulse sequence is present at the device output until the number of pulses defined at I1
has been reached.
• Range B: Activating the coil PO..BR initiates the braking phase and reduces the frequency of the pulse
sequence.
• Range C: A voltage drop at coil PO..EN immediately switches off the pulse sequence from the device
output.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

373

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Jog mode with signal diagram
You can use the PO function block in jog mode for commissioning. You can either start a
positioning job with a specified number of steps P1 or a specified jog frequency PF. The
decisive factor will be whether the on time for TP is TP ≤ 0.5 seconds or TP > 0.5
seconds.
Parameters for jog operation
Configure the following function block inputs:l FS start frequency; e.g., 200 Hz (value range of 0 to 5000 Hz); the operating frequency is not needed for operation, but for the plausibility check instead.
l RF - Frequency change per step in the acceleration phase; e.g., 500 mHz/step,i.e., the frequency is increased 0.5 Hz per step (value range of 0 to 65535)
l BF - Frequency change per step in the deceleration phase; e.g., 2000
mHz/step, i.e., the frequency is decreased 2 Hz per step (value range of 0 to
65535)
To move at the specified jog frequency at function block input PF (e.g., 1000 Hz (oto 5000 Hz), configure the maximum frequency that the motor should reach in jog
mode.
The jog frequency must be greater than the start frequency: PF > FS; e.g., 1000 Hz.
To run at the specified number of steps, configure the maximum number of steps
that the motor should carry out in jog mode at function block input P1.
Connect inputs EN and TP each to a contact suitable for activation.
Check the acceptance of the job at device output AC.
Jog mode will be executed as described below as a function of the duty cycle at function block input TP.

374

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Positioning with a specified number of steps P1 (defined distance)
TP on time ≦ 0.5 seconds
When using this operating mode, set the distance using the number of steps P1.
Switch the TP input to 1 for a duration ≦ 0.5 seconds.
The motor will start with starting frequency FS, move the set number of steps, and thenstop automatically. The start ramp and deceleration ramp will be ignored in this case.

EN
PF
FS
QF
≦ 0.5 s≦ 0.5 s≦ 0.5 s

TP

AC
Q1/2
A

B

Figure 182: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified number of steps P1
PF: Jog frequency
FS: Start frequency
QF: Current output frequency
TP: Jog command
AC: Positioning job active
A: Pulse output until number P1 reached, triggered by TP if on duration ≦ 0.5 sec.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

375

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Positioning with specified jog frequency PF (defined maximum frequency)
TP on time > 0.5 seconds
When using this operating mode, you can control the distance manually by keeping thestate at function block input TP at "1" for a time > 0.5 seconds.
Switch the TP input to 1 for a duration > 0.5 seconds.
The motor starts moving for the duration of 0.5 s with start frequency FS and is thenaccelerated to jog frequency PF with frequency change RF.
End jog mode with TP = 0.
Number of steps in jog mode P1 reached
If the number of steps P1 is reached after the deceleration phase ends, device output
Q1/2 will be switched off.

EN
PF

FS
QF
> 0.5 s
TP

AC
Q1/2
B

C

D

E

A

Figure 183: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified jog frequency, P1 after deceleration phasereached
PF: Jog frequency
FS: Start frequency
QF: Current output frequency
TP: Jog command
AC: Positioning job active
A: Complete distance if active TP on time is longer than 0.5 sec.
B: During the first 0.5 sec, the distance is traversed with specified start frequency FS.
C: This is followed by the acceleration phase with RF all the way to the jog frequency.
D: Motion continues with jog frequency PF.
E: The deceleration phase is initiated with jog command TP = 0 and the frequency of the pulse
sequence is reduced to the start frequency with BF.

376

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Number of steps in jog mode P1 not reached:
If the number of steps P1 has not been reached after the deceleration phase ends, themotor will be driven with start frequency FS until the specified number of steps isreached. Device output Q1/2 will not be switched off until then.

EN
PF

FS
QF
> 0.5 s
TP

AC
Q1/2
B

C

D

E

F

A

Figure 184: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified jog frequency, P1 not reached after deceleration phase
PF: Jog frequency
FS: Start frequency
QF: Current output frequency
TP: Jog command
AC: Positioning job active
A: Complete distance if active TP on time is longer than 0.5 sec.
B: During the first 0.5 sec, the distance is traversed with specified start frequency FS.
C: This is followed by the acceleration phase with RF all the way to the jog frequency.
D: Motion continues with jog frequency PF.
E: The deceleration phase is initiated with jog command TP = 0 and the frequency of the pulse
sequence is reduced to the start frequency with BF.
F: Distance after deceleration phase until the specified number of steps P1 is reached with start frequency FS.

How the run-on distance (phase F) is determinedP1 and the on time for jog mode TP=1 need to be added to the sample parameters
defined in "Parameters for jog operation."
FS = start frequency = 200 Hz
PF = 1000 Hz
RF = Acceleration frequency change = 500 mHz/step
BF = Frequency change in the braking phase = 2000 mHz/stepeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

377

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

P1 = Number of steps in jog mode = 6000
TP=1 on duration = 3 seconds
The sample parameters yield the following distance:
A: Complete distance = P1 = Number of steps in jog mode
B: Start phase with FS for 0.5 seconds = 100 steps
C: Acceleration phase with RF= 0.5 Hz/step to reach PF-FS= 800 Hz = 1600 steps
D: Jog frequency = 1000 Hz with an assumed on time of 3 seconds for TP=1 = 3000
steps
E: Deceleration phase with BF = 2 Hz/step to reach PF-FS= 800 Hz = 400 steps
F: P1-(B+C+D+E) = 6000 - 5100 = 900 steps
The run-on distance (phase F) is 900 steps.
Connecting a pulse output function block
PrerequisiteslA control relay with 24 VDC must be selected for the project.

Evaluation of a pulse output contact
You can use bit outputs AC (positioning job in progress) and E1 (error) to check whether
a positioning or jog mode job has been activated. You can use error output E1 to check
whether your parameters are correct.
Resetting a pulse output function block
To reset (Reset) the pulse output function block, switch the EN bit input from 1 to 0
See also→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "VC - Value limitation ", page 384→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364

378

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.4.4 TC - Three step controller
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 three-step controller function
blocks, TC01 through TC32.
TC three-step controllers feature three states for the manipulated
variable. These states are implemented with two function block outputs Q1, Q2, of which either none or only one can be closed. I1 is the
setpoint and I2 is the actual value. X = I1 - I2 yields control deviation
X, which is applied on the actual controller. The controller will thendetermine the manipulated variable for function block outputs Q1, Q2.

Figure 185: Three-step controller schematic diagram
I1: Setpoint
I2: Actual value

Operating principle
The following timing diagram shows how the three-step controller behaves.

Figure 186: Timing diagram for three-step controller
XH/ -XH: Distance X from switching point
H1: Hysteresis 1 for XH
H2: Hysteresis 2 for -XH
Y(t): Operating points for Q1/ Q2

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

379

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Q1: Switch output X = positive
Q2: Switch output X = negative

Operating ranges
X > XHQ1 switches one to X < ( XH – H1)l X < –XH
Q2 switches one to X > -XH + H2l

If the switching conditions for Q1 and Q2 are not met, both outputs will be switched off
to 0.
Only Q1, or Q2, or neither one can be switched on at any onetime.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
(DWord)1: Activates the function block.

I1
I2
H1 Chaser
light on times
H2 Chaser
light on times
XH

Setpoint
Actual value
Hysteresis value 1-32768…+32767-32768…+32767
0…32767

Hysteresis value 2

0…32767

Distance from switching point

TC

Cycle time

0…32767
Contact distance
0…65535
In 0.1 ms; value of 10 = 1 s. If the value =0, the function block will go throughevery cycle.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Numeric inputs
Constant
Markers MD, MW, MB
Analog inputs IA
Analog output QA
Numeric output from a different FB

I1, I2, H1, H2, XH, TC
x
x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

380

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET
SN _ Output bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit
nN - NET station n marker
ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlight
I Bit input
Q Bit output from another FB

EN
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description
(Bit)
Q1
Q2

Switch output 1
Switch output 2

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Operators
Bit outputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET
SN _ Output bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bitnN
ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - display brightness indicators
I Bit input
Q Bit output from another FB

Q1, Q2
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

381

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Heating and cooling
Actual value I1 (temperature) is higher than setpoint I2, meaning that cooling isrequired.
Function block output Q1 =1 switches the cooling system on as soon as (I1-I2) > XH.
Actual value I1 (temperature) is lower than setpoint I2, meaning that heating is required.
Function block output Q2 = 1 switches the heating system on as soon as (I1-I2) > XH
Hysteresis values H1 and H2 determine how long cooling or heating is required and,accordingly, the cooling/heating energy content.

Figure 187: Signal diagram for three-step controller

382

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Level control
The contents of a liquid tank must not fall below or exceed a specific liquid level.
The ACTUAL value (level) is higher than the SETPOINT, meaning that liquid needs to bedrained. Function block output Q1 switches the drain valve on.
The ACTUAL value (level) is lower than the SETPOINT, meaning that liquid needs to be
replenished. Function block output Q2 switches the supply valve on.
Hysteresis values H1 and H2 define how long liquid needs to be drained or replenished.
This also means that they define the volume before draining and after replenishing.
See also→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "VC - Value limitation ", page 384→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

383

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.4.5 VC - Value limitation
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 value limitation function
blocks, VC01 through VC32.
These function blocks can be used to output values within specific limits.

Operating principle
The lower and upper limits are set using function block inputs SL (Low) and SH (High).
The value at function block output QV will follow the value at function block input I1 aslong as the latter falls within the limits. Values outside of the range will be truncatedaccordingly.
EN = 0 will carry out a reset and function block output QV will be set to a value of 0.

Figure 188: Figure: Restriction of the input values to the specified limits.
SL: Lower limit
SH. Upper limit

384

I1: Input function at I1
QV: Bounded output function at QV

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

Input valueSH

Upper Threshold Value

SL

Lower threshold value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit inputxxx

Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x

385

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note(DWord)QV

Outputs the value at input I1 within the set lim- Integer value range:its.
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block
will be enabled and function block
input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

386

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "DC - PID controller", page 351→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

387

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5 Data and register function blocks
6.1.5.1 BC - Block compare
The data block comparator (BC = Block Compare) function block compares two contiguous marker ranges. For this you define the number of bytes to be compared. The
comparison is carried out in byte format for marker types MB, MW and MD.
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 32 block comparison function
blocks,BC01 through BC32. This function block compares values fromtwo contiguous marker ranges. Moreover, this comparison can be
carried out within the entire marker range (1024 bytes).
Addresses are byte-based, including the range that can only be
addressed with words or double words (MB513 through MB1024).
(MB513 through MB1024), refer to section → Section "Organizing
marker ranges", page 202.
Operating principle
The reference data block starts at the source address specified at input I1. This data
block will be compared with the data block that starts at the destination address specified at I2. You can use constants or operands, in which case the data value of the operand at runtime will be used as the corresponding address.
The NO input is used to specify the size of the data block (number of elements) in bytes.
If the comparison of two data blocks finds that there is no difference between them, theBoolean output EQ will be set to 1.
The following operands can be used:
Constant NU
l ACTUAL value ..QV.. of a function blockl Analog input IA.. or analog output QA..
l Timer constantl

Example value 0
A value <0> at input I1 means that the reference data block for the comparison starts at
MB01. A value of <100> at I2 means that the target data block for the compare operation begins at MB101.
Marker byte example
You wish to compare the content of marker bytes MB11-MB14 with the content ofmarker bytes MB381-MB384 (MD96). A value <10> at input I1 means that the reference data block for the comparison starts at MB11. A value <380> at I2 means that388

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

the destination data block for the comparison starts at MB381.
Marker addresses are always specified using byte addresses.
easySoft 7 no longer supports addresses without an offset.
UpdateAfter importing projects created with earlier versions of the programming software
easySoft, check whether the "without offset" address type was used. If it was, you willneed to reprogram the relevant parameters and replace the marker operands with constants.
Offset calculation for addressing marker words
Offset = MW (x-1)*2

Offset calculation for addressing marker double words
Offset = MD (x-1)*4

Parameter error due to incorrect number or offset definition
Bad parameter configurations will be output at program runtime via error outputs E1
through E3.
This type of parameter configuration error will occur, for example, when the number of
elements exceeds the source or destination range or, due to an offset error, the sourceor destination range falls outside the available marker range.
Application example
Comparing marker data blocks
I1

MB23

I2

MB30

NO

NU 4

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

389

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

Source range

First marker address (MB, MW, or MD) of
the reference data block oroffset added to marker byte MB01 whenusing one of the operands specified
above.
First marker address (MB, MW or MD) of
the destination data block oroffset to marker byte MB01 when defining
one of the operands stated in the table.

I2

Destination range

NO

Number of elements to be compared:
max. 192 bytes

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1

390

M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EQ
E1

E2

E3

EQ

1: if the data ranges are identical.
0: if the data ranges are not identical.
Error output
1: if the number of elements exceeds thesource or target range.

The range limits are checked irrespectiveof the edge change on the Boolean EN
input.
Error output
The range limits are checked irrespective
1: if the source and target range overlap.
of the edge change on the Boolean EN
input.
Error output
The range limits are checked irrespective
1: if the source or destination range are outside of the edge change on the Boolean ENof the available marker range (offset error, or
input.
input NO is not configured i.e. has the value 0.
Equal
1: if the data ranges are identical.
0: if the data ranges are not identical.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

391

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter Description
set
Functionblock release
by EN isnecessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the state of function block input EN will be evaluated. If thecheckbox is disabled instead, the function
block will be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

Parameter dis- Constants can be edited on the device, as canplayfunction block parameters when using the EDP+ Callprogramming language.
enabledSimulation
possible392

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Note
This parameter ensures that when existing programs are copied, the functionality of the function blocks that are
carried over will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1
depending on the function block.

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a analog value comparator function block when using the EDP programming language
I 05-----------------------------Ä BC11EN

Figure 189: Wiring the enable coil
BC11E1o
BC11E2s
BC11E3j-----------------------Ä M 48
BC11EQ-BC11EN-----------------Ä M 49

Figure 190: Wiring the contacts

Example of an AR configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
BC11 +>I1>I2>NO

Figure 191: Parameters on the display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
BC11 blockcompare
+
>I1

>I2
>NO

Function block: Data block comparator, number 11
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
Start of comparison range 1; the data block with the start address present at
input I1 is compared with the data block with the start address present at
input I2.
Start of comparison range 2
Number of elements to be compared in bytes per range, number: 1 - 383

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

393

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "FT - PT1-Signal smoothing filter ", page 358→ Section "TC - Three step controller", page 379→ Section "VC - Value limitation ", page 384→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "PO - Pulse output", page 364→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410

394

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.2 BT - Block transfer
The block transfer function block is used to transfer values from one marker range toanother (copy data). The marker ranges can be overwritten with a particular value (datainitialization). The following marker types can be transferred and overwritten: MB, MW
and MD.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 Block Transfer function
blocks BT01...BT32.
The block transfer function copies values from one marker
range to a different, contiguous market range when the CPY(copy) operating mode is enabled. The source range and target
range are allowed to overlap.
When the INI (initialization) mode is enabled instead, the function block copies the content of a marker byte to a different,
continuous marker range.
The transfer is carried out bytewise.
Operating principle
Data is transferred from the source address specified at function block input I1 to thedestination address specified at function block input I2. The NO input is used to specify
the size of the data block in bytes.
Transfer with offset
The source address for the copy or initialization is specified at function block input I1,
while the destination address is specified at function block input I2. Within this context,
the numeric value of the operand at runtime will be interpreted as the offset to be added
to marker byte MB01.
Example with a value of "0"
A value 0 at input I1 means that the source data block for the transfer starts at MB01. A
value 10 at I2 means that the destination data block for the transfer starts at MB11.
With the offset information you can address marker ranges(for example MB380), which you can not address when using
marker operands (direct addressing).
Marker byte example
You wish to transfer the content of marker bytes MB1-MB4 with the content of marker
bytes MB381-MB384 (MD96). A value 0 at input I1 means that the source data blockfor the transfer starts at MB01. A value 380 at I2 means that the destination address forthe transfer starts at MB381.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

395

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Offset calculation for addressing marker words
Offset = MW (x-1)*2

Offset calculation for addressing marker double words
Offset = MD (x-1)*4

Parameter error due to incorrect number or offset definition
Incorrect parameters are indicated whilst the program is running via the E1 - E3 error
outputs.
Parameter errors of this kind occur, for example, if the number of elements to be transferred exceeds the source or destination range, or when, due to an offset error, thesource and destination range are outside of the available marker range.
Transfer function blocks always copy or initialize marker
bytes, and never marker words or double words. This transfer
behavior does not depend on the values at I1 and I2 (source
address and destination address). You can copy a marker
double word, e.g., MD 12 to MD 96, by copying 4 marker bytes
with the function block.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled

T_(DWord)Triggering the transfer on a rising edge

I1

Source address

I2

NO

Offset to marker byte MB01 when using
for the definition one of the aforementioned operands
Destination address
Offset to marker byte MB01 when using
for the definition one of the operands
stated in the table
Number of elements to be initialized or copied. Integer value range
Operating mode INI: 1…+1024 Byte
Operating mode CPY: 1…+1024 Byte

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.

396

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description

Note

INI

Initialize

Initializes the destination range with abyte value that is stored at the source
address. The length of the source range
is fixed at one byte. NO defines the lengthof the destination range.

CPY

Copy

Copies a data block from a source to a
destination range. NO defines the size ofthe data block to be copied.

Copy mode, operating mode = CPY
In Copy mode, the function block copies the complete data range of the size specified at
NO from the source range to the destination range. You specify the start of the source
range and the destination range via I1 (source address) and I2 (destination address).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

397

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example transfer with offset
Copying a marker data block (2 bytes) with a variable offset definition for the marker
ranges.
The content of the marker bytes MB14 + MB15 are to be copied with a variable offset
that is defined via the output QV of counter relay C3.
I1
I2
NO

NU14
C3

NU 2

Initialization mode, operating mode = INI
In initialization mode, the function block takes a byte value that is stored at the source
address (input I1) and copies it to a destination range. The destination range is specified
at input I2, and the length is defined by the value at input NO. The exact same source
byte value (MB) is then copied to every single byte in the destination range.
If you select a type MD or MW marker operand as the source
address, the function block always uses the content of theleast significant byte for the initialization. If, for example, you
assign MD 6 to I1, the function block initializes with the content
of marker byte MB21.
Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
E1

E2

E3

Error output
1: if the number of elements exceeds thesource or destination range.

The range limits are checked irrespectiveof the edge change on the Boolean T_
input. No data blocks are initialized or
copied if an error occurs.
Cannot be evaluated
The source and target ranges are
Originally used as an error output in previous
allowed to overlap for a copy operation;versions and kept due to compatibility reasons. no error message will be generated at E2.
Error output
The range limits are checked irrespective
1: if the source or destination range are outside of the edge change on the Boolean T_of the available marker range (offset error, or
input. No data blocks are initialized or
input NO is not configured i.e. has the value 0. copied if an error occurs.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n

398

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

xx

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a configuration for a BT block transfer function block on the device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
BT07 INI +
>I1
>I2
>NO

Figure 192: Parameters on the display

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

399

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
BT07 block transfer
INI
+
>I1
>I2
>NO

Function block: block transfer, number 07
Operating mode: INI - Initialize
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
Start address of source range or initialization markers (MB,MW,MD)
Start address destination range
Number of elements to be written in bytes per range, number: 1…383

Example of a block transfer function block when using the EDP programming language
The trigger coil is connected to a device input.
I 05-----------------------------Ä BT07T_

Figure 193: Wiring the trigger coil

BT07E1o
BT07E2s
BT07E3--------------------------Ä M 42

Figure 194: Wiring the contacts

The messages of the function block are sent as a group message to a marker M42.
See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410→ Section "Retention function", page 578→ Section "Organizing marker ranges", page 202

400

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.3 DB - Data function block
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 data function blocks
DB01…DB32.
This function block makes it possible to copy bytes, words,
or double words to an operand for only one cycle.
Operating principle
When there is a rising edge at function block input T_, the value at function block input
I1 will be passed to an operand connected to function block output QV. The operand willkeep that value until the next time it is overwritten,
meaning it can be used, for example, to save reference values for function blocks.
Note that the data function block only transfers the value in the
program cycle in which it detects a rising edge. When the operand linked with output QV is overwritten by the program after
the value is transferred, the value transferred with the data
function block is lost.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabledT_

A rising edge at this input will transfer thevalue of function block input I1 to the operand
connected to QV.

(DWord)I1

Value that is transferred to output QV when the Integer value range:
function block is triggered.
-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)

xeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

4016. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: transfer confirmation, if function block output T_ is 1.

(DWord)
QV

Passes the value at function block input I1 tothe operand connected to QV during the program cycle in which a rising edge is detected
at T_.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

402

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x
x

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter set
Function block release by
EN is necessary

No edge evaluation of T bit
input
Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
Data blocks can be operated with retentive actual values.
To select the number of data blocks, go to Project view/System settings/Retention area.
The retentive actual value will require 4 bytes of memory space. If a data block is retentive, the actual value will be retained when the operating mode changes from RUN to
STOP and when the power supply is switched off. If the device is started in RUN mode,the data block will continue to work with the actual value stored in non-volatilememory.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

403

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Signal diagram

Figure 195: Signal diagram of data function block
Legend for Figure
1: Value at input DB..>I1
2: Trigger coil DB…T_
3: Value on DB…QV>Example of a data function block with programming method EDP
The trigger coil is addressed via the network.
GT01Q1-------------------------Ä DB16T

Figure 196: Wiring the trigger coil

The output of the data function block DB16Q1 is assigned to the input D02 EN of the text
display function block.
DB16Q1-------------------------Ä D 02EN

Figure 197: Wiring of the function block contact

Example of a DB configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.
DB16 +>I1
QV>

Figure 198: Parameters on the display

404

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
DB16 data function block Function block: Data function block, number 16+
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
>I1
Input value
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647>I2
Outputs the value of DB..I1 when triggered.
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410→ Section "Retention function", page 578→ Section "Organizing marker ranges", page 202

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

405

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.4 MX - Data multiplexer
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 data multiplexer function
blocks, MX01 through MX32. You can use a data multiplexer toselect a value from eight input values, I1 through I8. The function block will then provide this value at output QV for further
processing.
Use input K (channel number) to specify which input will beconnected through to the output. Channel number 0 will connect input I1 to QV, while channel number 7 will connect input
I8 to QV.
The MX data multiplexer can be used for the sequential control
of up eight to positioning sections that are transferred to the I1
input of the PO Pulse output function block.

Operating principle
If there is a signal state of 1 at the EN coil, the data value of the operand connected to
input Ix will be connected through to output QV. In this case, the value at function block
input K will reference input Ix.
You can change the channel number and accordingly connect a different input value
through to QV even when the EN input is set.
If there is a signal state of "0" at the EN coil, output QV will be set to a signal state of "0".
The function block will carry out a selection of one out of eight.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)K

406

Channel number
References the function block input you want
(I1 through I8).
channelFunction Block Input
0
I1
1
I2

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Integer value range: 0…7

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description
2
3
4
5
6
7
I1…I8

Note

i3
I4
I5
I6
I7
I8

Input value

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

407

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

E1

Description

Note

Error output
1: with incorrect parameters , if
0 > K or K > 7

Output QV is reset to 0 if there is a parameter error.

Output value of the selected channel

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647(DWord)QVAssigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputsxx

MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

408

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410→ Section "Retention function", page 578→ Section "Organizing marker ranges", page 202

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

409

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.5 RE - Recipe records
Only available on easySoft Version 7.10 or higher.
If this function block is not being shown in the leftmost pane in easySoft 7, make surethat you are using firmware version 1.10 or higher for the project.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 8 recipes RE01…RE08.
Normally, the word "recipe" is used to refer to a combination ofingredients with quantities, temperatures, and times that is used tomake a product – especially a food dish. In manufacturing, aRecipe usually refers to a specific product model or a specificmethod. and describes a group of various parameters for the relevant product or method type. These parameters are in turn filledwith concrete values, which results in one or more data records.
In real-life applications, recipes are used to make it possible toquickly switch between production processes in production systems. The selection is made by the corresponding device operator
on the device screen, and, if necessary, it is also possible toenable the operator to edit parameters for a production process.
Recipes cannot be edited at runtime. Neither the recipe parameters nor the values in the records can be changed.
Operating principle
When there is a rising edge at T_, the value at function block input NO will be read. NO
determines which record (i.e., which recipe) will be read in the function block and output at function block outputs D1 through D8. A maximum of one recipe with a maximumof 32 records can be stored per instance (each record consists of 8 values).
If there is no value at function block input NO, or if there is a value that addresses arecord that does not exist and the value is applied with T=1, the function block will signal an error at E1. This error at E1 will then be cleared as soon as there is a correct
value at NO. Please note that the values in a record can only be edited in easySoft 7.
Data2
Data3
Data4
Data5
Data6
Data7
Data8
NO Data1
1
2
3
4
5
…
32

1
100
2200
-6000
-84987…
-893652
250
1750
21474836-31789…
-356978

4500
455
-333
-74836
-5255
…
21

3572
3478
45
0
-45
…
-13

1564389
34
55
647
768
…
34999

Records cannot be modified at runtime.
410

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

0967
46
1750
232
235
…
-476

5447
3
255
78
66
…
35879

79
44
266
-32999-234…
-637

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

T_

1: Activates the function block.
0: Resets all function block outputs.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Trigger input
When there is a rising edge at T_, the value atfunction block input NO will be read. There
must be a valid value at function block input
NO before T is set to 1 – otherwise, the function block will signal an error at E1.

(DWord)NO

The number of the recipe with the record thatshould be output at function block outputs D1
through D8.

Numberof records
1…32

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarmx

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

411

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1
RY

E1

1: if T_=1;
0: if T_=0 or E1=1 or EN=0;
1: The record for the requested recipe with number NO has been loaded.
0: No recipes are loaded.
0: The value at NO has changed, but the record
for the recipe has not been loaded and is notpresent at D1 through D8.
Error
1: If the recipe with requested number NO
does not exist or the value range of NO isexceeded.
0: As soon as there is a value at NO withwhich the record in a valid recipe can beaddressed.

(DWord)D1…D8Values in the record of the recipe selectedwith NO.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)412

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

N - Network marker bit2)x

LE - Output backlightxxx

Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.
The "Function block release by EN isnecessary" option is enabled bydefault.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Parameter set

Simulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

413

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
Recipes are parts of the parameter set and are accordingly stored retentively as part ofthe project.
See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "DB - Data function block", page 401→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423

414

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.6 SR - Shift register
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 shift
register function blocks, SR01 …
SR32.
These function blocks can be used toshift bits or double words by one position with every clock pulse. You canselect the BIT or DWORD operating
mode with a parameter. To set the shift
direction, you will need to activate
either function block input FP (forward
pulse) or function block input BP (backward pulse). The values to be acceptedin the shift register are located at different inputs depending on the shift direction and operating mode.
The shift register has a linear structure. If, for example, a clock-pulsed bit
operation adds a value is at one end of
the register, another value is dropped
at the other end.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

415

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operating principle
SR function block - shift register (BIT)
A rising edge at FP (ForwardPulse) causes the bit value to be accepted at data input FD(ForwardData) into the first register field Q1. The original contents of the register fields
are then moved by one field in the direction of the next higher field numbers.
A rising edge at the BP (BackwardPulse) transfers the bit value at the BD (BackwardData) data input to the last register field Q8. The original contents of the register
fields are then moved by one field in the direction of the next lower field numbers.
Example: Shift register BIT mode, forward

Figure 199: Shift register SR..: Forwards operation in BIT operating mode

① Initial situation

②

③

④

The "Function block release by EN is necessary" option is enabled.
– SR..EN is not activated, the function block is not active.
– SR..Q7 contains a data bit 1, a 0 is contained in the other register fields.
Transfer of a data bit– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– SR..FD has the value 1.
– With the forwards pulse from SR..FP the register field SR..Q1 shifts the content of all
register fields one place forwards and accepts the 1 from SR..FD.
Transfer of a data bit– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– SR..FD has the value 0.
– With the forwards pulse from SR..FP the register field SR..Q1 shifts the content of all
register fields one place forwards and accepts the 0 from SR..FD.
Reset of the register– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– Activating SR..RE clears the content of the register.

SR function block - shift register (DWORD)
A rising edge at FP (ForwardPulse) causes the double word value at data input I1 to betransferred to the first register field D1. The original contents of the register fields are

416

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

then moved by one field in the direction of the next higher field numbers. A rising edge
at the BP (BackwardPulse) transfers the double word value at data input I2 to the lastregister field D8. The original contents of the register fields are then moved by one fieldin the direction of the next lower field numbers.
Example: Shift register DW mode, backward

Figure 200: Shift register SR..: Backwards operation in DW operating mode

① Initial situation

②

③

④

The "Function block release by EN is necessary" option is enabled.
– SR..EN is not activated, the function block is not active.
– SR..D2 contains the value 8, a 0 is contained in the other register fields.
Transfer of value– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– SR..I2 has the value 10.
– With the backwards pulse from SR..BP the register field SR..D8 shifts the content of all
register fields one place back and accepts the 10 from SR..I2.
Transfer of value– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– SR..I2 has the value 52.
– With the backwards pulse from SR..BP the register field SR..D8 shifts the content of all
register fields one place back and accepts the 52 from SR..I2.
Reset of the register– SR..EN is activated, the function block is active.
– Activating SR..RE clears the content of the register.

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

FP

Forward Pulse
SingleeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

417

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description
BP
RE

FD
BD
(DWord)Note

Clock input, shift register forward
Backward Pulse
Clock input, shift register backwardReset
1 clears the entire output register Q1...Q8 andD1...D8.
Bit data input, shift register forward
Bit data input, shift register backward

I1

Input value for shift direction forwards

I2

Input value for shift direction backwards

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB

x
x
x
x
x

2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

418

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.comx6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operating modes
Description
BIT
DW

Note

Marker bit shift operation
Marker double word shift operation

The factory setting of this parameter is BIT.
The operating mode is determined by selecting different
function blocks:
SR - shift register (BIT) or
SR - shift register (DWORD)
and not with the parameters for the function block as is
usually the case.
If the BIT operating mode is selected, the inputs I1, I2 andoutputs D1-D8 are displayed. They have no function in
BIT mode! If they are assigned operands, these will haveno effect. The wiring of the SR function block (BIT) is carried out in the circuit diagram.
Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1…Q8
(DWord)Output of the bit register fields 1 - 8

D1…D8Register values for the shift register 1 through8

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

419

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.

420

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Application example
Different workpieces are moved along a production line with several machining stations. An operator determines the work required for the individual workpieces, createsa production code for it and writes it into a shift register. The workpieces reach themachining stations in this order. When the workpiece is changed, the stations read therequired production steps from their permanently assigned register field. When workpiece 1 moves to the first station, the forwards pulse input coil SR01FP and the shift
register SR01 receive production code 01 at input SR1I1 from the double word marker
MD11. Production code 1 is now at the register field SR01D1 for the first machining station which reads it from double word marker MD01. The finished workpiece is thentransferred to station 2. The shift register accepts the production code 2 for the next
workpiece.
Production code 1 moves one place forwards, as does the remaining register content. It
now stands at register output SR01D2. Double word marker MD02 gets it to production
station 2. The process is repeated for each further workpiece and for each further
machining station until the finished workpieces leave the line.
When using the EDP programming language, the coils are connected in the circuit
diagram:
The enable coil SR01EN is permanently active, the function block is not switched off.
Marker M09 switches the forwards pulse input coil SR01FP.
-------------------------------Ä SR01EN
M 09---------------------------Ä SR01FP

Figure 201: Circuit diagram with EDP programming language for user example 2

SR01 configuration on device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure. After defining shift register number 01, you set here the following
parameters:
The DW operating mode for the double word marker format.
l The double word markers for receiving the production code.
lSR01 DW +>I1 MD11>I2
D1> MD01
D2> MD02
D3> MD03
D4>
D5>
D6>
D7>
D8>

Figure 202: Parameters on the device display

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

421

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
SR01 shift register
DW
+
>I1

>I2

D1>

D2>
D3>
D4>
D5>
D6>
D7>
D8>

Function block: SR shift register, number 01
Operating mode: Double word
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERS menu
Input value DW forwards:
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Input value DW backwards:
Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
Register value 1 of the shift register,Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
for all registers
Register value 2
Register value 3
Register value 4
Register value 5
Register value 6
Register value 7
Register value 8

See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410→ Section "Retention function", page 578→ Section "Organizing marker ranges", page 202

422

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.5.7 TB - Table function
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 table function function blocks,
TB01 through TB32.
The table function block allows you to easily create and readtable entries in the form of double words (32 bit).
You can select a LIFO or FIFO function for read operations.
A table can contain up to 16 double words.

Operating principle
Writing to a table
The function block is enabled when EN=1. When the function block is enabled and there
is a rising edge at the function block input, the current value at function block input I1
will be added to the table. Every time there is an edge, a double word (32 bits) will beassigned a value.
It is permissible to simultaneously activate the EN coil and the WP coil with a risingedge.
Every new table entry will be appended after the last entry until the sixteenth entry isreached. At the same time, function block output QN will be incremented by 1. QN indicates the current number of entries. If I1 is added successfully, the input value that was
just entered will be output at function block output QV.
Once the maximum number of 16 table entries is reached, no more data will be added tothe table. If you want to keep making table entries in this scenario, you will first need toclear the entire table with a rising edge at function block input RE. Function block output
QN will be set to 0 in this case.
Reading from the table
A table can be read from the table's beginning or end.
When there is a rising edge at the RF coil, the oldest value in the table will be read andoutput at output QV (FIFO function).
The read operation deletes this value from the table and the actual number of entries isdecremented by 1 at the QN output.
A rising edge at the RL coil causes the most recent value entered in the table to be output at QV (LIFO function).
The read operation deletes this value from the table and the actual number of entries isdecremented by 1 at the QN output.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

423

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the

(Bit)
EN

Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled
WP

RF

RL

RE

Trigger coil
Rising edge: The value at I1 will be added tothe table and output at function block output
QV. QN will be incremented by 1.
Trigger coil
Rising edge: The oldest value in the table will
be output at function block output QV (FIFO
function). QN will be decremented by 1 witheach read operation.
Trigger coil
Rising edge: The most recent value in the table
will be output at function block output QV(LIFO function). QN will be decremented by 1with each read operation.
Reset
Rising edge: The entire table will be cleared.
Function block output QN will be set to 0.

(DWord)I1

Input value to be transferred to the table.

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

424

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

The function block and its parameters
Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
TE
TF
(DWord)1: if the table is empty.
1: if the table is full.

QV

Read operation:
The value read from the start or end of thetable.
Write operation: The input value just entered.
Current number of table entries

QN

Integer value range: 0…16

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

425

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

N - Network marker bit2)x

LE - Output backlightxxx

Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Configuration/time range

Description

Note

Function block release by EN
is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, thestate of function block input EN
will be evaluated. If the checkbox
is disabled instead, the function
block will be enabled and function
block input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carried over will be retained. The
parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a table function when using the EDP programming language
While in the Programming view:
Position a TB function block on a coil field in your circuit diagram.
In the Properties field window select the required function block number on the Circuit Diagram Element tab.
Assign a numerical operand to the function block input I1 so that a numerical value
can be transferred.
Connect the coils TBxxEN, TBxxWP, TBxxRF etc. with the contact suitable foractivation.
If required, write a comment for the selected operand.
If you wish to check if a table is full or empty, you must also wire this function block as
a contact.
Position the function block on a contact field and select the same function blocknumber in the Circuit Diagram Element tab that you have assigned to the coil.
If required, change the switch function of the contact from break to make contact.

426

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

If necessary, position the function block on a contact field and associate TBxxTE(table empty) and TBxxTF (table full) with a Boolean operand suitable for evaluation tasks.
Whether you position the function relay first of all in a coil field or contact field or
whether you make the entries in the Parameters tab of a coil or a contact is not important. It is only important that you have selected the same function block number if you
also want to configure the same function block.
See also→ Section "BC - Block compare", page 388→ Section "BT - Block transfer", page 395→ Section "TB - Table function", page 423→ Section "MX - Data multiplexer", page 406→ Section "SR - Shift register", page 415→ Section "RE - Recipe records ", page 410→ Section "Retention function", page 578→ Section "Organizing marker ranges", page 202

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

427

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.6 NET Function Blocks
6.1.6.1 GT - Get values from NET
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide 32 function blocks GT01…GT32(GET).
The list of operands and function blocks will only include thisfunction block if the project view features a NET consisting ofat least two devices.
With function block GT you can poll a 32-bit value from the NET
network. The function block automatically fetches the data designated for itself as soon as it is provided on the NET byanother NET station using PUT function block PT.
Operating principle
The GET function block can be used to read a value from the NET. This value is sent
beforehand by the corresponding PUT function block of another NET station. The sentvalue can be the content of a function block output, a marker byte, word or double word.
Each GET function block is assigned exactly one PUT function block in the parameters
for the function block. At runtime, only one single EN enable signal is required, and thereceived value will be provided each cycle.
The SC function block only functions if the NET is running properly.

428

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: if a new value transferred from the NET network
is present. Only valid for one processing cycle

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

429

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description

Note(DWord)QVValue received from NET

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputsxx

MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog outputxx

I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
NET-ID: The number of the transValue range: 01…08
mitting NET station.
PT: Number of the transmit function Possible function block numblock (e.g. PT 20) by which the trans- bers: 01...32
mitting NET station puts a value onto
the NET.

Function Block Input

Simulation not possible

430

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

To set parameters, follow the steps below:
Uniquely define the sender providing the value for the GET function block. To dothis, go to Programming view/Get value from the NET parameters tab /Function
block input section/NET-ID and select the number of the transmitting NET station.
Select also the number of the transmitting PUT function block from the PT dropdown menu.
Connect the QV function block output to an operand to which you want to pass thereceived value.
Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "PT - Put values to NET", page 432→ Section "GT - Get values from NET", page 428→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

431

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.6.2 PT - Put values to NET
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 function blocks PT01…PT32(PUT).
The list of operands and function blocks will only include thisfunction block if the project view features a NET consisting ofat least two devices.
These function blocks can be used to pass an operand, whichmust not be longer than 32 bits, to the NET. The operand value
is transferred and automatically read by the corresponding
GET function block GT of another NET station.
Operating principle
The operand being transmitted needs to be connected to function block input I1. To dothis, you can use the output from another function block, e.g., an arithmetic function
block. Using a marker double word such as MD1 will make it possible to simultaneously transmit 32 marker bits, M01 through M32.
To transmit marker bits M01 through M96, you would need three PUT function blocks inorder to transmit marker double words MD1, MD2, and MD3
You can trigger the transmission with a rising edge at function block input T_. In orderfor the function block to do another transmission, it would then need to detect anotherrising edge.
As an alternative, you can have the device do transmissions that depend on the cycle
time, i.e., by specifying the number of cycles after which the transmission should occur.
This makes it possible to optimize net loads and to transmit values that are not subject
to change as frequently less often.
These options are selected in the parameters for the function block.
The SC function block only functions if the NET is running properly.

432

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
T_

1: Activates the function block.
Trigger coil
When there is a rising edge, the function block will temporarily save the input value at I1 and pass it to the NET.

(DWord)I1

Input value that is to be put onto the NET.

Integer value
range:-2,147,483,648
to+2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

433

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1
AC

E1

1: if the status of the trigger coil
PT..T_ is also 1.
1: As soon as a transmit job is activated, or as soon as one is abortedwith an error message at output E1.
Error - NET transmission error
1: If the value could not be sent andthe previously set AC output changes
from a state of 1 back to 0.
The output will remain with a state of
1 until a new transmit job is activated.

This bit output is used for checking whether the required value
was transferred to the NET.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Function block release by
EN is necessary

434

Description

Note

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description

Note
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

No edge evaluation of T bit

When this checkbox is enabled, thedata will be transmitted to the NET
input
based on cycle times. It will betransmitted every nth cycle, where n
can be defined in the parameters forthe function block.
If the checkbox is disabled, manualtransmission triggering with an edgeat function block input T_ will be
required.
Write data to NET after each … Can only be selected if
No edge<n> cycle
evaluation of T bit input is enabled.
Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation not possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "GT - Get values from NET", page 428→ Section "PT - Put values to NET", page 432→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

435

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.6.3 SC - Synchronizing clock via NET
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide exactly one function block SC01
(Send Clock).
This function block allows you to selectively place the date andtime onto the network. All other NET stations accept the date
and time of the transmitting station and set their device realtime clock accordingly.
Operating principle
If the function block's trigger coil is activated, the current date, day of the week, andtime of the transmitting station will be sent to the NET network. The transmitting station
will perform this operation as soon as the seconds counter of the device's real-timeclock goes through zero to the next minute. The other stations accept this value. This
process can be repeated as often as desired. In this case, the function block input trigger coil must be changed from a state of "0" to a state of "1" again.
Accuracy of time synchronization
The maximum time deviation between the functional stations is 5 s.
The SC function block only functions if the NET is running properly.

436

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
T_

1: Activates the function block.
Trigger coil
When there is a rising edge, the function block
will transmit the current date, day of the week,
and time to the NET.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

437

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: If the transmit job has been completed.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation not possible

Other
Retention

438

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block does not recognize retentive data.
User example
The trigger pulse is set at 03:32:21 (hh:mm:ss). The other stations are synchronized at
03:33:00. The time is accepted by all stations.
See also→ Section "GT - Get values from NET", page 428→ Section "PT - Put values to NET", page 432→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

439

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7 Other function blocks
6.1.7.1 AL - Alarm function block
You can use the alarm function block to send e-mails to specific recipients in a targetedmanner when specific events occur.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 alarm function blocks, AL01
through AL32. One e-mail with a defined subject and a defined160-character message text can be sent with each function
block.
This means that a maximum of 32 different messages can besent to any recipient of your choice. The subject and the message text are both defined in the parameters for the AL function
block.
The program triggers the actual sending.
Operating principle
In order for the e-mails to be sent, the LAN port on a suitable network must be configured and connected.
A rising edge at function block input T_ will cause the message to be sent. In order forthis to work, however, function block output BY must equal to 0.
Message sending starts after each rising edge at T. A maximum of three send attempts
will be made per trigger.
If the e-mail is sent successfully, there will be corresponding feedback signals at BY
and E1. Otherwise, the job will be aborted, also with corresponding feedback signals at
BY and E1.
Deactivating the function block will not result in e-mail sending operation being aborted.
BY will have a state of 1 as long as the job is in progress, preventing any new send jobs
from being accepted. If the send job is not completed successfully, an error will besignaled at function block output E1 with E1 = 1.
The recipients and the e-mail server settings need to be set in the hardware configuration.
To do this, a base device needs to be selected in the Project view and the relevant parameters must be configured under the E-Mail tab.
For more information on this topic, please refer to → "E-mail function", page 670.

440

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN
is necessary
parameter must first be enabledT_

A rising edge will start the communication job.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm

x
x
x
x
x
x

LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

441

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1
E1

BY

1: If function block input EN = 1.
Error output
The send job could not be completed successfully after three attempts.
Cleared if the job is completed without errors or if the EN input is set to
"0".
BUSY
1: The most recent send job is still in progress.
0: The most recent send job has been completed.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter setxxx

Description

Function block release If this checkbox is enabled, the state offunction block input EN will be evalby EN is necessaryuated. If the checkbox is disabledinstead, the function block will beenabled and function block input EN
will not do anything.
Web server active as

The web server will be selectively
long as there is a state of 1 turned on and off based on AL_EN.
In order for this to work, the web server

442

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Note
This parameter ensures that when
existing programs are copied, thefunctionality of the function blocks
that are carried over will be
retained. The parameter will be
automatically set to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.
Turning off the web server saves
processing time

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set

Description

at input EN

must not be permanently enabled; go to→ "Webserver tab", page 646
Constants can be edited on the device,
as can function block parameters whenusing the EDP programming language.
E-Mail; there are no other options as ofthis writing
Used to select one of the three possible
recipient groups. Each recipient groupcontains all the detailed information
required in order to send an e-mail.
1 recipient group; there are no otheroptions as of this writing

Parameter display+ Call enabledType of information transmission
Recipient assignment

Subject
Message text

Note

Each recipient group needs to be
set up in the hardware configuration. To do this, click on "Project" – select a base device – clickon the "E-Mail" tab. You can thenconfigure the e-mail server andone or more e-mail recipients foreach of the three available groups.

The e-mail's subject
The text must not exceed 160 characters.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
See also→ Section "E-mail function", page 670→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "ST - Set cycle time", page 503

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

443

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.2 BV - Boolean operation
This function block can be used to define logical operators between the input signal andoutput signal.
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 (Boolean operation) function
blocks, BV01 through BV32. This means that the values at function block inputs BV…I1 and BV…I2 will be connected with a
Boolean operator. This function block can be used to mask specific bits from values, detect bit patterns, or change bit patterns.
Operating principle
This function block makes it possible to apply Boolean operators to bit groups (bytes,
words, or even double words). The size of the parameters at I1 and I2 must be thesame, in which case a bitwise AND, OR, XOR, or NOT operator will be applied to them,with the result being output at QV.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description Note
(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the The checkbox for thefunction block.
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

First value

If one operand assumes a negative value, such as 10 (dec) the processing unit forms the two's complement of the amount.
ExampleI2

Second value-10 (dec) = 10000000 00000000 00000000 00001010 (bin)Two's complement = 11111111 11111111 11111111
11110110 (bin) = FFFFFFF6 (hex)Bit 32 is retained at 1 as a sign bit.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)

444

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)x

NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description
AND
OR
XOR
NOT

Note

AND operation
OR operation
Exclusive OR operation (XOR eXclusive OR - exclusive OR, either or)Inverts the individual bits of the value at I1. The inverted value isshown as a signed decimal value.

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
ZE

Zero
1: if the value of the function block output QV (the operation result) equals zero

(DWord)QVResult of the operation

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

445

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Value outputs

MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - MarkersxSN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example I1 AND I2 = QV
decimalbinaryI1 13 219
0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0011 1010 0011
I2 57 193
0000 0000 0000 0000 1101 1111 0110 1001
QV 4 897
0000 0000 0000 0000 0001 0011 0010 0001

446

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example I1 OR I2 = QV
decimalbinaryI1 13 219
0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0011 1010 0011
I2 57 193
0000 0000 0000 0000 1101 1111 0110 1001
QV 65 515
0000 0000 0000 0000 1111 1111 1110 1011
Example I1 XOR I2 = QV
decimalbinaryI1 13 219
0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0011 1010 0011
I2 57 193
0000 0000 0000 0000 1101 1111 0110 1001
QV 60 618
0000 0000 0000 0000 1110 1100 1100 1010
Example NOT I1 = QV
decimalbinaryI1 13 219
0000 0000 0000 0000 0011 0011 1010 0011
I2 –QV -13 220
1111 1111 1111 1111 1100 1100 0101 1100
See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

447

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.3 D - Text display
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 text display function blocks,
D01 through D32. Each of these function blocks can be used to
output a custom text display on the easyE4 display or on
another external display device and to allow custom input
using the device's P buttons.
Output options
Each text display consists of 6 lines, with 16 characters
each. In other words, 96 characters. These displays are
created using a text editor in easySoft 7, and can be used
to add graphic macros, texts, value displays, bar graphs,
running texts, message texts, date and time entries, etc. on
the work pane.
l Input options
These can be used to enable operators to enter value input
and use input buttons. Specific device P buttons can beused to implement user controls within this context.
lVarious character sets, such as Cyrillic, are available, as if theability to switch between various user languages. The EN function block input is used to call the function block in the program, and enables the text display.
Operating principle
Only one text display function block instance (i.e., only one of the maximum 32) can bedisplayed at any one time. This must be implemented with the programming, i.e., only
one of the text displays should be enabled with the EN input at any one time. If multiple
function blocks are enabled instead, the display priority and rolling time will be used todetermine which one is displayed. In this case, the program will follow the defined priorities to change from one enabled function block to the next every time after the set
rolling time elapses.

448

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

AI

1: Acknowledges an alarm message

The text page for the relevant function
block instance will be shown.
A rising edge will reset an alarm. Only as
long as the function block is still visible.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

449

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Returns the state of input EN.
Acknowledgement pulse for an alarm reset

Q1
AO

Only as long as the function block is stillvisibleAssigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Description

Note

Display priority

001…032

Rolling time [s]001…030

001: highest priority
032 lowest priority
Text display time
when the priority is the same
The text display will remain on thedevice display until it is acknowledged
via a rising edge at AI.

alarm

Highest priority; takes precedence over allother function blocks

Text display tab
The parameters for the text display function block can be configured in the Text display
parameters tab. Before you can configure a specific function block (e.g., D02), you willneed to select it in the Programming view. If it is the first time you are configuring thefunction block, the configuration dialog box will show an empty text display consistingof 6 lines with 16 characters each.
450

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 203: Text display parameters tab for text display function block in the Programming view

Display priority
If multiple text displays from D01 through D32 are enabled simultaneously, the display
priority will be used to determine the order in which they will be displayed on theeasyE4 device display. The text display with display priority 001 will have the highest
priority, while the text display with 032 will have the lowest priority. The text display
with the highest priority will be displayed as long as it is enabled (EN=1). The text display with the next highest priority will not be displayed until the function block input ofthe previous text display is disabled (EN=0). If multiple text function blocks with thesame priority are enabled, the corresponding texts will be displayed in a rolling patternbased on the rolling time. Moreover, when a text display with an alarm becomesenabled, it will be displayed on the device display immediately. (Please refer to the
Alarm parameter as well.)Rolling time [s]The rolling time parameter is used to specify how long text displays that have the exact
same display priority will be displayed on the device display. In order for this parameterto do something, multiple text displays must be enabled simultaneously (EN=1). Please
note that the rolling time is specified in seconds. Moreover, when a text display with analarm becomes enabled, it will be displayed on the device display immediately. (Pleaserefer to the Alarm parameter as well.)Alarm
If this checkbox is enabled, the corresponding text display will be displayed with absolute priority until the device operator acknowledges the alarm via a rising edge at input
AI. This function is only effective for visible function blocks
If multiple text displays with an alarm are enabled simultaneously, the first one thatwas enabled will remain on the device display until it is acknowledged by a rising edge
at input AI. The next text display will be shown then. Once all the text displays with analarm have been acknowledged by a rising edge at input AI, the text display with thehighest priority will be displayed on the device display.
It is important to keep in mind that the alarm acknowledgement function at function
block input AI always expects a rising edge. In other words, the AI function block input

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

451

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

does not need to be acknowledged immediately, but it does, however, need to beacknowledged by the next alarm reset at the latest.
Activation P buttons
The P buttons on the easyE4 device can be used for input and menu control purposes atruntime. You can use these parameters to individually define which buttons should beenabled, and the specific button configuration can be different for each individual text
display. Please note that the buttons are required only if you need the operator to enter
input or switch screens.
In order for the P buttons to work, they must be enabled with an enabled checkbox next
to Project view/System settings tab/P buttons – please refer to System settings: → Section "P buttons", page 576 as well.
Default colors tab
The easyE4 device display is a monochrome display. Accordingly, the only device display setting that can be changed under the Default colors tab in this case is the backlight color:
White
Green
l Red
l
l

If you are using an external display device or are showing the device display via a web
server, you will be able to configure additional color settings under the Default colorstab. To do this, you can select the predefined colors from the color table.
Left-click inside the color table to select the text color you want.
Right-click inside the color table to select the background color you want.
Please note that you can use the text display editor to configure additional color settings for each element. The color settings you configure in the editor will overwrite any
settings you configure here.

452

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 204: Default colors tab for text display

These will be the default color settings used in the text display editor.
Languages tab
You can configure the text display in such a way that the device operator will be able tochange the language on the device display or on other external device displays. To dothis, you will need to configure the appropriate settings under the Languages tab.
You can assign each language any name of your choice in the Language table column.
After doing so, you will need to open the text display editor and enter the text in each language for each text element being used.

Figure 205: Text display function block, language tab

Language selection during runtime
Allows device operators to switch language at runtime.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

453

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Type and operandUser to select an operand that will be used to select the target language. You can use
analog inputs or outputs from function blocks, marker bytes, marker words, marker
double words, analog outputs, or analog inputs as an operand.
MB1 is selected in the following example. Look at the "Value" column, which is filled out
by the system. When MB1 is assigned a value of 1 in the program, the language will beswitched to English.
Language table
ColumnLanguage
Download

Value
Default

Time and number formats

Description
In the language table, you can assign any name of your choice to each languagein the project.
Selecting <Yes> in the Download column will make the texts for the corresponding language be loaded onto the device. You can enter these texts foreach language in the text display editor under the tab for the selected display
and entry element.
If the assigned operand assumes this value at runtime, the display will switch
to the corresponding language.
You can select a language as the default language. Selecting <Yes> in the
Default column will make the corresponding language be selected wheneverthe current value of the operand cannot be found in the Value column. In otherwords, the default language will be used when a specific language is not selected.
The time and number formats for each language will be taken from theformats specified in the corresponding column. Every text that is configured willthen need to be entered in each of the defined languages when defining the text
element in the text editor.

Other
Signal diagram for text displays with different priorities
The following signal diagram shows four different text displays with different priorities.
The text display with the highest priority, D01, is displayed first. As soon as D01_EN=0,
other enabled text displays are output – D02 in this example. And as soon as a text display with an alarm is enabled, e.g., D06_EN=1, the text display will be displayed andremain until the alarm is acknowledged with D06_AI=1. After the alarm is acknowledged, the enable text display with the highest priority or with an alarm will be displayed instead. In this example, D07 will be displayed until it is acknowledged with
D07_AI=1, after which the display will switch to D02, i.e., the only remaining text display.

454

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 206: Signal diagram Text display

Signal diagram for text displays with identical priorities
Text displays D03, D04, and D05 all have the same priority of 3. They will accordingly bedisplayed according to their configured rolling time as soon as no other text displayswith a higher priority are enabled. In other words, D01_EN must be 0 and D02_EN mustbe 0 for this to happen in the example below. D03, D04, and D05 will be displayed inalternating order until a text display with a higher priority is enabled, e.g., D02_EN=1.

Figure 207: Signal diagram for text display with text function blocks with an identical priority of 3
Rolling time: D03 = 1s; D04 = 3s; D05 = 1s

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

455

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
ExampleEntering data on the display via a D text function block
If an easyE4 with a display is used with the text function block and the cursor buttons
are enabled in the configuration, operators will be able to enter data using these buttons. To do this, the input mode needs to be accessed by pressing the ALT button. You
can also simulate this with easySoft.

The input fields will then be highlighted in color or be shown with inverse colors.
To select an input field and enter data, the operator will need to use the arrow buttons.
The currently active cursor position will flash.
UP: The numeric value at the current cursor position will be incremented
DOWN: The numeric value at the current cursor position will be decremented
RIGHT: The next smaller decimal place will be selected or the input value to the right or
underneath will be selected
LEFT: The next larger decimal place will be selected or the input value to the left orabove will be selected
In the example above, there are three input values on the screen: a value entry, a latching button, and a message text selection.
The value entry [with a value of 900 in the screenshot] consists of three decimal numbers in which the value for each number is entered individually. The latching button [thecheckbox with the checkmark] is activated. The question marks show the 16-characterarea for the message text selection, in which the UP/DOWN buttons can be used to
select one of the configured texts.
Once a new value is entered, it can be confirmed with OK. This will exit input mode.

456

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "D - Text display", page 448

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

457

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.4 D - Text display editor
easySoft 7 features a text display editor that can be used to design text displays. In
order to be able to access it, there must first be a text display function block in the Programming view work pane and the you must have clicked on the function block. Openthe Text display parameters tab and click on the Text display editor button. The text display editor will be opened in a separate window.
Properties Text display editorText display editor
Text displays are put together with a text display editor that makes input with free text
and actual values from various function blocks possible.
This editor features the following properties:
6 lines x 16 characters - 96 elementsl Texts can be positioned freely within the text displayl Analog value, timer value, and time value processingl Message texts, times, dates, and checkboxes as input and output elementsl Simple value entry and controls
l User-controlled acknowledgementsl Ticker text with variable speeds
l Variable display times
l Prioritization by the userl Multi-language capabilitiesl Can also be used in user function blocks
l458

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Working with the text display editor
In order to position a display or input element, follow the steps below:
Select the display or input element you want from the list, e.g., Static text.
While holding down the left mouse button, drag the element to the work pane anddrop it where you want it to be positioned.
Move your cursor over one of the element handles and drag the handle until thedisplay or input element has the size you want.
Configure the parameters using the tabs below. For example:Static text (01)tab/Text field<Sample text>.

Figure 208: Text display editor with static text in the first line

1 List with display and input elements
2 Work pane with text display elements that have already been configured
3 Status information tab with parameters for the display and input elements
Color management in the display text editor
Each element will get its own text color and background color as parameters.
If you use the inverse display mode, the colors will be swapped.
If you enter 0 as a color, "default color" will be used.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

459

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Insert special characters
In addition to the characters on your keyboard, you can also enter special characters .
To do so, use the CTRL+C/CTRL+V or ALT+ASCII code shortcuts.

Figure 209: Character table Special characters

460

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Display and input elements
Value display

Value displays can be very effectively combined with a static text. In the example
above, the value display element has been placed to the right of the "Value" text in thepreview pane. The display in the example is intended to have five digits, which is why
the number of characters has been configured accordingly. (The number 9 symbolizes
value displays.)
Value range: The default value range is 0-65535. If you want to make it smaller, you canenter the corresponding limits in this section. If the actual value falls outside the configured value range, the display will instead show the nearest value that still falls within
the value range.
Scaling range: If you want the value to be scaled for display, enable the "Scaling range"
option. Then enter the minimum and maximum values for the scaling.
Displays can be customized with a sign and/or leading zeros.
"Associated variable" tab: The settings in this tab can be used to select a byte, word, or
double word value from the operand resources and the function block inputs and outputs so that it can be displayed.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

461

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Bar graph

Bar graphs can be very effectively combined with a static text. In the example above,
the bar graph element has been placed to the right of the "Bar" text in the preview pane.
The display in the example is intended to have five digits, which is why the number ofcharacters has been configured accordingly.
Value range: The default value range is 0-65535. If you want to make it smaller, you canenter the corresponding limits in this section. If the actual value ends up falling outsideof the value range as a result, arrows pointing up or down will be used to indicate this.
Associated variable tab: The settings in this tab can be used to select a byte, word, or
double word value from the operand resources and the function block inputs and outputs so that it can be displayed.
Static text
To place a static text in the first line, follow the steps below:
Select the Static text option from the list, hold down the left mouse button and dragthe display element to the work pane, then drop it in the line where you want it.
Enter the text you want into the Static text (01) tab/Text field, e.g., <Sample Text>.
Move your cursor over one of the element handles and drag the handle until thestatic text element has the size you want.

462

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Running text

If you want to display a text that is longer than 16 characters, you can use the runningtext display element. This option can come in particularly handy when you want to draw
the machine operator's attention to a text.
Simply select the running text display element from the list, hold down the left mousebutton, and drag the element to the work pane. You can then move your cursor over oneof the element handles and drag the handle until the running text element has the size
you want.
You can use the settings in the corresponding tabs to enter the actual text and set thelanguage, the display mode, and the display speed.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

463

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Rolling text

Rolling texts can be used to display various texts in succession in a single line. You candisplay various messages or errors, which in this case will be shown in sequence one
after the other at a set interval.
The required texts need to be entered into the table under the Rolling text tab, where
you can also select the corresponding colors and the display type.
Unconditional display
When this operating mode is selected, the texts will be displayed in succession at the
specified interval. This interval can be defined using the Display time parameter.
Associated variable
When this operating mode is selected, the text selection will depend on the application
program. More specifically, an operand that can be selected under the Associated variable tab will be used to control how the texts are displayed. You can select local or network operands of type byte, word, or double word. Each text will then be automaticallylinked to a bit from the selected operand as you enter it.
Text 1 will be assigned bit 1l Text 2 will be assigned bit 2l Text 3 will be assigned bit 3l etc.
l

If bit 2 is set in the program at runtime, for example, text 2 will be displayed. If multiple
bits in the operand are set simultaneously, the corresponding texts will be displayed insuccession. In this case, the interval at which they are displayed will correspond to thevalue configured with the Display time parameter.

464

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Message text

Figure 210: Example showing an exact value message text

Message texts can be used to display various texts in succession in a single line. Thiscan come in handy, for instance, for operating or maintenance procedures in which thedisplay needs to ask the operator or maintenance technician to carry out a step, thenanother step, then another, etc. In this case, the text can be changed every time theoperator or maintenance technician performs the requested action (increment/decrement).
The required texts need to be entered into the table under the Message text tab, where
you can also select the corresponding colors and the display type. To do this, you needto specify a status value for each system text. This status value (bit or decimal value)
will then be used to call the corresponding message text in the user program (if you areusing more than two texts, please make sure to select the "Value" type). An operand
that can be selected under the Associated variable tab will be used to control how the
texts are displayed. You can select local or network operands of type byte, word, or
double word.
Default Text
The default text will be shown in exact value mode as soon as the value of the associated variable does not match any of the stored status values.
The default text will be shown as soon as the value of the associated variable is lessthan the lowest specified status value.
Resize modelExact value
If you select the exact value, a text will only be displayed if the value is exactly equal
to the configured value mode.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

465

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocksl466

Value range
In value range mode, the value range of the associated variables will be the value
range for possible status values – please refer to → "Elementary data types", page
200.
This value range can be subdivided further so that the appropriate message text will
be output based on the value of the associated variables. In this case, the subdivision will always start with the status value that was entered and end before thenext status value that is entered. Moreover, the default text will be shown for any
value that is less than the lowest specified status value. And for each value that isgreater than or equal to the highest specified status value, the message text for thatstatus value will be shown (all the way to the end of the value range).

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

This can come in handy, for instance, when trying to abstract analog values – pleaserefer to the description for a fill level in the following example:
Value range message text example

Figure 211: Value range message text example

The value range starts with the status value defined for the message text. This yields
the following value ranges:
0…9 : Less than 10%
10…19 : Less than 20%
20…29: Less than 30%
30…39: Less than 40%…
75…65535: Greater than 75%
The maximum value will depend on the type of associated variable. In this particularcase, it is a marker word with a value range of 0 to 65535.
In this specific example, the default text will not be shown.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

467

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Date and time display

Date and time elements are available in various display formats. Drag a date and time
display element to the screen and then select the format you want. The example above
contains two data and time display elements configured with the same backgroundcolor.

468

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Timing relay value display

Time functions can be implemented using the timing relay value display elements. You
can conveniently display the reference value or the running time value in its own display element. Please note that the number of characters, and the size of the display element accordingly, is fixed. To configure the element, you will need to select the timing
relay function block number you want and configure the parameters you want. You canalso reference operands such as markers directly as a source for the display, in whichcase you will need to make sure that the data format used in the operand is the format
for a timer value.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

469

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Value entry

You can also use the display and the keyboard on the easyE4 to enable operators toenter input. To do this, drag a <value entry> element onto the screen. The value entry
element is indicated with <99999>, with the superscript <1> indicating that the element
is meant for value input. The <Setpoint> text in the example above is a separate display
element of type static text and is used to describe the function of the value being
entered.
After being entered, the value will be written to a "set variable" that can be selectedunder the corresponding tab. Moreover, this element can be configured with scaling,which can be activated by enabling the "Scaling range" option.
You can define the valid value range for the value written to the set variable in the"Value range" section. In this particular example, the full value range of 0 to 65535 thatis allowed with a word width has been selected. In order to make things easier for operator, however, the value entered will fall within a range of 0 to 100 instead (this is agood idea, for example, when entering a container fill level for which the fill level percentage is sufficient in terms of accuracy). Accordingly, the scaling range is set at 0 to
100 in the example.
Example: If the operator enters a value of 40, a value of 65535*0.4=26214 will be written to the set variable.
Scaling range
Enabling the checkbox will allow you to configure the scaling range for the value entry
element. If you, for example, enter a value of <1000> into the [max] field, the value input
will be limited to 4 digits, <9999>.

470

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Example: Entering data on the display via a D text function block
If an easyE4 with a display is used with the text function block and the cursor buttons
are enabled in the configuration, operators will be able to enter data using these buttons. To do this, it is first necessary to switch to input mode by pressing the ALT button.
You can also simulate this with easySoft 7.

The input fields will then be highlighted in color or be shown with inverse colors.
To select an input field and enter data, the operator will need to use the arrow buttons.
The active cursor position will flash.
UP: The numeric value at the current cursor position will be incremented
DOWN: The numeric value at the current cursor position will be decremented
RIGHT: The next smaller decimal place will be selected or the input value to the right or
underneath will be selected
LEFT: The next larger decimal place will be selected or the input value to the left orabove will be selected
In the example above, there are three input values on the screen: a value entry, a latching button, and a message text selection.
The value entry [with a value of 132 in the screenshot] consists of three decimal numbers in which the value for each number is entered individually. The latching button [thecheckbox with the checkmark] is activated.
Once a new value is entered, it can be confirmed with OK. This will exit input mode.
The values entered will be stored page by page.
If the text display contains multiple input elements that affect the same
associated variable, clicking on OK will assign the value of the input element with the highest index to the associated variable.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

471

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Latching button

Latching button input elements can be used to visualize and enter binary values withthe use of a checkbox and checkmark. Two different colors can be used based on a
Boolean value. To configure this type of element, you will need to select a bit operand(marker bit 1 in the example above).
To enter input mode, press the <ALT> button at runtime or during the simulation. You
will then be able to use the checkbox by pressing the P2 or P4 button, and the binary
value will switch between 0 and 1 accordingly.
The superscript 2 on the indicates that it is the second parameter on the page thatcan be modified by input – please refer to → Section "Example: Entering data on the display via a D text function block", page 471.

472

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Message text selection

Normally, message texts are activated by the program on the easy. However, it is also
possible to have operators call message texts as "input" for the program on the easy
(when selecting operating modes, for example). (when selecting operating modes, forexample). One example is a scenario in which a machine can produce various colors
and the operator needs to select one: black socks, brown socks, blue socks.
This element is configured exactly the same way as a message text – please refer to →Section "Message text", page 465.
The only difference is that the message text selection element allows for operator input– please refer to → Section "Example: Entering data on the display via a D text function
block", page 471.
Date and time entry
This element is configured exactly the same way as a date and time display – pleaserefer to → Section "Example: Entering data on the display via a D text function block",
page 471
The only difference is that the element allows for operator input.
Timing relay value entry
This element is configured exactly the same way as a timing relay value display –please refer to → Section "Example: Entering data on the display via a D text function
block", page 471
The only difference is that the element allows for operator input.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

473

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458

474

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.5 DL - Data logger
GeneraleasyE4 Base devices provide exactly one data logger function
block DL01.
You can use the data logger function block to write operating
data with a timestamp to a log file on a memory card in theeasyE4 base device. In order for this function block to work, amemory card must always be inserted in the device. You canselect a filename for the log file when configuring the function
block.
Digital function block inputs T1 through T4 and analog function
block inputs I1 through I4 are always logged for each data set.
In addition, the log will indicate which input triggered the logging operation.
Operating principle
Logging can be triggered with a rising edge at one of the trigger inputs T1 through T4 ora change at analog function block inputs I1 through I4. You can use the Delta ΔI parameter for each function block input (I1 through I4) to specify the data change magnitude
starting from which logging will be triggered.
There are two storage modes available for selection:
1. All events will be saved in a single file [ring buffer], meaning that the file willgrow with every save operation. Once the maximum number of data sets isreached, the entries at the beginning will be overwritten.
2. A new file will be created for each save operation until the number of log files isreached.
Any byte, word, or double word operand can be connected to analog inputs I1 throughI4.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
T1
T2
T3
T4
(DWord)1: Activates the function block.
1: Logging data set.
1: Logging data set.
1: Logging data set.
1: Logging data set.

I1

Analog value 1 for storageeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

475

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Description
I2
I3
I4

Note

Analog value 2 for storage
Analog value 3 for storage
Analog value 4 for storage

If too many log entries are made in a short amount of time,some of the entries may be lost. An important factor to consider within this context is the speed of the memory card being
used. If logging is triggered via function block inputs T1 throughT4, this problem can be avoided by only having one save operation be triggered if the function block is not in the "logging disabled" state.
Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs

476

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
RY

BY

Ready
0: Logging is active
1: Logging inactive
RY = 0 always applies to ring buffers;
Until number of log files reached: Logging
is active until the predefined number of files
per log session have been filled with the specified number of records.

Logging can be disabled because:Busy
1: Logging not possible

Possible causes:

l
l
l
l

l
l

E1

Error output
1: Data loss

n log files have been written
The memory card is full
No memory card fitted
Memory card faulty

The card is currently being written to
The temporary internal buffer is fullPossible causes:
l
l

l
l

No memory card fitted
The memory card does not haveenough space for another log file
Memory card faulty
Temporary internal buffer is
exceeded by at least one record

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

477

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Parameter set
Description

NoteEnter the name of the folder that contains the log files here, such as<MYLOG>. A maximum of 8 characters are allowed, and they must
conform to Microsoft DOS conventions. The default name is<EASYLOG>.
Storage mode
Ring buffer
Until number of log files isreachedNumber of files per log session A log session contains n log files
Integer value range for n:0…1000
Number of data sets per log file A log file contains n data sets
Integer value range for n: 0…60000
Log when input values change If the changes at DL_I are greater
Integer value range for ΔI: 0…65
than or equal to ΔI, a data set will535
be logged.
If this checkbox is enabled, the state This parameter ensures that
Function block release byof function block input EN will bewhen existing programs are
EN is necessary
evaluated. If the checkbox is discopied, the functionality of theabled instead, the function block will function blocks that are carried
be enabled and function block input over will be retained. The paraEN will not do anything.
meter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.
Parameter display
Constants can be edited on the+ Call enabled
device, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Simulation possible
Directory name of log session

Storage mode
You can select between Ring buffer and Until number of log files is reached :Ring buffer
If you select the ring buffer mode, the older values will be overwritten after a certain
amount of time. If you select this option, you will be able to look at past values up to acertain limit, as old data will be lost at some point.
Until number of log files is reached
Up to n log files will be created in succession in a single folder. The name of the files will
be <number>.log, where <number> will be an eight-digit number that is counted up starting from 00000001.log.
The individual log files are only visible on the file level.

478

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The data logged with the DL data logger manufacturer function block is stored on thecard in a folder. The folder is named as entered in Programming view/Data logger parameter tab under the folder name of the log session.
The data in the recording is binary-encoded and cannot be read with standard Windows
PC tools. You can instead read it in easySoft 7, where you can view the logs on the cardand export them to Excel. To do this, click on Project menu/Card.../Data logger logs/icon
Card = PC button. In the process, the binary data of a log are converted to a *.csv
format, compiled and stored in a file. They can be read and edited in Excel.
See example .....
Number of files per log session
You can define the number of files you want to be logged per log session by using the
Number of files per log session parameter. The maximum number is 1000. When thismaximum number is reached, logging will stop (i.e., the log session will be terminated)and output RY will be set to 1. In order to start over, the log files must first be deleted
from the storage device.
Number of data sets per log file
You can use this parameter to define the number of data sets you want to be logged perlog file. The maximum number is 60,000. In this mode, logging will always be running,i.e., the log session will not be terminated automatically.
Make sure that the number of data sets you select is only
as large as necessary so that the the time for logging will
be kept as short as possible.
Log when input values change
You can use the delta values in this section in order to specify the magnitude of change
in the actual value (when compared to the most recently logged value) at which a newsave operation should start. You can set a delta (ΔI1 through ΔI4) for the four analog values at DL_I1 through DL_I4. Please note that all data will always be logged with eachlog operation.
Programming view/DL1

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

479

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Create log files
The data logged with the DL data logger manufacturer function block is stored on thecard in a folder. The folder is named as entered in Programming view/Data logger parameter tab under the folder name of the log session.
The data in the recording is binary-encoded and cannot be read with standard Windows
PC tools. You can instead read it in easySoft 7, where you can view the logs on the cardand export them to Excel. To do this, click on Project menu/Card.../Data logger logs/icon
Card = PC button. In the process, the binary data of a log are converted to a *.csv
format, compiled and stored in a file. They can be read and edited in Excel.
Please keep in mind that only one folder can be created for each log session, even if the number of files per log session is selected as greater than
1 and several binary files are also stored accordingly.
Task: Any time the device button P1 is pressed, this should be logged. A total of 3 log
files with 3 data sets each should be logged. No further logging will occur afterwards.
To do so, follow the steps below:
Switch to Programming view.
Place a function block DL in the workspace.
From the catalog, drag a N/O to the function block input DL01_T1.
In the Contact tab, configure the operand as P device button

Figure 212: Workspace with function block and device button

Click on the function block DL and configure as shown in the following illustration.

480

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 213: Data logger tab with set parameters for the programming view

Place a function block DL in the workspace.
Make sure that this option is enable with the check mark in the Project view/System settings tab/P buttons.
Establish an online connection to the device.
Save the program on the device.
Start the program with Communication view/Program/Communication/RUN
Switch the Status Display On using with Communication menu bar/ Status displayon.
On the device, press the P button P1 nine times.
The function block output RY=1 displays that logging has ended. The 9 logged data setsare on the SD card. No other data sets are considered.
Read log files
The data logged with the DL data logger manufacturer function block is stored on thecard in a folder. The folder is named as entered in Programming view/Data logger parameter tab under the folder name of the log session.
The data in the recording is binary-encoded and cannot be read with standard Windows
PC tools. You can instead read it in easySoft 7, where you can view the logs on the cardand export them to Excel. To do this, click on Project menu/Card.../Data logger logs/icon
Card = PC button. In the process, the binary data of a log are converted to a *.csv
format, compiled and stored in a file. They can be read and edited in Excel.
Please keep in mind that only one folder can be created for each log session, even if the number of files per log session is selected as greater than
1 and several binary files are also stored accordingly.
Make sure that the card is inserted in the log files.
Establish an online connection to the device with Communication view/Connection/Online.
Make sure that the Status indicator is switched off using Communication menu
bar/Status display OFF.
Click on the button on the Card... in the area Program/Configuration.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

481

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

The following dialog appears.

Card => PC
RestartDeleteDelete all

Transfers the log files from the memory
card to a folder on the computer.
Clicking on this button will create a new
directory, on the memory card, for a newdata logger file. The new log file will immediately be located in this folder on thememory card.
Deletes the selected log file from thememory card.
Deletes all the log files found on thememory card.

Click on Card => PC.
If this button cannot be enabled, make sure that the card is not released in thedevice.

482

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

All of the folders of log files on the card are displayed in the following window.

Select the folder and confirm with OK .
In the following Explorer window, choose a storage location and potentially a different file name than the one for MYLOG_000/
The content of all log files in the MYLOG folder are stored in the CSV file MYLOG_
000.csv.
If the recording is exported to Excel, the content of several log files is exported into one
Excel file. In the dialog, only one file is shown as well, such as MYLOG

Figure 214: Card content after logging has ended

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

483

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Sample log file
The following information will be saved for each data set in the log file:
Countersl Date stampl Time stamp hh:mm:ssl Time stamp msl States of function block trigger inputs T1 through T4 (DL01T1 through DL01T4 in thisexample)l Values at analog function block inputs I1 through I4 (DL01I1 through DL01I4 in thisexample)lCounter

Date

Time

Time (ms)DL01T1

DL01T2

DL01T3

DL01T4DL01I1DL01I2DL01I3DL01I40

2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726
2018-0726

12:08:40

365

1

0

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:08:40

968

1

1

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:42

965

1

0

0

0

1479

2321

0

0

12:08:43

677

0

1

0

0

1479

2322

0

0

12:08:45

579

1

0

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:46

908

0

1

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:08:51

529

1

0

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:08:52

332

0

1

0

0

1477

2322

0

0

12:08:53

367

1

0

0

0

1480

2319

0

0

12:08:54

151

0

1

0

0

1479

2322

0

0

12:08:54

729

1

0

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:55

155

1

1

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:56

675

1

0

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:56

677

1

1

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:57

598

1

0

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:08:57

607

1

1

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:08:58

493

0

1

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:58

494

1

1

0

0

1480

2322

0

0

12:08:59

355

1

1

0

0

1481

2321

0

0

12:09:00

198

0

1

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:00

201

1

1

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:01

56

0

1

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:01

60

1

1

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:02

523

1

0

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:02

525

1

1

0

0

1481

2322

0

0

12:09:03

445

0

1

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

12:09:03

447

1

1

0

0

1480

2321

0

0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

484

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

There are 26 data sets logged in this log file. The logging for all the data sets was
triggered by a rising edge at one of the digital inputs, e.g., data sets 0 through 2 by a
DL01T01=1 trigger and data set 3 by a DL01T02=1 trigger. Log files do not include any
information regarding the operating mode.
See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

485

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.6 JC - Conditional jump
GeneralThis function block is only available when using the EDP (easyDevice Programming) programming language.
easyE4 base devices provide 32 conditional jump function blocks,
JC01 through JC32. You can use JC function blocks to branch off forward to an LB jump label function block within the function block diagram and skip several function blocks while doing so.
The JC function block is used in the circuit diagram, while the LB function block is used in the function block diagram. You can use thisapproach to structure a program.
Operating principle
In order for a jump to be executed, function block input EN must have a state of 1.
The jump target is defined using an LB jump label function block.
JC.. and LB.. must always be used in pairs.
When EN = 1, the program jumps forward over one or several function blocks. The next
function block to be processed by the program is the first one following the jump label
LB.. in the function block diagram.
When EN = 0, the next function block that the program processes is the one that you
have added behind JC.. in the function block diagram.
If the associated jump label is not present for an activated jump or is positioned in frontof the jump label (backward jump), the program jumps to the end of the function block
diagram.
In both cases, the function block output will be set to state E1 = 1.
Please note that if there is a timing relay function block thathas been started in the circuit diagram, the time will keep
counting up even if the timing relay is skipped in the function
block diagram with JC..
Display of function blocks in the function block diagram
Active function blocks
During simulation, the function block status display shows a red frame around an activated function block that is being processed in the program.
An inactive function block that is not being processed, for example, because the enablecoil is set to 0, is shown in a black frame.
The following figure shows the function block JC.. as an example of an active function
block. This functions here as the active jump label.

486

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Figure 215: Activated function block in the function block status display

Skipped function blocks
Function blocks, in the function block diagram change the intensity of their color due toan active » Conditional Jump « JC...
With a skipped function block:l

The red in a frame of an active function block turns to pink andthe black in the frame of an inactive function block turns to grey.
l The last internal states and values are frozen, e.g. the calculation result of an arithmetic function block, that was calculated before a JC..- function block was activated.
lBased on these intermediate states, a function block starts
its recalculation as soon as it is no longer skipped,l a bit input can be activated in the circuit diagram andl a green dot can also be displayed in the simulation,lhowever, the function block does not change its internal states and values. It consequently does not also change the state of its outputs.
Positioning in the function block diagram
Drag the conditional jump function block JC.. into the function block diagram and selectin the Properties field window the required function block number between 1 and 32 on
the Parameters tab.
The conditional jump function block JC.. is now shown at the end of the function block
diagram.
Position the conditional jump function block JCxx in the function block diagram in frontof the function block(s) to be skipped. To do this, activate the context menu of the JC..
function block and use the Move Function Block function.
Use of the conditional jump function block also requires the placement of a jump label(LABEL:xx) function block in the function block diagram.
Association in the circuit diagram
Drag the conditional jump function block JC.. onto a coil field of the circuit diagram andin the Properties Field window select the function block number already used in the positioning. Connect the JC..EN coil with an appropriate contact for activation.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

487

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

For greater clarity, position the conditional jump function block
JC.. in the circuit diagram if possible directly in front of the function block(s) to be skipped.
If the error output is to be evaluated, position the function block in the circuit diagram
again. This time use it as a contact and associate JC..E1 with a suitable Boolean operand.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs

488

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttonsxx

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.comx6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxxFunction block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
E1

Error
1: if no associated jump label LB is present or is
located in front of the jump location (backward
jump)

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Parameter set

Description

Note

–

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

489

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "ST - Set cycle time", page 503

490

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.7 LB - Jump label
GeneralThis function block is only available when using the EDP(easy Device Programming) programming language.
easyE4base devices provide 32 jump label function blocks,
LB01 through LB32.
Within a function block diagram, an LB jump label is used as ajump target for a conditional jump implemented with the JC
function block.
JC.. and LB.. must always be used in pairs.
Operating principle
The jump label function block does not have to be linked or assigned parameters. It only
has to be placed at the appropriate position in the function block diagram.
A corresponding JC.. function block (conditional jump) must exist for every LB.. function
block. Conditional jump JC01, for example, is always associated with jump label LB01.
Seen from the corresponding conditional jump function block, the jump label must
always be downstream. In other words, it must be closer to the end of the function
block diagram.
If the jump label is located upstream of the jump location (backward jump), the program
will branch off to the end of the function block diagram. In this case, the conditional
jump function block output will be set to state E1 = 1.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

491

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Linking and parameter setting
In the function block diagram view, drag the function block to the position you want.
Then go to the Jump label parameters tab and select the same function block number
you originally assigned to the corresponding conditional jump function block.
You can also move this function block later on. To do so, right-click on the function block
you want to move and then select the Move... option.
See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "ST - Set cycle time", page 503

492

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.8 MR - MasterReset
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 master reset function
blocks MR01 to MR32.
These function blocks can be used to set the markers
and all device outputs to a state of 0.
Operating principle
Depending on the operating mode set, it is possible to reset either the outputs only, themarkers only or both.
To ensure that all data ranges are reliably cleared, the master
reset function block must be the last function block executed inyour program. Otherwise subsequent function blocks may
overwrite the data ranges again.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
T_

1: Activates the function block.
Trigger: The reset will be carried out when there is a rising edge.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)

xnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)x

NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x

x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

493

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating mode
Description

Note

Device outputs Q.., and QA..., as well as outputs
LE.., SN.., will be reset to a state of 0.
The following markers are reset to 0:

Default
settings

Operating mode
Q = Reset outputs
M = Reset markerlll

ALL = Reset both

Function block outputs
Description

Marker range MD01...MD256
ND01..ND16
Internal markers of existing function
blocks UF, IC, IE and IT

Has an effect on the operands set at Q and M.

Note

(Bit)
Q1

1: If input T_ has a state of 1.

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB

x
x
x
x

2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:

494

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands

Bit outputs

M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example of a master reset function block with the programming method EDP
I 05--------------------------Ä MR07T_

Figure 216: Wiring the function block coils

The trigger coil is connected to a device input.
MR07Q1------------------------

Ä

S M42

Figure 217: Wiring of the function block contact

The message of the function block is sent to a marker.
Example of a master reset function block configuration on a device display
When using the function block in the circuit diagram for the first time, use OK to automatically enter the display of function blocks on the device display, as shown in the following figure.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

495

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

MR16 Q +Figure 218: Parameters on the device display

Enter the function block settings here. The display contains the following elements:
MR16 master
reset
Q
+

Function block: Master reset, number 16
Operating mode: Reset outputs
Parameter set can be called via the PARAMETERSmenu

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497→ Section "ST - Set cycle time", page 503

496

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.9 NC - Numerical converter
GeneraleasyE4base devices provide 32 numerical conversion function
blocks NC01...NC32.
A decimal number can be represented either as being binarycoded or BCD-coded. Depending on the operating mode you
select, this function block will convert BCD-coded numbers tobinary-coded numbers (BCD mode) or vice verse, i.e., binarycoded numbers to BCD-coded numbers (BIN mode).
Operating principle
EN=1 enables the function block so that the number conversion will be carried out
every cycle. The following applies when using LD, FBD, ST: As soon as there is achanged value at I1, the new conversion value will appear at output QV. When using
EDP, the converted value will be provided until the next cycle.
The maximum data size that can be connected to the inputs/outputs is a double word
(32 bits). A BCD-coded number requires four bits (a nibble). This means that the biggest
BCD-coded numbers that can be converted are 7-digit BCD-coded numbers, since themost significant nibble is used for the sign.
0000 means +1111 means –EN=0 initiates a reset in which the output QV is reset to 0.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
(DWord)1: Activates the function block.

I1

Operand to be converted

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Integer value range,
decimal not all the way due to BCD limitation
BCD: -9 999 999 … +9 999 999
Decimal: -161 061 273 … +161 061 273

497

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)
nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating mode
BCD mode
The BCD value at I1 will be converted to a binary value and output at output QV. The binary value is displayed as a decimal value.
BIN mode
The binary value present at input I1 is converted to a BCD value and supplied at the output QV. The binary value is displayed as a decimal value.
Description
BCD
BIN

498

Converts a BCD value to a binary value.
Converts a binary value to a BCD value.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Note6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Function block outputs
Description

Note

Supplies the converted value.

Integer value range
Decimal: -161 061 273…+161 061 273
BCD: -9 999 999… +9 999 999(DWord)QVAssigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Configuration/time range

Description

Note

Function block release by EN
is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, thestate of function block input EN
will be evaluated. If the checkbox
is disabled instead, the function
block will be enabled and function
block input EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carried over will be retained. The
parameter will be automatically set to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation possible

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

499

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Example for BIN operating mode
For simulation purposes in easySoft 7, function block input I1 can be connected to amarker double word instead of to a binary source. The value of this marker double word
can be entered in hexadecimal or decimal format. It will always be interpreted as binary
at function block input I1.
MD value
(dec)

(hex)

I1
BIN

BCD

QV
(dec)

9

9

0000 1001

0000 1001

9

23

17

0001 0111

0010 0011

35

37

25

0010 0101

0011 0111

55

9 999 999

00 989 67F

0000 0000
1001 1000
1001 0110
0111 1111

0000 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001

161 061 273-9 999 999

FF 676 981

1111 1111
0110 0111
0110 1001
1000 0001

1111 0110
0110 0110
0110 0110
0110 0111-161 061 273-10 000 000

1001 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000

1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001-161 061 273

Value range
exceeded

The most significant nibble determines the sign.
For negative numbers, the two's complement
will be calculated.
Since each decimal value is represented with four bytes oreight nibbles and each nibble in the BCD code can assume avalue of 9, the largest number that can be represented is
9999999. The smallest number that can be represented is 9,999,999.

500

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

However, since a BCD source cannot represent negative numbers, a negative numeric
conversion at QV is simply a theoretical case.
Values greater than 9999999 are output as 161061273.
Values less than –9999999 are output as –161061273.
The working range of the function block has been exceeded.
Example for BCD operating mode
For simulation purposes in easySoft 7, function block input I1 can be connected to amarker double word instead of to a BCD source. The value of this marker double word
can be entered in hexadecimal or decimal format. It will always be interpreted as BCD
at function block input I1.
MD value
(dec)

(hex)

I1
BCD

BIN

QV
(dec)

9

9

0000 1001

0000 1001

9

23

17

0001 0111

0001 0001

17

37

25

0010 0101

0001 1001

25

18 5854 8990000 0000
0000 0000
0100 1000
1001 1001

0000 0000
0000 0000
0001 0011
0010 0011

4 899

161 061 273

9 999 999

0000 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001

0000 0000
1001 1000
1001 0110
0111 1111

9 999 999

-161 061 273

F6 666 667

1111 0110
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001

1111 1111
0110 0111
0110 1001
1000 0001-9 999 999

1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001

9 999 999

161 061 274

1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001
1001 1001

Value range
exceeded

The most significant nibble determines the sign. For negative
numbers, the two's complement will be calculated.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

501

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Since each decimal value is represented with four bytes or eightnibbles and each nibble in the BCD code can assume a value of
9, the largest number that can be represented is 9999999. The
smallest number that can be represented is -9,999,999.
However, since a BCD source cannot five a negative number at I1, a negative numeric
conversion at QV is simply a theoretical case.
Values greater than 161061273 are output as 9999999.
Values less than –161061273 are output as –9999999.
The working range of the function block has been exceeded.
Example of a numerical converter function block when using the EDP programming
language
Function block input NC..EN is connected directly to device terminal I5
I 05-----------------------------Ä NC01EN

Figure 219: Wiring the function block coils
NC02 BCD +>I1
QV>Figure 220: Setting of the parameters

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section "ST - Set cycle time", page 503

502

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

6.1.7.10 ST - Set cycle time
GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 32 set cycle time function blocks,
ST01 through ST32.
This function block allows a set cycle time to be defined.
This cycle time is adjusted automatically if the maximum cycle
time used in the program is less than this specified value.
The maximum possible set cycle time is 1000 ms.
The set cycle time cannot be implemented if the cycle time of the
program is longer than it.
The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled(DWord)I1

Required cycle time in ms

Integer value range:
0…1000Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

503

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.

Simulation NOT possible

Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
Application example
A program consisting of the bit circuit diagram and function block generates a mean
cycle time of approx. 12 ms. Setting the set cycle time to 30 ms will ensure that thecycle times are kept constant at this value.

504

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.1 Manufacturer function blocks

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440→ Section "BV - Boolean operation", page 444→ Section "D - Text display", page 448→ Section "D - Text display editor", page 458→ Section "DL - Data logger", page 475→ Section "JC - Conditional jump", page 486→ Section "LB - Jump label", page 491→ Section "MR - MasterReset ", page 493→ Section " NC - Numerical converter", page 497

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

505

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

6.2 interrupt function blocks
6.2.1 IC - Counter-controlled interrupt
Only possible with easySoft 7.
6.2.1.1 GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 8 counter-controlled interrupt function
blocks, IC01 through IC08. This does not apply to the EDP programming
language.
easyE4 makes it possible to quickly respond to various events. This
makes it possible, for instance, to switch outputs on or off outside of themain program's routine. Only bit operators are allowed within an interrupt program.
The following events can trigger an interrupt:
Reaching counter reference values, two-channel, device inputs I1
through I8, function blocks IC1 through IC8l Frequency measurement, reference value exceeded or fallen below,
device inputs I1 through I8, function blocks IC1 through IC8l

Execution time for an interrupt
The time between the moment the event is detected and the moment
there is a response at a device output is < 1 ms. To this end, the basedevice's QP physical output must be set.
If multiple interrupts are executed simultaneously, the times add up.
NOTICEUse each device input from I1 to I8 only once in each interrupt function block. Otherwise, an error message will be
output during the plausibility check and it will not be possible to load the program onto the device.

In total, no more than 8 interrupt sources are allowed to beprocessed in a single program. The valid interrupt sources
are the IC, IE, IT interrupt function blocks and the CF, CH,
and CI high-speed counters that are directly connected tothe device inputs.

506

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

If there are multiple interrupt requests present simultaneously, the first detected interrupt program will be
executed, after which the remaining ones will be executed
based on the corresponding order.
While the interrupt program is being processed, any otherincoming interrupts at the function block inputs of the same
instance will not be detected.
6.2.1.2 Operating principle
A reference value is set at function block input SV. Depending on the operating mode,the function block will be assigned one or two of device inputs I1 through I8 in the corresponding parameters (at least one of them will be set as a counter input in the parameters). If the counter input reaches the reference value, the interrupt will be triggered.
The system will switch from the main program to the interrupt program and the latter
will be processed.
Interaction between main program and interrupt program
The states of function block inputs IC_I1 through IC_04 are passed to the interrupt program, where they can be processed further as I01 through I04.
Function block outputs IC_Q1 through IC_Q4 can be set from the interrupt program. The
corresponding interrupt program outputs are Q01 through Q04.
Main program

Interrupt program

Figure 221: Input and output states being passed between the main program and interrupt programeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

507

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

If an output is defined as a physical output on base device in the parameters for theinterrupt program, the output will be assigned an identifier of QP01 – QP04 and will act
directly on device output Q1 – Q4.
The function block has its own 32-marker-bit marker range for processing the interrupt
program.
Available functions within an interrupt program
Interrupt programs are not available when using the EDP programming language.
Action
KOP
FBSST
New network
Input/output inverter
Contacts
Coils
Jump functions
Logic gates
Conditional statement
Simple alternative
Multiple alternatives

√
√
√
√
√
√
Make, Break, Constant 1, Constant 0
Contactor, Negated contactor, Set, Reset
Jump if 1, Jump if 0, Return if 1, Return if 0AND, AND NOT, OR, OR NOT, XOR, XNOR
–
–
√
–
–
√
–
–
√

6.2.1.3 The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN is necessary
parameter must first be enabled

RE
I1
I2
I3
I4
(DWord)SV

1: Sets the actual counter value to zero
The states of the bit inputs from the main program will be provided to the interrupt program

Setpoint

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Value inputs
Operators
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markersxx

NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)

508

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Operators

Value inputs

nNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)x

NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes(Bit)

Description

Note

Counter with external direction
control

Pulse at device input I1 – I8, which
is defined as a counter input in theparameters.

Maximum frequency 5kHz

Counter with 2 counter inputs

incremental counter

Duration signal at device input I1 –I8, which specifies the counting direction.
0: up counting
1: down counting
Pulse at device input I1 – I8 counts
up.
Pulse at device input I1 – I8 counts
down.
Double evaluation
With automatic up/down counting direction detection, two counter inputs
I1…I8, counter input channel A,
pulse
I1…I8, counter input channel B,
pulse

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

509

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks(Bit)

Description

Frequency counter; f > SV

Frequency counter; f < SV

Note

When there is a complete channel A
and B period (e.g., first channel Aedge to next channel A edge), thevalue at IC..QV is incremented or
decremented by 2 depending on the
counting direction.
I1…I8, timeout of the frequency reference
Measuring interval 0.01s, 500 Hz 5000 Hz
Measuring interval 0.1 s, 50 Hz 5000 Hz
Measuring interval 1.0 s 5 Hz - 5000
Hz
I1 – I8, Frequency reference fallen
below
Measuring interval 0.01s, 500 Hz 5000 Hz
Measuring interval 0.1 s, 50 Hz 5000 Hz
Measuring interval 1.0 s 5 Hz - 5000
Hz

In the case of pulse counter with external direction control,
device inputs I1 through I4 must be used as pulse inputs anddevice inputs I5 through I8 must be used as direction inputs.
In the case of counters with 2 counter inputs, I1 through I4
should be used with first priority.
In the case of incremental encounters, I1 through I4 should be
used with first priority.
In the case of incremental counters, channel A and channel B
must deliver pulses with an offset of 90°.
IC function block with incremental counter operating mode, up or down count; Double
evaluation
Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)

510

Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
(DWord)Bit output used to provide operand states fromthe interrupt program to the main program.

QV

Current counteasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Integer value range:-2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputs
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputs
M - Markers
x2)
SN - Output bit via NET (send) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Clicking on the button will open theinterrupt routine

Edit interrupt routine
Simulation possible

6.2.1.4 Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
The interrupt program does not have any retentive data.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

511

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Monitoring the interrupt load
In total, no more than 8 interrupt sources are allowed to be processed in a single program. The valid interrupt sources are the IC, IE, IT interrupt function blocks and the CF,
CH, and CI high-speed counters that are directly connected to the device inputs. For
more information, please refer to → "CF - Frequency counter", page 287, → "CH - Highspeed counter", page 293 , → "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299 as well.
For function blocks IE01 – IE08 and IC01 – IC08, device inputs I01 – I08 can be assigned
freely.
For function blocks IT01 – IT08, an interrupt that is not yet in use is assigned in easySoft
7. The interrupt sources used by the CF, CH, and CI high-speed counters are also considered to be in use within this context.
Each device input and each interrupt source can only be used once.
Exceptions:
For CI01, the instance of I02 can be used by an IT interrupt function block.
l For CI02, the instance of I04 can be used by an IT interrupt function block.
l For each interrupt function block IC, the instance of the second input of an IT function block can be used if the Counter with 2 counter inputs mode has not been selected.
lThese exceptions are taken into account by the plausibility check and by the program
compilation routine in easySoft 7. The maximum number of 8 interrupts is also taken
into account within this context.
Device inputs
I01

I02

I03

I04

Interrupt source
CF01 frequency
counter
CF02 frequency
counter
CF03 frequency
counter
CF04 frequency
counter
CH01 high-speed
meter
CH02 high-speed
meter
CH03 high-speed
meter
CH04 high-speed
meter
CI01 incremental
counter

512

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

I05

I06

I07

I08

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Device inputs
I01
CI02 incremental
counter
IE01…IE08
IC01 – IC08
IT01…IT08

I02

I03

I04

x

x

I05

I06

I07

I08

One input, I01 – I08 can be assigned freely (max. 8, none can be assigned more thanonce)
Two inputs, I01 – I08 can be assigned freely (max. 8, none can be assigned more thanonce)
Automatically assigns the user interrupts 1 to 8 that are still available (only for instancesof I01 – I08 that are not in use by other function blocks)

The time between the moment the triggering signal is detected and the moment there isa response at an output is < 1 ms. If multiple interrupts are executed simultaneously,
the times add up.
Measuring the interrupt load
The runtime for each interrupt source is measured in µs. All measured times are added
over a period of 100 ms. After each 100 ms, the total of all times is evaluated and thetime measurement is cleared. If the interrupts used up more than 50% of the computing
time, the application will be stopped.
The <System_CPU_overload> diagnostic message will be generated and ID19 will be
set to 1.
For more information on how diagnostic messages can be called and processed,
please refer to
Available fixes for high interrupt loads
If the interrupt load becomes too heavy, the following steps can be taken to reduce it:
Reduce the number of function blocks
l Keep the interrupt routine as short as possiblel Reduce frequencies when using counterslExample of a pulse counter with external direction control in easySoft 7
Device input I1: Counter input C_
Device input I5: Counting direction D_
If the setpoint of <1750> is reached at device input I1, the system will jump to the interrupt program. Inside the interrupt program, QP04 will be used to set device output Q4 to
1 directly. Q01 will be used to set function block output Q1 to 1. The system will thenjump back to the main program.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

513

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Figure 222: easySoft 7 Main program Pulse counter with external direction

Figure 223: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Pulse counter with external direction

514

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Example with two counter inputs in easySoft 7
Device input I1: Up counter input C+
Device input I2: Down counter input CIf the actual value reaches the function block's setpoint, the interrupt will be triggered.
The interrupt program will then set device output Q1 back to 0. In addition, Q01=1 will be
used to set function block output Q1 to 1 and main program marker M250 to 1. Thisway, the container status will be signaled.

Figure 224: easySoft 7 Main program, two counter inputs

Figure 225: easySoft 7 Interrupt program, two counter inputs

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

515

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Example of an incremental counter in easySoft 7
Palletizing system with home positioning
The gripper must set the material down every time the target position with marker
word MW512 is reached in the up direction. When Q01 is set in the interrupt program,marker M511 is set in the main program so that it can be used to move back to thehome position.
Device input I3: channel A
Device input I4: channel B
The target position is specified on marker MW512.

Figure 226: easySoft 7 Main program Incremental counter

516

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Figure 227: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Incremental countereasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

517

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Example frequency measurement in easySoft 7
Device input I1 is a measuring input.
If the frequency at device input I1 reaches the frequency of 1030 Hz, the interrupt is
triggered. The interrupt program uses QP02 to reset device output Q2 and SQ01 to set
marker M31 at function block output Q1. Marker 31 signals that the frequency has beenreached.

Figure 228: easySoft 7 Main program Frequency measurement

Figure 229: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Frequency measurement

See also→ Section "IE - Edge-controlled interrupt", page 519→ Section "IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block", page 525

518

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

6.2.2 IE - Edge-controlled interrupt
Only possible with easySoft 7.
6.2.2.1 GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 8 edge-controlled interrupt function blocks,
IE01 through IE08. This does not apply to the EDP programming language.
easyE4 makes it possible to quickly respond to various events. This
makes it possible, for instance, to switch outputs on or off outside of themain program's routine. Only bit operators are allowed within an interrupt program.
The following events can trigger an interrupt:lRising, falling, rising, and falling edges at device inputs I1 through I8,function block IE01 through IE08.

Execution time for an interrupt
The time between the moment the event is detected and the moment
there is a response at a device output is < 1 ms. To this end, the basedevice's QP physical output must be set.
If multiple interrupts are executed simultaneously, the times add up.
NOTICEUse each device input from I1 to I8 only once in each interrupt function block. Otherwise, an error message will be
output during the plausibility check and it will not be possible to load the program onto the device.

In total, no more than 8 interrupt sources are allowed to beprocessed in a single program. The valid interrupt sources
are the IC, IE, IT interrupt function blocks and the CF, CH,
and CI high-speed counters that are directly connected tothe device inputs.
If there are multiple interrupt requests present simultaneously, the first detected interrupt program will be
executed, after which the remaining ones will be executed
based on the corresponding order.
While the interrupt program is being processed and during
a configured delay, any other incoming interrupts at thefunction block inputs of the same instance will not be detected.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

519

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

6.2.2.2 Operating principle
You can use function block input TD to set a reference value for a delay you want. You
will need to assign one of device inputs I1 through I8 to the function block as an interrupt source. The first edge at the assigned device input will trigger the interrupt directly
if you did not configure a delay. Otherwise, the interrupt will be triggered after the configured delay elapses. The system will switch from the main program to the interrupt
program and the latter will be processed.
Interaction between main program and interrupt program
The states of function block inputs IE_I1 through IE_04 are passed to the interrupt program, where they can be processed further as I01 through I04.
Function block outputs IE_Q1 through IE_Q4 can be set from the interrupt program. The
corresponding interrupt program outputs are Q01 through Q04.
Main program

Interrupt program

Figure 230: Input and output states being passed between the main program and interrupt program

If an output is defined as a physical output on base device in the parameters for theinterrupt program, the output will be assigned an identifier of QP01 – QP04 and will act
directly on device output Q1 – Q4.
The function block has its own 32-marker-bit marker range for processing the interrupt
program.
Available functions within an interrupt program
Interrupt programs are not available when using the EDP programming language.

520

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Action

KOP

New network
Input/output inverter
Contacts
Coils
Jump functions
Logic gates
Conditional statement
Simple alternative
Multiple alternatives

√
√
√
√
√
√
Make, Break, Constant 1, Constant 0
Contactor, Negated contactor, Set, Reset
Jump if 1, Jump if 0, Return if 1, Return if 0AND, AND NOT, OR, OR NOT, XOR, XNOR
–
–
√
–
–
√
–
–
√

6.2.2.3 The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

FBS

ST

Note

(Bit)
EN

1: Activates the function block.

The checkbox for the
Function block release by EN isnecessaryparameter must first be enabled

RE
I1
I2
I3
I4
(DWord)TD

1: Sets the function block's internal counter forthe delay back to the value at TD.
Bit input used to provide operand states fromthe main program to the interrupt program

Delay until the interrupt program is started

Value range: 20 ms …999 990 ms
Resolution: 10 ms

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station n
IA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

521

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nx

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description
Rising edge

Note

Rising edge: Runs the interrupt program once after
delay TD.
Falling edge: Runs the interrupt program once after
delay TD.
Rising edge and falling edge at input: Runs theinterrupt program after delay TD each time.

Falling edge
Both edges

Function block outputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
(DWord)QV

Bit output used to provide operand states from theinterrupt program to the main program.

Actual elapsed delay (TD) time

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Value outputs
Assigning operands
MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog output
I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

522

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

x
x
x
x

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlightx
Q - Bit outputx
I - Bit input of a FBx2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

Parameter set
Description

Note

Function block release by
EN is necessary

If this checkbox is enabled, the stateof function block input EN will be
evaluated. If the checkbox is disabled instead, the function block will
be enabled and function block input
EN will not do anything.

This parameter ensures thatwhen existing programs arecopied, the functionality of thefunction blocks that are carriedover will be retained. The parameter will be automatically set
to 0 or 1 depending on the function block.

Parameter display+ Call enabled

Constants can be edited on thedevice, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Used to select device inputs I1
through I8 as a trigger for the interrupt
Clicking on the button will open theinterrupt routine in the Programmingview

Interrupt source

Edit interrupt routine

Simulation possible

6.2.2.4 Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
The interrupt program does not have any retentive data.
Example slope in easySoft 7
Rising edge operating mode
Cutting device at station 2. The interrupt is triggered with a pulse at function block input
I1. Device output Q1 is set in the interrupt program and the product is cut. Device output
Q2 is reset. The interrupt program Q01 passes marker 211 to the main program with Q1and signals that the cutting device is active.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

523

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Once the product has been cut at station 2, there is a rising edge at input I1 of the basedevice. Processing must be initiated.

Figure 231: easySoft 7 Main program Slope

Figure 232: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Slope

See also→ Section "IE - Edge-controlled interrupt", page 519→ Section "IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block", page 525524

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

6.2.3 IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block
Only possible with easySoft 7.
6.2.3.1 GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 8 time-controlled interrupt function
blocks, IT01 through IT08. This does not apply to the EDP programming language.
easyE4 makes it possible to quickly respond to various events. This
makes it possible, for instance, to switch outputs on or off outside of
the main program's routine. Only bit operators are allowed within aninterrupt program.
Time-controlled interrupt function blocks can be used in on-delayedmode or interval mode.
Execution time for an interrupt
The time between the moment the event is detected and the moment
there is a response at a device output is < 1 ms. Accordingly, QP Physical output on base device must be set in the interrupt program.
If multiple interrupts are executed simultaneously, the times add up.
In total, no more than 8 interrupt sources are allowed to
be processed in a single program. The valid interrupt
sources are the IC, IE, IT interrupt function blocks andthe CF, CH, and CI high-speed counters that are directly
connected to the device inputs.
If there are multiple interrupt requests present simultaneously, the first detected interrupt program will be
executed, after which the remaining ones will be
executed based on the corresponding order.
6.2.3.2 Operating principle
A reference value is set at function block input PD. As soon as function block input EN
is set to 1, the time measurement starts. Depending on the operating mode being used,
the system will jump to the interrupt program once or repeatedly as soon as the specified time at function block input PD is reached.
Interaction between main program and interrupt program
The states of function block inputs IT_I1 through IC_04 are passed to the interrupt program, where they can be processed further as I01 through I04.
Function block outputs IT_Q1 through IC_Q4 can be set from the interrupt program. The
corresponding interrupt program outputs are Q01 through Q04.
Main program

Interrupt programeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

525

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Figure 233: Input and output states being passed between the main program and interrupt program

If an output is defined as a physical output on base device in the parameters for theinterrupt program, the output will be assigned an identifier of QP01 – QP04 and will act
directly on device output Q1 – Q4.
The function block has its own 32-marker-bit marker range for processing the interrupt
program.
Available functions within an interrupt program
Interrupt programs are not available when using the EDP programming language.
KOP
FBS
ST
Action
New network
Input/output inverter
Contacts
Coils
Jump functions
Logic gates
Conditional statement
Simple alternative
Multiple alternatives

526

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

√
√
√
√
√
√
Make, Break, Constant 1, Constant 0
Contactor, Negated contactor, Set, Reset
Jump if 1, Jump if 0, Return if 1, Return if 0AND, AND NOT, OR, OR NOT, XOR, XNOR
–
–
√
–
–
√
–
–
√

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

6.2.3.3 The function block and its parameters
Function block inputs
Description

Note

(Bit)
EN
RE
ST

I1
I2
I3
I4
(DWord)PD

1: Activates the function block.
1: Sets the actual time of the interrupt function
block back to the time at PD.
1: Stops the interrupt function block's timemeasurement.
0: The interrupt function block's time measurement will continue.
The states of the bit inputs from the main program are provided to the interrupt program.

Pulse pause time:
Value of the delay that must elapse before theinterrupt program is started.

Integer value range:
20…999 990 ms,
resolution 10 ms

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are numeric
inputs.
Operators
Value inputs
Constant, timer constant1)

x

MD, MW, MB - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers2)xxnNB, nND, nND- NET markers 2)
NET station nxIA - Analog input
QA - Analog output
QV - QV - Numeric output of a FB
1) Only on function blocks T, AC
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

You can assign the following operands to the function block inputs that are bit inputs:
Operators
Bit inputs
Constant 0, constant 1
M – Markers
RN - Input bit via NET2)xxx

SN - Output bit via NET (send)2)x

N - Net marker bit2)xnN - NET marker bit2) NET station nxeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

527

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Operators

Bit inputs

ID: Diagnostic alarm
LE - Output backlightP device buttons
I - Bit input
Q - Bit output
Q - Bit output of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

x
x
x
x
x
x

Operating modes
Description
On-delayed

Interval

Note

If the time set at function block input PD isreached, the system will jump to the interrupt
program once
If the time set at function block input PD isreached, the system will jump to the interrupt
program. The time measurement will start again
and, after it elapses, the system will jump to theinterrupt program again. This will keep happening as long as function block input EN = 1.

IT interrupt function blocks feature two operating modes that work as described below:
On-delayed
The interrupt function block is enabled via function block input EN. The pulse/pause
time at function block input PD starts to count down. When the pulse/pause time atfunction block input PD elapses, the interrupt is triggered immediately and the interrupt program is processed.
l Interval
The interrupt function block is enabled via function block input EN. The pulse time atfunction block input PD starts to count down. When the pulse time at function block
input PD elapses, the interrupt is triggered immediately and the interrupt program isprocessed. After this, the pause time at function block input PD starts to countdown. When the pause time at function block input PD elapses, the interrupt is
triggered immediately and the interrupt program is processed. This means that theinterrupt is triggered twice: once at the end of the pulse and once at the end of thepause.
l

Function block outputs
Description
(Bit)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4

528

Bit output used to provide operand states from theinterrupt program to the main program.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Note6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Description

Note(DWord)QV

Elapsed actual time of delay set at PD

Assigning operands
You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are numeric
outputs:
Assigning operands
Value outputsxx

MB, MD, MW - Markers
NB, NW, ND - NET markers 2)
NET stations n
QA - Analog outputxx

I - Value input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NET

You can assign the following operands to the function block outputs that are bit outputs:
Assigning operands
Bit outputsx
M - Markers
SN - Output bit via NET (send)2) SN - Output x
bit via NET (send)
N - Network marker bit2)x
LE - Output backlight
Q - Bit output
I - Bit input of a FB
2) Only on projects with ≥ 2 base devices on NETxxx

Parameter set
Description
Parameter display+ Call enabled
Edit interrupt routine

Note

Constants can be edited on the device, as can function block parameters when using the EDP programming language.
Clicking on the button will open the interrupt
routineSimulation possible

6.2.3.4 Other
Retention
The function block does not recognize retentive data.
The interrupt program does not have any retentive data.
Monitoring the interrupt load
In total, no more than 8 interrupt sources are allowed to be processed in a single program. The valid interrupt sources are the IC, IE, IT interrupt function blocks and the CF,
CH, and CI high-speed counters that are directly connected to the device inputs. For

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

529

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

more information, please refer to → "CF - Frequency counter", page 287, → "CH - Highspeed counter", page 293 , → "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299 as well.
For function blocks IE01 – IE08 and IC01 – IC08, device inputs I01 – I08 can be assigned
freely.
For function blocks IT01 – IT08, an interrupt that is not yet in use is assigned in easySoft
7. The interrupt sources used by the CF, CH, and CI high-speed counters are also considered to be in use within this context.
Each device input and each interrupt source can only be used once.
Exceptions:
For CI01, the instance of I02 can be used by an IT interrupt function block.
l For CI02, the instance of I04 can be used by an IT interrupt function block.
l For each interrupt function block IC, the instance of the second input of an IT function block can be used if the Counter with 2 counter inputs mode has not been selected.
lThese exceptions are taken into account by the plausibility check and by the program
compilation routine in easySoft 7. The maximum number of 8 interrupts is also taken
into account within this context.
Device inputs
I01

I02

I03

I04

I05

I06

I07

I08

Interrupt source
CF01 frequency
counter
CF02 frequency
counter
CF03 frequency
counter
CF04 frequency
counter
CH01 high-speed
meter
CH02 high-speed
meter
CH03 high-speed
meter
CH04 high-speed
meter
CI01 incremental
counter
CI02 incremental
counter
IE01…IE08
IC01 – IC08

530

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x

One input, I01 – I08 can be assigned freely (max. 8, none can be assigned more thanonce)
Two inputs, I01 – I08 can be assigned freely (max. 8, none can be assigned more thaneasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Device inputs
I01
IT01…IT08

I02

I03

I04

I05

I06

I07

I08

once)
Automatically assigns the user interrupts 1 to 8 that are still available (only for instancesof I01 – I08 that are not in use by other function blocks)

The time between the moment the triggering signal is detected and the moment there isa response at an output is < 1 ms. If multiple interrupts are executed simultaneously,
the times add up.
Measuring the interrupt load
The runtime for each interrupt source is measured in µs. All measured times are added
over a period of 100 ms. After each 100 ms, the total of all times is evaluated and thetime measurement is cleared. If the interrupts used up more than 50% of the computing
time, the application will be stopped.
The <System_CPU_overload> diagnostic message will be generated and ID19 will be
set to 1.
For more information on how diagnostic messages can be called and processed,
please refer to
Available fixes for high interrupt loads
If the interrupt load becomes too heavy, the following steps can be taken to reduce it:
Reduce the number of function blocks
l Keep the interrupt routine as short as possiblel Reduce frequencies when using counterslExample of a time-controlled interrupt function block in easySoft 7
Output Q4 needs to be reset after a specific time. This time should be independent fromthe main program's cycle time so that the switch-off point in time is always the same.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

531

6. Function blocks
6.2 interrupt function blocks

Operating mode: On-delayed

Figure 234: easySoft 7 Main program Time-controlled

Figure 235: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Time-controlled

See also→ Section "IT - Time-controlled interrupt function block", page 525→ Section "IE - Edge-controlled interrupt", page 519

532

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

6.3 UF - User function block
Only possible with easySoft 7.
6.3.1 GeneraleasyE4 base devices provide 128 user function blocks, UF01 throughUF128.
You can configure these function blocks yourself and then use themin the main program the same way as manufacturer function blocks.
User function blocks are used whenever a recurring functionality needs to be programmed with various parameters. For example, when similar machines need to becontrolled, the actual control program for them can be written in a user function blockand then called multiple times – separately for each machine. User function blocks also
feature inputs and outputs that can be used to pass custom parameters for each call.
The programming language used in each user function block is independent from theprogramming language used for the corresponding main program. In other words, you
can use user function blocks written in ST in an FBD or LD main program, for instance.
User function blocks have their own data range. In fact, there are 64 bytes, which canbe used as bits, bytes, words, or double words, available for each instance (call) of auser function block. This means, for example, that marker M01 in the main program is
not the same marker M01 in a user function block.
Parts of the markers can be declared as being retentive. In this case, it is important tokeep in mind that the total number of retentive markers cannot exceed 400 bytes, andthat this total includes the retentive markers from the main program and the retentive
markers from all user function block instances.
Just like a main program, a user function block is made up of FBD/LD networks or ST
source code. This means that a user function block can be created the same way as amain program, with the only differences consisting of the available operands (pleaserefer to → Section "Configuring a user function block", page 536.
The maximum number of user function blocks that can be called in a single main program is 128.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

533

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

6.3.1.1 General information on user function blocks
The markers and function blocks used in a user function block have their own self-contained data range.This precludes any conflicts with data from other user function
blocks or data from the main program. Likewise, the standard function blocks used in auser function block, as well as their parameter sets, are managed separately in the firmware for each function block instance.
The number of instances of a manufacturer function block that can be used in a userfunction block is the same as the number that can be used in the main program. The program is limited only by the available program memory.
When a main program is loaded onto an easyE4 device or into the current project, all
the user function blocks used in the main program will be loaded as well.

6.3.2 Creating a user function block
Once you have created a project and selected a programming language, you can createa user function block.
Click on the Program/ Create user function block... menu option
orclick on the

button in the toolbar.

The Create user function block dialog box will appear
Program/ Create user function block... menu option

534

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Figure 236: Create user function block

You must at least enter a name and version and select a programming method before
creating the user function block. However, in order to be able to use the user function
block effectively, it is also a good idea to configure the options in the Interface section.
In short, this section is used to specify how big the number of parameters passed fromthe main program should be.
You can choose to configure all the other options later on if you want. The "Configuring auser function block" section goes into them in greater detail.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

535

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Name and Version
The name you choose for the user function block should not exceed a maximum of 10
characters. The following characters are allowed:
Uppercase and lowercase lettersl Numbersl Special characters # $ % & ` ( ) + , - ; = @ [ ] ^ _ ‘ { } ~lSpaces and the \ / . : * ? < > | special characters are not allowed. The name is not casesensitive. If you enter a name that meets all requirements, a black checkmark willappear to the right of the Name field. If the name needs to be corrected instead, a red
exclamation mark will appear. A new user function block will automatically be assigned
version 1.00. You can enter any version number between 0.00 and 99.99.
Programming method
You can use this drop-down menu to select the programming language (LD, FBD, ST)
for the user function block. The default is FBD. The programming language you selecthere will be independent from the programming language used for the main program.
However, please note that once you create a user function block, you will no longer beable to change its programming language.
Clicking on OK to close the "Create user function block" dialog box will create andsave the new user function block.
Once you click on OK, the empty programming unit for the user function block will be
opened and the Programming view work pane will show an additional tab with thesame name as the user function block, e.g., <UF – Blinker1V1.00>.
If you switch to the Main program tab, the user function block will appear in the list ofoperands and function blocks, in the "User function blocks" folder.

6.3.3 Configuring a user function block
In order to configure a user function block, click on the tab with the same name as theuser function block inside the work pane, e.g., <UF – Light timer V1.10>, and use one of
the following methods:
Click on the Program/ Configure user function block... menu option.
Inside the pane, click on the tab with the same name as the user function block,e.g., <UF – Light timer V1.10>, and then click on the "Configure user function block"button in the toolbar.
Right-click on the tab for the user function block in the work pane and select theConfigure... option.
Or

536

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

In the work pane, click on the <Main program> tab.
Go to the list of operands and function blocks / User function blocks folder , rightclick on the function block, and then select the Configure... option.
The Configure user function block dialog box will appear.
Enter all parameters.
Confirm your input and close the dialog box by clicking on OK or pressing the<Return> key.
The changes will be applied to the user function block.
The Name, Version, and Programming method fields have already been described in the"Creating a user function block" field. Please note that, although the "Configure user function block" dialog box will show the programming language you originally selected, it
will no longer be possible to change it.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

537

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Menu option Program/ Configure user function block

Figure 237: Configure user function block

From firmware version
You can use this drop-down menu to specify the minimum firmware version for using
the user function block. The function blocks and language elements available for theselected firmware version will be available.
Please note that, after selecting a firmware version, you will not be able tochange it back to the older version.
Interface section
You can use the options in this dialog box to define the number of digital and analog
inputs and outputs for your user function block. These inputs and outputs will then form
the interface between the user function block and the main program. You can configure538

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function blocka maximum of 12 digital bit inputs/outputs and a maximum of 8 analog inputs/outputs.
Please note, however, that the total number of all inputs and outputs cannot exceed 12.
When the user function block is called in the main program, the inputs and outputs
defined in the Interface section will be shown and you will be able to configure them.
Read from program
If the program for the user function block has already been written and it uses inputs
and outputs, you can click on the "Read from program" button to have the system automatically determine the interface parameters. The highest input/output index used willbe the one copied over, and any gaps in the circuit will be ignored. Please note that thisbutton will not be available if:
The inputs and outputs are configured correctly in conformity with the program forthe user function block.
l The user function block has already been used in a main program in the project.
leasySoft 7 will not check whether the inputs/outputs used in
the user function block program are defined in the Interface
section as well.
Know-how protection section
You can set a password in order to prevent a user function block from being viewed oredited. This password must not be longer than 32 Unicode characters. If the password
entered into both fields matches, a black checkmark will appear and the OK button will
be enabled again.
Retention section
It is a requirement of system and machine controllers for operating states or ACTUAL
values to have retentive settings. What this means is that the values will be retained
until the next time the ACTUAL value is overwritten.
There are two input fields (for the start and end values of the retention range) each formarkers and for the following function blocks.
Project view/ System settings tab

Figure 238: Screenshot of Retention section that can be found in the System settings tab in the Project
view (including sample values)

Value range for the function blocks, instances that can be stored retentively:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

539

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

C - Counter relay : 01…32
l CH - High-speed counter : 01…04
l CI - Incremental counter : 01…02
l DB - Data function block : 01…32
l T - Timing relay : 01…32
l

For more information, please refer to the description for the relevant function block.
Marker value ranges:
MB : 1 …512l MW : 1…512
l MD : 1…256l

The values from the input field will be automatically converted to MB marker bytes.
Retention bytes
The entire retentive marker range for an easyE4 must not exceed 400 bytes. The total of
the retention bytes for the main program and user function blocks (UF) will be displayedin the Project view, in the System settings tab. If the retentive marker range exceeds
400 bytes, a red negative number will be shown in the Free field in order to indicate this.
Retain retention during transfer
Retentive ACTUAL values on the device are deleted:
By any program change in the circuit diagram or function block diagram followed by
its transfer to the device.
l When the program is deleted with the Communication/Program/Configuration/Delete
device buttonl By any change of the retentive range via Project view/System settings/Retention.
l By any changes to the parameters for the remote markers of a visualization device.
l When deleting the device from the workspace of the project view.
l

The following exception applies to retentive markers:
Marker contents
If this option is enabled, the contents of the existing retentive marker range will be
retained when the program is transferred. The ACTUAL marker values are retained.
In order for this to work, however, the marker range defined as being retentive mustremain unchanged.
Function block contents
If this option is enabled, the contents of the existing retentive operand range will be
retained when the program is transferred.
In order for this to work, however, the function block defined as being retentive mustremain unchanged.

540

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Comment section
This box can be used to enter an optional comment, e.g., in order to distinguish between
various versions of a user function block.

6.3.4 Programming a user function block
Once you have created a user function block, the view will automatically switch to theProgramming view for the user function block. Moreover, a tab with the user function
block's name and version will appear next to the Main program tab in the work pane.
This tab will be green as long as the user function block is not being used in a main program. As soon as the function block is used in the main program, however, the tab willchange color to yellow.
User function blocks are programmed exactly the same way as a main program. The
only difference is that there are slightly fewer operands available. The list of available
operands and function blocks will automatically change to reflect this.
You should be in the Programming view for the user function block. Following is ascreenshot showing an example in which a timing relay is programmed with the flashing operating mode.
Programming view for UF Blinker1 tab

Figure 239: Programming view for UF Blinker1 user function block

Run a plausibility check first.
Save the user function block and switch to the Programming view for the main program.
The user function block will appear in the list of operands and function blocks with agreen icon that means that it is not being used in the project yet.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

541

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

6.3.4.1 Programming view tabs
The tabs in the Programming view are intended to help you keep your project moremanageable.
When applicable, tabs for user function blocks and interrupt function blocks will befound next to the tab for the main program. Different colors and icons will be used to differentiate between them:
Color
Registers
Blue
Green
Yellow
Magenta

Main program
User function block that is not being used
User function block that is being used
Interrupt function block

Inactive tabs will be shown with a brighter color. A total of 11 tabs can be displayed.

Adding comments to user function blocks
It is recommended to add detailed comments to your user function blocks. This will
enable users to understand how to use the function block even if they do not have apassword. There are three ways to show the comments for a user function block:
1. In the Programming view, go to the list of operands and function blocks / User
function blocks folder, right-click on the function block, and select the Show comments… option.
2. Open the user function block and select the Program/Show user function blockcomments… menu option.
3. Select the user function block in the main program.
The comments will be shown in the tab.

542

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Figure 240: User function block comments being shown in the tab

The operand comments for a user function block are managed separately from the operand comments from the main program. This means, for example, that I1 ("Otto") in theuser function block can have a comment different from I1 ("Emil") in the main program.

6.3.5 Calling a user function block in the main program
User function blocks can be called in the main program the same way manufacturer
function blocks are called.
User function block in and FBD main program
In order to call a user function block in a main program that uses the FBD programming
language, drag the function block like a normal function block to the work pane in the
Programming view.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

543

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Figure 241: UF Blinker1 user function block used in the main program

The function block will be shown with its name, version, and configured inputs/outputs.
The function block type will be "UF", followed by the instance number (01 to 128).
The function block will now appear in the leftmost pane with a yellow icon, and the tabin the work pane will also change color to yellow, which means that the function blockis being used in the project.

544

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Inputs/outputs wiring
The digital and analog inputs and outputs can be connected the same way as for any
other function block. The example shows the user function block's Q1 output being connected to a counter relay's C input.
Programming view

Figure 242: Inputs/outputs wiring

User function block inputs and outputs can be copied in the main program and pasted
the same way as those from any other operand.
If a user function block call is copied and pasted, the new call will be assigned the next
free instance number.
All the user function blocks used in a project's main programs will be part of the project
file and will be saved together with the project.
If there are any user function blocks, the tabs will change accordingly:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

545

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Programming view

Figure 243: Contact tab
Programming view

Figure 244: Analog contact tab

If there are any user function blocks with bit and/or analog outputs available, you will beable to select the "User function block outputs" option in the "Type" drop-down menu.
Meanwhile, the "Operand" drop-down menu will contain all registered user function
blocks that have bit and/or analog outputs.
The "Number" drop-down menu will contain all available function block numbers withina range of 1 to 128, as well as the comment entered for the corresponding number.
Please note that any instance numbers that have already been assigned to other types
of user function blocks will not be available for selection.
Finally, the "Function block outputs" drop-down menu will list the various individual outputs, together with information specifying whether the contact is connected internally.
In addition, you will be able to select the bit logic for digital outputs.
Programming view

Figure 245: Coil tab

546

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Programming view

Figure 246: Analog coil tab

If there are any user function blocks with bit and/or analog inputs available, you will beable to select the "User function block inputs" option in the "Type" drop-down menu.
Meanwhile, the "Operand" drop-down menu will contain all registered user function
blocks that have bit and/or analog inputs.
The "Number" drop-down menu will contain all available function block numbers withina range of 1 to 128, as well as the comment entered for the corresponding number.
Please note that any instance numbers that have already been assigned to other types
of user function blocks will not be available for selection.
Finally, the "Function block inputs" drop-down menu will list the various individual
inputs, together with information specifying whether the coil is connected internally.
In addition, you will be able to select the coil function (Contactor, Set, Reset, etc.) for
digital inputs.
6.3.5.1 User function blocks in an ST main program
A user function block created with the FBD language can also be called in an ST main
program and vice versa.
In this case, a template based on the user function block's parameters (as defined in
the Interface section) will be generated in the ST program if the function block is
dragged onto the program. You will be able to connect the inputs and outputs the same
way as with manufacturer function blocks.
The NAME and VERSION you entered originally will be used to define the user function
block's type and version. These two pseudo inputs cannot remain unconnected and are
not allowed to be mapped outside of the function block call.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

547

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

ExampleThe example shows the user function block's Q1 output being connected to a counter
relay's C input.

6.3.6 Saving a user function block
You can close an open user function block at any time. Likewise, you can save changes
to the user function block at any time. Please note that if you close a modified user function block, the system will ask whether you want to save or discard the changes.
All user function blocks are stored in the \ProgramData\Eaton\easySoft 7\UserFBs
folder.
The "Program->Close" menu option and the "Close" button will be available if the userfunction block is open and either the user function block view is open or the user function block is selected in the main program view.
The "Program->Save user function block" and the "Save user function block" button will
be available if the user function block is open and has been modified and either the userfunction block view is open or the user function block is selected in the main programview.

Operands available for user function blocks
When a user function block is selected, the list of operands and function blocks willshow the operands that are available. The number of manufacturer function blocks will
be smaller.
All operands within a user function block refer to a separate local memory area. Supported (local) operands:

548

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Operand Maximum number
I

12

IA

8

Q

12

QA

8

M

480

MB

64

MW

32

MD

16

These numbers specify the maximum possible number for I, IA, Q, and QA. However,the following restrictions apply:
The total number of inputs (bit and analog) must not exceed 12l The total number of outputs (bit and analog) must not exceed 12l A maximum of 12 bit inputs and outputs can be usedl A maximum of 8 analog inputs and outputs can be usedl

Device-specific operands (ID, LE, P) and NET operands (N, NB, NW, ND, RN, SN) arenot supported for user function blocks.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

549

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Supported manufacturer function blocks:
All standard function blocks can be used in a user function block, with the exception offunction blocks that have a hardware interface or firmware reference (i.e., OT, CF, CH,
CI, PW, PO, GT, PT, SC, AL, D, DL, and ST). Function blocks BC, BT, and MR can be used,
but will only act on the user function block's local data arrays.
The Copy, Cut, and Paste functions are supported the same way as in the main program. However, they can only be used between user function blocks.
l Just like in the main program, the keyboard can be used to enter the I, Q, IA, QA, M,
MB, MW, and MD operands as contacts and coils.
l In addition, and just like in the main program, the keyboard can be used to createcontacts and coils corresponding to the supported function blocks, inputs, and outputs. This applies both to entering an operand completely and to changing the index
number for an operand.
l As soon as a change is made to a user function block, the Save user function block
option in the main menu and the Save user function block button in the toolbar will
become available.
l6.3.7 Exporting a user function block
User function blocks can be saved in a separate folder as a uf7 file. The"Export userfunction block" menu option will become available if a user function block call is selected or the programming view for a user function block is open.
Before the user function block is exported, it will be subjected to a plausibility check.
Please note that it will only be possible to export the function block if it does not containany errors. Finally, if the function block is protected with a password and is not open, aprompt asking you to enter the password will appear.
A dialog box will appear and ask if you want to edit the user function block's name, version, password, and/or comment before exporting it.
Yes— Yes: The "Edit user function block settings" dialog box will appear. Please note that if a password waspreviously set for the user function block, you will need to enter it first. If you do not enter the password, a prompt will appear asking whether you still want to export the user function block.
No:

No: The "Select user function block folder" dialog box will appear. You can then select the folder where
you want the user function block's uf7 file to be saved.
If the selected folder contains any items (files, folders, archives) with the exact same
name as the user function block being exported, you will not be able to notice this in
the "Select user function block folder" dialog box. Accordingly, make sure to firstcheck whether the selected folder is suitable for saving the file.

Clicking on the "Select Folder" button may result in any of the following scenarios if
there is a problem:
In the five cases below, you will be able to select a different folder:

550

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

1. The selected drive is not ready or is write-protected
2. The selected drive does not have enough free memory
3. The selected folder cannot be accessed
4. The selected folder is write-protected
5. The selected folder already contains a folder named UserFB_V1_01.uf7
In the first three cases, you will be asked whether you want to overwrite the file orselect a different folder.
1. The selected folder already contains an archive named UserFB_V1_01.uf7
2. The selected folder already contains a user function block named UserFB_V1_
01.uf7
3. The selected folder contains a write-protected user function block named
UserFB_V1_01.uf7.
If the aforementioned checks are all completed successfully, the user function block
will be saved and the user interface will be refreshed in the Programming view and in
the list of operands and function blocks if applicable.
6.3.7.1 Plausibility check
When exporting a user function block, a user function block check that determines
whether the user function block can be executed in the easyE4 device's current state
will be triggered. This is especially necessary for user function blocks programmedusing ST, as entering impermissible operands is possible in these cases.
The export function will generate a uf7 file only if the user function block is executable.
In this case, the file will contain not only the actual user function block, but also all
required management data.
This check can be run at any time on user function blocks that are in use or that are notin use in the project. The sole exception consists of password-protected user function
blocks in use.
A user-function-block-specific plausibility check will not be run when copying and pasting between user function blocks. All checks are identical to those run on the main program.
Within the context of the plausibility check for a device, the system will check whether
the total number of user function blocks per device is less than or equal to 128. If theplausibility check for a device outputs an error / warning for a user function block in the"Report output" dialog box and the view for the user function block is not active or open
in the Programming view, double-clicking on the error / warning will activate, or, if
applicable, open the Programming view for the user function block and show exactly
where the error or warning is found.
Depending on the corresponding results, the following messages may appear after aplausibility check:easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

551

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

FB input / FB output %2 is not part of the user function block's interface
l The number for an FB input / FB output was not assigned without gaps
l FB input %2 exceeds the maximum number of a total of 12 bit and analog inputs
l FB output %2 exceeds the maximum number of a total of 12 bit and analog outputs
l Operand %2 is not supported in user function blocks!
l The number for operand %2 falls outside the permissible value range for user function blocks.
l

6.3.8 Importing a user function block
The import function makes it possible to load user function blocks (uf7 files) from afolder. This function is available in the Programming view.
In order to be able to import user function blocks, all open userfunction blocks must be unmodified.
If they are not, the following message will be output: If open
user function blocks are modified, an import will not be possible. Please save all modified user function blocks first..
Select a uf7 file and click on "Open"The selected user function block will be added to the user function block management
group only if it meets certain criteria.
The following messages can occur:
User function block is already found in easySoft 7.
You do not need to import it. Do you want to select a different file?
l A user function block with different content is already found in easySoft 7. Since it isused in the project and the function block interfaces are different, the import is notallowed. Do you want to select a different file?
l A user function block with different content is already found in easySoft 7. This userfunction block is open for editing, meaning that an import is not possible. Do you
want to select a different file?
l

The following applies to these three scenarios:No:

The import will be aborted

Yes—

You will be able to select a different filel552

A user function block with different content is already found in easySoft 7. Do you
want to replace this user function block with the function block being imported?

No:

You will be able to select a different fileYes—

The existing function block will be replaced with the imported function blockeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

If the aforementioned checks are all completed successfully, the imported user function block will be added to the group of user function blocks in easySoft 7.

6.3.9 Replacing a user function block
This function makes it possible to replace a user function block that is being used in the
project with a different user function block with an identical "Interface" configuration.
In order for this menu option to be available, a user function block call must be selected
and the user function block must not be open for editing.
If there are any user function blocks with an "Interface" configuration that matches thatof the selected function block and the latter is not open for editing, the "Replace userfunction block" dialog box will appear and the user function blocks that can be selected
as replacements will be shown as a list in a pane.
You can then use the "Replace area" section to specify which user function block callsshould be replaced:
The selected user function block onlyl All instances of the selected user function block in the current programl All instances of the user function block in all programslClicking on the "Replace" button will replace the original user function block instance(s),i.e., the calls, contacts, and coils for the original user function block will be replacedwith the selected user function block.
If there are no user function blocks with an "Interface" configuration that matches thatof the selected function block available, or if they are open for editing, the following message will appear:"There are no user function blocks that are suitable as a replacement, or they are currently open for editing."

6.3.10 Deleting a user function block
The function can be used to remove user function blocks from easySoft 7. Please notethat you will only be able to delete user function blocks that are not being used in the
project and that are not open for editing. If there are no user function blocks that can bedeleted, the Delete user function blocks menu option will not be available.
The following options are available for deregistering / deleting a user function block:
1. Program/Delete user function blocks… menu option
2. User function blocks folder in list of operands and function blocks/Delete userfunction blocks… context menu option
3. List of operands and function blocks <name>/Delete context menu option
The following dialog box will appear if you use one of the first two options:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

553

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Figure 247: Delete user function blocks dialog box

You will get a list of all user function blocks that can be deleted, and can select any individual user function blocks you want. Once you select a function block and click on the
Delete button, the function block will be deleted. After this, the user function block will
no longer be part of easySoft 7 and will no longer be available in the list of operands andfunction blocks/User function blocks folder.
If you use the third option, the user function block you selected will be deleted andremoved from the list of operands and function blocks/User function blocks folder.

6.3.11 Comparing user function blocks
The "Compare user function blocks..." menu option will be enabled as soon as you
select a user function block. If the selected user function block is password-protected,
you will have to enter the password.
Please note that you can only compare user function blocks
that use the same programming language.
You can select whether you want to compare the user function block with a user function block registered in easySoft 7 or to one from a uf7 file (i.e., a user function blockthat has been previously exported). Accordingly, the following dialog box will appear:

Figure 248: Location of user function block user for comparison dialog box

554

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

If you choose to compare the selected user function block with an existing user function block, a dialog box showing all available user function blocks with the same programming language will appear.

Figure 249: UF user function block

If you instead choose to compare the selected user function block with a previously
exported user function block, the "Import user function block" dialog box will appear sothat you can select a uf7 file.

Figure 250: Import user function block

If a user function block is identical to the one being compared,or
if you are attempting to compare user function blocks that use
different programming languages, you will get a message tothis effect, after which you can select a different function
block.
The comparison uses a text-based line-to-line comparison as a basis. The function
units for each network will be grouped together in order to make the comparison easierto follow. The comparison itself will be visualized in a simplified ASCII character image.
easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

555

6. Function blocks
6.3 UF - User function block

Moreover, the gates and parallel branches in each network will be assigned a threedigit order number in ascending order based on where they are located in the network.
You can use these numbers is order to identify how the gates/parallel branches are
related to each other.
After the comparison, the results will be shown on your default HTML browser andsaved to an output file. This output file will have the same name as the opened user function block and the HTML extension, and will be stored in the user's "My Documents" or"Documents" folder.

6.3.12 Printing a user function block
You can print both user function blocks that are being used in the project and user function blocks that are not being used in the project.
When you print out a user function block, the printout will contain all the parametersfrom the configuration dialog box, the program in the programming language used, anda list of cross references for the operands used.
This function comes with the option of viewing a page preview first.

Opening a project with an existing user function block
If you open a project that has an existing user function block, the user function block
will be automatically added to the list of available function blocks in easySoft 7. This
also means that it will be available for other projects.
If you open a project that has a user function block and there is already another userfunction block with the same name in easySoft 7, a prompt to this effect will appear andyou will have two options for solving the conflict:
1. You can cancel opening the project.
2. You can open the project, in which case the user function block in it will overwrite the user function block in easySoft 7.
To solve the conflict, you can also rename the user function block found in easySoft 7
and then open the project.

556

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.4 Timing and counter relay example

6.4 Timing and counter relay example
A warning light flashes when the counter reaches 10. In this example the function
blocks C01 and T01 are wired in the standard circuit diagram and their inputs and outputs are defined.
L01+

P1

S2

S1

K1T

R

C
P1

E1

K1T

L01–
2s

Zähler
Wert 10Figure 251: Hardwiring with relays
L01+
L01–

S1

+24 V 0 V
1

S2

I5 I6
2

Q1
E1
L01–

Figure 252: Wiring with EASY-E4-UC-..., for example

Enter circuit diagram
Enter the following circuit diagram while using the EDP programming language.
I 05-----------------------------Ä C 01C
I 06-----------------------------Ä C 01RE
C 01OF---------------------------Ä T 01EN
T 01Q1---------------------------Ä Q01

Figure 253: Wiring of counter and timing relay

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

557

6. Function blocks
6.4 Timing and counter relay example

Entering function block parameters
If you enter the coils or contacts of a function block, the inputs/outputs of the function
block are displayed that you can parameterize. The parameters can be entered via thefunction blocks menu.
The meaning of these parameters is explained under each function block type.
Entry:
The first part of the parameter set of a counter C01 is displayed.
Move the cursor > over the + character to the value input behind >SH:>SH means: Function block input upper counter setpoint value.
The + character means that the parameters of this timing relay can be modified
using the PARAMETERS menu.
Change the upper counter setpoint to 10:
Use < > to move the cursor onto the tens digit.
Use the ↑ and ↓ buttons to change the value of the digit.
Press OK to save the value and ESC to return to the circuit diagram.
C 01 +>SH +10>SL +0>SV +0
QV>+0Figure 254: Enter parameter C01

Configuring the parameter for T01:
The timing relay works like a flashing relay. The function is set on the top right beside
the number in the parameter display.
The time base is set to the right of the “flashing” function. Leave the time base set
to S for seconds.
Move the cursor to the right over the + character in order to input the time
SETPOINT value I1.
If you enter the same setpoint value at I1 and I2, the timing relay operates as a synchronous flasher.
The + character means that the parameters of this timing relay can be modified using
the PARAMETERS menu.
Confirm the value input with OK.
Press ESC to leave entry.
T 01 n S +>I1 002,000>I2 002,000
QV>

Figure 255: Enter ParameterT01

558

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

6. Function blocks
6.4 Timing and counter relay example

Testing the circuit diagram:
Switch easyE4 to RUN operating mode and return to the program.
You can display every parameter set via the function relays menu.
Move the cursor onto C 01 and press OK.
The parameter set for the counter is displayed with actual and setpoint values.
Move the cursor ↓ downwards until you see the value QV.
Switch input IS05. The ACTUAL value changes.
C 01 +>SH +10>SL +0>SV +0
QV>+0Figure 256: Testing the circuit diagram

If the ACTUAL and upper SETPOINT values of the counter are the same, the timing relay
switches the warning light on and off every 2 seconds.
C 01 +>SH +10>SL +0>SV +0
QV>+10Figure 257: Testing the circuit diagram +10

Doubling the flashing frequency:
Select the power flow display T 01 and change the constant of the setpoint time to001,000.
When you press OK, the warning light will flash at twice the frequency.
T 01 n S +>I1 002,000>I2 002,000
QV> 0.550

Figure 258: Doubling the flashing frequency

If the setpoint is a constant, it can also be modified via the PARAMETERS menu.
The actual value is only shown in RUN mode.
See also→ Section "Timing and counter relay example", page 557→ Section "CF - Frequency counter", page 287→ Section "CH - High-speed counter", page 293→ Section "CI - Incremental Counter", page 299

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

559

6. Function blocks
6.4 Timing and counter relay example

560

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings

7. System settings
The "System settings" section groups together the various basic settings for the device,
and accordingly can be used as a reference guide.
It is important to note where the relevant system setting can be configured, i.e.,with the display on the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) under SYSTEM OPTIONS and/or only in
easySoft 7 after selecting the device. Programming and integrating the easyE4 device
into a group are also important within this context.
The following settings can only be configured with easySoft 7 as of this writing:Connection to other devices
Setting up a NET→ page 625
Modbus TCP→ page 632
Setting up a web server→ page 646
Web client→ page 652
E-mail function→ page 670
Configuration
Download comments→ page 575
Define program name→ page 577
Retention function→ page 578
Configuring the microSD card and device ID→ page 586

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

561

7. System settings
7.1 System options - Base device with display and buttons

7.1 System options - Base device with display and buttons
The system options that can be configured on EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) base devices
include:Table 74: System options
SECURITYSYSTEMMENU LANGUAGE
DELETE PROGR.
NETETHERNETUPDATE

Security

Access to the area used to assign a password and define password-protected
areas→ Section "Security – password protection", page 581

System

BOOT LOGO

Accessing the system settings:
Debounce, → Section "Debounce", page 574
P Buttons, → Section "P buttons", page 576
RUN Start, Card Start, → Section "Setting the startup behavior", page 571
Load Card, → Section "Configuring the microSD card and device ID", page 586
Display, Display settings, → Section "Display", page 563
Device ID, Device IDs, → Section "Device ID", page 564
Splash Screen, Used to set the display duration on the display, provided that aboot.bmp file has been stored on the memory card. → Section "Splash screen",
page 565

Menu language

Used to set the device menu language, → Section "Switch languages", page 570

DELETE PROGR.

Deletes the program on the easyE4 from the device memory

NET

Used to configure a NET GROUP as a group of multiple devices, → Section"Setting up a NET", page 625
The submenu is only provided in English

ETHERNET

Used to configure the Ethernet settings on the device,→ Section "Ethernet", page 568
The submenu is only provided in English

UPDATE

Operating System /Firmware Update for easyE4 expansion devices from Version
1.10.
→ Section "Update", page 569

Table 75: System options\System
DEBOUNCE
P BUTTONS ✓RUN MODECARD MODE
LOAD CARD
INDICATORDEVICE ID

562

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.2 Display

7.2 Display
This menu can be used to configure the settings for the display.
Table 76: System Options\System\Display
BRIGHTNESS1

100

BRIGHTNESS250

TIMEOUT:

10m

COLOR:

0

BRIGHTNESS1

Display brightness when the device is being operated
Default value: 100,can be changed in increments of 10

BRIGHTNESS2

Brightness for sleep mode
Default value: 50,
can be changed in increments of 10
Value: 0 will cause the display to be switched off in sleep mode

TIMEOUT

Used to set the time in minutes or seconds
after which the display will go to sleep if the easyE4 is not being actively operated

PAINT

Relevant to easyE4 remote operation
Color value of 0 – 15,This setting will affect the way the device is displayed, e.g., in easySoft 7 or on the
web server

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

563

7. System settings
7.3 Device ID

7.3 Device ID
Used to set / enter the individual device IDs for transferring programs.
Table 77:
SYSTEM OPTIONS\DEVICE ID
DEVICE-ID
xxx xxx xxx

Entering a device ID of <000 000 000> will disable the device ID check and theprogram ID check. If you do this, it will be possible to transfer all program types
to the base device through a microSD memory card or through easySoft 7
regardless of whether an ID has been set in the program itself.

564

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.4 Splash screen

7.4 Splash screen
Once an boot.bmp image is stored on the microSD memory card, this setting can beused to specify how long the image will be displayed, in seconds, before the status display is shown.
Table 78: System Options\Splash Screen
DISPLAY TIME
3 s

See also→ "Setting a splash screen for the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display" section, page 1

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

565

7. System settings
7.5 NET

7.5 NETThis submenu can be used to configure the NET addresses for the easyE4 device.
The other stations, i.e., easyE4 devices, must also be configured accordingly in orderfor it to be possible to establish a connection.
The item in the last line on the status display 1 will indicate whether there is an active
NET connection.
Table 79: Net configuration on device
Table 80: Main menu
Table 81: System options
STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 82: System options\Net

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

NET-GROUP:

00

SET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

NET-ID:00

DELETE PROGR.

BUSDELAY:

000

NET

REMOTE RUNCARDINFORMATIONETHERNETSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATEPROGRAMThe submenu is only
provided in English
Select the NET-GROUP you want using the cursor keys.
Set the device's NET-ID.
Select the network setting you want.
NET-GROUP
Used to select the group for the selected base device.
0
Base device running in standalone mode with the relevant I/O expansions (if any),no NET group
1-10
Possible NET-GROUP
NET-ID
Used to assign a group device number from the NET GROUP to the selected basedevice.
0Base device running in standalone mode with the relevant I/O expansions (if any)
1-8
Available device IDs in the NET-GROUP
Bus delay
The bus delay is used to define the time after which a station on the NET will send its
data to other stations.

566

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.5 NETThis bus delay needs to be adjusted as appropriate for the number of stations and thevalues being transmitted. Please note than an excessively short bus delay will result indata collisions.
The permissible value range for the bus delay is 10 ms to 255 ms.
Cyclical data will be sent every 10 ms or when there is a data change, but not before
the bus delay has elapsed. Using the default value of 60 ms will normally be sufficient toprevent transmission overloads.
Remote RUN
If this field is enabled, the NET stations of a group with NET-IDs 02 through 08 will taketheir current RUN or STOP operating mode from the NET station with NET-ID 1.
See also→ Section "Setting up a NET", page 625

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

567

7. System settings
7.6 Ethernet

7.6 Ethernet
This submenu can be used to configure the addresses for the easyE4 device.
The other station must also be configured accordingly in order for it to be possible toestablish a connection.
The last line on the status display will indicate whether there is an active connection.
New easyE4 base devices will come with the Auto IP setting configured by default. In
order to configure the settings differently on the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P), use the menu
structure and go to System Options\Ethernet
The submenu is only provided in English
Table 83: Ethernet configuration on device
Table 84: Main menu
Table 85: System options
STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 86: System options\Ethernet

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

ADDRESS MODESET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

IP ADDRESSDELETE PROGR.

SUBNET MASKNETGATEWAY ADDRESSINFORMATIONETHERNETDNS SERVERSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATECARD

PROGRAM

Use the cursor buttons to enter the device's
IP address.

Table 87: System Options\Ethernet\IP Address
IP-ADDRESS
000.000.000.000

Select the network setting you want.

Table 88: System Options\Ethernet\Address mode
AUTO IP✓DHCPSTATIC IP

See also→ Section "Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program", page
100

568

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.7 Update

7.7 Update
easyE4 expansion devices are equipped with a new operating system in this submenu.
A firmware update is possible for devices of version 1.10 or higher.
Updates for the operating system are made available by Eaton Industries GmbH, Bonnin the Download Center - Software under Firmware Updates as *.zip files.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Firmware Updates/easy
http://www.eaton.eu/software/OS Updates/easy
Observe the documents belonging to the update in the download center.
Unzip the required operating system file matching the easyE4 expansion device"*.FW" on the microSD memory card.
The easyE4 expansion device must be connected to the base device with the EASY-E4CONNECT1 plug connector.
The number of the easyE4 expansion is determined based on the position after the basedevices, starting with 1 from the left. The maximum number 11 can be assigned to an
expansion in the assembly block.
An update must be carried out separately for each expansion device.
Table 89: Updating expansion devices
Table 90: Main menu
Table 91: System options
STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 92: System options\Update

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

UPDATESET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

CARD

DELETE PROGR.
NETINFORMATIONETHERNETSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATEEXPANSIONPROGRAMFirst, select the number of the easyE4 expansion in the block; 1 to 11 are possible.
Select the corresponding operating system
file.

Table 93: System options\Update\Expansion
EXPANSION
1 -1 1UPDATEF i l e n a m eç£££¡¡¡¡££££££ÇThe easyE4 base devices can only be updated via the microSD memory card.
See also→ Section "Firmware update base device", page 1→ Section "Firmware update expansion device", page 1

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

569

7. System settings
7.8 Switch languages

7.8 Switch languages
The menus are available in several languages.
7.8.1 Selecting a menu language on a base device with a display
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\MENU LANGUAGE.
Select one of the available languages.
Confirm with the OK button.
Exit the menu with the ESC button.
Table 94: System Options\Menu Language
ENGLISHDEUTSCH✓FRANCAIS
ESPAŇOLITALIANONEDERLANDSPOLSKIČESKÝPORTUGUÊS
РУССКИЙ
TÜRKÇEROMÂNĀMAGYAR

The language will change when you exit the menu.
7.8.2 Setting the menu language in the easySoft 7
Only possible with easySoft 7.
You can change the user interface language in easySoft 7.
Click on the Options menu.
Select the Languages menu option.
Click on the language you want.
Before the change can be applied, the software will need to be closed and restarted.
Dutch is only available as a menu language on the base device.

570

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.9 Setting the startup behavior

7.9 Setting the startup behavior
The startup mode defines how the easyE4 device will respond when the supply voltage
is applied.
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P)Devices without a display automatically start in RUN mode.
After power up, the easyE4 device switches directly to RUN mode if it contains a valid
program.
If, on the other hand, there is no program in the easyE4 device, it will remain in STOP
mode.
If the device is connected via Ethernet, it can be configured.
A *.e70 program can be loaded via a memory card.
EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P)The startup behavior of devices with a display can be set.
With the SYSTEM OPTIONS/SYSTEM/RUN START menu option on the device or in the
program in easySoft 7 by using the RUN start option.
This option will be stored on the device together with the program.
→ Section "Overview of switch-on behavior", page 98
Startup behavior
The startup behavior is an important aid during the commissioning phase.
The circuit diagram which EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) contains is not yet fully wired up or thesystem or machine is in a state which EASY-E4-... is not permitted to control.
If voltage is applied to the easyE4 device in this case, it should not be possible to drive
the outputs, i.e., it is not allowed for the outputs to be set immediately when the easyE4
is switched on.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

571

7. System settings
7.9 Setting the startup behavior

7.9.1 Enabling / disabling the RUN START option
Only possible on base devices with a display.
7.9.1.1 Configuration on base devices with a display
In order to configure it, the program must be stopped.
STOP ✓ RUN

Operating mode changes may be protected with a password.
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SYSTEM.
Select the RUN START menu option.
Press the OK button to enable and disable the option.
Display

StatusRUN START ✓ActiveRUN MODEThe program will start as soon as the device is switched on(the device will switch to RUN mode).
Disabled The program will need to be started separately (the device
will remain in STOP mode).

The RUN START option will be enabled by default on the EASY-E4-..., aswell as after a factory reset.
What will happen if the program is deleted
The startup mode setting is a device function and will be retained even if the circuit diagram is deleted.
Upload/download to memory card or PLC
The setting will be retained when a valid program is transferred.

7.9.2 Enabling / disabling the CARD START option
The mode for starting up with a memory card is intended for applications in which it isnecessary for it to be possible to change programs easily and quickly by changing thememory card.
If the program on the memory card is different to the program in the easyE4 device, theprogram from the card will be loaded on power up first of all and then started in RUN
mode. If the programs only contain different function block SETPOINT values (constants), the program on the memory card is not loaded.
The program is retained in the device and is started. If there is no circuit diagram on thememory card the device will remain in STOP mode. For a detailed description of theeffect of this option, see → "Switching on the device with the microSD memory card",
page 1.

572

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.9 Setting the startup behavior

Default setting CARD START inactive
7.9.2.1 Configuration on base devices with a display
In order to be able to do this, the program must be in STOP mode. If it is not, the device
will point this out.
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SYSTEM.
Select the CARD START menu option.
Press the OK button to enable and disable the option.
If there is a checkmark ü next to the menu option, the program will be loaded from thememory card and applied as soon as the easyE4 device is switched on.
If there is no check mark, the current program will be kept.
7.9.2.2 Configuring the easySoft 7
You can enable and disable this option in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the Memory card / device ID section and find the checkbox for Card start.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
See also→ Section "Configuring the microSD card and device ID", page 586

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

573

7. System settings
7.10 Debounce

7.10 Debounce
easyE4 is factory set to evaluate input signals with an input delay, the so-called
debounce function. This ensures that any contact bouncing of switches and pushbuttons is masked out.
There are certain applications in which detecting very brief input signals is necessary.
In order to ensure that this will happen in those cases, you can disable the input delay ifnecessary.
7.10.1 Configuring input debouncing on a base device with a display
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SYSTEM.
Select the DEBOUNCE menu option.
Press the OK button to enable and disable the option.
If there is a checkmark ü next to the menu option, input debouncing will be enabled.
If there is no check mark, it will be disabled instead.
7.10.2 Configuring input debouncing in easySoft 7
You can enable and disable the input delay in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the System settings section and look for the Debounce checkbox.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.

574

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.11 Download comments

7.11 Download comments
Only possible with easySoft 7.
All the comments created in easySoft 7 can be loaded onto the device together with the
project.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the Comments section and look for the Download comments checkbox.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

575

7. System settings
7.12 P buttons

7.12 P buttons"P buttons" are the cursor buttons on easyE4 devices with a display and keypad.
When working with EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) devices, you can use the buttons as a contact in your circuit diagram.
In order to prevent accidental operation, the buttons will not be
automatically enabled.

7.12.1 Configuring the P buttons on a base device with a display
In order to configure it, the program must be stopped.
STOP ✓ RUN

Operating mode changes may be protected with a password.
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SYSTEM.
Select the P BUTTON menu option.
Press the OK button to enable and disable the option.
If there is a checkmark ü next to the menu option, input debouncing will be enabled.
If there is no check mark, it will be disabled instead.
7.12.2 Configuring the P buttons in easySoft 7
You can enable and disable the P buttons in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the System settings section and look for the checkbox for P buttons and an input
field.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
Max. cycle time [ms]This setting can be used to define the maximum cycle time you want. The default setting is 1000 ms, and the value range is 0 to 1000 ms. The device will switch to STOP
mode as soon as a program cycle exceeds the configured maximum cycle time.
Enter the maximum cycle time in [ms] into the input field.
If you do not enter a value into the input field, the default setting will be used instead.

576

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.13 Define program name7.13 Define program name
Only possible with easySoft 7.
You can name your program in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the Program name section and look for the input field.
Enter the name you want into the text field so that it will be applied to the program.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

577

7. System settings
7.14 Retention function

7.14 Retention function
Only possible with easySoft 7.
It is a requirement of system and machine controllers for operating states or ACTUAL
values to have retentive settings. What this means is that the values will be retained
until the next time the ACTUAL value is overwritten.
There are two input fields (for the start and end values of the retention range) each formarkers and for the following function blocks.
Project view/ System settings tab

Figure 259: Screenshot of Retention section that can be found in the System settings tab in the Project
view (including sample values)

Value range for the function blocks, instances that can be stored retentively:
C - Counter relay : 01…32
l CH - High-speed counter : 01…04
l CI - Incremental counter : 01…02
l DB - Data function block : 01…32
l T - Timing relay : 01…32
l

For more information, please refer to the description for the relevant function block.
Marker value ranges:
MB : 1 …512l MW : 1…512
l MD : 1…256l

The values from the input field will be automatically converted to MB marker bytes.
Retention bytes
The entire retentive marker range for an easyE4 must not exceed 400 bytes. The total of
the retention bytes for the main program and user function blocks (UF) will be displayedin the Project view, in the System settings tab. If the retentive marker range exceeds
400 bytes, a red negative number will be shown in the Free field in order to indicate this.
Retain retention during transfer
Retentive ACTUAL values on the device are deleted:578

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.14 Retention function

By any program change in the circuit diagram or function block diagram followed by
its transfer to the device.
l When the program is deleted with the Communication/Program/Configuration/Delete
device buttonl By any change of the retentive range via Project view/System settings/Retention.
l By any changes to the parameters for the remote markers of a visualization device.
l When deleting the device from the workspace of the project view.
l

The following exception applies to retentive markers:
Marker contents
If this option is enabled, the contents of the existing retentive marker range will be
retained when the program is transferred. The ACTUAL marker values are retained.
In order for this to work, however, the marker range defined as being retentive mustremain unchanged.
Function block contents
If this option is enabled, the contents of the existing retentive operand range will be
retained when the program is transferred.
In order for this to work, however, the function block defined as being retentive mustremain unchanged.
7.14.1 Retention in the easySoft 7
You can configure the retention function both for markers and for function block contents in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to theRetain retention during transfer
section and look for the checkbox for Marker contents and the checkbox for Function block contentsl Retention
l Retention bytesl

To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To configure the corresponding retention as necessary, enable the Marker contents
and/or Function block contents checkbox.
Define the ranges that should remain retentive by selecting them and entering the corresponding values.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

579

7. System settings
7.14 Retention function

These ranges should be used exclusively for values that are
required in order to be able to start the system back up after arestart. Please keep potential unforeseen and/or undesirable
consequences in mind!

Retention bytes will show the amount of memory needed as you enter the values you
want.
Check whether there is enough memory.

580

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.15 Security – password protection

7.15 Security – password protection
Configuring password settings and password-protected areas is only possible on
easyE4 devices with a display or must alternatively be configured in easySoft 7.
Password protection can be used to lock access to various areas.
At least one area must be protected.
In the default setting the circuit diagram is selected.

7.15.1 Configuring the password on a base device with a display
Defining password-protected areas
To define the areas that should be protected with a password, follow the steps below:
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SECURITY\AREA.
Select the desired range
Press the OK button to enable and disable the option.
If there is a checkmark ✓ for the area next to the scrollbar, this means that access tothe corresponding area will be protected with a password prompt.
If there is no checkmark, it will be possible to access the area freely.
Table 95:
System options\Security\Area
PROGRAM✓PARAMETER
CLOCK
OPERATING MODE
MEMORY CARD
INTERFACE
DELETE FUNCTION

The submenu shows the device areas that can be protected.
PROGRAM The password is applied to the PROGRAMS as well as function blocks
that are not enabled. This area also prevents the transfer of a circuit
diagram from and to the memory card.
PARAMETER The PARAMETERS menu is protected.
CLOCK
Date and time are protected with the password.
OPERATING It is not possible to change the operating mode from RUN to STOP andMODEvice versa using the operating buttons of the device.
MEMORY
Access to the microSD memory card will be protected.
CARD

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

581

7. System settings
7.15 Security – password protection

INTERFACE

DELETEFUNCTION

Protects against access to the Ethernet interface of this device.
Data exchange via the net is not affected.
Take into account the restricting effect of a protectedinterface if you have to reset the easyE4 device.
When this function is not activated, the question “DELETE PROG?” willappear if the password entry is entered incorrectly four times. This
question does not appear if you protect the this area. However, it is nolonger possible to make changes in protected areas if you forget the
password.

At least one of the following areas must be protected: Program, Parameters, Clock, Operating Mode, or Memory Card.
If you do not select any of these areas, "Program" will be selected automatically.
The PROGRAM area will be selected by default when using thedevice's factory settings.
Assigning a password
Go to the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SECURITY.
Select the PASSWORD menu option.
Table 96:
System options\Security
PASSWORDRANGE

You can use any numbers or letters for the six-character password. Special charactersand umlauts are not permitted.
PASSWORD:

0XXXXX

ABCDEFGHIJ KLM
NOPQRSTUVC-XYZ
O1234567890

Figure 260: Password assignment

The first password character will flash.
Select the first letter or number for the password.
Confirm the entry with the OK pushbutton.
Repeat these steps for the remaining characters in the password.

582

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.15 Security – password protection

You can cancel at any time with the ESC button.
Enabling the password:
Place the cursor anywhere inside the password.
Press the OK button.
The password submenu will be displayed.
CHANGE PW
ACTIVATE PW✓

Figure 261: Password submenu

Select the ACTIVATE PW menu option.
Confirm the password with the OK pushbutton.
The password will be enabled in order to → Section "Defining password-protectedareas", page 581.
Changing a password
Press the OK button on the easyE4 to open the main menu.
Go to SYSTEM OPTIONS\SECURITY\PASSWORD.
If a password has been assigned, the submenu for the password will be displayed.
Select the CHANGE PW menu option.
Enter the password.
The submenu for changing the password will be displayed.
NEW PASSWORD:PASSWORD:

0 XXXXXABCDEFGHIJ KLM
N O P Q R S T U V C-X Y Z
O1234567890

Figure 262: Submenu for changing
the password

To assign a new password, follow the same steps outlined in → Section "Assigning apassword", page 582
Removing password protection
To disable password protection, assign a password of <000000> .
7.15.1.1 What happens if you forget your password or enter the wrong password?
When you enter the wrong password, there will be a short period during which you will
be locked out. You can try and enter the password again once this period elapses.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

583

7. System settings
7.15 Security – password protection

If the DELETE FUNCTION area is password-protected,
you will be able to enter a password as many times as you
want.
Starting from the fifth wrong attempt, the base device will display a delete prompt.
ESC button: Abort, circuit diagram, data or password are not deleted.
OK button: Circuit diagram, data and password are deleted.
If you no longer know the exact password, you can press OK to unlock the protected
easyE4 device.
The saved program and all function relay parameters will be lost.

7.15.2 Configuring the password in easySoft 7
When working on a project, you can set a password for the <program>.e70 and selectthe areas you want to protect in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view.
Click on the Register Security.
Go to the Password entry section. This section will feature a checkbox for each areathat can be protected with the password, as well as an input field for the password.
Project view\Security

Figure 263: Assigning a program password

To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
You can use any numbers or letters for the six-character password. Special charactersand umlauts are not permitted.
Enter the password into the input field.
Confirm the password by entering it again.

584

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.15 Security – password protection

If you enable

the checkbox, the password will be shown in cleartext.

When you save the project, the password will be enabled for the <program>.e70.
The Delete password button will reset the password

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

585

7. System settings
7.16 Configuring the microSD card and device ID

7.16 Configuring the microSD card and device ID
Only possible with easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view
Click on the System settings tab.
Go to the Memory card / device ID section and look for the Card start checkbox, theAllow overwriting via card checkbox, and the numeric input field.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
If

Card start, the device will access the microSD when it is switched on.

If Allow overwriting via card, it will be possible for the
program that is found on the microSD card to overwrite the program stored on theeasyE4.
You can enter a six-digit number as a Program/device ID into the input field.
This ID ensures that a program will be transfered on theeasyE4 device only if the IDs match.
The system will use the device ID and program ID you entered in order to check
whether it is permissible to transfer the selected program to the correspondingbase device.
See also→ Section "Transferring programs from and to the microSD memory card", page187
→ Chapter "1 -Memory card", page 1→ Section "Device ID", page 564
easySoft 7 Help, Communication view586

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

7.17 Time and Date setting
easyE4 devices feature a real-time clock (RTC) with a date and time functionality. This
real-time clock forms the basis for all the time-based operations controlled with theeasyE4.
When combined with the HW, HY or WT, YT function blocks, this real-time clock makes
it possible to implement the functionality of a weekly timer and year time switch.
The AC manufacturer function block can be used to implement a sunrise time and sunset time functionality.

7.17.1 Time and date on a base device with a display
Go to the main menu.
Go to SET CLOCK.
Select the DATE & TIME menu option.
Table 97: Set Clock\Time/Date
DD-MM-YYYY
FR 13.08.2018
12:03:04

Select the display format you want in the first line.
Use thecursor buttons to scroll through the available formats.
Select the format you want.
DD-MM-YYYY
DD/MM/YYYY Day.Month.Year
DD.MM.YYYY
MM/DD/.YYYY Month.Day.YearYYYY-MM-DD
Year.Month.Day
YYYY.MM.DD
The display will change accordingly.
Use thecursor buttons to jump to the individual input positions in the date andtime format.
Set the values by means of the cursor keys.
Confirm the entry with the OK pushbutton.
There are additional configuration options available in the SET CLOCK menu.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

587

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

DST setting DST
Go to the main menu.
Go to SET CLOCK.
Select the SUMMER TIME menu option.
Table 98: Set clock\Daylightsaving time
✓

NO
DST
US
RULE

The following will be available for selection: None, CEST,US, and Rule. A checkmark ✓will indicate which setting is currently selected.
If you select "None," no daylight saving time schedule will be applied. "CEST" will apply
the Central European Summer Time schedule, while "US" will apply the daylight saving
time schedule used in the United States. Finally, selecting "Rule" will enable you todefine your own custom schedule.
Table 99: Set Clock\Daylight
Saving\Rule
SUMMERTIME START
SUMMERTIME END

In "Rule,"
select when you want daylight saving time to start and when you want it to end.
The easyE4 will apply your settings and will automatically change the clock on thedates you selected.
Setting radio clock
Alternatively, you can also have the system synchronize its clock with a radio time signal. If this functionality is enabled, the real-time clock on the device will be overwritten
as soon as a suitable radio time signal is received.
Go to the main menu.
Go to SET CLOCK.
Select the RADIO CLOCK menu option.
To enable it, use thecursor buttons to select the YES option.
Use thecursor buttons to select the input you want.
Use thecursor buttons to define the value you want.
Use the same steps to enter the offset from the radio time signal time.
The unit for this offset is minutes, while each individual increment is 5 minutes.

588

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

Table 100: Set Clock\Radio
Clock
RADIO
CLOCK
ACTIVE

: YES

INPUT

: I001OFFSET: +000'Setting up the astronomical clock
You can also set the real-time clock using the astronomical clock. This astronomicalclock calculates both sunrise and sunset times based on latitude and longitude.
The settings in this submenu will apply globally to all 32 possible instances of the → Section "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272 function block in the user program.
Go to the main menu.
Go to SET CLOCK.
Select the ASTRON. CLOCK menu option.
Use thecursor buttons to select a digit in the coordinate input line.
Use thecursor buttons to define the value you want.
Repeat the steps above to enter the offset between the time zone and UTC.
The unit for this offset is minutes, while each individual increment is 5 minutes.
LAT: Latitude coordinate
LNG: Longitude coordinate(±) is entered with N-North/S-South and E-East/W-West in thefirst input character.
Format: (±) ddd.ddddd, in decimal degrees
Pressing theseconds.

button will switch the input line to DMS with degrees, minutes, andTable 101: Set clock\astron.
clock
ASTRON.

CLOCK

LAT

N000. 0000000

LNG

E000. 0000000

OFFSET:+000'

The input entered on the easyE4 device will be overwritten every time a program is transferred. This means that in order to always have the coordinates available on the device, the coordinate information must be stored in
easySoft 7 for the program. To do this, you can transfer the modified program to easySoft 7 and save it there if you want to apply this information to
the location data in the project.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

589

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

ExampleSettings for time zone in Bonn (UTC+1 hour) in decimal degrees
Table 102: Set clock\astron.
clock
ASTRO

CLOCK

LAT

N050.

734012

LON

E007.

082808OFFSET: +060'and DMS
Table 103: Set clock\astron.
clock
ASTRO.

CLOCK

LAT

N050° 44'02"

LON

E007° 04'58"

DIFFERENCE: +060'7.17.2 Setting time and date in the easySoft 7
You can enable and disable the time in easySoft 7.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view.
Click on the Register Clock.
Go to the SNTP synchronization section and look for the checkbox for Synchronize
clock via SNTP.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
Select whether you want to enter a URL or the IP address for the SNTP server.
Enter the address into the corresponding field.
Alternatively, you can synchronize the clock with a radio time signal.
Go to the Radio clock synchronization section and look for the Synchronize clock via
radio (DCF77) checkbox.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
Use the drop-down menus to select the input you want to use and the time offset,
in [min], at the location where the easyE4 is being used.
Finally, you can use the Daylight saving time section to configure the corresponding settings as needed.
Enable theNone, CEST, US setting
or590

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

The Rule setting if you want to define your own custom schedule.
Click on the Modify time zone... button to specify the time zone where you are located.
Go to the Time zone section to select the time zone corresponding to the location where
the easyE4 device is being used.
Clicking on the Modify time zone... button will open the Time zone and geographic
coordinates dialog box.
Use the City drop-down menu to select one of the available cities.
You can click on the New button to add a new option based on geographic coordinates.
The new option will be saved on the local system.
NET-GROUP
If you are using a NET GROUP, you can select a easyE4 device from the group that willserve as the time reference for all the other devices in the NET GROUP.
Go to the NET synchronization section and look for the checkbox for Synchronize clock
via NET.
To turn on, enable the checkbox by clicking on it.
To turn off, disable the checkbox by clicking on it.
Select the NET-ID (station number) corresponding to the device in the NET GROUP
that will serve as the time reference for the other devices.
Application
Say that only one easyE4 device in the NET group features a radio clock and that you
want this device to serve as the time reference for all the other devices in the group. In
this case, you would enter the NET-ID of the device here.
See also
Timer modules→ "HW - 7-day time switch (Hour Week)", page 218→ "HY - Year time switch (Hora Year)", page 228→ "WT - Weekly timer (WeekTable)", page 268→ "YT - Year time switch (Year Table)", page 261→ "AC - Astronomic clock ", page 272

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

591

7. System settings
7.17 Time and Date setting

592

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside

8. easyE4 InsideeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

593

8. easyE4 Inside
8.1 Program execution

8.1 Program execution
When using the LD or FBD programming language, the program will be executed as follows:l

The program will start by reading the hardware's input states and writing them tothe image table register. After this, it will run through network 01 in its entirety andnot only process all function blocks and logic circuitry, but also write the state of all
mapping assignments (Q, M, etc., and function blocks) to the image table register. It
will then run through the next network (if any networks are jumped over, they will
not be run through). Once the last network has been run through, the resulting output states will be transmitted to the hardware The cycle will then start again.

In the Programming language STl

The program will start by reading the hardware's input states and writing them tothe image table register. After this, it will execute the statement and instruction list
from top to bottom and modify the image table register every time there is a mapping assignment (if any statements or instructions are jumped over, they will not be
executed). The cycle will then start again.

When using the EDP (easy Device Programming) programming languagelThis programming language is the same one that can be use for programming directly on the base device. The way in which this program will be executed is
identical to the way programs are executed on the existing easy500, easy700, andeasy800 devices.

In conventional control systems, a relay or contactor control processes all the rungs inparallel. The speed with which a contactor switches is thus dependent on the components used, and ranges from 15 to 40 ms for relay pick-up and drop-out.
Table 104: Cycle timeeasyE4

①
③ ①

②

594

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Readprocess
image

②

③

Process circuit
Write
diagram and func- process
tion
image
block diagram
Local
Local
inputsoutputs
Function
Function
block
block
inputsoutputs
Markers
Markers
Diagnostics
NET stainformation
tions outputs

8. easyE4 Inside
8.1 Program execution

NET stations
inputsDuring this time, the easyE4 device passes through six segments in succession.
If the operands of the inputs and outputs are addressed in the easyE4, the signal statesof the digital inputs/outputs are not scanned but a memory range in the device systemmemory is accessed. This memory range is called the process image. The process
image is divided into two sections: the process image for the inputs and the process
image for the outputs.
Segment 1 - 4The easyE4 device evaluates the contact fields within the first four segments. The evaluation starts in the first segment in circuit diagram line 1 and continues from top to bottom until circuit diagram line n is reached.
The easyE4 device then moves to the next contact segment and continues to evaluate
from top to bottom until it has reached the last contact in the fourth segment. During thisprocess it checks whether contacts are switched in parallel or in series and saves theswitching states of all contact fields.
Segment 5
In the fifth segment the easyE4 device assigns all coils in one pass, from the circuit diagram line 1 - n, with the new switch states from the process image of the outputs.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

595

8. easyE4 Inside
8.1 Program execution

Segment 6
In the sixth segment which is outside of the circuit diagram, the function blocks present
in the function block list are evaluated.
The easyE4 device uses this sixth segment in order to:lprocess the existing function blocks. The output data of a function block is immediately up-to-date after it has been processed. The function blocks are processedby the easyE4 device in the order of the function block list (￫ FUNCTION BLOCKSmenu).

The following requirements must be fulfilled when using particular function blocks:
Contact the “outside world”
Output relays Q 01 to Q… are switched and inputs I 1
to I… are re-read.
l to exchange NET data if this easyE4 device receives newread data or provides new send data ( on ).
l to copy all new switching states to the process image.
lrungSegment

Figure 264: How the EDP evaluates circuit diagrams and function blocks

596

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.2 Transfering an existing circuit diagram

8.2 Transfering an existing circuit diagram
Existing easy.e60 programs can be imported with easySoft 7.
When importing existing programs / projects, you will be able to select either the EDPor LD programming language:
EDP programs will be imported in their entirety, and their flow structure will be compatible with previous devices.
If the program / project is instead imported into LD, the first mapping assignment will beto an intermediate marker. Once the last mapping assignment to an intermediatemarker is completed, the intermediate markers will be mapped to the actual M, Q, etc.
function block operands. This ensures that the program will keep the same flow structure as the previous devices.
easySoft 7 will output an import log that specifies how the inputs, outputs, and markers
have been rewired.
If a project featuring an easyE4 features MFD-CP8/10 stations
as well, the MFD devices will be shown as "other" NET stations.
easySoft 7 will use the previous devices and the operands
used as a basis in order to optimize the easyE4 hardware andthe new <xyz>.e70 program.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

597

8. easyE4 Inside
8.3 Device information

8.3 Device information
Device information is provided in the
Information menu both for service purposes and in order to make it possible to identify
the device's performance characteristics.
Following data is displayed:
The submenu is only provided in English
ACTUAL CONFIG - Shows the device configurationl

NET GROUP: The NET group number, on a single line, e.g., 00l

NET-ID: The device's station number, on a single line, e.g., 00l

MAC ADDRESS: (MAC address of the device), two display lines

e.g. 0022C712343E
l DEVICE NAME: e.g.:EASYE4-12UC1 Assigned DNS device name for the ETHERNET
network → chapter "8 System settings", page 561
l IP-ADDRESS: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
l SUBNET MASK: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
l GATEWAY ADDRESS: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
l DNS SERVER: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
l WEB SERVER (Enabled / Disabled)l

HTTP PORTl

MODBUS TCP (Enabled / Disabled)

SYSTEM - Shows the operating system version

598: Part number

l

E4-

l

B

l

OS : 1.00(Version)l

CRC : 60268(checksum): 0068(build version)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.4 NET network

8.4 NET network
The NET functionality via Ethernet was created in order to simplify communications
between easyE4 base devices while simultaneously ensuring that it would be possible
to import existing easy800 projects.
A NET group can be made up of up to eight easyE4 base devices. Within the group, theeasyE4 base devices can communicate with each other. If, however, you want devices
to be able to communicate across groups, you will need to use a coordinator device
that allows the easyE4 base devices from the various groups to communicate witheach other via Modbus.
Ten NET groups (groups 1 through 10) can be run on a single Ethernet network at one
time (this is the equivalent of 80 easyE4 base devices).
Ethernet network
↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

ModuleModuleModuleStations…

ModuleModuleModuleNET-ID 1 NET-ID… NET-ID 8 NET-ID…
NET group 1

NET-ID 1 NET-ID… NET-ID 8

NET group… NET group 10

The following list shows the operands that can be used within a group by every device:(n = NET-ID 1 .. 8)l n SN 01 - 32 [Bit]l n RN 01 - 32 [Bit]l PT 01 - 32 (PUT) [double word]l GT 01 – 32 (GET) double word]l n N 01 - 512[ Bit]l n NB 01 - 64 [Byte]l n NW 01 - 32 [Byte]l n ND 01 - 16 [double word]l Synchronize clock (settings)lExamplesStation 1 sending a bit to station 2
NET-ID1

NET-ID 2

2 SN 15￫ 1 RN 015

Station 3 sending a double word to station 8 via PT16
NET-ID1
pt16

NET-ID 2￫ GT 01
Parameter
NET-ID 1
PT 16

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

599

8. easyE4 Inside
8.4 NET network

Station 4 sending a network marker [bit and word] to all stations.
NET-ID4

NET-ID 2 NET-ID 5 NET-ID 7

N 125￫ 4 N 125

NW30

￫ 4 NW 30 4 NW 30 4 NW 30

4 N 125

4 N 125

This basic principle applies to all network markers in all data formats:
Network markers overlap in the various data formats
N1-8 N916

N1724

N2532

N3340

N4148

N4956

N5764

NB1

NB3

NB4

NB5

NB6

NB7

NB8

NB2

NW1

NW2

NW3

ND1

ND2

N65- N7372
80
NB9

NW4

N8188

N8996

N97104

N105- N113- N121120
112
128

NB10 NB11 NB12 NB13 NB14

NW5

NW6

ND3

NW7

NB15

NB16

NW8

ND4

etc.
Life signs NET stations
In order to make it possible for all NET stations within a group to be able to knowwhether NET stations important to them are still communicating, each station cyclicallysends a heartbeat every second (1 s). If a heartbeat is not received, the corresponding
error bit ID01 – 08 will be set to "1" until a heartbeat is detected.
Remote Run
If this flag is set, the NET stations in a group with NET-ID 02 through 08 will follow thecurrent operating mode of the NET station with NET-ID 1 (RUN or STOP).
Bus Delay
The bus delay defines the delay that a station on the NET will use when sending its data
to other stations.
This bus delay must be adjusted in line with the number of stations and the values beingtransmitted. If it is too short, there will be data collisions and the Ethernet will be limited
to transmitting NET communications exclusively.
The value range for the bus delay is 10 ms to 255 ms.
The following rule of thumb applies:
l600

Case A: When using PUT/GET and network markers:l Bus delay in ms = (number of NET stations - 1) * 4 * 2 + 6

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.4 NET network

Case B: If only network markers are being used:l Bus delay in ms = (number of NET stations - 1) * 2 * 2 + 6l

The following table can be used as a convenient guide for configuring the setting:Number of modules:

Delay with put/getms

Delay without put/get
ms

2

14

10

3

22

14

4

30

18

5

38

22

6

46

26

7

54

30

8

62

34

If you are no longer able to connect to the NET stations via Ethernet with easySoft 7, set the bus delay as high as possible foryour application. To do this, you will need to disconnect eachdevice from the Ethernet and use easySoft 7 to change the bus
delay point by point.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

601

8. easyE4 Inside
8.5 Operating states easyE4

8.5 Operating states easyE4
easyE4 devices feature various operating states.
Switched off- no supply voltage available
Powered up
If there is no program on the base device, the base device will remain in the STOP
operating mode and it will not be possible to execute any programs.
l If a program has been loaded onto the device, the base device will remain in the
STOP operating mode until it switches to RUN. When the base device is in STOP
mode, the program will not be executed. Connected expansion devices will communicate with the base device as long as there are no configuration errors, and all
the outputs on all devices will have a state of 0 (OFF). In addition, it will be possible
to communicate with easySoft 7 via Ethernet.
l The base device can be switched to the RUN operating mode with the menu or
through easySoft 7. In this case, the program will be executed and the outputs will
be switched on and off as per the program logic. Existing communication services
such as NET, Modbus, web servers, etc. will be running, and it will be possible touse them.
l602

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

8.6 Device easyE4 time responses
8.6.1 Time behavior of the inputs and outputs
The reaction time, which is measured from the reading in of a digital input signal to thesetting of the associated output, is determined by the timing characteristics of theeasyE4 inputs and outputs as well as the size and design of the circuit diagram.
Input delay (debounce)
The time required from reading the inputs to switching the contacts (setting the outputs)in the circuit diagram can be increased on the easyE4 base device using an input delay,
the so-called I-DEBOUNCE, please refer to → Section "Debounce", page 574
This function is useful, for example, in order to ensure a clean switching signal despite
contact bounce.
S1

I1

Figure 265: easyE4 input assigned a switch

EASY-E4-DC-... devices and EASY-E4-AC-... devices operate with physically different
input voltages and therefore differ in the length and evaluation of debounce times.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

603

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

8.6.2 Base device timing
8.6.2.1 Delay time for operation with DC power supply
Delay time with debounce activatedWhen debounce is activated, the delay time for DC signals is 20 ms.
S1

1
0

I1

1
0

C

A
B

B

B

B

B

Figure 266: Delay times for evaluating an DC input signal and an activated debounce

The times for A and C depend on the specific device.
For more information, please refer to the device data sheet → Section "Technical data",
page 699
An input signal S1 must therefore be 1 on the input terminal for at least 20 ms before theswitch contact will change from 0 to 1 (A). If applicable, this time must also include thecycle time (B) since a easyE4 device does not detect the signal until the start of a cycle.
When the DC signal drops from 1 to 0 with debounce active, the same delay time (C) of
20 ms applies. For this the input signal S1 must be 0 at the input terminal.

604

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

Delay time with debounce deactivatedWhen I-DEBOUNCE is deactivated, the delay time (A) for DC signals on the input foreasyE4 base devices is reduced.
S1

1
0

I1

1
0

A
B

B

C
B

B

B

Figure 267: Switching behavior with debounce deactivated

The times for A and C depend on the specific device.
For more information, please refer to the device data sheet → Section "Technical data",
page 699
When debounce is deactivated ensure that input signals arefree of noise. The easyE4 device responds to very short signals.
To allow reliable recognition and processing of the input signal
in the user program, it must be applied stably for a certain duration, the length of which depends on the circuit diagram processing cycle time.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

605

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

8.6.2.2 Delay time for operation with AC power supply
In the case of AC inputs, the easyE4 device will read the input signal every period with ascan cycle of tSC.
The scan cycle depends on the supply frequency.
S1
1

2

1

2

①
A

B

②
A

B

tSC

Figure 268: Delay times for evaluating an AC input signal①②

without I-DEBOUNCE andfor an activated I-DEBOUNCE

Delay time with debounce activated
If the DEBOUNCE function is activated, the easyE4 device checks each period whether
a positive half-wave is present at an input terminal during two successive scan cycles
tSC1 (1st and 2nd scan pulse at A). If the easyE4 device registers two positive halfwaves in succession, it switches the appropriate input (contact) internally from 0 to 1.
S1
1

2

1

2

tSC
A

B

Figure 269: Switching behavior of AC input signal with DEBOUNCE activatedAccordingly, the typical input delay caused by the debounce option is at least 40 ms (50Hz). The cycle time needs to be added to this, since a easyE4 device will not detect thesignal until the start of a cycle. Conversely, the input is switched off if the easyE4
device does not detect any half-cycles twice in succession (1st and 2nd pulse at B).
ll

Switch-on delay (normally):l I1 … I8: 45 ms (38 ms)
Off-delay (normally):l I1 … I8: 45 ms (38 ms)

The corresponding values for 60 Hz are given in brackets.

606

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

Delay time with debounce deactivated
If the debounce option is disabled, the delay time will decrease. If a positive half wave
is detected, the easyE4 device will directly switch the corresponding input (contact)from 0 to 1 (A) internally.
S1
1

2

1

2

tSC
A

B

Figure 270: Switching behavior of AC input signal with DEBOUNCE deactivated

If a positive half-cycle is not detected the easyE4 switches off the contact (B).
ll

Switch-on delay (normally):l I1 … I8: 25 ms (21 ms)
Off-delay (normally):l I1 … I8: 25 ms (21 ms)

The appropriate values for 60 Hz are given in brackets.
For more information on how to change the delay times, pleaserefer to → Section "Time behavior of the inputs and outputs",
page 603

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

607

8. easyE4 Inside
8.6 Device easyE4 time responses

8.6.3 Timing characteristics of expansion devices
You can use the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector to connect the easyE4 base device to
up to 11 expansions and assemble them into a single device block. This connector will
not only establish the mechanical connection between the devices, but also the electrical connection – easyConnect.
When the outputs and inputs on expansion devices are written to and read respectively
via easyConnect, the corresponding process will not be synchronized with the program
cycle. In fact, if the easyConnect cycle is more than twice as fast as the program cycle,
the inputs and outputs will be refreshed with every program cycle.
If, on the other hand, the easyConnect cycle is slower than half the program cycle, theinputs and outputs may be refreshed after two program cycles instead.
The easyConnect cycle time will be between 10 ms and 15 ms depending on the specific configuration.
8.6.3.1 Delay time for AC expansion devices
EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P) AC expansion devices behave like the AC base devices.
EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P) AC expansions support multiple phases, resulting in an additional delay.
ll

Switch-on delay (normally):l I1…I8: 39 ms (32 ms)
Off-delay (normally):l I1…I8: 39 ms (32 ms)

The appropriate values for 60 Hz are given in brackets.
For more information, please refer to the device data sheet → Section "Technical data",
page 699

608

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

9. Operating system diagnostic messages

9. Operating system diagnostic messages
The ‍easyE4 devices output information on their own operating state via ID (operands)
diagnostics contacts. This information can be evaluated in the circuit diagram andshown in the status display 2 on the display.
Diagnostic operands are used in order to obtain information regarding operating statesin the program. (this functionality can only be used when the base device is in RUNmode). If the event in question has occurred, the operands will have a state of 1.
Operand Event
ID01
ID02
ID03
ID04
ID05
ID06
ID07
ID08
ID09
ID10

There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 1 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 2 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 3 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 4 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 5 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 6 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 7 is not present:
There are more than two devices in this NET group and the NET is active.
The NET station 8 is not present:
The DCF77 radio time signal has been enabled in the program. A radio signal is not being detected
at the selected input.
This diagnostic bit is set if one of the following time synchronization operations could not be completed successfully:
l
l
l
l

ID11
ID12

ID13

ID14
ID15
ID16

"Synchronize clock via NET"
"SNTP synchronisation"
Date and time
DCF77 radio clock

Using the SC function block will not result in this error message or in it being cleared.
If the device cannot communicate via Ethernet.
Arithmetic blocks have their own error output that is used to signal whether there is a numeric underflow/overflow, e.g., as a result of attempting to divide by zero. When using the ST programming
language, this diagnostic operand will additionally be set if such an error occurs.
If the base device is being operated with one or more expansion devices, this diagnostic operand
will indicate whether required devices are disconnected from the easyConnect bus or are not being
detected, e.g., in the event of a power failure on an expansion device.
Transistor outputs in the base device are experiencing an overload or a short circuit; the outputs will
be switched off and then checked again after 30 seconds.
––

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

609

9. Operating system diagnostic messages

Operand Event
ID17
ID18
ID19

–
–
There is an interrupt overload. One or more interrupt function blocks are being used, and the interrupt
function block sequence is overloading the easyE4's controller. Not all interrupt function blocks canbe run correctly.

Additional diagnostic messages for the expansion devices can be assigned to diagnostic operands ID25 through ID96 based on the relevant device characteristics.
Transistor output example
Transistor outputs on expansion devices EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P), EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P)When there is a short circuit or overload at an output, the DIAG diagnostic message
can be applied to a diagnostic operand. This means that when the event occurs, theoperands will assume a state of 1.
Example Analog expansion device
Name ondeviceDIAG
DIAG 1
DIAG 2
DIAG 3
DIAG 4

Event
General diagnostic indicating that a diagnostic event is present
Current input overloaded (current greater than 23 mA), excessive voltage
Analog output overloaded, excessive current, load too smallOpen wire at at least one current input (I < 4 mA)
The measuring range has been physically exceeded at an input
The measuring range has been physically fallen below at an input, e.g., the current is < 4 mA for ameasuring range of 4–20 mA.

Temperature expansion example
Name ondeviceDIAG
DIAG 1
DIAG 2610

Event
General diagnostic indicating that a diagnostic event is present
Configured measuring range exceeded at at least one temperature input, or connection cable discontinuity
Configured measuring range fallen below at at least one temperature input, or a short-circuit
has occurred

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

9. Operating system diagnostic messages
9.1 Transistor outputs (overload / short-circuit)

9.1 Transistor outputs (overload / short-circuit)
The base and expansion devices' transistor outputs are thermally protected against
overloads and short circuits. If the temperature inside the four transistor modules is too
high, the outputs will be switched off. If the temperature returns to the operating range
and the outputs are driven, the transistors will switch back on.
The overload / short circuit fault scenario can be detected for the base device with operand ID14.
ID14 = 1, error
Expansion devices feature a "DIAG" output that you can assign to operands ID25
through ID96 for each device.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

611

9. Operating system diagnostic messages
9.2 Diagnostics buffer

9.2 Diagnostics buffer
Only possible with easySoft 7.
During online operation, the diagnostic buffer will be shown in the Communication view.
Additional information on this in the easySoft 7 Help

612

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

9. Operating system diagnostic messages
9.3 LED status messages on the device

9.3 LED status messages on the device
For diagnostic purposes, base devices without a display feature two LEDs, while expansion devices feature one LED. The light patterns on these LEDs are accordingly used toindicate the corresponding device's status.
LED POW/RUN base device
The POW/RUN LED indicates the state of the POW power supply as well as the STOP
or RUN state.
Off
Green, continuous light
Green,
Flashing, 1 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 4 Hz

Malfunction or no supply voltage
Supply voltage OK, RUN mode
Supply voltage OK, STOP mode
Fault at one of the expansions,
between the easyE4 device and the EASY-E4-CONNECT1 connector

LED ETHERNET/NET (base device only)
Off
Yellow, continuous light
Green, continuous light
Red, continuous light
Green, flashing,
2 flashes, pause, etc.
Green, flashing,
1 flash, pause, etc.

No Ethernet cable connected; supply voltage off
The port is not enabled; the easyE4 device does not have an IP address
Ethernet cable connected
There is an IP address, but the NET has not been configured
Ethernet conflict or error, e.g.: duplicate IP address, address collision
NET data flow working; one or more NET stations missing
NET data flow working; all NET stations working

LED POW/RUN status expansion unit
OffGreen, continuous light
Green,
Flashing, 1 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 3 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 10 Hz
Green,
Flashing, 0.5 Hz

Malfunction or no supply voltage
Supply voltage OK, address assigned, expansion bus working correctly
Supply voltage OK, no data exchange with base device
Supply voltage OK, no data exchange with base device,
diagnostic bit will be set, device not working
Device waiting for firmware update
Firmware update in progresseasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

613

9. Operating system diagnostic messages
9.3 LED status messages on the device

614

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices

10. Connection to other devices
New easyE4 base devices will come with the Auto IP setting configured by default. In
order to configure the settings differently on the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P), use the menu
structure and go to System Options\Ethernet
Table 105: Ethernet addresses on the device
Table 106: Main menu
Table 107: System options
STOP ✓ RUN

SECURITY

Table 108: System options\Ethernet

PARAMETERSSYSTEM

ADDRESS MODESET CLOCKMENU LANGUAGE

IP ADDRESSDELETE PROGR.

SUBNET MASKNETGATEWAY ADDRESSINFORMATIONETHERNETDNS SERVERSYSTEM-OPT.

UPDATECARD

PROGRAM

Table 109: System Options\Ethernet\IP Address
IP-ADDRESS

Use the cursor buttons to enter the device's
IP address.

000.000.000.000

Table 110: System Options\Ethernet\Address mode
AUTO IP

Select the network setting you want.

✓

DHCP
STATIC IP

Prerequisites that must be met in order to be able to access an easyE4 control relays:
The PC must have an Ethernet port that is free and has been configuredl The PC's Ethernet port must be configured for auto-IP.
l The easyE4 control relays must be connected to the PC with a standard Ethernet
cable featuring an RJ45 connectorl

CAUTION
INTERFERENCES
The values specified in the technical data, as well as the device's electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), cannot be guaranteed if the following
are used: unsuitable cables, improperly assembled and terminatedcables, and/or wiring that does not conform to the applicable standards.
Only use cables assembled and terminated by professionals.
The cables being used must be assembled and terminated as requiredby the port/interface description in this document.
When wiring the devices, follow all instructions regarding how to wire
the corresponding port/interface.
All general Directives and standards must be complied with.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

615

10. Connection to other devices

Only possible with easySoft 7.

Compatibility rules for going ONLINE
As soon as a connection is established between easySoft 7 and a device (i.e., as soon
as you are ONLINE), easySoft 7 will check the extent to which the physical device configuration matches the device selection in the project view.
Certain differences are allowed. In fact, if the physical device matches the device
model in the project view but with slightly different characteristics, the devices will be
categorized as being compatible. Within this context, devices are compatible in the following cases:
Device model with display and device model without display
l Device model with screw terminals and device model with push in terminalsl

If there are differences, the devices will be shown in color in the Project view.

Figure 271: ONLINE Project view with devices colored differently based on their compatibility

Within this context, the following colors are used:None

The physical device matches the device in the Project viewe.g EASY-E4-DC-16TE1P .

GreenExpansions / devices found online that are not found in the configuration
The physical device is not found in the project view.
If the device number of the device to the left is the same, thisindicates that the physical device was found instead of theconfigured device to its left.
Example: EASY-E4-DC-12TC1P is physically present, but EASY-E4-DC-12TC1 isconfigured at the corresponding spot in the Project view.
Example: EASY-E4-DC-4PE1P is physically present, but EASY-E4-DC-6AE1 isconfigured at the corresponding spot in the Project view.

Yellow

Replaced online with compatible expansions / devices
Example: EASY-E4-DC-12TC1 is configured in the project; the physicallypresent device is an EASY-E4-DC-12TC1P

Red

Expansions / devices that are missing online and that are only found in the configuration
Either the device configured in the Project view is not physically present or it is
not compatible with the configured device.
Example: EASY-E4-DC-6AE1 is configured in the Project view, but an EASY-E4DC-4PE1 is physically present

616

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices

If a device is not recognized in the Communication view, this indicates that an older version of easySoft 7 is being used and that the physical device is not found in the device
catalog. In this case, you will need to install a newer software version.
The plausibility check will output any relevant compatibility errors and/or warnings
based on the compatibility rules.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

617

10. Connection to other devices

Establish connection to device
Only possible with easySoft 7.
In easySoft 7, the connection to the device always has to be established in the Communication view.
By default, the easyE4 base device will be set to Auto IP and have a NET ID of 0.
Prerequisites that must be met in order to be able to access an easyE4 control relays:
The PC must have an Ethernet port that is free and has been configuredl The PC's Ethernet port must be configured for auto-IP.
l The computer and the device must be connected to each other with an Ethernet
cable – please refer to → "Connecting the Ethernet cable", page 76lOpen easySoft 7 and click on the Communication button.
Now expand the Connection section in order to show the corresponding buttons.
The connection to the device will be offline.
Under IP profiles, click on the Search… button.
Opens the Search for devices dialog box.
Check the selected PC interface (Ethernet) for your computer in the PC interface
drop-down menu.
Select the "all" search filters in the NET group and NET-ID drop-down menus.
Click on New searchYour PC interface will search for all reachable easyE4 control relays. Any devices thatare found will be shown in the table as follows:
The Selected item section will show all the project parameters for the easyE4 basedevice.

618

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices

Select the row with the device to which you want to establish a connection.
Click on the Save as IP profile button.
Click on Close to close the dialog box
The IP profile will appear in the drop-down menu under "Interface."
Use the Interface drop-down menu to select the IP profile you just saved.
Use the Device drop-down menu to select the "Local" option.
(New devices will not have a program, and accordingly will not have a NET ID
either.)Click on the Online button to establish a connection.
If a device is locked with a password, the Password dialog box will appear so thatyou can unlock it. Simply enter the corresponding password and confirm it.
The connection to the device will be established and the status line will show "ONLINE."
Details for the table in the Search for devices dialog box
Description
ColumnFirst column?

Errors and Alarms
Inconsistent entries on the device!

There are at least duplicate NET IDs

x

The device cannot be configured, since the "Enable configuration via network" option is disabled.
Indicates that there is currently a connection between the computer and the device. Accordingly, changes cannot be made to the device's IP settings.
The easyE4 base device's MAC address (fixed)(fixed)NET group (if any)
The easyE4 base device's NET ID (if any)
The easyE4 base device's IP address (as per the device's Ethernet settings)
If there is no device name in the data record that is currently selected, a new connection profile will be automatically created with the device's current IP address.
If there is a device name, the user will be able to select whether the new profile should be
generated based on the current IP address or on the device name. If changes have already been
made to the current selected data record but have not yet been transferred to the device, theattempt to generate a new profile will be aborted with the following message:•
MAC
Device TypeGrp.
ID
IP Address
DeviceName

StatusRequired NET
card"Please transfer the modified configuration to the device first. Otherwise, obsolete parameters
will be saved in the new IP profile."
The easyE4 base device's operating status: (RUN/ STOP)
If the device has a program and is being operated in a NET group or the devices already havethe relevant NET settings configured

Possible messages in the Search for devices dialog box
The Search for devices dialog box may show the following messages while a connection is being established:easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

619

10. Connection to other devices

Message

RemedyThe configuration cannot be modified in the
RUN device status!

Only relevant if you wantto make a change in the"Selected item" section:
Use the device
menu to bring
the device to the
STOP operating
status.

Please transfer the modified configuration to
the device first. Otherwise, obsolete parameters will be saved in the new IP profile.

If you have made achange in the Selected
item section (such aschanging the devicename), then you will firstneed to transfer the project to the device in order
to avoid an inconsistency
between the project ineasySoft 7 and the project on the device.
Click on the=>Device buttonin the Search fordevices dialog
box.
Then click on
the Save as IP
profile button.

The device configuration is locked and you
cannot make changes to it!

The device configurationin the Selected item
section cannot be modified.
Go to the Project
view/Ethernet
tab and enable
the Enable configuration via network option.
Go to the Communication
view/Connection
section andclick on theOnline button.
Click on the PC=> Device buttonin the Program /Configuration
section.

620

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices

Message

RemedyThe project will be transferred to the device.
Click on Offline.
Click on Searchunder IPdevices.
You will now be able to
make changes in the
Selected item sectionin the Search fordevices dialog box.

No devices matching the selected search filter setting were found.

Check that themodule rack
Check to makesure that the correct PC interface, NET group,
and NET ID are
selected.
Check to makesure that the IP
addresses of theeasyE4 basedevice and computer fall within
the same number group. For
more information, pleaserefer to → "Basic
information on
assigning IP
addresses",
page 100.

Terminating the connection to the device
In order to terminate the online connection, click on the Offline button in the Connection section.
The connection to the device will be terminated. The status line will show "OFFLINE."

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

621

10. Connection to other devices

Setting up a connection to multiple devices on the NET
Before the first time a connection is established, easyE4 devices in a NET group will notknow which NET ID and which parameters they should use in order to establish a connection. There are three ways to set up this connection:
1. → "Connection parameters and program on the device", page 622: Loading the
program, with the NET ID and Ethernet settings, onto each device.
2. → "Connection parameters on device", page 623: Using the Search for devices
dialog box to load the NET ID and Ethernet settings onto each device.
3. Device menu directly on the device: Configuring the NET ID and Ethernet settings
directly on each device.
Connection parameters and program on the device
If you have created a project with multiple easyE4 devices, the parameters for establishing a connection with every easyE4 device should be configured using the corresponding settings in the Project view/Ethernet tab. A program must have beencreated for the easyE4 device.
In order to transfer these settings to the easyE4 device in the NET group, follow thesteps below:
In the Project view work pane, select the first device in the project.
Search for the devices in the NET group,
select the device that should correspond to the first device in the project from thelist of found devices, andgo ONLINE, → Section "Establish connection to device", page 618
In the Connection section, click on the PC => Device button.
The Select a NET station dialog box will appear.

Figure 272: Selection of NET station

Select the NET station. All the NET stations in the project will be available.

622

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices

The program and all project settings (i.e., the NET ID and Ethernet settings) for the selected NET station will be loaded onto the easyE4 device.
In the Project view work pane, select the next easyE4 device in the NET group.
Search for the devices in the NET group,
select the next device that should correspond to the next device in the projectfrom the list of found devices, andgo ONLINE, → Section "Establish connection to device", page 618.
In the Connection section, click on the PC => Device button.
Select the NET station.
Repeat these steps for every device that you want to configure in the project.
Project view

Figure 273: NET configuration with project and program

Connection parameters on device
The computer can use easySoft 7 to establish a connection without a project or program and download the parameters for establishing a connection to each easyE4
device.
However, the Enable configuration via network option must be enabled on thedevice. This is only possible if the project has been loaded, with the option enabled, onto
the device at least once – please refer to Enable configuration via network New.
In order to transfer these settings to the easyE4 device in the NET group, follow thesteps below:
easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

623

10. Connection to other devices

Search for the devices in the NET group andselect the device that should correspond to the first device in the project from thelist of found devices → Section "Establish connection to device", page 618
Configure the parameters you want for the device in the Selected item section
under the list
(the system settings for Ethernet and NET; please refer to → Section "System settings", page 561).
Click on the => Device button.
The parameters for establishing the connection (i.e., the Ethernet settings) will be
loaded onto the easyE4 device.
Select the next device that should correspond to the second device in the projectfrom the list of found devices → Section "Establish connection to device", page 618
Configure the parameters you want for the device in the Selected item section
under the list
(the system settings for Ethernet and NET; please refer to → Section "System settings", page 561).
Click on the => Device button.
Repeat these steps for every device that you want to configure in the project.

Taking the Ethernet and NET configuration from the device
Search for device → Section "Establish connection to device", page 618
Select the device you want from the list of devices found.
Click the <= Project button.
Select the NET station you want in the "Select a NET station" dialog box.
Confirm your selection with OK.
The NET station you selected in easySoft 7 will receive the parameters for establishinga connection from the device. To check them, go to the Project view/Ethernet tab andselect the NET station.
Repeat these steps for every device that you want to configure.

624

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

10.1 Setting up a NET
NET - a group
A NET is a group that is made up of up to eight stations and that uses a special protocol
for the device series in order to allow for communications via Ethernet connections.
The name "NET" refers to Ethernet/UDP-based communications between the easyE4
devices. It was designed specifically with the needs of straightforward transfers
between easyE4 devices in mind. Within a NET, every device has read access to the
NET operands of any other device in its group. In addition to this, data can be transferred both cyclically and acyclically.
Please note that nodes from different groups cannot communicate directly with eachother.
Between groups
If, however, you want devices to be able to communicate across groups, you will need
to use a coordinator device that controls the corresponding communication with Modbus TCP.
A total of ten NET groups (groups 1 through 10) can be run on a single Ethernet networkat one time.
Ethernet network
↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

↑

ModuleModuleModuleStations…

ModuleModuleModuleNET-ID 1 NET-ID… NET-ID 8 NET-ID…
NET group 1

NET-ID 1 NET-ID… NET-ID 8

NET group… NET group 10

NET uses UDP protocols that send unconfirmed broadcast frames; accordingly, thedevices in the NET group must be located on the same subnet. Connections through arouter are not allowed, as broadcast frames will normally be unable to pass through arouter.

Figure 274: NET diagram

All easyE4 base devices feature an Ethernet port that can be simultaneously used for allcommunications, e.g., web server, Modbus TCP, e-mail, and programming the easyE4.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

625

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

In order to be able to run a NET group, there must be an Ethernet connection between
the devices or device and PC.
10.1.1 Access on the NET
There can be a max. of 8 easyE4 devices in a single NET group.
Access is based on various NET operands and function blocks.
1. Network markers (N, NB, NW, ND) (cyclical access)Every single device in the group is allowed read access to the network markersof the other devices in the group. In addition, each device has write and readaccess to its own network markers. This makes it possible for each device toprovide up to 512 bits of data to the other stations in the group.
2. RN and SN bit markers (cyclical access)
The RN and SN operands make it possible to directly access the state of theoperands of another device on the NET. These operands are used to send andreceive Boolean values. Each station in the group has 32 RN (Receive NET) and32 SN (Sent NET) bit markers available.
3. Transmitting double words with function blocks (acyclical access)Each easyE4 device in the group has 32 PUT (PT) manufacturer function blocks
and 32 GET (GT) function blocks available for sending and receiving analog values in an event-driven manner.
4. NET synchronization
The device blocks in the NET group can be synchronized – please refer to→ Section "NET-GROUP", page 591
Compatibility with easyNET
The easyNET devices in the easy800 series use their own custom CAN-specific transmission. Accordingly, devices from the easy800 and easyE4 series cannot be physically connected to each other.
Existing .e60 programs can be migrated to .e70 programs for the easyE4 series. Whenyou do this, the easy800, devices that are used with the Remote I/O operating mode will
be converted to local expansions.

626

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

10.1.2 Communication via NET
A NET group can be made up of up to eight easyE4 base devices.
Within the group, the easyE4 base devices can communicate with each other.
If, however, you want devices to be able to communicate across groups, you will need
to use a coordinator device that controls the corresponding communication with Modbus TCP.
A total of ten NET groups (groups 1 through 10) can be run on a single Ethernet networkat one time. This is the equivalent of a maximum of 80 easyE4 base devices that cancommunicate with each other.
The following list shows the operands that can be used within a group by every device:(n = NET-ID 1 .. 8)l n SN 01 - 32 [Bit]l n RN 01 - 32 [Bit]l PT 01 - 32 (PUT) [double word]l GT 01 – 32 (GET) double word]l n N 01 - 512 [Bit]l n NB 01 - 64 [Byte]l n NW 01 - 32 [Byte]l n ND 01 - 16 [double word]l Synchronize clock (settings)lExamplesStation 1 sending a bit to station 2
NET-ID1

NET-ID 2

2 SN 15￫ 1 RN 015

Station 3 sending a double word to station 8 via PT16
NET-ID1
pt16

NET-ID 2￫ GT 01
Parameter
NET-ID 1
PT 16

Station 4 sending a network marker [bit and word] to all stations.
NET-ID4

NET-ID 2 NET-ID 5 NET-ID 7

N 125￫ 4 N 125

NW30

￫ 4 NW 30 4 NW 30 4 NW 30

4 N 125

4 N 125

This basic principle applies to all network markers in all data formats.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

627

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

Network markers overlap in the various data formats:N1-8 N916

N1724

N2532

N3340

N4148

N4956

N5764

NB1

NB3

NB4

NB5

NB6

NB7

NB8

NB2

NW1

NW2

NW3

ND1

ND2

N65- N7372
80
NB9

NW4

N8188

N8996

N97104

N105- N113120
112

NB10 NB11 NB12 NB13 NB14

NW5

NW6

ND3

NW7

NB15

N121128
NB16

NW8

ND4

etc.
NET station heartbeat
In order to make it possible for all NET stations within a group to be able to knowwhether NET stations important to them are still communicating, each station cyclicallysends a heartbeat every second (1 s).
If a heartbeat is not received, the corresponding error bit ID01 – 08 will be set to "1" until
a heartbeat is detected.

628

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

10.1.3 NET settings
Prerequisites
The Ethernet settings must have already been configured.
In offline mode, setting up the configuration in easySoft 7 under the Ethernet tab isenough, → Section "Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program",
page 100A NET ID needs to be assigned to every easyE4 base device and to every station added
to the project as an other NET station.
Project view

Figure 275: NET-ID dialog box used to assign a NET ID when adding a new base device

After you add a new station to the project, you will need todownload all easyE4 programs for the NET group again.
Loading programs onto multiple NET stations
To conveniently load programs for multiple stations on the NET with a single operation,
follow the steps below:
Prerequisites
All the devices must be in the group physically.
l Every single device must have an assigned NET ID.
l

If the project that is open features multiple NET stations, establish online communications with the NET-ID1 NET station.
Make sure that <Device NT1> is selected instead of the usual <local> in the Communication view/Connection section/Device drop-down menu.
Click on the PC -> Device button.
The Selection of NET stations dialog box will appear.
Enable all the NET stations for which you want the new program to be loaded.
Confirm your selection with OK.
The programs for all the selected NET stations will be loaded onto the devices.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

629

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

Project view

Figure 276: NET tab for the selected base device in the NET group

NET-GROUP
Used to select the group for the selected base device.
0
Base device running in standalone mode with the relevant I/O expansions (if any),no NET group
1-10
Possible NET-GROUP
NET-ID
Used to assign a group device number from the NET GROUP to the selected basedevice.
0Base device running in standalone mode with the relevant I/O expansions (if any)
1-8
Available device IDs in the NET-GROUP
Remote RUN
If this field is enabled, the NET stations of a group with NET-IDs 02 through 08 will taketheir current RUN or STOP operating mode from the NET station with NET-ID 1.

630

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.1 Setting up a NET

Bus delay
The bus delay is used to define the time after which a station on the NET will send its
data to other stations.
This bus delay needs to be adjusted as appropriate for the number of stations and thevalues being transmitted. Please note than an excessively short bus delay will result indata collisions.
The permissible value range for the bus delay is 10 ms to 255 ms.
Cyclical data will be sent every 10 ms or when there is a data change, but not before
the bus delay has elapsed. Using the default value of 60 ms will normally be sufficient toprevent transmission overloads.
You can use the following formula:
Case A: When using PUT/GET and network markers:
Bus delay in ms = (number of NET stations - 1) * 4 * 2 + 6
l Case B: When using network markers exclusively:
Bus delay in ms = (number of NET stations - 1) * 2 * 2 + 6l

The following table can be used as a convenient guide for configuring the setting:
Delay without
Number of modules: Delay with
PUT/GET in ms PUT/GET in ms
2

14
22
30
38
46
54
62

3
4
5
6
7
8

10
14
18
22
26
30
34

If you are no longer able to connect to the NET stations via Ethernet with easySoft 7, set the bus delay as high as possible foryour application.
To do this, you will need to disconnect each device from the
Ethernet and use easySoft 7 to change the bus delay point bypoint.
See also→ Section "GT - Get values from NET", page 428→ Section "PT - Put values to NET", page 432→ Section "SC - Synchronizing clock via NET", page 436→ Section "Establishing an Ethernet connection and transferring a program", page100

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

631

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2 Modbus TCP
Only possible with easySoft 7.
10.2.1 General
Modbus TCP is a simple communication protocol that uses a client-server architecture
in order to make it possible for measuring and control systems (server) to communicate with higher-level control systems (client) and vice versa. Since the protocol isbased on TCP/IP and Ethernet, any device that supports the Internet protocol suite andfeatures an Ethernet port can implement it.
During communications, data is written as a payload in TCP/IP packets and transmitted
this way.
Please note that Modbus TCP only assumes the functionality of a lowerlevel server, and not the higher-level client functionality.
Modbus TCP ensures communications with devices:
That do not necessarily have to be part of the easyE4 family of productsl That are not found in a NET grouporl That do not implement NET.
l

The most important functions include, but are not limited to:
Communications at the control levell Transmitting analog and digital values to higher-level control systemsl Platform-independent communicationl Communication with devices that are not part of the easyE4 serieslWith firmware version 1.12 and higher, easyE4 can run two Modbus TCP clients. This
makes it possible, for instance, to implement communication with a touch display and a
gateway at the same time.
If you are using more than one Modbus TCP client, make sure to set a response timethat is as short as possible. Change it to 60 ms!

632

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2.2 Programming communication with Modbus TCP
In order to program these communications, you will need at least one system that fulfills the functionality of a Modbus TCP client and that is able to send commands to thelower-level server.
Since the easyE4 control relays can work with various Modbus TCP clients available on
the market, only standard-compliant Modbus TCP functions are supported.
In other words, functions that are defined in a standardized manner in the Modbus
standard and are accordingly implemented at the protocol level in a standardized manner by all Modbus TCP stations. For more information, please refer to the MODBUSMESSAGING ON TCP/IP IMPLEMENTATION GUIDE V1.0b published by the Modbus
Organization.
Connection:
In order for the Modbus TCP server to work, the following ports must be opened:lModbus TCP: Service—Port 502

Port 502 is normally set by default. If it is not, make sure to set it when establishing aconnection.
Ports that may need to be opened depending on the functionality being used:
DNS: UDP/TCP port 53 (only if using DNS)l DHCP: UDP port 67 for server / UDP Port 68 for clients (only if using DHCP)l

The Modbus TCP server implementation on the easyE4 will provide the following standard functions:
Function description
Function
Code
Read Coils
Read Discrete Inputs
Read Holding Registers
Read Input Registers
Write Single Registers
Write Multiple Registers

Used to read outputs
Used to read inputs
Used to read output registers
Used to read input registers
Used to write to a register
Used to write to multiple registers

0x01
0x02
0x03
0x04
0x06
0x10

There are two basic protocol data units (PDUs) for each of the function descriptions
above:
1. Request PDU (the Modbus TCP server must receive this PDU)
a. Byte 0 contains the function code, which is used to identify the function thatis desiredb. The remaining bytes are function-specific
2. Response PDU (the Modbus TCP server must send this PDU)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

633

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

a. Byte 0 contains the request's function codeb. The remaining bytes are function-specific
If an error occurs, the Modbus TCP server will send an error messagelError-Framea. Byte 0 always contains the request's error code (0x80 + function code)b. Byte 1 contains the exception code (error-specific)

Following is a description of the request & response function codes for each of the function descriptions in the table above:
10.2.2.1 Read Coils 0x01:
This function reads the entered number of bit outputs starting from a specified starting
address and then returns the result in bytes (8 outputs per byte)
Table 111: Request-PDU
Function Code1 byteStart address
2 byteNumber of outputs

2 byte0x01 ;Read Coils
Must always be 1 less than the starting output you want(zero-based)
1 to 2000 (0x7D0)

Response to the request being received
1. The starting address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
a. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The number of outputs is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
a. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo
3. The output states are reada. From the start of the (starting address) to (starting address + number of
outputs)
Table 112: Response-PDU
1 byteFunction Code
Bye Count
1 byteOutput valuesn * 1 byte

0x01 ;Read CoilsN
Value

n= Number of outputs read / 8
Preparation for sending the response
1. The read bits are encoded in bytes(1 but per output state; 1=ON, 0=OFF)
2. The LSB of the first byte, i.e., bit 0, contains the state of the output that isaddressed first in the request. The other outputs follow in ascending order.

634

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

3. If a byte is not used fully, the unused bits will be padded with 0's.
Once the response is encoded, it is sent.
10.2.2.2 Read Discrete Inputs 0x02:
This function reads a specified number of bit inputs starting from a specified starting
address and then returns the result in bytes (8 inputs per byte)
Table 113: Request-PDU
Function Code1 byteStart address
2 byteNumber of outputs

2 byte0x02 ;Read Discrete Inputs
Must always be 1 less than the starting input you want(zero-based)
1 to 2000 (0x7D0)

Response to the request being received
1. The starting address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
a. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The number of inputs is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
a. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo
3. The bit input states are reada. From the start of the (starting address) to (starting address + number of bit
inputs)Table 114: Response-PDU
0x02 ;Read Discrete Inputs
Function Code 1 byte
Bye Count
1 byteN
Output values n* 1 Byte Valuen= Number of inputs read / 8
Preparation for sending the response
1. The read bits are encoded in bytes
Bit per input state; 1=ON, 0=OFF)
2. The LSB of the first byte, i.e., bit 0, contains the state of the input that isaddressed first in the request. The other inputs follow in ascending order.
3. If a byte is not used fully, the unused bits will be padded with 0's.
Once the response is encoded, it is sent.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

635

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2.2.3 Read Holding Registers 0x03:
Function 0x03 reads internal registers (e.g., marker words in the easyE4) word byword.
Table 115: Request-PDU
Function Code1 byteStart address
2 byteNumber ofregisters

2 byte0x03 ;Read Holding Registers
Must always be 1 less than the starting input you want(zero-based)
1 to 125 (0x7D)

Response to the request being received
1. The starting address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
a. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The number of registers is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
a. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo
3. The data words are read from the start of the (starting address) to (starting
address + number of registers)
A register corresponds, e.g., to one marker word
Table 116: Response-PDU
Function Code 1 byte
Bye Count
1 byte0x03 ;Read Holding Registers
A value of= 2 * n must always be entered here
Register values n* 2 byte Valuen= Number of registers readPreparation for sending the response
1. The registers read (marker words) are mapped to two bytes per register
2. There are a high byte and a low byte for each register (marker word)
ExampleRegister word Hi0x02
l Register word Lo0x2B
l Content of marker word 0x022B
l

3. The LSB within the byte is bit 0
Once the response is encoded, it is sent.

636

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2.2.4 Read Input Registers 0x04:
Function 0x04 reads the analog inputs' registers word by word.
The Modbus client treats two bytes as one input register.
This means that in order to read an analog input with 32 bits, two consecutive input
registers must be read.
Table 117: Request-PDU
Function CodeStart address

1 byte2 byteNumber of input registers

2 byte0x04 ;Read Input Registers
Must always be 1 less than the starting input you
want (zero-based)
1 to 125 (0x7D)

Response to the request being received
1. The starting address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
b. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The number of registers is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
b. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo
3. The input registers are read from the start of the (starting address) to (starting
address + number of input registers)(An input register corresponds to two bytes)
Table 118: Response-PDU
Function Code
Bye Count

1 byte1 byteRegister values

n* 2 byte

0x04 ;Read Input Registers
A value of= 2 * N must always be entered here
Value

n= Number of input registers readPreparation for sending the response
1. The input registers read are mapped to two bytes per input register
2. There are a high byte and a low byte for each input registera. The first byte = Hi; the second byte = Lo
b. Example:- Register word Hi0x00- Register word Lo0x0A- Content of marker word 0x000A
3. The LSB within the byte is bit 0
Once the response is encoded, it is sent.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

637

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2.2.5 Write Single Registers 0x06:
This function writes 16 bites to a register ((NET) marker word in the easy)
Table 119: Request-PDU
Function Code
Target address

1 byte2 byteRegister value

2 byte0x06 ;Write single Registers
Must always be 1 less than the MW being written
to (if you want MW1 to be written to, there must
be a 0 here)
Value to be written

Response to the request being received
1. The target address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
a. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The value being written is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
a. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo
3. The value is written to the target register ((NET) marker word)
Response-PDU
If the value is written successfully, the request will be echoed once as a response(→ Section "Write Single Registers 0x06:", page 638 Request PDU)
In other words, the response is identical to the corresponding request and is used for
confirmation purposes only.
10.2.2.6 Write Multiple Registers 0x10:
This function writes n * 16 bits to N registers ((NET) marker words in the easyE4)
Table 120: Request-PDU
Function CodeStart address

1 byte2 byteNumber of registers
Bye Count
Register values being written(marker words)

2 byte1 byten * 2 byte

0x10 ;Write Multiple Registers
Must always be 1 less than the starting marker word
(if you want MW1 to be written to, there must be a 0
here)
1-123 (0x0001 to 0x007B)
2*N
Values being writtenn = Number of registers being written to
Response to the request being received
1. The starting address is analyzed (distributed among bytes 1 and 2)
a. Byte 1 = Hi; Byte 2 = Lo
2. The number of registers is analyzed (distributed among bytes 3 and 4)
a. Byte 3 = Hi; Byte 4 = Lo638

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

3. The number of bytes is analyzed
4. The marker words are written to the target registers
If the values are written successfully, a response is sent.
This response will contain the function code, the starting address, and the number ofregisters from the request(→ Section "Write Multiple Registers 0x10:", page 638 Request PDU)
Table 121: Response-PDU
Function Code1 byteStart address
2 byteNumber of
2 byteregisters

0x10 ;Write Multiple Registers
Same value as in request
Number of registers written to (the value should matchthe request)

10.2.3 Modbus TCP error handling
Read Coils 0x01:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
Fault Code1 byte 0x81 ; Read Coils
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Invalid address, i.e.:0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined* (please refer to the "Modbus map" table) orl Un-enabled*l

Exception Code 03 = The number of outputs is not >= 0x0001 and <= 0x07D0
Exception Code 04 = (Error in server) n.a.***For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
**Data in the image table is protected from other modules by semaphores; as of thiswriting, no known criterion for a "read coil" error in the server.
Read Discrete Inputs 0x02:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
1 byte 0x82 ; Read Discrete Input
Fault Code
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Starting address is invalid, i.e.:0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined* (please refer to the "Modbus map" table) orleasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

639

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCPl

Un-enabled*

Exception Code 03 = The number of inputs is not >= 0x0001 and <= 0x07D0
Exception Code 04 = (Error in server) n.a.***For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
**A read operation always returns consistent data from the image table, since this data
is protected from other modules by semaphores. In other words, as of this writing,there is no known criterion for a "read discrete inputs" error in the server.
Read Holding Registers 0x03:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
Fault Code1 byte 0x83 ; Read Holding Registers
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Starting address is invalid, i.e.:0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined* (please refer to the "Modbus map" table) orl Un-enabled*l

Exception Code 03 = The number of inputs is not >= 0x0001 and <= 0x07D0
Exception Code 04 = (Error in server) n.a.**
If no analog I/O is physically present (e.g., analog I/O smart modules missing or faulty),
the image table (values = 0) will still be delivered to the client. No check, no error message.
*For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
**A read operation always returns consistent data from the image table, since this data
is protected from other modules by semaphores. In other words, as of this writing,there is no known criterion for a "read holding registers" error in the server.
Read Input Registers 0x04:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
1 byte 0x84 ; Read Input Registers
Fault Code
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Starting address is invalid, i.e.:0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined* (please refer to the "Modbus map" table) orl Un-enabled*l640

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

Exception Code 03 = The number of inputs is not >= 0x0001 and <= 0x07D0
Exception Code 04 = (Error in server) n.a.**
If no analog I/O is physically present (e.g., analog I/O smart modules missing or faulty),
the image table (values = 0) will still be delivered to the client. No check, no error message.
*For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
**A read operation always returns consistent data from the image table, since this data
is protected from other modules by semaphores. In other words, as of this writing,there is no known criterion for a "read input registers" error in the server.
Write Single Register 0x06:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
Fault Code1 byte 0x90 ;Write Single Register
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Target address is invalid, i.e.,0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined* (please refer to table → Section "Modbus map", page 643) orl Un-enabled*l*For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
Exception Code 04 = Error when attempting to write to the register (marker word)****A write operation can always write consistent data to the image table, since this data
is protected from other modules by semaphores. In other words, as of this writing,there is no known criterion for a "Write Single Register" error in the server.
Values are only allowed to be written if all required addresses are valid and unlocked.
Write Multiple Registers 0x10:
In the event of an error, Modbus TCP will send an error frame.
1 byte 0x86 ;Write Multiple Registers
Fault Code
Exception Code 1 byte 02 or 03 or 04

Exception Code 02 = Target address is invalid, i.e.,0 (the user keeps specifying addresses as one-based addresses)l Undefined*(please refer to table → Section "Modbus map", page 643) orl Un-enabled*l

Exception Code 03 = The number of registers is not >= 0x0001 and <= 0x007B
OR
easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

641

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

Number of bytes != Number of registers x 2
Exception Code 04 = Error when attempting to write to the registers**
Values are only allowed to be written if all required addresses are valid and unlocked.
*For an error message, it is sufficient if only one of the requested addresses is notunlocked or is invalid.
**A write operation can always write consistent data to the image table, since this data
is protected from other modules by semaphores. In other words, as of this writing,there is no known criterion for a "write multiple registers" error in the server.
Unknown function:
If the client requests an unsupported function, the Modbus TCP server must return thefollowing error frame after receiving the request:
Fault Code1 byte 0x80 + Function code
Exception Code 1 byte 01

This will indicate to the client that the desired function is not supported by the server.

642

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

10.2.4 Modbus map
Table 122: How the Modbus registers and read data for the Modbus server are mapped easyE4 control relays

Function code
ModbusModbus Operand Description
reg. #

Remark

0x01(Read Coil)Max. 512 coils at
once,
8 coils aregrouped into a
byte

1
…
4

Q1
…
Q4

Bit output 1…
Bit output 4

Local outputs base device

17

Q17

Local outputs expansion

…
128

…
Q128

Expansion
Bit output…
Expansion
Bit output

1001
...
1512

M1
…
M512

Marker bit 1…
Marker bit 512

2001
…
2512
1
…
4

N1
…
N512
QA1
…
QA4

NET marker bit 1…
loc. NET marker bit 512
16-bit analog output 1…
16-bit analog output 4

5

QA5

…
48

…
QA48

Expansion 16-bit analog Local analog outputs expansion
output…
Expansion 16-bit analog
output

1001
…
1512

MW1
…
MW512

Marker word 1…
Marker word 512

2001

NW1

loc. Net marker word 1

…

…

…

2032

NW32

NET marker word 32…

RTC (second)…
RTC (year)

0x03(Read Holding
Register)Max. 125 registers
at once,1 register =2 byte/1word

5000
….
5005

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Only the local NET marker bits
are returned
Local analog outputs basedeviceOnly local NET marker words
will be returned, i.e., no double
words, no bytes, and no markers from the other stations will
be returned
5000: Seconds; 5001: Minutes;
5002: Hours; 5003: Day; 5004:
Month; 5005: Year643

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

Function code
ModbusModbus Operand Description
reg. #

Remark

0x02 (Read discrete input) Max.
512 inputs at once,
8 inputs aregrouped into a
byte

1
…
8

I1
…
I8

Bit input 1…
Bit input 8

Local inputs base device

17
…
128

I17
…
I128

Expansion bit input…
Expansion bit input

local inputs expansion

1001
…
1512

M1
…
M512

Marker bit 1…
Marker bit 512

2001
…
2512

N1
…
N512

NET marker bit 1…
NET marker bit 512

Only the local NET marker bits
and no marker bits of the otherstations are returned

3001
…
3024

ID1
…
ID24

Diagnostics bit 1…
Diagnostics bit 24

Diagnostics for base device

3125
…
3196
0x04 (Read Input
1
Register) Max. 125 …
registers at once, 1 4
register = 2 bytes /1 word
5
…
48

ID25
…
ID96
IA1
…
IA4

Diagnostics bit 25…
Diagnostics bit 96
16-Bit analog input 1…
16-Bit analog input 8

Diagnostics extension

IA5
…
IA48

16-Bit analog input…
16-Bit analog input

Local analog inputs expansion

1001
…
1512

MW1
…
MW512

Marker word 1…
Marker word 512

2001
…

NW1
…

NET marker word 1
…

2032

NW32

NET marker word 32

Local analog inputs basedeviceOnly the local NET marker
words will be returned, i.e.,
accessing NET markers fromother nodes is not possible.
NET marker bytes and NET
marker double words can becalculated based on the NET
marker words.

If a function code is used on Modbus registers that are not listed (gray), a value of 0 or an exception code will be returned.

644

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.2 Modbus TCP

Table 123: How the Modbus registers and write data for the easyE4 Modbus server are mapped

Function
codeModbus
0x06(Write Single
Register)and
0x10(Write Multiple
Register)

Modbusreg.#

Operand Description

1001
…
1512

MW1
…
MW512

Marker word 1…
Marker word 512

2001

NW1

…
2032

…
NW32

NET marker
word 1…
NET marker
word 32

RemarkPlease note that little-endian is used when converting bytes to words inan easyE4. If you want to implement Modbus communications with bigendian, you will need to make the necessary adjustments.
See also

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

645

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

10.3 Setting up a web server
Only possible with easySoft 7.
The web server is intended to make it even more convenient for users to use an easyE4
control relay. This web server makes it possible to use a web client (i.e., a web
browser) to access the device as though it were being accessed directly on the easyE4base device. In other words, this means that the web service offers an additional interface for communication that is much like an additional HMI for the easyE4 device. In
addition to this, the web client is also perfectly compatible with mobile devices.
The device status can be ready directly on the display on EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) devices– please refer to → Section "Status display on easyE4 control relays with display andkeypad", page 94.
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P) devices without a display can also be read using the web
server function.
The web server only has a limited amount of computing time available. This ensuresthat easyE4 will not be negatively affected when it comes to running programs.
The web server needs to be configured in easySoft 7 by opening the Project view andthen going to the Webserver tab.

Webserver tab

Figure 277: Project view Webserver tab

Web server configuration

646

Web server enabled

When this option is enabled, the Web server passwords
and user names dialog box will appear so that you can set
up the corresponding users – please refer to → Section"Setting up users", page 648
If the option is disabled, all settings, passwords, and usernames will be reset.

Always enabled

As soon as the project is loaded onto the easyE4 basedevice, the web server will be active every time thedevice is turned on.

Activation by program

If the web server is supposed to be activated by a specific program, all AL alarm function blocks will be read
before the web server is started. The parameter set forthese alarm function blocks includes the Web server act-

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

ive as long as there is a state of 1 at input EN option, and the
web server will only be started if this option is enabled
for at least one alarm function block and the condition ismet (i.e., function block input EN = 1). This means that if
this option is not enabled for any of the alarm function
blocks, the web server will never be started.
HTTP : PortHTTPS default port 443 will be set for encrypted connections, but you can use any port you want. Pleasekeep the TCP/UDP ports assigned to protocols (specified
by IANA) in mind.

SSL/TLS encryption
enabledParameter list enabled

Enable marker (write)
copy from
---

up to
---

If this option is enabled, communications between the
web server and the web client will always be encrypted.
If this option is enabled, the Parameter list menu option
will be shown in the web client catalog. In this case, itwill be able to put together a custom parameter list with
operands in the web client. This will make monitoring
and controlling the relevant operands significantly easier.
This is where the marker range for access through the
web client is enabled. The enabled range will apply tothe administrator and to all defined users equally.

Access control
Anonymous readaccessallowedIf this option is enabled, everyone will be granted read access to theeasyE4 base device. As soon as the web client starts, the contents will beshown without requiring the user to log in.

Definepasswords
and usernames

Clicking on this button will open
→ "Web server passwords and user names dialog box", page 649

Username

If additional users have been set up in addition to the administrator, they
will be shown here.

Entitlements

Shows the Read or Read and write permissions for the user.

The following options are equivalent to the settings in Project view /Security tab/Areapassword input, see Password input:
Mode

If this option is enabled with a check mark, the relevant user will be able
to change the RUN/STOP operating mode for the easyE4 base device
using the web client's menu bar. The administrator definitely has the permission. (the administrator always has the required permissions for this).

Clock

If this option is enabled with a check mark, the device time of the device
clock can be modified from the web client. This function may be helpful
during commissioning.
However, if in Project view/Clock the option
Synchronize clock via SNTP or
Synchronize clock via wireless (DCF77) is enabled,easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

647

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

the device will get its device time as a client from an SNTP server or froma wireless clock (DCF77).
In the process, the time modified via the web client is overwritten again.
Parameters

If this option is enabled, the relevant user will be able to use the Catalog
display menu option in the web client in order to access the
PARAMETERS menu in the remote display and, once there, configure
function block inputs and outputs.
In addition, the user will be able to write the function block inputs and outputs that are grouped together in a custom manner in the parameter list
menu option in the web client.
If this option is not being displayed, check to make sure thatfirmware version 1.10 or higher is selected in the Project
view/System settings tab.

Default administrator permissions
Only the administrator can operate the remote displayl Changing the STOP/RUN operating model Writing markers, provided that they have been enabled in the Web server configuration section.
l Reading diagnosticsl

10.3.1 Configuring the web server function in easySoft 7
You can configure the web server functions you want for each device in the project ineasySoft 7. To configure the web server functions for a device, follow the steps below:
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view.
Click on the Webserver tab.
Setting up users
Under the tab, there is the Webserver configuration section that can be used to enable
and configure the web server functionality, as well as an Access control section.
Click on the

Web server enabled checkbox to enable the option.

As soon as you enable the web server function, the Web server passwords and usernames dialog box will appear. In order to be able to access the easyE4 base device
through a web client later on, an administrator must be able to log in to the easyE4 basedevice. – this will require a password.
Please note the security requirements for the password:
At least eight ASCII characters with at least one uppercase
character, one lowercase character, one number, and one special character.

648

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

Figure 278: Web server passwords and user names dialog box

Enter a password for the administrator.
You will then be able to create up to two users.
Enter a username into the corresponding text field.
Enter a password into the corresponding text field.
Setting the web server login text
If there are multiple easyE4 base devices on the Ethernet network, you can assign a different web server login text to each device. This web server login text will then appear
in the login dialog box for the web client, where it can be used to make sure that thedevice to which a connection is being established is actually the desired device.
Enter a web server login text of your choice for the easyE4 base device or keep
the default <login@easyE4> login text in the text field.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

649

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

Please note that every time you change the web server
login text and apply the change with the Apply button, youwill need to set up all users again.
When you confirm with the OK button, the users will be created and you will be takenback to the Webserver tab.
Configuring the settings in the Webserver tab
Web server configuration
Now select whether you want the web server to be Always enabledor
if Activation by program should instead be required.
If the web server is supposed to be activated by a specific program, all AL alarmfunction blocks will be read before the web server is started. The parameter set
for these alarm function blocks includes the Web server active as long as there isa state of 1 at input EN option, and the web server will only be started if this option
is enabled for at least one alarm function block and the condition is met (i.e., function block input EN = 1). This means that if this option is not enabled for any of thealarm function blocks, the web server will never be started.
Set the HTTP port you want.
80 will be set as the default "HTTP port".
If you change this port, please make sure that the HTTP port is set to the samevalue both on the web browser and on the easyE4 device.
Now define the ranges that can be written to via the web server with the From and To
drop-down menus. .
Select the range for Enable marker (write) .
The enabled marker range applies to the administrator and to all created users
equally.
Access inhibit
Enable this option if you want anonymous read access to be allowed.
If this option is enabled, everyone will have read access to the easyE4 basedevice. As soon as the web client starts, the contents will be shown without requiring the user to log in.
The User name field will have a maximum of two users, with these users being theones you previously set up in the Setting up users step. You can use the dropdown menus underneath these users to configure their access permissions: Reador Read and write.
A user will be able to change the RUN/STOP operating mode through the web client if this option is enabled for them (please note that the administrator will always
have write permissions for the operating mode).

650

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.3 Setting up a web server

If you want to change a user or their password, simply click on the button to →"Web server passwords and user names dialog box", page 1
The settings will take effect as soon as you store the project on the easyE4 basedevice.
See also→ Section "Web client", page 652→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

651

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

10.4 Web client
The web client can only be started if the web server function has already been configured and the password for the administrator or for a different user is known. The following web browsers are supported:
Internet Explorer 11 or higher,
l Chrome,l Safari,l MS Edge,l Opera,l Brave,l Firefox.
l

We recommend using Chrome, because the web client was optimized for this browser.
The web client was developed according to Responsive Design principles, allowing agood remote display for each display device such as screen, laptop, tablet and smart
phone as well.
Please note that each access to the easyE4 base device increases the security risk from the outside.
For this reason, please note EATON's recommendations on product safety.
Only provided in English.
Product Cybersecurity, Secure Hardening Guideline652

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

MZ049001EN

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Webclient/

Start.

Figure 279: Web client, running

Depending on the protocol used, we recommend to only access a certain number of client programs at the same time on a easyE4 base device:https: 2 Client programsl http: ≤ 4 Client programsl

The term client programs refers to web client or JSON API. Otherwise, the wait time forthe updated display may increase disproportionately.
Starting the web client
To start the web client, follow the steps below:
Open your web browser.
You may need to accept the IP address for easyE4 in the browser settings for theproxy server.
We recommend using an encrypted IP connection with the HTTPS port. Accordingly, enter the following into the address bar:"https://" "IP address of easyE4 base device", e.g., <https://192.168.0.2>.
If you configured an HTTPS port other than port 443 or an HTTP port other thanport 80 when configuring the web server function, include the HTTPS port accordingly, e.g., <https://192.168.0.2:90>.
The following dialog appears:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

653

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Figure 280: Web client login dialog box

If you want to access the easyE4 base device as an administrator, enter <admin>
as the username, as well as the corresponding password, into the dialog box.
If you instead want to access the easyE4 base device as a user, enter the username and password that you set when when configuring the web server function
into the dialog box.
Confirm by clicking on the Login button.
If you would like to log on as a guest, confirm your entry by clicking on the Guest
Login button.
This requires that the option Anonymous read access permitted is enabled withthe check mark in the Project view/ Tab web server/ Access protection area.
The web client will start and you will be able to access the easyE4 base device. The specifics of this access will depend on the web server function configuration set up in the
Project view/Webserver/Access control section.
Log on as guest
This requires that the option Anonymous read access permitted is enabled with thecheck mark in the Project view/ Tab web server/ Access protection area.
Do not enter a user name. Instead, simply click on the Guest login button.
The web client starts and you only have read access to the easyE4base device.
Using the web client
The web client is subdivided into three areas: A menu bar, a left pane, and a work pane.
How it looks in the web client
Generally, the following colors indicate the editability of fields:
Gray: Read access only
l Blue: Read/write accessl654

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

As a rule, the digital operands will be indicated with the following colors:llll

M1 : Operand =0, read access only
M1 : Operand =0, read and write accessM1 : Operand =1 is set, read access only
M1 : Operand =1 is set, read and write accessShow comments – Comments that were configured in easySoft 7 can be shown or hidden in the web client.
Clicking on the input field in the workspace moves the viewing window so that the input
field you clicked on is shown in the center. Please refer to → "PreventInputScroll", page669 as well.
Menu bar
The menu bar contains non-editable and editable information. Editable information canalso be edited in the easySoft 7 in the web client and in the device, depending on theaccess permission issued in the easySoft 7. The content of the menu bar is explained
below with a definition of the editing options:
Description
easySoft
Webclient
DeviceMenu bar 1
7easyE4 (NT1)
Name: Easy2
IP: 192.168.0.2
2019-03-13
FW: 1.10
MAC: 00-22-c7-120d-31
15:45:09
Admin| DE |

Device (station)
Device name
IP address of the device,
Current device dateFirmware version of the device
The device's MAC address

x
x1)
x1)
x2)
–
–

–
x
x
x
–
–

–
–
x
x
–
–

Current device time
Display of the logged on user

x2)
–

x
x

x
–

Selecting the language for the
web client, DE for example; There
are thirteen languages available:
DE, EN, IT, ES, PL, FR, forexample–x–– Information that cannot beedited1) see also Project view2) see also Clock

The language selection for the web client may be different to the language selection in
the device. Since the language selection is stored exclusively in the browser, each web
client can show the device content in a different language.
Menu bar Description
easySoft
Webclient
Device2
7
RUN

Show/hide catalog
Button used to select the easyE4 operatingstate : green RUN, red STOP

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

–
x

x
x

–
x

655

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Menu bar2

Description

easySoft
7

Webclient

Device

IOX

Displays the status of the easyConnect bus(IO eXtension)
IOX - highlighted in gray: No expansion
devices are connected or fault at theeasyConnect bus.
Possible causes:

–

–

–

IOX - highlighted in green: easyConnect bus
in operation
Show selection in the catalog

–

x

–

Show/hide menu bar

–

x

–

l
l
l

l

Start

Configuration not OK
Expansion device defective
Expansion device has no supply
voltageCommunication error to an expansion device

Catalog
Menu bar 2

Description

Start

Web client start menu with the most important information regarding the connected
device.

Remote dis-

The remote display will be shown in the work pane (only the administrator has accessto this remote display). This display is operated exactly the same way as the easyE4base device itself.

playOperands

Operands can be modified. The administrator always has write permissions for local
operands. Users can also be assigned these permissions. However, access to themarker range through the web client must first be enabled in easySoft 7 and, if necessary, read permissions for I/O must be assigned as well – please refer to → "Enable
marker (write)", page 647 as well.

NET operands NET operands can be modified. The administrator always has write permissions for his
own NET markers. However, access to the NET marker range through the web client
must first be enabled in easySoft 7 – please refer to → "Enable marker (write)", page
647 as well.
Other users will be able to modify operands if write permissions have been set up forthem in the access control settings – please refer to → "Access control", page 647
Parameter list

The user can compose a list of operands that he would like to observe and/or edit.

Diagnostics

Shows the diagnostic messages that are currently present – please refer to → "Operating system diagnostic messages", page 609 as well.

Settings
Logout656

The user can make General settings for the device, Network settings, Email settings and Settings for the web client on his own.
Logs off a logged on user.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Update operands
The web client queries all data in the easyE4 base devices cyclically at a specific interval. This interval is referred to as the "web client cycle time" and is configurable. The
default value is 450 ms. The data is stored temporarily in the web client's storage area.
The displayed operands in the web client are no older than one second.
As soon as the data is a few seconds old (), the loading circle will appear.
Depending on the protocol used, we recommend to only access a certain number of client programs at the same time on a easyE4 base device:https: 2 Client programsl http: ≤ 4 Client programsl

The term client programs refers to web client or JSON API. Otherwise, the wait time forthe updated display may increase disproportionately.
Update web client
The web client is an integral part of the firmware. To update a web client, the latest firmware must be installed on an SD card. The SD card must be inserted in the device. The
index.html file is started as a web client.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

657

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Remote display
The keypad can be operated in the web client display exactly in the same way as on thedevice itself. We recommend switching into the special menu using the key combination ALT+SHIFT instead of using the common actuation on the device with the ALT
key. Alternatively, you can control the keypad with mouse clicks.

Figure 281: Device display

Zoom increment
There is an option to zoom in 0.25 (25%) increments. By default, the zoom range is set to
2 and has a value range from 0.25 to 15.75.
The zoom level will be stored locally in the web client even after closing the session.

658

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Operands
In the operating range, operands show the states of the local bit and value operandsof the device, see → "Overview of operands for numeric formats", page 202.

Figure 282: Operands

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

659

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

NET operands
In the operating range, NET operands display the states of the local bit and value
operands of the device or the NET bit and value operands of the other NET subscribers,
see also → "Overview of operands for numeric formats", page 202.
The NET bit and value operands of the other NET subscribers are selected using the
Select NET ID button. The drop-down menu will only show the NET IDs of the devices
that are actually found on the NET. The web client only allows writing onto the NET operands of the local device. The NET operands of other NET subscribers are read only.
You can click on the NETWebClient button to connect to the web server for the NET station that is selected with the Select NET ID button. This will open a second web client
without requiring for the IP address to be entered. After logging in, the NET station will
become the local device for the web client, making it possible to write to the corresponding NET operands.
In order to emphasize which device the web client is currently connected
to and which operands are being shown, we recommend assigning device
names, e.g., "EasyE2".

Figure 283: NET operands

660

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Parameter list
The project in the device must allow access in order to display this menu item. To allow
access, enable the Parameter list enabled option in the Project view/Webserver tab(refer to → " Parameter list enabled", page 647 as well) or enable it in Catalog settings/Web client/Separate operands in the web client (please refer to → "Parameter
list", page 668 as well).
The web client has the option of putting together a custom view of the easyE4 basedevice's and its expansions' operands. This view is defined in the parameter list. The
parameter list can be made up of all available operands, i.e., EASY-E4-... operands, I/O
expansion for easyE4 control relays operands, NET operands, and function block operands. User function blocks UF are excluded. The parameter list is stored in thebrowser's local memory and not in EASY-E4-.... The parameter list is retained when visiting the site again in the browser.
Each web client has its own parameter list.
If a parameter list, domain name, or device name is very long, the corresponding request will be broken down into multiple small queries andwill require multiple cycle times.
The parameter list can be exported and imported. This allows it to be transferred fromone browser, PC, web client, or mobile device to another.
The parameter list can contain a maximum of 18658 different entries. In order to prevent requests for the easyE4 base device from being unnecessarily long, however,make sure to keep the parameter list as short as possible.
In addition, parameter list operands that corresponding to function block inputs or outputs will be highlighted with a red box:
Shows that the selected operand in the parameter list is not being
FB.A01.F1
used in the easyE4 base device's program. The value is set to "0".

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

661

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Figure 284: Separate operands

ColumnDescription

Name

Any random operand can be entered in the Name column. The context-sensitive searchsupports the input by displaying all of the operands supported by easySoft 7 that containthe entered text anywhere in the operand or in the comment.
The proposed text can be assumed by performing the following steps:
l
l

Value

Use the arrow keys ↑ and ↓ to navigate through the proposed entries
Make a selection with a click of the mouse and hit Enter.

Depending on the device's operating status, the states of the selected operands are displayed in the workspace.
In the case of digital operands, the name of the operand will be shown. For a status of 1,
there will additionally be a green bar in the field, e.g., T01EN. For a status of 0, no bar
will be shown.
In the case of analog operands, the operand's current value will be shown.
Specifically in the case of function block inputs and outputs, a red box will be shown if
the operand is not being used in the program on the device. The operand's value will thenbe set to "0", e.g.,
FB.A01.F1

0
Comment
Note
Write access

662

A comment is displayed for each operand stored in the program on the device.
A comment can be entered that is only stored in the browser. Notes are exported andimported along with the parameter list.
This option is available exclusively to the administrator.
The administrator can enable and disable write access for all writable operands in theparameter list in order to set up permissions for another person. To do this, the parameter list needs to be exported and then imported into the browser being used by otherpeople.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Manage list

ColumnDescription

Pick File
None selectedExport List

You can import a previously exported JSON file that contains the parameter list.
As soon as a parameter list is loaded, the filename will be shown here.
The file "OwnsOps.json" is saved. Depending on the browser settings, the file is saved in
the folder provided for the download. After this, you can archive the file, open it with atext editor, or provide it to other people so that they can import it.

Save temporary changes permanently
Clicking on the SaveAllFBChanges button will result in all the changes made in all web
clients since the last time the easyE4 base device was started being retentively copied
to the device.
Only digital constant, analog constant, and time constant values will be copied.
Changes that come from other web clients and that have been madeacross several sessions will also be copied.
This means that the modified constants will be immediately available on the device andwill be retained the next time the device is started.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

663

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Diagnostics
Diagnostics displays which diagnostics operands are set and their meaning. In the web
client, the values listed in the Bit column are equal to the diagnostics operands. For
more information on diagnostics options, see also → "Operating system diagnostic messages", page 609.

Figure 285: Diagnostics

664

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Settings
The fields highlighted in blue can be edited: Only the admin can modify the settings. The
following settings can be displayed:
General settingsl Network settingsl E-mail settingsl API key (is only displayed for the admin)l Web client (is only displayed for the admin)lGeneral settings
The admin can modify the device name, device date and device time. Any changes in
the web client must be confirmed after a query. The modified data is not transferred tothe device until then. The standard user has read only access to the General settings.

Figure 286: Web client - General settings

Network settings
The admin can modify the network settings, make changes to the IP address, subnet
mask and the gateway's IP address. Any changes in the web client must be confirmed
after a query. The modified data is not transferred to the device until then. The standard
user has read only access to the Network settings.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

665

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Figure 287: Web client - Network settings

E-mail settings
The admin can modify the mail server's email settings. These are the same parametersthat are configured in easySoft 7 Project view/Email tab/Mail server settings area, seealso Email tab. These are the IP address or the DNS name of the mail server, mailserver domains, encrypted mail server connection, login name or user and login password of the mail server user and the mail server port. All changes in the web client
must be confirmed after a query. The modified file is then transferred to the device. The
standard user has read only access to the email settings.

666

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Figure 288: Web client - E-mail settings

API key
Only the administrator can create an API key. An API key can be created for any user inthe web client's workspace.
The web server offers the option for an application programming interface JSON API.
Any program can access and edit the easyE4 data from this interface, for example theprogram of an enterprise software. easySoft 7 is not required. The API can be used inall high-level languages that provide a library for HTTP GetRequests, for example Java
Script, Python, VBa, C++.
A software that wants to access the application programming interface can authenticate itself in two different ways:
1. With the web client's user name and password<User name web client>:<Password user name web client>@<IP address
device>.api/…
Example: testuser:$myPasswd@192.168.0.2.api/get…
2. API key<API key>@<IP address device>.api/…
Example: FTZKVUGUBGLIUIHGIGIZZTIUFFZKUFTABC@192.168.0.2.api/get…
The JSON API is described in a separate document – please refer to www.eaton.eu/easy-jsonapi.
easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

667

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

Figure 289: API key

Web Client

Figure 290: Web Client

Select display topic
White - The web client's interface is presented bright.
l Dark - The web client's interface is presented in dark gray.
l

Parameter list
ActiveIf this option is set to Enabled, creating a parameter list will be allowed. The menu
item Separate operands can be accessed in the web client's catalog. This option isequivalent to the option Parameter list active in Project view/Web server tab, seealso → " Parameter list enabled", page 647.
l Inactive
If this option is set to Disabled, creating a parameter list will not be allowed. The
menu item Separate operands is not displayed in the web client's catalog. Thisl668

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.4 Web client

option is equivalent to the option Parameter list active in Project view/Web servertab, see also → " Parameter list enabled", page 647.
PreventInputScroll
ActiveIf the cursor is placed inside an input field in the web client, the display will not
scroll, and the way the fields are being displayed will remain unchanged.
l Inactive
Default setting. If the cursor is placed inside an input field in the web client, the display will scroll automatically so that the input field is shown in the center.
l

Web client cycle time
The web client's cycle time is the time between two requests for the device used to
update local data. In the following screen refresh cycle, the modified data is shown in
the web client (please note that the cycle time for the web client and the screen refresh
cycle time and independent from each other). The value range for the web client's cycle
time is 250 ms to 30000 ms, with the default value being 450 ms.
The web client's cycle time can be shortened if data needs to be shown in the web client faster than the default value and the program is able to do this with its cycle time.
Please note that reducing the web client's cycle time can place
an excessive load on the easyE4 device and block device
responses under certain circumstances.
Changes in the web client will not affect the settings in the project. However, they will
be saved in the browser and retained even after the session is closed.
See also→ Section "Setting up a web server", page 646→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

669

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

10.5 E-mail function
Only possible with easySoft 7.
The e-mail function can be used to have the easyE4 control relay send a message to up
to three different recipient groups.
Precondition:
In order for the e-mail function to work, there must be an Ethernet connection
between the easyE4 control relay and an server.
This server must either provide the mail server itself or the connection to the mailserver that will be used.
The e-mail message will be triggered:If an error occurs in the NET group (all devices located on the same network as theeasyE4)l The controller's operating state changes
orl The program is deletedl

In addition, e-mails can be sent to recipients if an alarm function block has been configured in the relevant program.
Since the easyE4 control relay cannot send any messages itself, the e-mail function is
the ideal way to ensure that the defined people will promptly receive a notification whenrequired.
These notifications will be triggered automatically if there is an active connection
between the easyE4 and a mail server and the latter has been configured accordingly.
In addition, the e-mail functionality comes with the advantage of traceability. This traceability can be viewed much the same way as data logging.
The following will be saved:
When an error occurredl When the operating state changedl When programs were deletedl670

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Register e-mailAll settings required to send an email are made in Project view/Email tab. The email
time stamp incorporates the time zone configured for the device location, please refer
to Project view.
Project view/E-Mail tab

Figure 291: Register e-mailE-mail recipient
You can enter up to three recipient groups.
A recipient group can contain one recipient or several recipients separated with a semicolon.
The definition for each recipient group can have a maximum length of 254 bytes. Thereis an activation bit for each recipient group. When an email is triggered (e.g., by thealarm function block), emails are only sent to the recipient groups that are activated.
Mail server settings
You will need to enter the connection data for the mail server in the Mail server settings
section. If the settings do not match, it will not be possible to send the easyE4 systemmessages. The mail server can either be defined with an IP address or with the DNS
name (preferably).
DNS name (64 bytes) or IP address of the mail server;Enter the mail server's full name, e.g., "smtp.gmail.com"
DHCP mode or a DNS server is required in order to use DNS names. The DNS
server encrypts the DNS name of the mail server and links it to the correct IP
address. Thus, the DNS server establishes the connection to the mail server. In thiscase, the DNS server's IP address must be defined in Project view/Ethernet tab.
l Sender domain (64 bytes); "easyE4" by default
Enter the hostname or the domain for the easyE4 device itself as the sender domain.
This information will be used to log in to the mail server.
l Email service port of the SMTP server;
The service port will depend on the selected security option. If an external provider
is used for the email service, the service port must be queried from the relevant provider.
leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

671

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

For example, Gmail uses port 587 for the connection security STARTTLS and port
465 for SSL/TLS.
l Connection security:
l not encrypted
l STARTTLSl SSL/TLS (most common connection security protocol)
The DNS name, mail server domains and service port are defined by theemail provider.
Often times, you will be able to find the entire domain name by running asimple Internet search by <SMTP server> followed by the mail server; forexample Yahoo, Googlemail, gmx.
An email account must definitely be set up with the mail server. If easyE4 should transfer the email via a public network, an email account must be set up with a provider. The
login data must be entered in the following fields for the email account:
Login name (32 Byte)l Login password (32 Bytes)l

A check mark next to the field Login password shows that you repeated the password
correctly.
System Messages
You can define for which events easyE4 is to send emails in the system messages
area.
easyNet error occured
Operating state changed
Program deleted
Sending to the recipient group
With this ID the recipient group is selected to which easyE4 should send emails if oneof the defined trigger events occurs.

672

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Example: Sending an email with easyE4 if there is an operating
mode change
In the following example, an easyE4 base device should send an email if the operating
mode changes.

IP: 192.168.0.2

IP: 192.168.0.1

Email account with Gmail:
Recipient:
Address: alarmEasyE4@gmail.com
testuser1@eaton.com
Password:: • • • • • • •SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol)
STARTTLS Port:587

Prerequisites
You have set up an email account with a provider and you know the port for the
STARTTLS connection security.
To complete this example, follow the steps below:
Settings in the email tab
You can configure the e-mail function as necessary in easySoft 7.
Open a new project.
Select the device you want from the catalog in the Project view.
Click on the E-Mail tab.
There are three sections under the tab: E-mail recipient, Mail server settings, and System messages.
Activate a recipient group for editing, such as <Recipient group1>.
Enter the recipient's e-mail address, <testuser1@eaton.com>, for example.
In the System messages section, select the events that should trigger an e-mail to therecipient group.
Enable the operating mode option with a check mark.
In the Send to recipient group drop-down menu, select the recipient group towhich the selected messages should be sent, e.g. <1>.
You will need to enter the connection data for the mail server in the Mail server settings
section. In this example, the mail server is a Gmail server smtp.gmail.com.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

673

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Start by selecting whether you will be entering an IP address or a DNS name. The
DNS name that you want to activate is entered in this example.
Enter the DNS name in the field <smtp.gmail.com>.
Confirm or change the sender domain for the easyE4 base device.
Enter the email service port; for example, Gmail uses port 587 for the connection
security STARTTLS and port 465 for SSL/TLS.
Select the connection security, for example STARTTLS.
In the field Login Name, enter the address of your email account through whicheasyE4 should send the email.
In the field Login Password, enter the password for your email account throughwhich easyE4 should send the email.
A check mark next to the field Login password shows that you repeated the password correctly.
DHCP mode or a DNS server is required in order to use DNS names. The DNS
server encrypts the DNS name of the mail server and links it to the correct IP
address. Thus, the DNS server establishes the connection to the mail server.

Figure 292: Email tab with the settings from the example

Upper and lower case do not play a role when naming email accounts.
Ethernet tab settings
First, enter the parameters for communicating with the device.
Because the mail server is entered with the DNS name in the example, the DHCP modeor a DNS server is required to establish a connection to the mail server.
Switch to Project view/Ethernet tab.
In the selection field mode, select the option Fixed IP address .
Enter the IP address of the easyE4 base device, for example 192.169.0.2.
Enter the subnet mask, such as 255.255.255.0.
Enter the IP address of the router in the Gateway field. It establishes the connection between the easyE4 and the public network.
Set the check mark to activate the option Enable configuration via network. This
will allow you to modify the IP settings in the Search for devices window in theCommunication view during testing.
Enter a name for the easyE4 base device in the field Device name, such as<myEasyE4>. The Device name is noted in the email.

674

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Enter the IP address of the router in the DNS server field. In this example, the DNS
server is equivalent to the router, because it establishes the connection to the public network and from the device perspective, will establish the connection to the
DNS server. The DNS server encrypts the DNS name of the mail server and links
it to the correct IP address.
Make sure that the IP addresses for the PC, easyE4 and the router are in
the same number range.
You may need to adjust the system settings of your PC.
Project view/Ethernet tab

Figure 293: Ethernet tab with settings from the example

Programming
Before you can load your project onto the easyE4 base device, you must first create asmall program. Otherwise, the plausibility check will report an error.
Switch to Programming view.
Select the programming language, preferably FUP or KOP.
Drag a N/O to the work pane, such as I01.
Drag a contactor to the work pane, such as Q01.
Establish a connection to easyE4 and load the program onto easyE4
Switch to View communication.
In the range, select the IP address of the easyE4 base device, such as 192.168.0.2.
Click on the Online button.
When the device is online, the illustration of the easyE4 on the work pane changes.
Press the PC-> device button to load the program to the device.
Switch the Status Display On using the command sequence Communication menu
bar/ Status display on.
Click the RUN button to start the program.
Trigger the event and send the email.
Click the RUN button to start the program and to change the operating mode of thedevice.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

675

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Check the incoming email folder to see whether an email is received shortly after
this; such as testuser1@eaton.com.
Example of an email:From: myEasyE4@local <alarmeasye4@gmail.com>
To: testuser1@eaton.com
CC:
Subject: [EXTERNAL] Device: myEasyE4- Enter RUN
Device : myEasyE4
Time : 2019- 02- 01 14:52:55
IP : 192. 168. 0. 12
State : STOP
Message reason: Enter RUN

Figure 294: Email example when the operating mode changes

676

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Example: Sending an email with alarm function block AL
You now expand the previous example → chapter "10 E-mail function", page 670 byadding an alarm function block AL.
After pressing the P button P1 on the easyE4 base device, the easyE4 should send an
email.
Precondition:
You have created a project using the example Sending email with easyE4 when theoperating mode changes.
To complete this example, follow the steps below:
Program and configure the alarm function block
Make sure that the project from the example Sending email with easyE4 when theoperating mode changes is open.
Switch into View programming.
Select the alarm function block AL from the catalog and left click it to drag it to theworkspace.
Select the alarm function block AL N/O from the catalog left click it to drag it to theworkspace at input T_ of the AL01 function block.
In the Contact tab in the selection list, select operand P- device key.
Make sure that number 1-< is selected in the selection list.
Left click on the alarm function block AL01. The tab Alarm function block parameters opens.
In the field Subject, enter a text that describes the trigger event.
In the field Message text enter any text with a maximum of 160 characters.
Make sure that the ID of the desired recipient group is entered in the selection field
Recipient assignment. Which recipient is assigned to which recipient group isdefined in Project view/Email tab.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

677

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Programming view/AL01

Figure 295: Alarm function block tab with parameters from the example and FUP program with alarmfunction block and P button P01

Activating P buttons
Switch into the system settings tab.
Enable the P buttons option with a check mark. By doing so, you allow the program
to read the condition of the P buttons on the device.
Transfer program
Save the project.
Switch to Communication view and press the Online button.
Stop the device by clicking on the Program/configuration/STOP.
By clicking on Program/configuration/PC->device, you load the program onto thedevice.
Start the device by clicking on the Program/configuration/RUN.
To check whether the P button works properly, set the Status indicator ON fromthe Communication menu bar/ Status indicator ON.
Trigger the event and send the email.
Press the P button P1 < on the device to trigger the event.
Check the incoming email folder to see whether an email is received shortly after
this; such as testuser1@eaton.com.

678

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

10. Connection to other devices
10.5 E-mail function

Example of an email:From: myEasyE4@local <alarmeasye4@gmail.com>
To: testuser1@eaton.com
CC:
Subject: [EXTERNAL] P1 pressed
Hello,
this is a free defined text with 160 letters per
maximum and can be defined within functions block
alarm AL; Message Reason is AL01_E1=1

Figure 296: Example email when triggered by alarm function block AL01

See also→ Section "AL - Alarm function block", page 440

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

679

10. Connection to other devices
10.6 Convenient visualization for easyE4

10.6 Convenient visualization for easyE4
For simple control applications, the easyE4 relay has the option of running the visualization through the display on the base device.
However, you can also use an XV-102-AO-35TQRB-1E4 touch display as an operating
terminal for much more convenient project visualization.
This 3.5“ display is a cost-effective solution for distributed visualization applications.

Figure 297: Visualization on operating terminal

For more information on how to connect the controller, please refer to the tutorials andthe various documents → Section "Further information ", page 709.
For additional product information, as well as access to the software demo version,please visit the product page.
http://www.eaton.eu/easy
http://www.eaton.eu/galileo
Data is exchanged between the devices using the GALILEO 10 internal tag importformat (*.itf). easySoft 7 supports this export format for Modbus TCP..

680

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

11. Faults

11. Faults
This section provides troubleshooting information for your easyE4 in case it does not
behave as expected.
Fault
Cause
RemedyThe base device will not bootup
The display stays or turns dark.

There is no supply voltage
The backlight is deactivated.

Check the input wiring.
Switch on the device
Turn on the backlight; pleaserefer to the text function blockdescription or check the corresponding function in the program with easySoft 7.

If a easyE4 device does not behave as expected, the following tips can help you in rectifying any possible problems. If a program does not function as expected, in spite of athorough simulation in easySoft 7, the power flow display in the EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P)device enables you to test the logic operations of the circuit diagram.
Only qualified persons should test electrical voltages while the easyE4 device is in operation.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

681

11. Faults
11.1 Messages from the operating system

11.1 Messages from the operating system
Messages on the LCD
display

Explanation

RemedyNo display

Power supply interrupted
LCD is faulty

Restore powereasyE4 replace

Only when switched on for the first time-

The operating system file (*.FW) does notmatch the selected easyE4 expansion device.

Select the operating system file"*.FW" corresponding to the
expansion device on the
microSD

Temporary display
TEST: EEPROM
TEST: CLOCKUPDATE ERROR

Continuous display
ERROR: EEPROMERROR: CLOCK

682

The memory for storing the retentive values or easyE4 replace
the easyE4 circuit diagram memory is faulty.
Clock error
easyE4 replaceeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

11. Faults
11.2 Possible situations when creating programs

11.2 Possible situations when creating programs
Situations when cre- Explanation
ating a program

RemedyCannot enter contact orrelay in programTime switch switches atwrong times
Message when using amemory card PROGINVALID

easyE4 device is in RUN mode

Select STOP mode

Time or time switch parameters not correct

Check time and parameters

Memory card in easyE4 device contains no circuit diagram
Circuit diagram on the memory card uses contacts/ relays that the easyE4 device does notrecognizePower flow display does
easyE4 device is in STOP mode
not show changes to the
Association/ connection not fulfilled
rungs
Relay does not activate coil
Incorrect parameter values/time
Analog value comparison is incorrect
Time value of timing relay is incorrect
Function of timing relay is incorrect
Relay Q or M does not pick Relay coil has been wired up several times
up
Input not detected
Loose terminal contact
No voltage to switch/button
Wire breakeasyE4 device input is faulty
Relay output Q does not
easyE4 device in STOP modeswitch and activate theNo voltage at relay contact
load
easyE4 device power supply interrupted
easyE4 device circuit diagram does not activate
relay output
Wire breakeasyE4 device relay is faulty

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Change easyE4 device type or
the circuit diagram on thememory card

Select RUN mode
Check and modify circuit diagram and parameter sets

Check coil field entries
Check installation instructions,check external wiring
Replace easyE4 device
Select RUN mode
Check installation instructions,check external wiring

Replace easyE4 device683

11. Faults
11.3 Event11.3 Event
Event

Explanation

RemedyThe ACTUAL values are notbeing stored retentively.
The RETENTION… menu is
not displayed in the SYSTEM
menu.
The retentive data is cleared
when there is a mode change
from RUN to STOP.
When the device is switchedon, the easyE4 switches to
STOP mode

Retention has not been switched on.

Switch on retention in the
SYSTEM menu.
Select STOP mode

The contacts of the BC (datablock comparison) and BT(block transfer) function
blocks flash in the power
flow display
The display is not showing
anything

easyE4 device is in RUN operating mode.

This behavior only occurs when using the
PW02 (pulse width modulation) function
block in easyE4.
No circuit diagram in the easyE4 device
RUN START is deactivated at easyE4.

Avoid using the PW02 function
block.

No supply voltage
easyE4 device faulty

Switch on the power supply
Press the OK button. If no menu
appears, replace the easyE4
device.
Enter text or do not activate text
outputLoad, input circuit diagram
Activating RUN mode in Menu
SYSTEM OPTIONS.
The display of the easyE4 is being updated to Ignore this section of the powerintermediate states too frequently althoughflow display.
the contacts are operating properly

Text displayed with too many spaces

684

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

11. Faults
11.4 Functionality of the NET faulty

11.4 Functionality of the NET faulty
NOTICEYou can make a visual check the functionality of the NET by means of
the NET LED and in the circuit diagram via diagnostics bit ID01-ID08.
Checking the functionality of the NET using the NET LED
Status of the
Description
NET LED
Off
Continuous light

NET not operational, fault in configuration
NET station fault - possible causes:
l

l

l

l

Flashing

Net is initialized and at least one station has not been detected. Check the plug-in
connections.
You have modified the NET ID or baud rate for at least one station after the configuration has been completed. Change the configuration.
You have deleted the program on a NET station and thus also its NET configuration.
Reconfigure the NET via station 1.
You have expanded an existing NET station and replaced it with a new device
which cannot be assigned parameters.

NET operating fault-freeeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

685

11. Faults
11.4 Functionality of the NET faulty

686

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

12. Maintenance

12. MaintenanceeasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

687

12. Maintenance12.1 Cleaning and maintenance12.1 Cleaning and maintenance
The easyE4 are maintenance-free.
However, the following work may need to be carried out:lCleaning the easyE4 when soiled.

When soiled:
CAUTION
POINTY, SHARP OBJECTS AND CORROSIVE LIQUIDS
When cleaning the device:
Do not use any pointy or sharp objects (e.g., knives).
l Do not use aggressive or abrasive cleaning products or solvents.
Make sure that no liquids get into the device (short-circuit hazard) andthat the device is not damaged in any way.
l

Clean the device with a clean, soft, damp cloth.

688

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

12. Maintenance12.2 Repairs

12.2 Repairs
Contact your local supplier or technical support for repairs.
CAUTION
DESTRUCTION
The easyE4 should only be opened by the manufacturer or by an authorized center. Operate the device until only with the enclosure fully closed
and sealed.
Use the original packaging to ship the device.

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

689

12. Maintenance12.3 Storage, transport and disposal

12.3 Storage, transport and disposal
12.3.1 Storage and transport
CAUTIONUV LIGHT
Plastics will become brittle when exposed to UV light. This artificial
aging will reduce the easyE4 unit's lifespan. Protect the device from direct sunlight and other sources of UV radiation.
CAUTION
SHORT-CIRCUIT HAZARD
If the device is or has been exposed to environmental fluctuations (ambient temperature, air humidity), condensation may form on or inside it. As
long as this condensation is present, there will be a short-circuit hazard.
Do not switch on the device when it has condensation in or on it.
If the device has condensation in or on it, or if the panel has been
exposed to environmental fluctuations, let the panel settle into the existing ambient temperature before switching it on.
The ambient conditions must be met when transporting and storing the easyE4.
The ambient air temperature for storage and transportation must not exceed the maximum specified limit:
Ambient climatic conditions
Air pressure (in operation)

795 - 1080 hPa
Max. 2000 m above sea level

Temperature

Humidity

Operation - 25 – +55 °C (-13 – +131 °F)
The display is readable between ϑ -5°C (-23°F) ≦ T ≦ 50°C (122°F).
Storage / Transport - 40 – +70 °C (-40 – +158 °F)
Relative humidity 5 - 95 %Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures

Before commissioning
If storing/transporting the device in cold weather conditions or insuch a way that it will be exposed to extreme differences in temperature, make sure that no condensation forms on or inside thedevice.
If there is condensation in or on the device, do not switch on thedevice until it is completely dry.
Use the original packaging to ship the device.

690

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

12. Maintenance12.3 Storage, transport and disposal

The easyE4 is sturdily built, but the components inside it are sensitive to excessively
strong vibrations and/or mechanical shock.
Accordingly, make sure to protect the easyE4 from mechanical loads that exceed thescope of the unit's intended use.
The device should only be transported in its original packaging after being packed properly.
12.3.2 Disposal
Important!
Dispose of recyclables as required by your local recycling regulations.
easyE4 no longer being used must be professionally disposed of as per local standards
or returned to the manufacturer or relevant sales department.
Materials used in the packaging
Packaging
Outer packaging
Inner packaging

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Material
Cardboard
Cardboard
Plastic bag: polyethylene (PE)691

12. Maintenance12.3 Storage, transport and disposal

692

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix

Appendix
A.1 Dimension and weight specifications

694

A.2 Approvals and declarations

698

A.3 Technical data

699

A.3.1 Data sheets

699

A.4 Required memory for function blocks

705

A.5 Further information

709

A.6 Sample Projects

711

A.6.1 easyE4_Lauflicht_EDP.e70 application example

711

Alphabetical index

714

List of Figures

726

Glossary

737

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

693

Appendix
A.1 Dimension and weight specifications

A.1 Dimension and weight specifications
Base devices with 4 space unit front dimension
EASY-E4-UC-12RC1(P), EASY-E4-DC-12TC1(P), EASY-E4-AC-12RC1(P)45 mm (1.77")

110 mm (4.33")

90 mm (3.54")

50 mm (1.97")

102 mm (4.02")

10.75 mm(0.42")

M4
35.75 mm (1.41")

4.5 mm (0.18")
48.5 mm (1.91")

71.5 mm (2.81")

56.5 mm (2.22")
59.6 mm (2.35")

EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1(P), EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1(P), EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1(P)

45 mm (1.77")

110 mm (4.33")

90 mm (3.54")

50 mm (1.97")

102 mm (4.02")

10.75 mm(0.42")

M4
35.75 mm (1.41")

4.5 mm (0.18")
48.5 mm (1.91")

71.5 mm (2.81")

56.5 mm (2.22")
59.6 mm (2.35")

Figure 298: Dimensions in mm (Inch) base devices
Width x Height x Depth694

71.5 mm x 90 mm x 58 mm (2.81" x 3.54" x 2.28")

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
A.1 Dimension and weight specifications(without plug)
WeightRefer to the data sheet for the device; varies between 139 g and 230 g dependingon the specific model

Expansion devices with 4 space unit front dimension
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1(P),EASY-E4-DC-16TE1(P), EASY-E4-AC-16RE1(P),45 mm (1.77")

110 mm (4.33")

90 mm (3.54")

50 mm (1.97")

102 mm (4.02")

10.75 mm(0.42")

M4
35.75 mm (1.41")

4.5 mm (0.18")
48.5 mm (1.91")

80.3 mm (3.16")

56.5 mm (2.22")
57.6 mm (2.27")

Figure 299: Dimensions in mm (Inch) extensions 4SU
Width x Height x Depth(without plug)
Weight71.5 mm x 90 mm x 58 mm (2.81" x 3.54" x 2.28")
Refer to the data sheet for the device; varies between 139 g and 230 g dependingon the specific model

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

695

Appendix
A.1 Dimension and weight specifications

Expansion devices with 2 space unit front dimension
EASY-E4-UC-8RE1(P), EASY-E4-DC-8TE1(P), EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P), EASY-E4-AC-8RE1(P)45 mm (1.77")

110 mm (4.33")

90 mm (3.54")

102 mm (4.02")

7.5 mm(0.3")

M4

35.5 mm (1.4")

4.5 mm (0.18")

7.5 mm(0.3")

48.5 mm (1.91")
56.5 mm (2.22")

43.8 mm (1.72")

57.6 mm (2.27")

Figure 300: Dimensions in mm (Inch) extensions 2SU
EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)45 mm (1.77")

110 mm (4.33")

90 mm (3.54")

102 mm (4.02")

7.5 mm(0.3")

M4

35.5 mm (1.4")

4.5 mm (0.18")

7.5 mm(0.3")

48.5 mm (1.91")

43.8 mm (1.72")

56.5 mm (2.22")
57.6 mm (2.27")

Figure 301: Dimensions in mm (Inch)696

Width x Height x Depth(without plug)

35.5 mm x 90 mm x 58 mm (1.4" x 3.54" x 2.28")

WeightRefer to the data sheet for the device; varies between 79 g and 232 g dependingon the specific model

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
A.1 Dimension and weight specifications

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

697

Appendix
A.2 Approvals and declarations

A.2 Approvals and declarations
The following specifications apply to all easyE4 devices.
Approvals and declarations
easyE4 approval present
easyE4 units comply with all applicable European Union (EU) Directives andfeature the CE marking.
NEMA
easyE4 device complies with the applicable guidelines in North America
Marine approval (shipping clas- Application for easyE4 approval submittedsification)cUL
CE

Marine approvals applied for:Base devices

from Version

I/O expansions

from Version

EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1
EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1
EASY-E4-AC-12RC1
EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1
EASY-E4-...-12...C1P
EASY-E4-...-12...CX1P

02
02
02
02
01
01
00
00

EASY-E4-UC-8RE1
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1
EASY-E4-DC-4PE1
EASY-E4-DC-6AE1
EASY-E4-DC-8TE1
EASY-E4-DC-16TE1
EASY-E4-AC-8RE1
EASY-E4-AC-16RE1
EASY-E4-...-...E1P

03
03
01
03
03
03
01
01
00

Base and expansion devices with a lower version number than specified
in the above table do not have a Marine approbation. For devices without
Marine approbation the maximum contact discharge is 4 kV.
Applied standards and directives
EMC (relevant for CE)
IEC/EN 61000-6-2
IEC/EN 61000-6-3
Security
IEC/EN 61010
Product standards
EN 50178_x
IEC/EN 61131-2
Mechanical
IEC/EN 60068-2-27
shock resistance
IEC/EN 60068-2-6
Vibration
Environmental IEC/EN 60068-2-30
tests

698

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2004/108/EEC 2014/30/EU
Interference immunity for industrial environments

Safety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement, control and laboratory use
Electronic equipment for use in power installations
Programmable controllers: Equipment requirements and tests
15g /11ms

Displacement amplitude: 5–9 Hz: 3.5 mm; 9–60 Hz: 0.15 mm
Acceleration amplitude: 60–150 Hz: 2 g

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

A.3 Technical data
A.3.1 Data sheets
The current specifications for the device can be found in the corresponding data sheet
at www.eaton.eu/ecat
A.3.1.1 Base devices
With screw terminal connection
197211 - EASY-E4-UC-12RC1
197213 - EASY-E4-DC-12TC1
197215 - EASY-E4-AC-12-RC1

197212 - EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1
197214 - EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1
197216 - EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1With push in connection
197504 - EASY-E4-UC-12RC1P
197506 - EASY-E4-DC-12TC1P
197508 - EASY-E4-AC-12RC1P

197505 - EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1P
197507 - EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1P
97509 - EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1P

With screw terminal connection
with relay outputs

with transistor outputs

A.3.1.2 Expansions

197217 - EASY-E4-UC-8RE1
197218 - EASY-E4-UC-16RE1
197221 - EASY-E4-AC-8RE1
197222 - EASY-E4-AC-16RE1

197219 - EASY-E4-DC-8TE1
197220 - EASY-E4-DC-16TE1

with analog inputs

with temperature inputs

197223 - EASY-E4-DC-6AE1

197224 - EASY-E4-DC-4PE1

With push in connection
197510 - EASY-E4-UC-8RE1P
197511 - EASY-E4-UC-16RE1P
197514 - EASY-E4-AC-8RE1P
197515 - EASY-E4-AC-16RE1P

197512 - EASY-E4-DC-8TE1P
197513 - EASY-E4-DC-16TE1P

with analog inputs

with temperature inputs

197516 - EASY-E4-DC-6AE1P

197517 - EASY-E4-DC-4PE1P

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

699

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

Accessory devices
Cat No. and type198513 XV-102-AO-35TQRB-1E4
198514 XV100-BOX-E4-DC1

198515 XV100-BOX-E4-UC1

191087 MEMORY-SUD-A1

197226 EASYSOFT-SWLIC
061360 ZB4-101-GF1
197225 EASY-E4-CONNECT1

272484 - TR-G2/24

700

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Description
Touch display for easyE4, 24 VDC, 3.5 Zoll, TFTcolor, Ethernet
Starter package consisting of EASY-E4-DC-12TC1, XV-102-AO35TQRB-1E4 touch display, Ethernet switch, three patch cables, andlicense for easySoft 7
Starter package consisting of XV-102-AO-35TQRB-1E4, EASY-E4-UC12RC1, Ethernet switch, three patch cables, and license for easySoft
7
microSD
2 GB memory card with adapter, I Grade, without an operating system
Programming software license easySoft 7
ZB4-101-GF1 Device foot for screw mounting
EASY-E4-CONNECT1 spare parts package
Consists of three (3) connectors and three (3) end covers for theeasyE4 series between the control relay and input/output expansions
Transformer, 230 V, 12/24 V, 2/1 A

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

Following are some of the technical specifications from the various data sheets. This
information should help you get an overview of common properties and compare different individual devices.
EASY-E4-

UC-12RC1 UC(P)
12RCX1(P)

DC-12TC1 DC(P)
12TCX1(P)

AC-12RC1 AC(P)12RCX1(P)

Basic function

Control relay,
expandable with I/O expansions from the easyE4 series;
Ethernet port for connecting to a network
Real-time clock
Display with
Monochrome Monochrome Monochrome keypad
6 x 16 lines
6 x 16 lines
6 x 16 lines
Specifications for 12/24 V DC or
24 V DC
100 - 240 V AC or DC(cULus 100 - 110 V DC)
connection to sup- 24 V AC
ply voltage
Input points
Digital: 8,of which 4 can be used as analog inputs
Tophat rail IEC/EN 60715 (35 mm) or screw fixing with fixing brackets ZB4-101-GF1
Mounting(accessories)
Protection Style
IP 20

Ambient climatic conditions
Air pressure (in operation)

795 - 1080 hPa
Max. 2000 m above sea level

Temperature

Humidity

Operation - 25 – +55 °C (-13 – +131 °F)
The display is readable between ϑ -5°C (-23°F) ≦ T ≦ 50°C (122°F).
Storage / Transport - 40 – +70 °C (-40 – +158 °F)
Relative humidity 5 - 95 %Condensation Prevent condensation by means of suitable measures

Ethernet interface

on the basic device

Connection
Wire type

RJ45 plug, 8-pin
CAT5easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

701

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

Back-upof real-time clock①

Accuracyof the real-time clock

300
280
260
240
220
200
180
160
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
0

25°C

55°C

0

1

2 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20②① Backup time (hours) with fully charged double layer capacitor② Service life (years)
typ. ± 2 s/day (± 0.2 h⁄year)
depending on ambient air temperature fluctuations of up to± 5 s/day (± 0.5 h⁄year) are possible

The supercapacitor's full charge will be reached if the easyE4 device isconnected to the power supply for 24 hours.

702

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
Overvoltage category/degree of pollution
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

III/2
according to IEC EN 61000-4-2
8 kV

Air discharge
Contact discharge Version
EASY-E4-UC-12RC1 01
4 kV
from 02 6 kV
EASY-E4-UC-12RCX1 01
4 kV
from 02 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-12TC1 01
4 kV
from 02 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-12TCX1 01
4 kV
from 02 6 kV
EASY-E4-AC-12RC1 from 01 6 kV
EASY-E4-AC-12RCX1 from 01 6 kV
EASY-E4-UC-8RE1 01
4 kV
02
4 kV
03
6 kV
EASY-E4-UC-16RE1 01
4 kV
02
4 kV
from 03 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-4PE1 from 01 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-6AE1 01
4 kV
02
4 kV
from 03 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-8TE1 01
4 kV
02
4 kV
from 03 6 kV
EASY-E4-DC-16TE1 01
4 kV
02
4 kV
from 03 6 kV
EASY-E4-AC-8RE1 from 01 6 kV
EASY-E4-AC-16RE1 from 01 6 kV

The contact discharge value for all EASY-E4-..-....1P devices with push interminals is 6 kV.
Electromagnetic fields (RFI)

according to IEC EN 61000-4- 0.8 - 1.0 GHz: 10 V/m
3
1.4 - 2 GHz: 3 V/m
2.0 - 2.7 GHz: 1 V/m
Radio interference suppression In accordance with EN
Class B
61000-6-3
Burstaccording to IEC/EN 61000- Supply cables: 2 kV
4-4
Signal cables: 2 kV
according to IEC/EN 61000- 1 kV (supply cables, symmetrical)
Power pulses (Surge)

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

703

Appendix
A.3 Technical data

Radiated RFI

704

4-5
according to IEC/EN 610004-6

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

2 kV (supply cables, asymmetrical)
10 V

Appendix
A.4 Required memory for function blocks

A.4 Required memory for function blocks
The memory required for unconnected function blocks is the same for all programming
languages. In order to measure this memory when using the EDP programming language, drag each function block to the function block diagram individually and read thedifference regarding the remaining memory space in the status line.
Each function block will reserve the memory space listed below when unconnected. In
addition, text function block D has extensive static operating parameters that require
additional memory space.
Table 124: Memory Required FB

Function blocks

Instance 1

Instance 2

A
AC
AL
AR
AV
BC
BT
BV
C
CF
CH
CI
CP
D
DB
DC
DL
FT
HW
HY
IC
IE
IT
JC
LS
MM
MR
MX
NC
OT
PM
PO

68
68
540
40
60
48
48
40
52
48
52
52
32
76
36
120
92
56
68
68
–
–
–
20
64
48
20
96
32
64
56
96

68
68
290
40
60
48
48
40
52
48
52
52
32
56
36
120

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

56
68
68
–
–
–
20
64
48
20
96
32
64
48
96

705

Appendix
A.4 Required memory for function blocks

Function blocks

Instance 1

Instance 2

PW
RC
RE
SR(BIT)
SR(DWORD)
ST
T
TB
TC
VC
WT
YT

48
76
112
96
96
24
60
112
76
48
84
96

48
–
104
96
96
–
60
112
76
48
84
96

Required memory when connecting function blocks, using CP, T, D as an example
In order to estimate the required memory for a connected function block, you canassume a required memory space of eight bytes for each connected function block
input and function block output. This applies regardless of whether the function block
inputs and/or outputs are digital or analog and of whether the connection involves MBmarker bits or MD marker double words.
easySoft 7 will attempt to optimize the code, and in certain cases, less than eight bytes
will be needed. Please note that connections between function blocks also require
memory.
The following information was determined using the FBD programming language.
Table 125: Memory Required FB CP

CP - Comparator

Connected toMemoryRequiredFunction block
inputs/outputs

Operand

bytes

DI
AI
AI
TH
TH
TH

36
8
4
8
8
8
4
76

CP (not connected)
EN
I1
I2
LT
EQ
GT
TOTAL

706

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
A.4 Required memory for function blocks

Table 126: Memory Required FB T

T – Timing relay

Connected toMemoryRequiredFunction block
inputs/outputs

Operand

bytes

DI
DI
AI
AI
AI
TH
TH

56
8
4
8
12
12
4
8
112

T (not connected)
EN
RE
ST
I1
I2
Q1
QV
TOTAL

The D text display function block heavily depends on the configured display and input
elements and their texts. Every display and input element requires memory itself.
Moreover, the texts available for the element also require memory. Identical texts in adisplay or input element do not require additional memory, however.
Table 127: Memory required by D text display function block

D - Text display

MemoryRequiredFunction block inputs/outputs

bytes

Indication elements
D (not connected)
Value display
Bargraph
Static text (without text)+ per text with 16 characters

108
12
20
12
40 1)

Running text (without text)+ per 2 characters
Rolling text (without text)+ per text with 16 characters

8
4
16
401)

Message text (without text)+ per text with 16 characters

24
401)

Date and time display
DZ Weekday
Timing relay value display

12
8
12

Entry elements
Value entry
Latching pushbutton
Message text selection (without text)+ per text with 16 characters

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

12
12
28
401)

707

Appendix
A.4 Required memory for function blocks

D - Text display

MemoryRequiredFunction block inputs/outputs

bytes

Date and time entry
8
Timing relay value entry
81) Potentially less memory required if optimization is possible

708

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
A.5 Further information

A.5 Further information
Documents
For more information on additional devices and modules, please refer to the following
documentation:
Installation instructions Base devices

IL050020ZU

Installation leaflet for I/O expansions

IL050021ZU

Installation instructions Fixing bracket

IL05009005Z

Download Center, Eaton Online Catalog
Enter "easy" into the search box and the catalog will take you directly to the corresponding product group in the Automation, Control and visualization section.
http://www.eaton.eu/doc
http://www.eaton.eu/ecat
Product information
For up-to-date information, please consult the product page on the Internet.
http://www.eaton.eu/easy
Application examples
Support has provided a number of applications that are available for download as ZIP
files from the Software Download Center.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Anwendungsbeispiele/easy/Deutsch
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Application Samples/easy/English
These examples come with a task description, the circuit diagram, and the easySoft 7
project (in the EDP and LD programming languages as of this writing).
Tutorials
For helpful videos that explain how to use specific functions, please visit the productpage at http://www.eaton.eu/easy.
Product training
The Eaton Experience Center Training (EEC) has a series of training courses available
for the easyE4. For more information, as well as to download the workshop catalog,
please visit:

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

709

Appendix
A.5 Further information

http://www.eaton.eu/training
Community
easyForum is an additional source of help that can be found on the Internet at:
http://www.easy-forum.net
Cybersecurity
Eaton recommends implementing measures for protecting against cyberattacks.
Eaton cybersecurity
https://www.eaton.com/us/en-us/company/news-insights/cybersecurity.html
https://www.eaton.com/cybersecurity
Secure Hardening Guideline

710

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

MZ049001EN

Appendix
A.6 Sample Projects

A.6 Sample Projects
To get a quick look at the possibilities offered by the easyE4 series, please visit the corresponding product page on the Internet (the page includes a series of application
examples and tutorials).
Application examples
Support has provided a number of applications that are available for download as ZIP
files from the Software Download Center.
Download Center - Software
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Anwendungsbeispiele/easy/Deutsch
http://www.eaton.eu/software/Application Samples/easy/English
These examples come with a task description, the circuit diagram, and the easySoft 7
project (in the EDP and LD programming languages as of this writing).
Tutorials
For helpful videos that explain how to use specific functions, please visit the productpage at http://www.eaton.eu/easy.
If you do not have an Internet connection available, you can try out one of the application examples here if you have already installed easySoft 7:
The application examples created by Eaton can only be transferred to theeasyE4 device if a license has been added for easySoft 7.

A.6.1 easyE4_Lauflicht_EDP.e70 application example
Task definition
Say that you want to use the easyE4 to switch on four lamps in sequence and thenswitch them off accordingly.
Starting from the first lamp all the way to the fourth lamp, and then vice versa from thefourth lamp all the way to the first lamp, and so on. The system can be switched on andoff with main switch S1.
The selector switch S2 defines whether the chaser light is to be activated permanently
or only at the set times (daily from 6 PM to 10 PM).
Three different speeds can be set for the chaser light:
Switch S3 > Fast chaser light speed (0.30 sec.)l Switch S4 > Medium chaser light speed (0.60 sec)l Switches S3 S4 simultaneously > Slow chaser light speed (1 sec)leasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

711

Appendix
A.6 Sample Projects

Wiring topic
1. Inputs:
I1
Main switch S1 (system ON / OFF)
I2
Selector switch S2 (time switch ON/ OFF
I3
Switch S3 (chaser light speed)
I4
Switch S4 (chaser light speed)
2. Outputs:
Q1

Lamp H1

Q2

Lamp H2

Q3

Lamp H3

Q4

Lamp H4

3. Parameters:
T1

Fast pulse speed (0.30 sec)

T2

Medium pulse speed (0.60 sec)

T3

Slow pulse speed (1 sec)

C1-C4 Number of pulses Number of pulses
H1 Chaser light on times Chaser light on times

Figure 302: Circuit diagram for easyE4 chaser light712

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

713

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Alphabetical index
2
24 V pulses364

7
7-day time switch

218

Arithmetic

312

Assigning IP addresses

100

Assigning variables, function block input

195

Associated variable

461

Astronomic clock

272

Auxiliary relay

202

AV

317

A

Continuous mode

317

A - Analog value comparison visualization
deviceOne-time mode

317

AV continuous mode

317
317

306-307

AC

272

AV one-time modeAC base devices

41

Available operands

AC device notes

41

AC expansions

41

Average

366

B

Access control

647

Backward jumps

182

Accessory devices

29

Bar graph

462

Activation P buttons

452

BCD

497

Actuators

345

BCD-coded decimal value

497

ADD

312

Beschreibung

19

Adding313

Bestimmungsgemäße Verwendung

19

Rung

176

BIP

353

Aeration and de-aeration

45

Block transfer

395

AL - Alarm function block440

Blocks

Alarm

451

Blue

654

Alarm function block

440

BOOL definition

200

Boolean operation

444

User function blocks

548
317

Acceleration sequence
PO - pulse output

Ambient climatic conditions

45, 690, 701

281, 299

Analog Signals

40

BOOT.TXT

Analog value comparison

306

Brake sequence

AND

444

Brand names

API key

667

Product names

2

Approvals

698

Break-Down Service

2

AR

312

BT - Block transfer

395

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

109, 113
368

714

Bus delay

566, 631

BV

444

Clock
HW - 7-day time switch

228
218

Coil
C
C

281

Connect

175

Definition

165

Deleting

174

C - Counter relay for 800 control relays, Visualization devices

282

Entering, modifying

173

C - Counter relay for visualization devices

281

Field

161

Cable protection

56

Function, overview

165

Canceling, circuit diagram input

178

Negation

168

CARD START

572

Searching

178

Carry

283, 295, 302

CF

287

CH - Frequency counter287

CH - High-speed counter for the control relays
800 and the visualization devices

294

CH - High-speed counter for the visualization
devices

293

Changing input values, on function blocks

196
406

Characteristic curve

339

Characteristic map

339

CI

299

CI - Incremental Counters for the Visualization
Devices299

CI - Incremental counters for visualization
devices299

616

Comment
User function block
Commissioning

Channel number
MX - data multiplexer

Colors in Communication view

541
87Communication
View

615

Community

710

Company information

2

Comparison of analog and setpoint values

306

Comparison of variables and constants

326

Compatibility rules

616

Conditional jump

486

Connection
Deleting

176

Representation in circuit diagram display

162

To the device

618

Connection rules for operands

CI - Incremental Counters for Visualization
Devices299

Connections

Circuit diagram

161

External

Checking

180

Constants

Elements

163

Saving177

Assigning, function block input

201
72
195

Contact

Circuit diagram creation, Troubleshooting

683

Changing, N/O – N/C

172

Cleaning

688

Connect

175

Cursor buttons

179

715

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Definition

164

Date and time entry

473

Deleting

174

Display and input elements

461

Entering, modifying

171

Latching button

472

Fields161

Message text

465

Name

171

Message text selection

473

Number

171

Rolling text

464

Searching

178

Running text

463

Contactor function

166

Static text

462

Continuous operation

322

Timing relay value display

469

Timing relay value entry

473

397

Value display

461

Copy-protected2

Value entry

470

Copyright

2

Copy
Marker contents

282, 294

Count direction
Counter

238, 281, 287, 293, 299

CI - incremental counter

281

Counter input

293, 299

D - Text display (Display)
DamageData block

448, 45846
388, 395

Data function block

401

Data logger

475

C - Counter relay visualization device

281

Data multiplexer

406

CF - Frequency counter

288

Data Types

200

Counter relay

281

Date and time display

468

CP

326

Date and time entry

473

Date setting

587

DB

401

CP - Comparators for 800 control relays/visualization devices

326

CP - Comparators for visualization devices

327

Create log files

480

DC

351

Creating, editing an operand list

668

Debounce

574

Cybersecurity

710

Debounce activated604

Debounce deactivated605

Cycle pulse

Q1 (Boolean function block output)

401

Falling edge

169

Deceleration ramp

367

Rising edge

168

Decimal numbers

497

Declarations

698

Default colors display

452

Default IP address

618

Default NET ID

618

Cycle time

345, 359, 503, 576

D
D - Text display
Bar graph

462

Defining password-protected areas

581

Date and time display

468

Delay time604

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

716

Delay time AC voltage

606

Delay value

358

DELETE
Function blocks

197

Deleting

E
E-mail

670

E1

347

easyConnect656

Operands at function block inputs/outputs

196

easyNET - NET - Compatibility

626

Rung

176

ecat

709

Derivative term

352

Ejecting the memory card

124

Destination address

395

Electrical isolation

51

Electromagnetic compatibility

703

Destination range

389, 396

Detecting or changing bit patterns

444

EN

345

Determining counter frequency

287

EQ

308, 327, 388

Equal

Device91

Equipment supplied

Device ID

564

Error

Device reset

116

Device versions

22, 24

Changing language

Rectification, on event
Establishing an Ethernet connection
Ethernet

306, 32746684
100
75, 568

Devices shown in color

616

Dimensions

694

Configuration

622

Directives

698

Ethernet network

96

Evaluating a falling edge

169
168

Display
Default colors

452

Evaluating a rising edge

Elements

448

Execution time for an interrupt

506, 519, 525

Display and input elements

461

Display elements

448

F

Display messages

682

Factory communication parameters618

Display priority

451

Factory IP address setting

618

Factory NET ID setting

618

691

Faults

681

DIV

312

Features

20

Dividing

313

Firmware update

118

DL - Data logger

475

Firmware update expansion device

121

Download

454

Firmware version

Download Center

709

Firmware version 1.12

632

DST

588

Fixed IP address

100

DWORD definition

200

Frequency change

Disposal
Recycling

PO - Pulse output
717

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

118, 538

367

FT

330, 358

High-Speed Counters

299

Function

20

HW - 7-day time switch

218

Function block editor

194

HY

228

Function block list

193

Hysteresis

306

Adding to a circuit diagram for the first time

191

I

Assign operands, output

196

IC -

506

Assigning operands, input

195

IE

519

Check

198

Impulse relay

166

Configuration editor

194

Incremental Encoder

299

Definition

163

Initial commissioning

87

Delete197

Initialization mode

398

List

193

Input cables

709

Length39

Input delay

574

Installation

43

Function blocks

Further reading
G
Gain factor

307

GeneralInstallation position

293, 299

SD card

44

GET

428

Selection

44

GO TO other rungs

177

Integer value

497

Gray

654

Integral term

352

Greater than306, 312, 327

Green user function block

541

GT

Interface
User function block538

307, 327, 428

Interfaces

GT - "GET" Network Visualization device, 800 control relay
428

Ethernet
Interrupt

519, 525

Guest logon

Interrupt function block

519, 525

Counter-controlled

506

Time-controlled

525

654

H
Hardware counter

293

Interrupt load

Hardware inputs

293

Inversion

Hardware output

345

Hazards

Contactor function

75

512, 529
168

Inverting

Device-specific36

High-speed counter

293

IOX

656

High-speed counter functions

287

IP address, fixed

100

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Contact

172718

IP addresses

100

IT - Interrupt function block

525

Limits of PW pulse width modulation function
block

347

Load torqueJ

PO - Pulse output

366

JC - Conditional jump

486

Loading circle

657

Jog mode

366

Loading programs onto multiple NET stations

629

JSON API

653, 657

Location of use

44

Jump

486

Login guest

654

Jumps

181

Lower and upper limits

384

LS

330

LT

327

K

A - Analog value comparator for visualization
device306

K
MX - data multiplexer
Key to part numbers

406
703

Know-how protection
User function block
KP

539
358

L
Label

30

Language454

Language changeover

453

Languages

453

Changing on the device

91

Latching button

472

Latching relay

167

LB - Jump label

491

LED
Checking of the NET

685

LED ETHERNET

89, 613

LED POW/RUN

88-89, 613

Less thanLI

306, 327
354

LifespanBacklight
LIFO

719

87
423

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

M
Maintenance
Manipulated variable

687-688
352

Manipulated variable SV

345-346

Mark-to-space ratio

293, 300

Marker493

Definition

202

Initialize MB, MW + MD

398

Marker range accessible with offset

395

Retention

213

Value range

202

Marker range

508, 520, 526

Markers
Assigning, function block input

195

Copy MB, MW + MD

397

Memory card

124

Memory display, circuit diagram

162

Message
PROG INVALID

683

Message text

465

Message text selection

473

microSD124

Minimum on duration

345

Network Function Blocks

428

Minimum on duration = Minimum off duration

347

Network operation

96

Minimum period duration

347

NO

Missing parts

46

Normal mode

372

MM- Min-/Max function

335

Normalized variables of the PID controller

351

Modbus TCP

632

NOT

445

Modifying

388, 395

Number of pulses

Connections

175

Contacts and coils

170

Numeric formats

202

Motion control

364

Numerical converter

497

Mounting

47

Numerical converter mode497

MR - Masterreset

493

MUL

312

O

Multiplying

313

OffsetMX - Data multiplexer

406

On the CH High-Speed Counter

293

On the CI Incremental Encoder

299

ONLINE

616

N

PO - Pulse output

366

306, 395

N/C contact

164

Online Catalog

709

Inverting172

Operand connection rules

201

N/O contact

164

Operand overview

200

Inverting172

Operand table

204

Operands

200

Name
User function block

536

Assigning

195

Nameplate

30

Assigning, function block output

196

NC - Numerical converter

497

Deleting at function block inputs/outputs

196

Negation, coil

168

NET

566, 625

Operating frequency

365-366

Operating hours counter

238

-ID

184

Operating hours counter for visualization device 238

Configuration

622

Operating mode

131, 330, 353, 358, 497, 503

Operands

183

Timing relay

248

NET-GROUP

566, 630

Operating sequence

NET-ID566, 630

Pulse output

366

NET - Definition

625

Operating states602

NET settings

629

Operating system V1.00 update118

NET station heartbeat

628

Operation

Network function blocks

432

PropereasyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

35

720

Original Operating Instructions

2

OT

238

OT - Operating hours counter for visualization
deviceOverview of operands

577

Programming method
User function block

536

238

Proportional actuators

345

202

Proportional Factor

358

Proportional gain

358

Proportional gain Kp

353

Proportional term

352

P
P buttons

Program name

179, 448

Package contents

46

PT

432

Parameter setting

450

PT1 signal smoothing filter

358

Pulse duration

345

Pulse output

345

Parameters
Enabling/disabling accessPart number

193
28

Password

PO - Pulse output

364

Pulse sequence

345

Assigning582

Pulse Shape of Counter Signals

299

Changing

583

Pulse width345

Enabling

583

Pulse width modulation

345

Forgotten

583

PUT

432

Performance map

339

PW

345

Period duration

345

Period duration to minimum ON duration ratio

348

Q

PID controller

351

Q01/Q02345

351

Q1 (boolean function block output)

238

Operating mode
PID Controller

PT - "PUT" Network

432

SC - Synchronizing time via network

436

Scan time

351

Plausibility check551

Q1 (Boolean function block output)

Jog mode

374

R

Normal mode

372

Rate time Tv

353

Pulse output

364

RC - Real-time clock242

PO - Pulse output

364

RE

410

Ports

72

Read log files

481

PreventInputScroll

669

Reading values from the network

428

Product information

709

Real-time clock242

Product training

709

Program cycle time354

306, 428

PO

721

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Synchronizing via network
Recipe436
410

Recovery time

358

Reference data block

388

Reference value table

339

Relay
Coil function

165

RelaysS
Safety33

Saving, Circuit diagram

177

SC

436

Scan time

354

Definition163

SD card73

Remote operation

97

Search for devices

102

Searching, contacts and coils

178

Remote RUN

567, 630

Removing password protection

583

Sending e-mail440

Repairs

689

Separate web client operands

661

Required function block memory

705

Series production

117

Required memory for function blocks

705

Service31

Set cycle time

503

384

Set, coil function

167

Reset time Tn

353

Setpoint

351

Reset, coil function

167

Setting a boot program

109, 113

Resolution

345

Setting a starting program

109, 113

Restart482

Setting daylight saving time590-591

116, 353, 358, 497

Reset
VC - value limitation

Retention

401, 539, 578

Setting the web server login text

649

Retention with &function relays

281

Setting up a web server

646

Retention with Function &Relays

299

Setting up users

648

Retention with function relays

287

Settings web client

665

Retentive markers

213

SH

384

Rolling text

464

Shift register

415

Rolling time

451

Shifting bits forward/backward

415

RUN

131

Shifting double words forward/backward

415

RUN START

572

Showing easyE4 operands in the web client661

Signal smoothing

358
384

Rung
Adding/Deleting

176

SL

Change177

SNTP synchronization

Deleting

176

Source address

Rungs

162

Source range

Running text

463

Special considerations for AC devices

41

Splash screen

126

Splash screen display duration

565

SR

415

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

590-591
395
390, 396

722

Tab

ST

503

Standards

698

Webserver

646

Start frequency

366

Table function

423

Start ramp

367

TB

423

Starting program124

TC - Three step controller

379

Starting the web client

652

Technical data

699

Startup mode

571

Temperature measuring

67

Static text

462

Terminal capacity

54

Status display

94

Testing, circuits via the P buttons

179

Std. pack46

Text display

Step response

358

Text display editor

458

Stepper motor

364

Static text

462

STOP

131

TG

358

Storage690

Threshold value switch

306

SUB

312

Time

Subtracting

313

Support31

Switching contact –> please refer to Contact

164

Switching duration

448, 450

218, 228, 436

SC - Synchronizing time via network

436

Time reference value
T - Time relay/logic relay

248

Time response

603

246

Time response;Base devices

604

Synchronize date via NET

436

Time setting

587

Synchronizing NET stations

436

Time value

249

System requirements

79

System settings

646

T - Timing relay logic relay

T-Timing relay logic relay
Timer
HY - Year time switch

T

249
218
228

Timing and counter relay example

557

T-Timing relay

246

Timing characteristics;Expansion devices

608

Flashing

246

Timing relay

246

On-delayed

246

Operating mode

248

Retention

259

Timing relay value display

469

Single pulse switching

248

Timing relay value entry

473

Stop

246

TN

351

Switch off time

246

Transit damage

46

Timing and counter relay example

557

Transport

690

Trigger input

246

Trigger input (trigger coil)249"PT - PUT" Network

T – Timing relay logic relay

723

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

432

Troubleshooting
During circuit diagram creation
Two's complement

681

Value range

313

683

Value range, marker

202

444

Value scaling

330

VC - Value limitation

384

UversionUser function block

UF - User function block

533

UNP

353

Versions

Up/down counters

281

View

UpdateCommunication

389, 569

Update web client

657

Visualization

Updating data

657

Visualization device

Updating firmware

536
22, 28615
680
238, 281117-118

Upper limit

330

W

Upper threshold value

238

Web client

User function block533

Login guest

654

Calling in the main program

543

Operand list

668

Configuring

536

Separate operands

661

Creating

534

Settings

665

Exporting

550

Update the operands

657

Importing552

Updating data657

In an ST main program547

Web client cycle time669

Printing

556

Web operand list

668

Programming541

Web server configuration

646

Replacing553

Window discriminator

384

Saving548

Wirin

User function block green

544

Grid

161

User function block storage location

548

Wiring arrow

175

User function block yellow

544

WORD definition

200

WT - Weekly timer

268

User function blocks
Comparing

554

Using the web client

654

X
XOR

445

V
Value display

461

Y

Value entry

470

Year time switch

228

Value limitation

384

Yellow user function block541

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

724

YT - Year time switch

261

Z
Zoom function

658

Zoom increment

658

725

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
List of Figures

List of Figures
Figure 1: Device model with EASY-E4-...-12...C1(P) display and button controls
or with EASY-E4-...-12...CX1(P) LED display for diagnostics
22
Figure 2: Device model with 4SU

24

Figure 3: Device models in 2SU

24

Figure 4: Mounting distance min. 3 cm48

Figure 5: Assembling a base device with expansions

49

Figure 6: Installation on IEC/EN 60715 mounting rail

50

Figure 7: Inserting a fastening bracket.

52

Figure 8: Screw mounting configuration for a device

52

Figure 9: Remove adjacent connectors

53

Figure 10: Dismantling

53

Figure 11: Connecting the power supply for base devices

56

Figure 12: Connecting the power supply for expansions

56

Figure 13: Connecting the digital inputs on base devices

58

Figure 14: Connecting the digital inputs on expansions

58

Figure 15: Connect digital counter inputs

60

Figure 16: Connecting the analog inputs on base devices

61

Figure 17: Connecting relay outputs

62

Figure 18: Connecting base device transistor outputs

63

Figure 19: Connecting expansion device transistor outputs

63

Figure 20: Inductive load with suppressor circuit

64

Figure 21: Device parameters tab, using the EASY-E4-DC-6AE1 as an example 65
Figure 22: Connecting analog inputs EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)65

Figure 23: Connecting analog outputs EASY-E4-DC-6AE1(P)66

Figure 24: Connecting analog inputs EASY-E4-DC-4PE1(P)67

Figure 25: Expansion parameter tab, using the EASY-E4-DC-4PE1 as an
example68

Figure 26: Slot for microSD

72

Figure 27: Ethernet port on base device

72

Figure 28: Inserting a memory card

73

Figure 29: Removing the memory card

74

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

726

Appendix
List of Figures

727

Figure 30: Removing the memory card

74

Figure 31: RJ-45 socket, 8-pole

75

Figure 32: Connecting the Ethernet cable

76

Figure 33: Removing the Ethernet cable

77

Figure 34: Removing the Ethernet cable

77

Figure 35: license product certificate

79

Figure 36: Input screen for the license product certificate No.

80

Figure 37: License dialog box

81

Figure 38: Options in ? menu

82

Figure 39: Step 1

83

Figure 40: Step 2 License agreement

84

Figure 41: Step 3 License key

84

Figure 42: Step 4 Destination folder

84

Figure 43: Step 4.1 Changing the destination folder

85

Figure 44: Step 4.2 Creating your own destination folder

85

Figure 45: Step 6 Starting the installation

85

Figure 46: Step 7 Progress display

86

Figure 47: Step 8 Finishing

86

Figure 48: easySoft 7 icon depending on the screen resolution

86

Figure 49: LED status indication

88

Figure 50: Example of status display on display

90

Figure 51: Main menu in English

91

Figure 52: Menu path in English

91

Figure 53: Start displays for easyE4 base device in English

94

Figure 54: Example of status display on display

95

Figure 55: Startup procedure with device initialization

99

Figure 56: Establish Ethernet connection

102

Figure 57: Search for devices with an IP address

103

Figure 58: Saving the found device's IP profile

103

Figure 59: Selecting the easyE4 device's IP address

104

Figure 60: Connection to the easyE4 device established and program transferred

104

Figure 61: Offline dialog box for memory card

107

Figure 62: microSD memory card drive with PROGRAM folder contains

109

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
List of Figures

BOOT.TXT and compiled test.prg program
Figure 63: Offline dialog box for memory card

111

Figure 64: microSD memory card drive with PROGRAM folder contains
BOOT.TXT and compiled test.prg program

113

Figure 65: microSD memory card content when using bootloader version 1.01 118
Figure 66: boot.bmp

126

Figure 67: Storing the boot.bmp file126

Figure 68: Display and keypad

127

Figure 69: Example of status display on display

127

Figure 70: Empty circuit diagram

145

Figure 71: Fields in the circuit diagram

146

Figure 72: Lighting control circuit

147

Figure 73: Circuit diagram with inputs I01, I02 and output Q1

147

Figure 74: Completed circuit diagram

149

Figure 75: SAVE menu option in the status line

149

Figure 76: Power flow display 1

150

Figure 77: Power flow display 2

150

Figure 78: Display with zoom, power flow

151

Figure 79: Display with zoom, power flow interrupted

151

Figure 80: Sample program open

154

Figure 81: Card setup dialog box

155

Figure 82: File selection dialog box

156

Figure 83: The program was transferred to the memory card.

157

Figure 84: Ethernet connection on PC

159

Figure 85: Circuit diagram display

161

Figure 86: Contactor function signal diagram

166

Figure 87: Impulse relay signal diagram

166

Figure 88: Set and Reset signal diagram

167

Figure 89: Simultaneous triggering of Q 01

167

Figure 90: Inverse contactor function signal diagram

168

Figure 91: Signal diagram of cycle pulse with rising edge

168

Figure 92: Signal diagram of cycle pulse with negative edge

169

Figure 93: Circuit diagram with inputs

170

Figure 94: Contact legend

171

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

728

Appendix
List of Figures

Figure 95: Change contact I 03 from N/O to N/C

172

Figure 96: Relay coil "Output Q"

173

Figure 97: Relay coil for timing relay function block with control coil

173

Figure 98: Relay coil of a NET station

173

Figure 99: Circuit diagram with five contacts, invalid

175

Figure 100: Circuit diagram with M marker relay

175

Figure 101: Inserting a new rung

176

Figure 102: The cursor buttons are wired in the circuit diagram as contacts P
01 to P 04.
179
Figure 103: Switch Q1 via I1, I2, Í, or Ú

179

Figure 104: I5 switches to cursor buttons.

179

Figure 105: Paralleling link

180

Figure 106: Power flow display

180

Figure 107: 1 slave

186

Figure 108: 2 slave

186

Figure 109: Explanation of the function block list

194

Figure 110: Manufacturer function block display in the function block editor

194

Figure 111:

201

Figure 112: Signal diagram

222

Figure 113: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

222

Figure 114: Signal diagram

223

Figure 115: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

223

Figure 116: Signal diagram

224

Figure 117: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

224

Figure 118: Signal diagram

225

Figure 119: Tab with parameters in the Programming view Settings Time overlap
225

729

Figure 120: Signal diagram

226

Figure 121: Tab with parameters in the Programming view 24 hours setting

226

Figure 122: Tab with parameters in the Programming view

227

Figure 123: Year time switch parameters tab with and example in which ayear range is being selected

232

Figure 124: Entry screen in the programming software

234

Figure 125: Entry screen in the programming software

234

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
List of Figures

Figure 126: Entry screen in the programming software

235

Figure 127: Entry screen in the programming software

235

Figure 128: Entry screen in the programming software

236

Figure 129: Entry screen in the programming software

236

Figure 130: Entry screen in the programming software

237

Figure 131: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed (with and without random switching)
251
Figure 132: Signal diagram of timing relay, on-delayed (with and without random switching)
252
Figure 133: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed

253

Figure 134: Signal diagram of timing relay, off-delayed

254

Figure 135: Operational diagrams timing relay, on and off delayed 1

255

Figure 136: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 1

256

Figure 137: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 2257

Figure 138: Signal diagram timing relay, single pulse 1

257

Figure 139: Wiring the function block coils

259

Figure 140: Wiring of the function block contact259

Figure 141: Year time switch (new) parameters tab for YT function block with
example showing all four modes
264
Figure 142: Entry screen in the programming software

265

Figure 143: Entry screen in the programming software

265

Figure 144: Entry screen in the programming software

266

Figure 145: Entry screen in the programming software

266

Figure 146: Entry screen in the programming software

266

Figure 147: Weekly timer (new) parameters tab with an example

270

Figure 148: Sunrise and sunset in Bonn

276

Figure 149: Sunrise and sunset in Drevja

277

Figure 150: Offset; O1=-2; O2=2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise
and off 2 hours after sunset
277
Figure 151: No offset; O1=0; O2=0; Q1=1 between sunrise and sunset

278

Figure 152: Offset; O1=1; O2= -1; Q1 will switch on 1 hour after sunrise and off
1 hour before sunset
278
Figure 153: Offset; O1=-2; O2=2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise
and off 2 hours after sunset
278
Figure 154: Offset; O1=-2; O2=-2; Q1=1 will switch on 2 hours before sunrise 279

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

730

Appendix
List of Figuresand off 2 hours before sunset
Figure 155: Q1 does not switch off during the summer months

279

Figure 156: Q1 does not switch on during the winter months

280

Figure 157: Signal diagram of counter relay

285

Figure 158: Signal diagram of frequency counter292

Figure 159: Signal diagram High-speed counter297

Figure 160: CI function block counting up; QV=QV+4300

Figure 161: CI function block counting down; QV=QV-4

300

Figure 162: Signal diagram High-speed incremental value counter

304

Figure 163: Analog comparator signal diagram

310

Figure 164: Parameters on the display

311

Figure 165: Wiring the contacts

315

Figure 166: Parameters on the device display

315

Figure 167: Sample curve for hourly temperature measurement, over 7 days 323
Figure 168: Wiring the contacts

328

Figure 169: Parameters on the display

329

Figure 170: Figure: Scaling the input values - reducing

330

Figure 171: Scaling the input values - increasing

330

Figure 172: Mathematical interrelationship

331

Figure 173: Example of a characteristic curve for the PM function block343

Figure 174: Wiring the function block coils

356

Figure 175: Wiring of the function block contact356

Figure 176: Parameters on the device display

357

Figure 177: Response of the FT function block359

Figure 178: Wiring the function block coils

362

Figure 179: Parameters shown on display

362

Figure 180: Typical pulse profile for a stepper motor in normal mode

366

Figure 181: Signal diagram for PO pulse output with specified number ofpulses for I1 - possible normal mode phases

373

Figure 182: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified number of steps P1

375

Figure 183: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified jog frequency, P1 after
deceleration phase reached376
Figure 184: Signal diagram for jog mode with specified jog frequency, P1 notreached after deceleration phase
377

731

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
List of Figures

Figure 185: Three-step controller schematic diagram

379

Figure 186: Timing diagram for three-step controller

379

Figure 187: Signal diagram for three-step controller

382

Figure 188: Figure: Restriction of the input values to the specified limits.

384

Figure 189: Wiring the enable coil

393

Figure 190: Wiring the contacts

393

Figure 191: Parameters on the display

393

Figure 192: Parameters on the display

399

Figure 193: Wiring the trigger coil

400

Figure 194: Wiring the contacts

400

Figure 195: Signal diagram of data function block404

Figure 196: Wiring the trigger coil

404

Figure 197: Wiring of the function block contact404

Figure 198: Parameters on the display

404

Figure 199: Shift register SR..: Forwards operation in BIT operating mode

416

Figure 200: Shift register SR..: Backwards operation in DW operating mode

417

Figure 201: Circuit diagram with EDP programming language for user
example 2

421

Figure 202: Parameters on the device display

421

Figure 203: Text display parameters tab for text display function block in the
Programming view
451
Figure 204: Default colors tab for text display

453

Figure 205: Text display function block, language tab

453

Figure 206: Signal diagram Text display

455

Figure 207: Signal diagram for text display with text function blocks with an
identical priority of 3455

Figure 208: Text display editor with static text in the first line

459

Figure 209: Character table Special characters

460

Figure 210: Example showing an exact value message text

465

Figure 211: Value range message text example

467

Figure 212: Workspace with function block and device button

480

Figure 213: Data logger tab with set parameters for the programming view

481

Figure 214: Card content after logging has ended

483

Figure 215: Activated function block in the function block status display

487

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

732

Appendix
List of Figures

Figure 216: Wiring the function block coils

495

Figure 217: Wiring of the function block contact495

Figure 218: Parameters on the device display

496

Figure 219: Wiring the function block coils

502

Figure 220: Setting of the parameters

502

Figure 221: Input and output states being passed between the main programand interrupt program
507
Figure 222: easySoft 7 Main program Pulse counter with external direction

514

Figure 223: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Pulse counter with external direction

514

Figure 224: easySoft 7 Main program, two counter inputs

515

Figure 225: easySoft 7 Interrupt program, two counter inputs

515

Figure 226: easySoft 7 Main program Incremental counter

516

Figure 227: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Incremental counter

517

Figure 228: easySoft 7 Main program Frequency measurement

518

Figure 229: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Frequency measurement

518

Figure 230: Input and output states being passed between the main programand interrupt program
520
Figure 231: easySoft 7 Main program Slope

524

Figure 232: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Slope

524

Figure 233: Input and output states being passed between the main programand interrupt program
526
Figure 234: easySoft 7 Main program Time-controlled

532

Figure 235: easySoft 7 Interrupt program Time-controlled

532

Figure 236: Create user function block

535

Figure 237: Configure user function block

538

Figure 238: Screenshot of Retention section that can be found in the Systemsettings tab in the Project view (including sample values)
539

733

Figure 239: Programming view for UF Blinker1 user function block

541

Figure 240: User function block comments being shown in the tab

543

Figure 241: UF Blinker1 user function block used in the main program

544

Figure 242: Inputs/outputs wiring

545

Figure 243: Contact tab

546

Figure 244: Analog contact tab

546

Figure 245: Coil tab

546

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Appendix
List of Figures

Figure 246: Analog coil tab

547

Figure 247: Delete user function blocks dialog box

554

Figure 248: Location of user function block user for comparison dialog box

554

Figure 249: UF user function block

555

Figure 250: Import user function block

555

Figure 251: Hardwiring with relays

557

Figure 252: Wiring with EASY-E4-UC-..., for example

557

Figure 253: Wiring of counter and timing relay

557

Figure 254: Enter parameter C01

558

Figure 255: Enter ParameterT01

558

Figure 256: Testing the circuit diagram

559

Figure 257: Testing the circuit diagram +10559

Figure 258: Doubling the flashing frequency

559

Figure 259: Screenshot of Retention section that can be found in the Systemsettings tab in the Project view (including sample values)
578
Figure 260: Password assignment

582

Figure 261: Password submenu

583

Figure 262: Submenu for changing the password

583

Figure 263: Assigning a program password

584

Figure 264: How the EDP evaluates circuit diagrams and function blocks

596

Figure 265: easyE4 input assigned a switch

603

Figure 266: Delay times for evaluating an DC input signal and an activateddebounce

604

Figure 267: Switching behavior with debounce deactivated605

Figure 268: Delay times for evaluating an AC input signal without IDEBOUNCE and for an activated I-DEBOUNCE

606

Figure 269: Switching behavior of AC input signal with DEBOUNCE activated 606
Figure 270: Switching behavior of AC input signal with DEBOUNCE deactivated607

Figure 271: ONLINE Project view with devices colored differently based on
their compatibility

616

Figure 272: Selection of NET station

622

Figure 273: NET configuration with project and program

623

Figure 274: NET diagram

625

Figure 275: NET-ID dialog box used to assign a NET ID when adding a new629

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

734

Appendix
List of Figuresbase device
Figure 276: NET tab for the selected base device in the NET group

630

Figure 277: Project view Webserver tab

646

Figure 278: Web server passwords and user names dialog box

649

Figure 279: Web client, running

653

Figure 280: Web client login dialog box

654

Figure 281: Device display

658

Figure 282: Operands

659

Figure 283: NET operands

660

Figure 284: Separate operands

662

Figure 285: Diagnostics

664

Figure 286: Web client - General settings

665

Figure 287: Web client - Network settings

666

Figure 288: Web client - E-mail settings

667

Figure 289: API key

668

Figure 290: Web Client

668

Figure 291: Register e-mail671

Figure 292: Email tab with the settings from the example

674

Figure 293: Ethernet tab with settings from the example

675

Figure 294: Email example when the operating mode changes

676

Figure 295: Alarm function block tab with parameters from the example and
FUP program with alarm function block and P button P01
678

735

Figure 296: Example email when triggered by alarm function block AL01

679

Figure 297: Visualization on operating terminal

680

Figure 298: Dimensions in mm (Inch) base devices

694

Figure 299: Dimensions in mm (Inch) extensions 4SU

695

Figure 300: Dimensions in mm (Inch) extensions 2SU

696

Figure 301: Dimensions in mm (Inch)696

Figure 302: Circuit diagram for easyE4 chaser light712

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

736

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Glossary

Client
The term "client" refers to an application thatrequests specific services from a server.
**.bmp
Pixel-based file format for two-dimensional raster graphics*.csv
Comma-Separated Values (Character-Separated Values) Data format for text*.DLL
Dynamic link libraryA
Address reference
The term "address reference" refers to the data
packet's start address.
Alpha channel
Transparency information for PNG images
Used to specify the degree of transparency foreach pixel
Application
Short for "application software," a computer program that performs a function useful to the
user.
B

*.itf
Internal Tag Import Format*.jpg
Pixel-based file format for the JPEG (Joint Photographics Expert Group) image file format The
JPEG format does not support transparency

B
Build
Bitmap
Image file in the BMP raster graphics image fileformat.
Boot

*.png

Booting up, starting (up) - automatic processthat takes place after the device is switched on,
and in which a simple program in ROM memory
starts a more complex program.

PNG (Portable Network Graphics) image fileformat for graphics and video software, The
PNG file format supports transparency with its
alpha channelC*.tiffVector-based image file format for graphics
and video software, The TIFF format supports
transparency, as well as images using 8-bit
channels (grayscale, RGB, CMYK, etc.)

CBA
Communication Board Adapter
CEST
Central European Summer Time*.uf7
User function block file format

CIDR
ClasslessInterDomainRouting*.zip
ZIP file format used to compress and archive
files

easyE410/19 MN050009 ENwww.eaton.com

CIS
Card Information Structure

737

Command sequence
Path information List of the commands that thedevice operator must tap in succession in orderto get to the location described; for example:
Start\Project Overview\Variables folder.
Communication
The transfer of data between the panel and the
PLC, controller, or peripheral connected to it.
CRC
Operating system checksumD

DNS (Domain Name Server)
When you enter an address such as www.intel.com into a browser or FTP client, your computer will first need to ask a server for the IP
address behind the name in order to actually beable to reach the address. The server thatprovides this information is known as a"domain name server." Every single Internet provider provides this service, and most providers
have a secondary DNS in case their primary
DNS fails. and most providers have a secondary DNS in case their primary DNS
fails.DNS records are the IP addresses forthese servers.

Data Set Ready
The transmitter is ready to send data.

DSR

Data Terminal Ready
The receiver is ready to receive data.

DST

DCF77
German long-wave time signal, Frankfurt frequency 77
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DHCP (used to obtain an IP address automatically)
You can enable this setting if you do not want toconfigure every single individual computer
within a network, provided there is a DHCP
server on the network. When this setting isenabled, the computer will get information suchas an IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and
DNS from the DHCP server. In most cases, therouter used on a network will also feature a
DHCP server.
Direction URL
Uniform Resource Locator
DNS
Domain Name System

Data Set Ready

Daylight Saving Time
DTR
Data Terminal ReadyE
easyConnect
Data connection for easyE4 with each other via
bus connector plug EASY-E4-CONNECT1
EDP
Easy Device Programming - programming
methodF
FATFile Allocation Table
FB
function block
FBD
Function block diagram - programming method
File Allocation Table
FATs are used to define filesystems.

738

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

Firewall
Firewalls are used to prevent outside attempts
to access IP addresses on a private network.
In other words, they are used to protect internal
data. When configured correctly, they can also
be used to set up rules or lists that prevent specific URLs from being requested, e.g., when
they are in violation of company policy. A firewall's main task is to use the information in apacket (the source and destination IP
addresses, as well as the port) to decide
whether the packet should be rejected or
allowed to pass. This also prevents packets notmeant for the network from subjecting the network to an unnecessary load, as well as packets meant for the private network fromreaching the Internet.

I
IL
Installation instructions
IP Address
IP addresses are 32 bits (4 bytes) long and areused to uniquely identify networks, subnetworks, and individual computers that workwith the TCP/IP protocol. A distinction is drawn
between private address spaces for local networks (intranet) and public addresses (Internet).
IR
Infrared
L

FTP
File Transfer Protocol

LAN
Local Area Network

G

LD

Gateway
Gateway When two computers on different networks want to communicate with each other,
the networks need to be connected with arouter. For example, surfing on the Internet
requires for packets to be routed from the Internet to the network and vice versa. By using a
subnet mask, a computer can know whether
the receiver can be found on its network orwhether it is located outside of it. If it is locatedoutside the network, the computer will send apacket to the router specified with the gateway
IP address.

Ladder diagram - programming method
LSB
Last Significant Bit
M
MDI
Multi Document Interface
Menu barMenu ribbon that can be expanded and collapsed and that provides the various available
commands

H

MESZ
Central European Summer Time

Human-machine interface
Human Machine Interface

MN
Manual - Operation manual
ModuloFrom the Latin modulo, i.e., "a small measure"easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

739

O
ObjectStatic or dynamic element used for engineering
purposes. Static objects are located in the
view's background and do not change atruntime. In contrast, dynamic objects are located in the view's foreground, and their appearance can change as a result of data changes.
Operating system
A group of programs that control and manage
the processes in a computer and its connected
devices.

Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association (PCMCIA)PCMCIA Card, also known as PC Card, is astandard for the expansion cards for portablecomputers used in Eaton touch panels. PCMCIA
cards are energy-efficient and support hot plugging, i.e., they can be replaced during ongoing
operation. Plug and play is supported thanks to
the fact that all the properties required in order
to automatically configure the driver are stored
on the card's CIS.
PID controller
Proportional–Integral–Derivative Controller
PLC

OS

Programmable logic controller The controller or
peripheral that is connected to the HMI.

Operation System
P
PCMCIA
Personal Computer Memory Card International
Association (PCMCIA)
Peer to Peer (P2P)
Peer-to-peer is a term used for computers thatare connected to each other in an architecturein which both computers can assume the roleof server and client.
PELV (protective extra low voltage)
Protective low voltage that provides protection
against electric shock. It refers to how
machines are electrically installed – one side of
the circuit or a point on the PELV circuit's
power source needs to be connected to the protective bonding circuit.
Personal computer
A personal computer is made up of a central
processing unit, RAM, external data storage
devices, an operating system, and application
programs, and is connected to peripheraldevices (monitor, printer). PCs can be stationary or portable.

740

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

PLC(S)
Programmable logic controller The controller or
peripheral that is connected to the HMI.
Polling
Cyclical reading of the PLC's addressed variables
Port
Ports can be seen as virtual mailboxes for data
packets. A computer can communicate withother computers on 65536 different ports.
Projected capacitive touch
A display designed for high precision, user
friendliness, and durability. It is designed tobring the controls that have now become prevalent in consumer electronics to machines,
with advantages such as a gesture-based userinterface, two-finger multi-touch depending on
the application software being used, intuitive
operation that enables operators to start working right away, and the fact that no calibration isrequiredPU
PolyurethaneAdmittedly, however, this definition is not very
precise. More specifically, servers are applications on a computer that are responsible forproviding or processing data. In fact, every computer can provide such services. Servers are
not active in and of themselves. They wait until
they are addressed by a client, after which they
perform the corresponding tasks. Each server
application provides its service on the network
via a specific port.

R
Registers
Subpages in a dialog box or object
Retention
Refers to the ability of operands to retain theirvalue (memory contents) in the event of a lossof voltage
ROM (read-only memory)
Non-volatile read-only memory

Slot
Refers to a slot for a memory card

RouterRouters are devices used to forward ("route")
requests from a network to the Internet (or toanother network). Routers provide a measureof security for private networks, as nodes outside of the network will be unable to determine
which specific computer requested the data.
This is because all the computers on the private
network will appear under the same IP addresson the Internet.
RTC
Real Time Clock
RxD
Receive cable for received dataS
SD cardSecure Digital memory cards are non-volatile,
rewritable flash data storage devices that areused with Eaton and are commonly referred toas microSD cards. Data written to these cards
is stored in a non-volatile manner that does not
require any additional (secondary) power.
SELV (safety extra low voltage)
Circuit in which no dangerous voltage occurs
even in the event of a single fault.
Server:
The term "server" is usually used to refer tocomputers that provide services on a network.
easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

SNTP
Simple Network Time Protocol
SSL/TLS
Secure Sockets Layer/ Transport Layer Security
ST
Structured Text - programming method
StrokeA hub is a device used to connect various network devices together. Hubs broadcast all datato all connected devices (devices connectedwith a patch cable).
Subnet mask
A subnet mask is an IP address "filter." It has
the same syntax as an IP address. This mask
defines which computers can transfer data
between themselves within a network. This
also means that subnet masks define the maximum size of the corresponding subnetworks.
SwitchSwitches are networking devices that are moreadvanced than hubs. One of the main featuresthat sets them apart from the latter is the factthat they are more "intelligent" and forward data
packets much more efficiently by sending them
only to the devices that need to receive them.
Multiple data packets can pass through a741

switch at the same time. Among other things,
this means that switches have a significantly
higher total bandwidth (throughput) than hubs.
Moreover, switches learn which stations areconnected to which ports, meaning that additional data transfers will not result in any ports
being subjected to unnecessary loads, i.e., thatdata will only be forwarded to the port connected to the intended destination. With the
exception of their higher price, switches aresuperior to hubs in every way.
System character set
Font type and size used to output system messages.
T
TE
Space units
Toolbar
The toolbar provides all important functions sothat they can be accessed directly. All the buttons in a toolbar can also be found as menu
options in the menu.
Transfer parameters
Baud rate, data bit, start bit, stop bit, and parity
TxD

W
widescreen
Widescreen format
Windows
Dialog boxes, prompts, etc. that open while theapplication is running and remain on the current
program page Synonyms: dialogue box, dialog
These windows are shown by the application invarious situations in order to obtain specificinput or confirmations from the user. Dialog
boxes expect input from the user, while
prompts are shown to get the user's confirmation for specific messages.
Windows Embedded Compact 7 pro
A component-based, multi-functional real-time
operating system designed to meet the needsof even the most demanding industrial applications. The operating system will unpack itself
into the device's RAM memory every time thedevice is started, making it possible to de-energize the device without the need for a UPS orother similar precautions. As the successor to
WinCE 6, Windows Embedded Compact 7 features a large selection of standard technologies, communication servers/clients, andweb services. • Fast boot time • Multi-touch
support (two-finger) • Long-term availability

Transmit cable for transmitted data
U
UNC
Unified Coarse Thread
User
Operator using the device on which the userinterface created with Galileo is running.
UTC
Universal Time Coordinated742

easyE4 10/19 MN050009 EN www.eaton.com

WINS
Windows Internet Name Service, Name resolution service within Microsoft networks. In
order for this service to be used, there must be
a WINS server. If there is no WINS server,
names will be resolved using broadcasts andother mechanisms. A fixed name can be
assigned to an IP address in WINS so that acomputer will continue to be recognized even if
its IP address changes.

Eaton’s electrical business is a global leader with expertise in power distribution and circuit protection; backup power protection; control and automation; lighting and security; structural solutions and wiring devices;
solutions for harsh and hazardous environments; and engineering services. Eaton develops innovations that not only provide energy for theimportant things across industries worldwide, but also help customers
tackle the most critical electrical power management challenges out
there.
The Eaton Corporation is a diversified power management company with2017 sales of 20.4 billion dollars. We provide energy-efficient solutions
that help our customers effectively manage electrical, hydraulic, and mechanical power more efficiently, safely, and sustainably. Eaton is dedicatedto improving people's quality of life and the environment through the useof power management technologies and services. Eaton has approximately 96,000 employees and sells products to customers in more than
175 countries. For more information, please visit Eaton.com.

Eaton Addresses Worldwide:
www.eaton.eu

Email: automation@eaton.com
Internet: www.eaton.eu/easy

Eaton Industries GmbH,Hein-Moeller-Straße 7-11,
D-53115 Bonn
© 2018 by Eaton Cooperation
All Rights Reserved
10/19 MN050009 EN